PDF Meridian Features & Services 1 Of 3

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 616 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

XII features and services

SUPPLEMENT

Publication number:

Product release: Xl 1 release 19

Document release: 8.0

Document status: Standard

Date: October 31, 1993

1989 Northern Telecom

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Revision history

December

First issue of document.

June

Standard document is issued for updates and changes for X 11 release 15.

December

Standard document is issued for updates and changes for Xl 1 release 16.

December

Standard document is issued to include updates for Xl 1 release Due to the

extent of changes, revision bars are omitted.

December

Reissued to include updates for release 18. Changes in existing modules

are noted with revision bars in the margins. Information from Product

Bulletin 92024 (July 1992) is included in this document. The new modules

for release 18 are listed below.

Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime

Off Hook Alarm Security

Overlay Cache

December

This document is reissued to include updates for option 8 I systems. Revision

bars remain for 1 release changes (refer to note above), but are not

included for option 8 1 information.

August

This document is reissued to include updates for Xl release 19. Changes are

noted with revision bars in the margins.

October

This document is reissued to include technical updates. Changes are noted

with revision bars in the margins.

Xl 1 features and services

telemanuals.com

iii

Contents

Introduction

............................. l-l

Index of feature modules

..................

Systems and releases

..................... l-l 1

Features and software options

.............

1-13

Software options and package dependencies ,

1-21

Feature modules and issue dates

...........

1-45

Access restrictions .......................

Application Module .......................

3-1

Application Module Link ...................

4-1

Attendant Administration ..................

5-1

Attendant Alternative Answering ............

6-1

Attendant Barge-In

.......................

7-1

Attendant Busy Verify .....................

Attendant call selection ...................

9-1

Attendant Calls Waiting Indication ..........

1 O-1

features and services

telemanuals.com

iv Contents

Attendant consoles

......................

Attendant Incoming Call Indicators .........

Attendant Interpositional Transfer ..........

Attendant Lockout

.......................

Attendant Overflow Position ...............

Attendant Position Busy

..................

Attendant Recall ..........................

Attendant Secrecy .......................

Attendant Splitting .......................

Attendant Supervisory Console

............

Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication

.....

Audible Reminder of Held Calls ............

................................

Automatic Answerback ...................

Automatic Call Distribution ................

Automatic Line Selection ..................

Automatic Number Identification ...........

Automatic Number Identification on DTI .....

Automatic Preselection of Prime Directory

Number

................................

12-l

13-I

14-I

15-I

16-I

17-I

18-I

19-I

20-I

21-I

22-l

23-l

24-l

25-l

26-l

27-l

28-l

29-l

features and services

telemanuals.com

Contents v

Automatic Set Relocation

.................. 30-I

Automatic Timed Reminders ............... 31-I

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

.............. 32-l

Automatic Wake ....................... 33-l

Auxiliary Processor Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary Signaling .......................

Background Terminal

.....................

Bridging

................................

Busy Lamp Field

.........................

Call Detail Recording

.....................

Call Forward All Calls .....................

Call Forward Busy

........................

Call Forward by Call Type

.................

Call Forward External Deny

................

Call Forward, Internal Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward

No Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level . . . . . .

Call Hold, Deluxe

.........................

Call Hold, Permanent

.....................

34-l

35-l

36-l

37-l

38-l

39-l

40-I

41-I

42-l

43-l

44-l

45-l

46-l

47-l

48-l

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

vi Contents

Dial Pulse/Dual Tone Multifrequency Conversion

Call Park

...............................

Call Party Name Display

............... ..

Call Pickup

.............................

Call Pickup, Directed

.....................

Call Transfer

............................

Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting ...........

Called Party Disconnect Control

............

Camp-On

...............................

Capacity Expansion

......................

Centralized Attendant Service

..............

Switchhook Flash

.................

Charge Account and Calling Party Number . , .

Charge Account, Forced

..................

Conference

.............................

Console Presentation Group Level Services . .

Controlled Class of Service

................

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

......

Departmental Listed Directory Number

......

Dial Intercom

............................

49-l

50-I

51-I

52-l

53-l

54-l

55-I

56-l

57-1

58-l

59-l

60-I

62-l

63-l

64-l

65-l

66-l

67-l

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Contents vii

Dialed Number Identification Service

........

Digit Display

.............................

Digital Trunk Interface

....................

Direct Inward System Access

..............

Directory Number

........................

Directory Number Expansion

...............

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing

.........

Do Not Disturb

...........................

Electronic Switched Network

...............

End-to-End Signaling

.....................

Equal Access Compliance

.................

Fast Tone Digit Switch

....................

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision .

Flexible Feature Codes

....................

Group Call

..............................

History File

..............................

................................

Hunting

.................................

In-Band

.............................

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

.............

69-1

70-I

71-1

72-1

73-l

74-l

75-1

76-1

77-1

78-1

79-1

80-l

81-1

82-1

83-1

84-1

85-1

86-1

87-1

88-1

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

viii Contents

Incremental Software Management

.........

Integrated Messaging System Link

.........

Integrated Services Digital Network .........

Integrated Voice and Data

.................

Intercept Treatment

......................

Basic Rate Interface .................

Last Number Redial

......................

Limited Access to Overlays ................

Line Load Control

........................

Line Lockout

............................

Line and Trunk Cards

.....................

Maid Identification

.......................

..........................

Malicious Call Trace ......................

Manual Line Service

......................

Manual Signaling (Buzz)

..................

Manual Trunk Service

....................

Meridian Hospitality Voice Services .........

Meridian Mail ............................

Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration . .

89-l

90-I

91-I

92-l

93-l

94-l

95-l

96-l

97-l

98-l

99-l

100-l

101-l

102-I

103-I

104-I

105-I

106-I

107-I

108-I

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Contents ix

Meridian Manager

........................ 109-I

Meridian MAX/ACD-MAX ................... 110-I

Message Center

.......................... Ill-l

Message Registration

.....................

112-1

Message Waiting Indication (MWI) Interworking 113-I

Message Waiting Lamp Maintenance

........

114-1

MSDL Serial Data Interface

.................

115-1

Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime

...

116-1

Multiple Console operation

................

117-1

Multiple Customer Operation

............... 118-I

Multi-Tenant Service

...................... 119-I

Multi-User ......................... 120-l

Music

..................................

121-1

Music, Enhanced

.........................

122-1

Network Message Services

................

123-1

New Flexible Code Restriction

.............. 124-I

Night Key for DID Digit Manipulation

........

125-1

Night Service

............................ 126-I

No Hold Conference

......................

127-1

North American Numbering Plan

............ 128-I

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Contents

Off Hook Alarm Security .................. 129-I

Off-Premise Extension

.................... 130-I

Office Data Administration System ......... 131-I

On Hook Dialing

......................... 132-I

Optional Outpulsing Delay ................. 133-I

Overlay Cache Memory ................... 134-I

Override

................................ 135-I

Paging

................................. 136-I

Pretranslation

........................... 137-I

Privacy

................................. 138-I

Privacy Override

......................... 139-I

Privacy Release

......................... 140-I

Private Line Service

...................... 141-I

Property Management System Interface

..... 142-I

Public Switched Data Service

.............. 143-I

Recorded Announcement

................. 144-I

Recorded Overflow Announcement

......... 145-l

Recorded Telephone Dictation

............. 146-I

Remote Call Forward

..................... 147-I

Remote Peripheral Equipment

............. 148-I

Ring Again

.............................. 149-I

Xl features and services

telemanuals.com

Contents xi

Room Status

............................

Secretarial Filtering .......................

Short Buzz for digital telephones

...........

Speed Call

..............................

Speed with Authorization Codes

Speed Call, System

.......................

Station Category Indication

................

Station Specific Authorization Code

.........

Station-to-Station Calling

..................

Stored Number Redial

.....................

Telephones

.............................

Time and Date

...........................

.....................

Tones, Flexible Incoming

..................

Trunk Verification from a Station ............

Uninterrupted Line Connections

............

User Selectable Call Redirection

............

Voice Call

...............................

2500 Telephone Features

..................

500 Telephone Features

...................

Type Line Disconnect .............

150-I

151-I

152-I

153-I

154-I

155-I

156-I

157-I

158-I

159-I

160-I

161-I

162-I

163-I

164-I

165-I

166-I

167-I

168-I

169-I

170-I

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

xii Contents

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

List of figures

Figure

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field Supervisory mode . . . . . .

20-

Figure 1

Standard Busy Lamp Field on the . . . .

38-

Figure 38-2

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field monitoring (example) . .

38-

Figure I

Typical Centralized Attendant Service configuration. .

58-

Figure 1

Circular Hunting example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86-

Figure 86-2

Linear Hunting example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86-

Figure 86-3

Secretarial Hunting example . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86-

Figure 86-4

Short Hunting example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

86-

Figure

Example of Audit Trail printout (LD22). . . . . . . . . . .

96-

Figure

LLC, system control levels (hierarchy and overlap of

operative levels) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Figure

Private Corporate Network with Meridian 1 hosting the

Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

97-

1 features and services 553-3001-30

xiv List of figures

Figure 113-2

Private Corporate Network with DMS hosting the

Message Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113-3

Figure 113-3

Configuration Requirements for MWI Interworking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113-8

Figure 116-l

CFW and MARP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116-6

Figure 116-2

MARP control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116-7

Figure 129-l

Zone Dependent example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129-3

Figure 129-2

Event Dependent example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129-4

Figure 143-1

Public Switched Data Service (PSDS) between Meridian 1 and

Central Office (CO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143-l

Figure 151-l

Secretarial Filtering example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151-l

Figure 160-l

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160-13

Figure 160-2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160-14

Figure 160-3

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160-16

Figure 170-l

Incoming Trunk Call of Internal Call Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170-2

Figure 170-2

Outgoing Call from the Meridian 1 to a Central Office . . . . . . . . . . . 170-3

features and services 553-3001-305

List of tables

Table

System and supported X 11 release . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1

Class of Service chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 2-2

Trunk signaling arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1 l-l

Incoming Call Indicator key assignments . . . . . . . . .

Table 1 l-2

Attendant console optional feature key assignments . . . . . .

Table 1

Recommended number of rings per Automatic Wake Up call

Table 1

Call Detail Record Generation with answer supervision . .

Table 1

Tone and Cadence Card Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table

Response formats for CPND NAME prompt . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1

Features expanded in Xl 1 release 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 57-2

Features expanded in Xl 1 release 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 1

Do Not Disturb intercept treatments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-12

. . . 2-3

. . . 2-8

. .

1 l-3

. . . .

11-5

. . 33-3

. . . . 39-6

. . 40-3

. . . . 50-3

. . . 57-1

. . . . 57-2

. . 76-2

1 features and services 553-3001-305

xvi

List of tables

Table 77-l

Digit translation before and after X11 release 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77-7

Table 78-l

LD15 Enable End-to-End Signaling tone feedback. . . . . . . . . . . 78-4

Table 78-2

LD12 Add End-to-End Signaling key to attendant console. . . . . 78-4

Table 78-3

LD56 Specify the cadence for the EES feedback tone . . . . . . . . 78-5

Table 81-1

Returning Answer Supervision for DID calls terminating at the

Meridian1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

81-3

Table 93-l

Intercept Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

93-2

Table 93-2

Intercept Treatment for calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

93-3

Table 108-l

Data stored by both the Meridian 1 and Meridian Mail . . . . . . . . .

108-4

Table 108-2

Effect of running Audit with Data Correction enabled . . . . . . . . .

108-8

Table 108-3

Effect of running Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

108-9

Table 108-4

LD17 Configuring the VMBA application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-11

Table 108-5

a VMB on a telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-12

Table 108-6

-Add a VMB on a digital telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-13

Table 108-7

VMBA Application States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-19

Table 108-8

Print the DN block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-22

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

List of tables

xvii

Table 108-9

LD20 Print the TN block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-22

Table 108-10

LD20 Print VMB data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108-23

Table 108-l 1

VMB States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 108-12

LD83 Print ODAS data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 113-l

Network switch connections

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 113-2

Package requirements for the originating node

(the node with Message Center users) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 113-3

Package requirements for the host node

(the node hosting the Message Center)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 113-4

Package requirements for the tandem node

(the node that does not have Message Center users) . . . . .

Table 113-5

LD 17 -Configuring MWI remote D channel capability

Table 113-6

LD 23 -Configuring a Message Center DN . . . . . .

Table 122-l

Features vs. No Music, Music, and Enhanced Music

Table 128-1

Access Codes and dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 137-l

Description of model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 137-2

Numbering plan for model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Table 137-3

Access and restrictions for model

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

108-24

. .

108-24

. . 113-4

. . 113-6

. . 113-7

. . 113-9

113-9

122-1

128-3

137-3

137-4

137-5

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

List of tables

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Introduction

This document describes the software features available with the system. The

features are described in feature modules

alphabetically by feature

An alphabetized index of feature modules, enhancements and alternate

feature names is provided for easy reference. The enhancements, and

alternate feature names are italicized, with a reference to the appropriate

module which describes the functionality/capability. Each feature module

contains the following information.

Status box

Feature description

Operating parameters

Feature interactions

Feature packaging

Feature implementation

Feature operation

Status box

In the upper right hand corner of the module’s first page, the

status box identifies the minimum X 11 release this feature is available, as

well as the latest issue date of the feature module.

Feature description

Immediately following the title, a description

explains this feature and any enhancement made to the original design.

When

an enhancement is included, be sure to note the required X11 release

identified in the description text, as it may differ from the X11 release of

the original feature.

Operating parameters

These details explain the hardware and software

items required or prohibited for operating this feature.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Introduction

Feature interactions

An interaction description explains how this feature

is affected by, or affects, other features. When two features are mutually

exclusive, they cannot be active in the system at the same time.

Feature packaging

A brief list provides the package information (name,

number, and mnemonic) for this feature and its dependencies.

Feature implementation

This shows the individual overlays

necessary to activate this feature. The overlays listed show only prompts

requiring responses for this feature. For a complete discussion of prompts and

responses, refer to

Xl1 input/output guide

(553-3001-400).

Feature operation

Use these procedures to learn how to operate this

feature.

Information concerning software packaging and dependencies is discussed in

the chapters listed below.

Index

An alphabetized index of feature modules, enhancements and

alternate feature names is for easy reference. The enhancements, and alternate

feature names are italicized, with a reference to the appropriate module which

describes the functionality/capability.

Systems and releases

A table documents the highest X11 release

supported for each machine type.

Features and software options

An alphabetical list of features shows

the software package number, feature mnemonic, and the earliest Xl 1 release

the feature is available.

Software options and package dependencies

A numerical list of

software packages shows the feature name and package dependencies.

Feature modules and issue dates

An alphabetical list of feature

modules includes the latest issue date of the module.

Special features like Electronic Switched Network and Automatic Call

Distribution are documented in separate Northern Telecom Publications. The

modules in this manual that discuss these special features provide high-level

overviews, with the appropriate Northern Telecom Publication references.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Index of feature modules

Access Restrictions

Q Record Option. See

Call Detail Recording

ACD-MAX. See

Meridian MAX

Application Module

Attendant Administration

Attendant Alternative Answering

Attendant Barge-In

Attendant Busy Verify

Attendant Name Display. See

Call Party Name Display

Attendant call selection

Attendant Calls Waiting Indication

Attendant consoles

Attendant End-to-End Signaling. See

End-to-End Signaling

Attendant Incoming Call Indicators

Attendant Interpositional Transfer

Attendant Lockout

Attendant Overflow Position

Attendant Overflow Position Busy. See

Attendant Overflow Position

Attendant Position Busy. See also

Night Service

Attendant Recall

Attendant Secrecy

Attendant Splitting

Attendant Supervisory Console

Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication

Audible Message Waiting. See

Message

Audible Reminder of Held Calls

Autodial. See also

Last Number Redial

Stored Number Redial

with Authorization Code. See

Automatic Answerback

Automatic Call Distribution

Automatic Line Selection

Automatic Number Identification

Automatic Number Identification on DTI

Automatic Preselection of Prime Directory

Number

Automatic Set Relocation

Automatic Timed Reminders

Automatic Timed Recall. See

Automatic Timed Reminders

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Automatic Wake Up

Auxiliary Processor Link

Auxiliary Signaling

Background Terminal

Barge-In. See

Attendant Barge-In

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

1-4 Index of feature modules

Basic Alternate Route Selection. See

Electronic Switched Network

Basic Authorization Codes. See

Electronic Switched Network

Bridging

Busy Lamp Field

Busy Verify. See

Attendant Busy Verify

Buzz. See

Manual Signaling (Buzz)

Call Back Queuing. See

Electronic Switched Network

Call Back Queuing/Conventional Main. See

Electronic Switched Network

Call Detail Recording

Call Forward, See

Call Forward All Calls

Call Forward Busy

Call Forward External Deny

Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type

Call Forward, Internal Calls

Call Forward No Answer/ Flexible Call

Forward No Answer

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

Call Forward Reminder Tone

Hunting

Call Forward No Answer Second Level

Message Waiting Allowed Stations. See

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

Call Hold, Deluxe

Call Hold, Permanent

Call Park

Call Party Name Display

Call Pickup

Call Pickup, Directed

Call selection. See

Attendant call selection

Call Splitting. See

Attendant Splitting

Call Transfer

Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting

Called Party Disconnect Control

Calling Party Number. See

Charge Account and Calling Party Number

Calls Waiting Indication. See

Attendant Calls Waiting Indication

Trunks. See

Automatic Number Identification

Camp-On

Capacity Expansion

CDR. See

Call Detail Recording

CDR Expansion. See

Call Detail Recording

CDR Outpulsed Digits Option. See

Call Detail Recording

Centralized Attendant Service

Switchhook Flash

Code Restriction. See

Access Restrictions

Charge Account and Calling Party Number

Charge Account, Forced

Class

Service restrictions. See

Access Restrictions

CO Trunk Priority Option. See

Call Pickup

Conference

Conference Control. See

Conference

Console Digit Display. See

Digit Display

Console Presentation Group Level Services

Control

Trunk Group Access. See

Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication

Controlled Class of Service

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

1 features and services

Index of feature modules

Coordinated Dialing Plan. See

Electronic Switched Network

Coordinated Call Back Queuing. See

Electronic Switched Network

Coordinated Call Back Queuing Against

Main. See Electronic Switched Network

Data Port Hunting. See

Hunting

Deluxe Hold. See

Call Hold, Deluxe

Departmental Listed Directory Number

Dial Intercom

Dial Pulse/Dual Tone Multifrequency

Conversion

Dial Tones. See

Tones and Cadences

Digit Display

Digital Trunk Interface

Direct Inward System Access

Directed Call Pickup. See

Call Pickup, Directed

Directory Number

Directory Number Expansion. See also

Capacity Expansion

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing

Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom. See

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing

Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)

Do Not Disturb

DSN Station Loop Preemption. See

Station Loop Preemption

Electronic Switched Network

End-to-End Signaling

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service. See

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

Enhanced Hot Line. See

Hot Line

Enhanced Music. See

Music, Enhanced

Enhanced 911 Interface. See

Call Detail Recording

Equal Access Compliance

ESN, See Electronic Switched Network

Exclusive Hold. See

Call Hold, Deluxe

Fast Tone Digit Switch

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervisio

Flexible Attendant DN. See

Directory Number

Flexible Call Forward No Answer. See

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible

Call Forward No Answer

Flexible ESN Routing. See

Electronic Switched Network

Flexible Hot Line. See

Hot Line

Flexible Feature Codes

Flexible Line Lockout. See

Line Lockout

Flexible Tones and Cadences. See

Tones and Cadences

Forced Charge Account. See

Charge Account, Forced

Group Call

Guest Entry of Automatic Wake Up. See

Automatic Wake Up

History File

1 features and services

Index of feature modules

Hold. See

Call Hold, Deluxe

Call Hold, Permanent

Hospitality Screen Enhancement

Hot Line

features. See

Wake-Up

Background Terminal

Controlled Class of Service

Maid ID

Property Management System Interface

Room Service

Hunting

Improved End-to-End Signaling. See

End-to-End Signaling

See

Integrated Messaging System Link

In-Band AN1

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

Incoming Call Indicators. See

Attendant Incoming Call Indicators

Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion. See

Electronic Switched Network

Incremental Software Management

Individual Hold. See

Call Hold, Deluxe

Integrated Messaging System Link

Integrated Services Digital Network

Integrated Services Digital Network/

Application Protocol

Integrated Voice and Data

Intercept Treatment

Internal Call Detail Recording. See

Call Detail Recording

Internal Call Forward. See

Call Forward, Internal Calls

Internal Call Waiting. See

Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting

Interpositional Transfer. See

Attendant Interpositional Transfer

ISDN Basic Rate Interface

Last Number Redial. See also

Stored Number Redial

Limited Access to Overlays

Line Load Control

Line Lockout

Listed Directory Numbers. See

Directory Number

Lockout. See

Attendant Lockout

Line Lockout

Maid Identification

Make Set Busy

Malicious Call Trace

Manual Line Service

Manual Signaling (Buzz)

Manual Trunk Service

Meridian Hospitality Voice Services

Meridian Mail

Meridian Manager

Meridian MAX

Message Center

Message Registration

Message Waiting Lamp Maintenance

Modem Trunk Hunting. See

Hunting

Multiple Appearance DN. See

Directory Number

Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime

Multi-Language Wake Up. See

Automatic Wake-Up

Multiple-Console Operation

Multiple-Customer Operation

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Index of feature modules

Multiple DID Office Code Screening. See

Electronic Switched Network

Multi-Tenant Service. See also

Console Presentation Group Level Services

Multi-User

Music. See also

Recorded Announcement

Music, Enhanced

Network Automatic Call Distribution. See

Automatic Call Distribution

Network Alternate Route Selection. See

Electronic Switched Network

Network Authorization Codes. See

Electronic Switched Network

Network Call Transfer. See

Electronic Switched Network

Network features. See

Electronic Switched Network

Network Message Center. See

Network Message Services

Network Name Display. See

Integrated Services Digital Network

Network Signaling. See

Electronic Switched Network

Network Speed Call. See

Electronic Switched Network

Network Traffic. See

Electronic Switched Network

New Distinctive Ringing. See

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing

New Flexible Code Restriction. See also

Access Restrictions

Night Key for DID Digit Manipulation

Night Service

Night Service by Time

Day. See

Night Service

No Hold Conference

Off Hook Alarm Security

Off Hook Queuing. See

Electronic Switched Network

Off-Net

Number Recognition. See

Electronic Switched Network

Off-Premise Extension

Office Data Administration System

On Hook Dialing

Optional Outpulsing Delay

Optional Privacy

Outgoing Trunk Hunting. See

Hunting

Overflow tone. See

Tones and Cadences

Overlay Cache Memory

Override

Paging

Permanent Hold. See

2500 Set Features

Standardization. See

Property Management System Interface

Position Busy. See

Attendant Position Busy

Pretranslation

Prime DN. See

Directory Number

Privacy

Privacy Override

Privacy Release

Private Line Service

Property Management System Interface

Public Switched Data Service

Xl 1 features and services

telemanuals.com

1-8

Index of feature modules

RAN. See

Recorded Announcement

Recall. See

Attendant Recall

Recorded Announcement

Recorded Overflow Announcement

Recorded Telephone Dictation

Remote Call Forward

Remote Peripheral Equipment

Ring Again

Ringing Number Pickup. See

Call Pickup

Room Status

Round Robin Trunk Hunting. See

Hunting

Secrecy. See

Attendant Secrecy

Secretarial Filtering, See

Call Forwrd All Calls

Short Buzz for digital telephones

Single Appearance DN. See

Directory Number

Six Party Conference for 2500 Sets. See

Conference

Software Capacity Expansion. See

Capacity Expansion

Special Dial Tone. See

Tones and Cadences

Speed Call

Speed with Authorization Codes

Speed Call, System

Splitting. See

Attendant Splitting

Station Category Indication

Station Hunting. See

Hunting

Station Specific Authorization Codes

Station-to-Station Calling

Station to Station Call Waiting. See

Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting

Stored Number Redial

Supervisory Attendant Console. See

also

Attendant Supervisory Console

System Capacity Expansion, See

Capacity Expansion

System Speed Call. See

Speed Call, System

TAFAS. See

Night Service

Telephones

Time and Date

Time Forced Disconnect. See

Paging

Tones and Cadences

Tones, Flexible Incoming

Transfer. See

Call Transfer

Trunk Answer From Any Station. See

Night Service

Trunk Group Access Restrictions (TGAR).

See Access Restrictions

Trunk Group Busy See

Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication

Trunk Hunting. See

Hunting

Trunk Signaling Arrangements. See

Access Restrictions

Trunk Verification from a Station

Uninterrupted Line Connections

User Selectable Call Redirection

telemanuals.com

Index of feature modules 1-9

See

Voice Mailbox Administration

Voice Call

Voice Mailbox Administration

VP Wake Up. See

Automatic Wake Up

o-9

11 -Digit Translation. See

Electronic Switched Network

2500 Set Features

500 Set Features

500 Wake Up Calls. See

Automatic Wake Up

512 Second RAN. See

Recorded Announcement

Type Line Disconnect

63 Attendant Consoles. See

Multiple-Console Operation

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

l-10

Index of feature modules

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

1-11

Systems and releases

Table lists the systems, and the lowest and highest supported Xl 1 release

for each system.

Meridian 1 XT and system option 71 require a hard disk with Xl 1 release 16

and X 11 release 17.

Xl 1 release 18 and later require hardware upgrades. For further information,

refer to

conversion procedures

Upgrade

systems

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

1-12

Systems and releases

Table

System and supported Xl 1 release

System System Lowest supported

number Xl 1 release

STE

1011

1511 18

1211 8

1311 12

1011

1511 18

1111 15

1211 15

1611 18

Highest

supported Xl 1

release

featuresandservices 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Features and software options

1-13

Feature name Number Mnemonic Release

ACD Activity Code Entry

ACD Queue Record

ACD Load Management (C2)

ACD Package A

ACD Package B

ACD Package Cl

ACD Package D

ACD Package D, Auxiliary Link Processor

ACD Priority Agent

ACD Timed Overflow

ACD-D Auxiliary Security

Advanced Network Services

Alarm Filtering

Route Selection

Application Module Link

Attendant Administration

Attendant Alternative Answering

Attendant Overflow Position

155

ACNT

83 CDRQ

43 LMAN

ACDA

ACDB

42 ACDC

50 ACDD

LNK

116 PAGT

111

TOF

114

AUXS

148 NTWK

243

ALARM-FILTER

153

174

AAA

AOP

R13

RIO

R13

1 features and services 553-3001-305

1-14

Features and software options

Feature name Number Mnemonic Release

Automatic Answerback

Automatic Line Selection

Automatic Number Identification

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Automatic Wake Up

Auxiliary Processor Link

Background Terminal

Basic Alternate Route Selection

Basic Authorization Code

Basic Automatic Call Distribution

Basic Call Processing

Basic Queuing

Basic Rate Interface

Basic Routing

Call Detail Recording

Call Detail Recording Expansion

Call ID

Call Party Name Display

Call Park

Call-by-Call Service Selection

Call Waiting Notification

Calling line ID in CDR

CDR on Data Link

CDR on Teletype Machine (TTY)

Centralized Attendant Services (Main)

AAB

72 LSEL

84 ATM

102 AWU

109

APL

99 BGD

57 BARS

25 BAUT

40 BACD

BASIC

28 BQUE

216 BRI

BRTE

CDR

151

CDRE

247 CALL ID

95 CPND

33 CPRK

117 CBC

225 CWNT

118 CCDR

CLNK

CTY

26 CASM

R18

R16

R13

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Features and software options

Feature name Number Mnemonic Release

Centralized Attendant Services (Remote)

Switchhook Flash

Charge Account for CDR

Charge Account/Authorization Code

Command Status Link

Console Presentation Group Level Services

Controlled Class Of Service

Coordinated Dialing Plan

CSL with Alpha Signaling

Customer Controlled Routing

Deluxe Hold

Departmental Listed Directory Number

Dial Intercom

Dialed Number Identification Service

Digit Display

Digit Key Signaling

Digital Telephones

Direct Inward System Access

Directed Call Pickup

Directory Number Expansion

Distinctive Ringing/New Distinctive Ringing

Do Not Disturb, Group

Do Not Disturb, Individual

End-to-End Signaling

Enhanced ACD Routing

27 CASR

157 THF

23 CHG

24 CAB

172 CPGS

59 CDP

85 CSLA

215 CCR

DHLD

76 DLDN

DDSP

180 DKS

88 DSET

115 DCP

150 DNXP

74 DRNG

DNDG

EES

214 EAR

R15

R18

R13

R17

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

1-18

Features and software options

Feature name Number Mnemonic Release

Multi-User

Multi-Tenant Service

Music

Network ACD

Network Alternate Route Selection

Network Authorization Code

Network Call Transfer

Network Class of Service

Network Message Services

Network Queuing Main

Network Signaling

Network Speed Call

Network Traffic Measurements

New Flexible Code Restriction

Off Hook Queuing

Office Data Administration System

Optional Outpulsing Delay

PBX Inter-face for DTI

Pretranslation

Priority Queuing

Property Management System Interface

Recorded Announcement

Recorded Overflow Announcement

Remote Peripheral Equipment

Remote Virtual Queuing

242 MULTI-USER

TENS

44 MUS

207 NACD

58 NARS

63 NAUT

67 NXFR

32 NCOS

175 NMS

38 MCBQ

39 NSC

29 NTRF

49 NFCR

OHQ

20 ODAS

79 OOD

92 PXLT

60 PQUE

103

RAN

36 ROA

RPE

192 RVQ

R15

RIO

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Features and software options

1-19

Feature name Number Mnemonic Release

Room Status

Set Relocation

Single Terminal Access

Station Category indication

Station Loop Preemption

Station Specific Authorization Code

Stored Number

Superloop Administration (LD97)

Supervisory Attendant Console

System Errors and Events Lookup

System Speed Call

Time and Date

Tone Detector

Trunk Verification from a Station

Voice Mailbox Administration

VIP Auto Wake Up

2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface

2500 Telephone Features

500 Telephone Features

100 RMS

53 SR

228 STA

106

229 SSAU

64 SNR

205

245

ssc

TAD

TDET

110

TVS

246

VMBA

212 VAWU

154

SS25

ss5

R13

R14

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Features and software options

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

1-21

Software options and package

dependencies

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

Basic Call Processing BASIC

Includes the following features:

Call Transfer

Conference

Call Forward No Answer

Hunt

Call Pickup

Extended PBX Features

includes the following features:

Call Forward All Calls

Override

Ring Again

Secretarial Filtering

Speed Call

Voice Call

OPTF

Multiple-Customer Operation CUST

features and services

553-3001-305

l-22

Software options and package dependencies

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

Call Detail Recording CDR

This is the base package for CDR. See also

CDR with Charge Account (CHG-24)

CDR Magnetic Tape (CLNK-6) (package 6 is not

supported on Release 19 and later)

CDR TTY (CTY-5)

CDR Queue Record (CDR-83)

Internal CDR (ICDR-108)

Without CTY (5) or CLNK CDR cannot output

statistics or reports.

CDR on Teletype Machine (TTY)

Package dependencies:

CDR (4)

CDR on Data Link

Package dependencies:

CDR (4)

Recorded Announcement

Package dependencies:

(11)

Time and Date

Do Not Disturb, Individual

End-to-End Signaling

Intercept Treatment

Automatic Number Identification

Route Selection

Package dependencies:

(12)

CTY

CLNK

RAN

TAD

EES

Xl 1 features and services

Software options and package dependencies

1-23

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

Basic Routing

Package dependencies:

NCOS (32)

Remote Peripheral Equipment

Do Not Disturb, Group

Package dependencies:

(9)

Make Set Busy

2500 Type Features

Digit Display

Office Data Administration System

Dial Intercom

Direct Inward System Access

Charge Account for CDR

Package dependencies:

CDR (4)

CAB (24)

Charge Account/Authorization Code

Basic Authorization Code

Package dependencies:

CAB (24)

Centralized Attendant Services (Main)

CASM cannot be used with AOP (56)

Centralized Attendant Services (Remote)

CASR cannot be used with AOP (56)

Basic Queuing

BRTE Rl

RPE

DNDG

MSB

SS25 Rl

DDSP

ODAS Rl

DI Rl

CHG

CAB

BAUT

CASM

CASR

BQUE Rl

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

l-24

Software options and package dependencies

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

Network Traffic Measurements

One of the following packages must be equipped:

BARS (57)

(58)

CDP (59)

PQUE (60)

FCBQ (61)

OHQ (62)

NTRF

3 2 Network Class of Service

Call Park

System Speed Call

Integrated Message System

Package dependencies:

BACD (40)

ACDA (45)

MWC (46)

Meridian Mail IMS applications require the following

additional packages:

(77)

CDRQ (83)

(85)

36 Recorded Overflow Announcement

Package dependencies:

RAN (7)

37 Network Signaling

Package dependencies:

NCOS (32)

NCOS

CPRK R2

ssc

IMS R2

ROA R2

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies

l-25

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

Network Queuing Main MCBQ R2

Package dependencies:

NCOS (32)

(37)

FCBQ (61)

39 Network Speed Call

Package dependencies:

ssc (34)

BARS (57) or NARS (58)

Basic Automatic Call Distribution

This is the minimum package for ACD. See also

ACD Basic; package A (ACDA-45)

ACD Advanced; package B (ACDB-41)

ACD Management Reports; package (ACDC-42)

ACD Load Management; package C2 (LMAN-43)

ACD Package D (ACDD-50)

ACD Auxiliary Link Processor (LNK-51)

record (CDRQ-83)

ACD Timed Overflow

Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS-98)

ACD Package B

Package dependencies:

BACD (40)

ACDA (45)

ACD Package Cl

Package dependencies:

BACD (40)

ACDB (41)

ACDA (45)

NSC R2

BACD

ACDB

ACDC

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

l-26

Software options and package dependencies

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

ACD Load Management (C2)

Package dependencies:

BACD (40)

ACDB (41)

ACDC (42)

ACDA (45)

Music

Package dependencies:

RAN (7)

ACD Package A

Package dependencies:

BACD (40)

Message Center

Automatic Answerback

Group Call

New Flexible Code Restriction

Package dependencies:

NCOS(32)

ACD Package D

Package dependencies:

BACD (40)

ACDB (41)

ACDC (42)

ACDA (45)

LNK (51)

ACD Package D, Auxiliary Link Processor

Package dependencies:

ACDD (50)

LMAN

MUS

ACDA

MWC

AAB

GRP

NFCR R2

ACDD R2

LNK R2

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Software options and package dependencies

1-27

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

Forced Charge Account

Package dependencies:

CHG (23)

CAB (24)

Set Relocation

Attendant Administration

History File

Attendant Overflow Position

AOP cannot be used with CASM (26) or CASR (27).

Basic Alternate Route Selection

Package dependencies:

(14)

NCOS (32)

Network Alternate Route Selection

Package dependencies:

BRTE (14)

NCOS (32)

Coordinated Dialing Plan

Package dependencies:

BRTE (14)

FCBQ (61)

NCOS (32)

Priority Queuing

Package dependencies:

NCOS (32)

FCA

AA RI

AOP

BARS

NARS R2

CDP

PQUE

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

l-28

Software options and package dependencies

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

Flexible Call Back Queuing

Package dependencies:

BQUE (28)

BARS (57) or NARS (58) or CDP (59)

Off Hook Queuing

Package dependencies:

BQUE (28)

BARS (57) or NARS (58)

Network Authorization Code

Package dependencies:

CAB (24)

BAUT (25)

BARS (57) or NARS (58) or CDP (59)

Stored Number Redial

Tone Detector

Network Call Transfer

Package dependencies:

NCOS (32)

(37)

Hot Line Services

Enhanced Hot Line

Package dependencies:

NCOS (32)

ssc (34)

Deluxe Hold

Automatic Line Selection

FCBQ

OHQ

NAUT

SNR R3

TDET

NXFR R3

HOT

DHLD R4

LSEL R4

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Software options and package dependencies 1-29

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

500 Telephone Features

Package dependencies:

SS25 (18)

Distinctive and New Distinctive Ringing

PBX Inter-face for DTI

Departmental Listed Directory Number

Command Status Link

Optional Outpulsing Delay

Station Category Indication

Controlled Class of Service

ACD CDR Queue Record

Package dependencies:

CDR (4)

BACD (40)

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Package dependencies:

TDET (65)

CSLA with Alpha Signaling

Package dependency:

DDSP (19)

(77)

(75) for Meridian Mail MP systems

Multi-Tenant Service

Fast Tone and Digit Switch

Digital Telephones

ss5

DRNG

DLDN R5

OOD R5

CDRQ

ATM R7

TENS R7

FTDS R7

DSET R7

1 features and services 553-3001-305

l-30

Software options and package dependencies

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

M3000 Touchphone

TSET

Package dependencies:

DSET (88)

Last Number Redial LNR

M2317 Digital Display Telephone DLT2

Package dependencies:

DSET (88)

92 Pretranslation/Enhanced Pretranslation PXLT

93 Supervisory Attendant Console R8

9 5 Call Party Name Display CPND

Package dependencies:

DDSP (19)

DSET (88)

TSET (89)

ODAS

BGD

*The ODAS package is required for DES.

*The BGD package is required for Hotel/Motel

applications.

Meridian ST/System Option 21

Dialed Number Identification Service

Package dependencies:

DDSP (19)

ACDA (45)

APL

IDC

*The APL package is required for DP link.

*The IDC package is required for routing by DNIS.

SLST

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies

1-31

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

100

101

102

103

105

106

Background Terminal Facility B G D

Package dependencies:

CCOS (81)

RMS MR AWU or (103)

Room Status RMS

Package dependencies:

CCOS (81)

BGD (99)

(9)

MWC (46)

Packages (9) and MWC (46) are required for lamp

status.

Message Registration

Package dependencies:

CCOS (81)

BGD (99)

MR RIO

Automatic Wake Up

Package dependencies:

RAN (7)

CCOS (81)

BGD (99)

AWU

Property Management System Interface

Package dependencies:

CCOS (81)

BGD (99)

RMS (100)

Line Load Control LLC

Station Loop Preemption

R13

RIO

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

l-32

Software options and package dependencies

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

107

108

109

110

111

113

114

115

116

117

Malicious Call Trace

Internal Call Detail Recording (ICDR)

Package dependencies:

CDR (4)

Auxiliary Processor Link

Trunk Verification from a Station

MCT

ACD Timed Overflow

Package dependencies:

ACDB (41)

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

Package dependencies:

NFCR (49)

ACD-D Auxiliary Security

Package dependencies:

ACDD (50)

LNK (51)

Directed Call Pickup

ACD Priority Agent

Package dependencies:

ACDA (45)

Call-by-Call Service Selection

Package dependencies:

(145)

PRA (146)

IEC

*The IEC package is required for Inter-Exchange Carrier.

APL

TVS

TOF

R9.32

IDC R13

AUXS R12

DCP

PAGT R12

CBC

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies

1-33

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

118 Calling line ID in CDR CCDR R13

Package dependencies:

CDR (4)

(145)

119 Enhanced Music EMUS R12

Package dependencies:

MUS (44)

125 Flexible Tone and Cadences F TC R16

139 Flexible Feature Codes FFC

Package dependencies:

CCOS

ss5

*The SS5 package is required if you are using on

500 telephones.

*The CCOS package is required for the Electronic Lock

feature.

140

145

146

147

M2250 TCM Console

Package dependencies:

DSET (88)

Signaling

Primary Rate Access

Package dependencies:

(75)

(145)

The DDSP (19) package is required for CLID.

Signaling Link

Package dependencies:

(145)

DCON

PRA

ISL R14

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

148

149

150

151

153

154

Advanced Network Services NTWK R14

Package dependencies:

BRTE (14)

NCOS (32)

(145)

NARS (58) or CDP (59)

PRA (146) or ISL (147)

(37) for tandem node

Inter-Exchange Carrier IEC R13

Package dependencies:

(145)

PRA (146)

Directory Number Expansion DNXP R13

The CDRE (151) package is required if CDR is equipped.

Call Detail Recording Expansion CDRE R13

Package dependencies:

CDR (4)

DNXP (150)

Application Module Link R13

Package dependencies:

(77)

IMS (35)

MSDL requires MSDL package 222

2.0 Megabit Primary Rate Interface

Packagedependency:

(145)

R14

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies

l-35

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

155

157

158

164

170

172

173

174

ACD Activity Code Entry

Package dependencies:

ACDD (50)

LNK (51)

AUXS (114)

Switchhook Flash

Feature Group D

Package dependencies:

BARS (57)

NARS (58) (recommended)

Limited Access to Overlays

Meridian Modular Telephone

Package dependencies:

DSET (88) or TSET (89)

Console Presentation Group Level Services

Package dependencies:

TENS (86)

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service

Package dependencies:

CCOS (81)

Attendant Alternative Answering

ACNT

R13

THF

R14

FGD

CPGS

ECCS

AAA

features and services 553-3001-305

l-36

Software options and package dependencies

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

175 Network Message Services

Package dependencies:

Network Message Center:

NMS R16

Originating or Terminating PBX: EES (IO), MWC

PRA (146) or ISL NTWK

Tandem PBX: PRA (146) or ISL

NTWK (148)

Meridian Mail

Originating PBX: EES BACD ACDA

MWC NTWK PRA or

(147)

Tandem PBX: NTWK PRA

or ISL (147)

Terminating PBX: EES IMS BACD

ACDA MWC CSL PRA

(146) or ISL NTWK (148)

ACD Message Center:

Originating PBX: EES MWC

PRA (146) or ISL NTWK (148)

Tandem PBX: PRA (146) or ISL

NTWK (148)

Terminating PBX: EES BACD ACDA

MWC PRA (146) or ISL

NTWK (148)

178 Enhanced Overflow

Package dependencies:

TOF(lll)

EOVF R15

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies

1-37

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

179 Hospitality Voice Services H V S R16

Package dependencies:

Pretranslation and DND enhancements:

RAN (7)

EES (10)

(17)

IMS (35)

BACD (40)

ACDA (45)

MWC (46)

(77)

CSLA (85)

APL (109)

enhancements:

CCOS BGD RMS (103)

Meridian Mail:

APL (109)

180 Digit Key Signaling

Package dependencies:

RAN (7)

EES (10)

MSB (17)

IMS (35)

BACD (40)

ACDA (45)

MWC (46)

(77)

CSLA (85)

APL (109)

DKS R16

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

l-38

Software options and package dependencies

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

192

202

203

204

205

206

207

Remote Virtual Queuing

Package dependencies:

NTWK (148)

PRA (146) or ISL (147)

(145)

FCBQ (61)

(38)

International PRA

Package dependencies:

(145)

(154)

Extended Peripheral Equipment (Superloop)

Package dependencies:

(295)

Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS card

Package dependencies:

(205)

Superloop Administration (LD97)

Multi-Language Wake Up

Package dependencies:

AWU (102)

(103)

Network ACD

Package dependencies:

BQUE (28)

NTWK (148)

EOVF (178)

RVQ R18

XPE

XCTO

MLWU R16

NACD R15

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies 1-39

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

208 Hospitality Screen Enhancement

Package dependencies:

(170)

209 Meridian Link Module

Package dependencies:

(153) (before 1 release 17 only)

MSDL requires package 222 (Xi 1 release 18 and later)

210 Maid Identification

Package dependencies:

CCOS (81)

BGD (99)

RMS (100)

(103)

The (103) package is required to capture Maid ID

for statistic reports. The HSE (208) package is required

to bring up Maid ID screen for Meridian Modular

Telephones with Hospitality Screen Enhancement

feature.

212 VIP Auto Wake Up

Package dependencies:

AWU (102)

214 Enhanced ACD Routing

Package dependencies:

MUS (44)

ACDB (41)

ACDA (45)

HSE R17

MLS

MAID

R17

VAWU R17

EAR R17

1 features and services 553-3001-305

l-40

Software options and package dependencies

Number Feature Name Mnemonic. Release

215 Customer Controlled Routing

Package dependencies:

(77)

EAR (214)

CALL ID (247) for Release 19 and later

CCR

216

218

Basic Rate interface

Package dependencies:

(145) (required for Packet Handler options)

XPE (203)

MSDL (222)

Hold in Queue for IVR

Package dependencies:

CCR (215)

IVR

R18

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies

l-41

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

219 Message Waiting Indication Interworking with DMS

Package dependencies:

Originating Node:

MWI (219) if connected to DMS (BCS 36) for

Interworking

(175)

MWI

R 19

BACD (40) and ACDA (45) if ACD DN is used as the

Message Center DN

Signaling (145)

Primary Rate Access (146) or Signaling

Link (147)

NTWK (148)

MWC (46)

EES (10)

Host Node:

MWI (219) if connected to DMS (BCS 36) for

Interworking

(175)

IMS (35)

(77)

BACD (40)

ACDA (45)

Signaling (145)

Primary Rate Access (146) or Signaling

Link (147)

NTWK (148)

MWC (46)

EES (10)

Tandem Node:

MWI (219) if connected to DMS (BCS 36) for

interworking

Signaling (145)

Primary Rate Access (146) or Signaling

Link (147)

Network Services (148)

features and services 553-3001-305

l-42

Software options and package dependencies

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

222 Multi-Purpose Serial Data Link MSDL R18

223 FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision FCC R17

2 2 4 Meridian 911

Package dependencies:

DDSP (19)

(153)

EAR (214)

CALL ID (247)

CWNT (225) for full operation

MLM (209) for Meridian Link

Recommended:

CDR (4)

CTY (5)

LMAN (43)

ACDC (42) or ACDD (50) and LNK (51)

CPND (95)

MCT (107)

CCDR (118)

225

227

228

Call Waiting Notification

MSDL Serial Data Interface

Package dependency:

MSDL (222)

Single Terminal Access

Package dependencies:

MSDL (222)

MSDL SDI (227)

CWNT

MSDL SDI

STA

features and services 553-3001-305

Software options and package dependencies

1-43

Number Feature Name Mnemonic Release

229

242

243

245

246

247

248

Station Specific Authorization Code

Package dependency:

BAUT (25)

Multi User

Alarm Filtering

Packagedependency:

(55)

System Message Look-up Facility

Voice Mailbox Administration

Package dependency:

CPND (95)

Call ID

Meridian Packet Handler

Package dependency:

(216)

(145) for 1.5 Mbps PRI link

(154) for 2 Mbps PRI link

SSAU

MULTI-

USER

FILTER

VMBA

CALL ID

MPH

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

l-44

Software options and package dependencies

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

1-45

Feature modules and issue dates

Feature module issue date

Access restrictions 92 1231

Application Module 9 2 12 31

Application Module Link 92 12 31

Attendant Administration 9 2 12 31

Attendant Alternative Answering 9 2 12 31

Attendant Barge-in 93 1031

Attendant Busy Verify

92 1231

Attendant call selection 92 1231

Attendant Calls Waiting Indication 92 1231

Attendant consoles 92 12 31

Attendant Incoming Call Indicators 9 2 12 31

Attendant Interpositional Transfer 92 1231

Attendant Lockout 92 1231

Attendant Overflow Position 92 12 31

Attendant Position Busy 92 1231

Attendant Recall 92 12 31

Attendant Secrecy

92 12 31

1 features and services 553-3001-305

1-46

Feature modules and issue dates

Feature module Issue date

Attendant Splitting 92

12 31

Attendant Supervisory Console 92

12 31

Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication 92

12 31

Audible Reminder of Held Calls

Automatic Answerback

Automatic Call Distribution

Automatic Line Selection

Automatic Number identification

Automatic Number Identification on DTI

Automatic Preselection of Prime Directory Number

Automatic Set Relocation

Automatic Timed Reminders

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Automatic Wake Up

Auxiliary Processor Link

Auxiliary Signaling

Background Terminal

Bridging

Busy Lamp Field

Call Detail Recording

Call Forward All Calls

Call Forward Busy

Call Forward by Call Type

92 12 31

93 10 31

92 12 31

93 10 31

921231

92 12 31

921231

93 10 31

93 08 01

92 12 31

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Feature modules and issue dates

l-47

Feature module Issue date

Call Forward External Deny

Call Forward, Internal Calls

Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

Cail Hold, Deluxe

Call Hold, Permanent

Call Park

Call Party Name Display

Call Pickup

Call Pickup, Directed

Call Transfer

Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting

Called Party Disconnect Control

Camp-On

Capacity Expansion

Centralized Attendant Service

Switchhook Flash

Charge Account and Calling Party Number

Charge Account, Forced

Conference

Console Presentation Group Level Services

Controlled Class of Service

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

Departmental Listed Directory Number

92 12 31

93 10 31

92 1231

93 10 31

92 12 31

93 10 31

93 1031

92 12 31

92 1231

92 12 31

92 1231

92 12 31

921231

92 12 31

92 1231

92 12 31

93 1031

92 1231

Xl 1 features and services

Feature modules and issue dates

Feature module Issue date

Dial Intercom 93 08 01

Dial Pulse/Dual Tone Multifrequency Conversion 92 12 31

Dialed Number Identification Service 92 12 31

Digit Display 92 12 31

Digital Trunk Interface 92 12 31

Direct Inward System Access 92 12 31

Directory Number 92 12 31

Directory Number Expansion 92 12 31

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing 92 12 31

Do Not Disturb 92 12 31

Electronic Switched Network 92 12 31

End-to-End Signaling 93 08 01

Equal Access Compliance 93 10 31

Fast Tone Digit Switch

921231

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

921231

Flexible Feature Codes 93 08 01

Group Call

921231

History File 93 08 01

Hot Line 93 08 01

Hunting

931031

In-Band 92 12 31

Incoming DID Digit Conversion 92 12 31

Incremental Software Management 92 12 31

Integrated Messaging System Link 92 12 31

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Feature modules and issue dates 1-49

Feature module Issue date

Integrated Services Digital Network

Integrated Voice and Data

Treatment

Basic Rate Interface

Last Number Redial

Limited Access to Overlays

Line Load Control

Line Lockout

Line and Trunk Cards

Maid Identification

Make Set Busy

Malicious Call Trace

Manual Line Service

Manual Signaling (Buzz)

Manual Trunk Service

Meridian Hospitality Voice Services

Meridian Mail

Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration

Meridian Manager

Meridian MAX/ACD-MAX

Message Center

Message Registration

Message Waiting Indication (MWI) interworking

Message Waiting Lamp Maintenance

921231

92 1231

92 12 31

92 1231

921231

93 1031

92 12 31

92 1231

921231

92 12 31

92 1231

921231

93 10 31

92 1231

92 12 31

93 08 01

931031

92 1231

Xl 1 features and services

Feature modules and issue dates

Feature module Issue date

MSDL Serial Data Interface 93 08 01

Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime 92 12 31

Multiple Console operation 92 12 31

Multiple Customer Operation 92 12 31

Multi-Tenant Service 92 12 31

Multi-User 93 08 01

Music 93 08 01

Music, Enhanced 92 12 31

Network Message Services 92 12 31

New Flexible Code Restriction 92 12 31

Night Key for DID Digit Manipulation 92 12 31

Night Service 92 12 31

No Hold Conference 92 12 31

North American Numbering Plan 93 31

Off Hook Alarm Security

93 08 01

Off-Premise Extension 92 12 31

Office Data Administration System

921231

On Hook Dialing 92 12 31

Optional Outpulsing Delay

921231

Overlay Cache Memory 93 08 01

Override

921231

Paging

921231

Pretranslation 93 08 01

Privacy

92 12 31

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Feature modules and issue dates

1-51

Feature module Issue date

Privacy Override 93 08 01

Privacy Release 92 1231

Line Service 921231

Property Management System Interface 93 08 01

Public Switched Data Service 93 10 31

Recorded Announcement 92 1231

Recorded Overflow Announcement 92 12 31

Recorded Telephone Dictation 92 1231

Remote Call Forward 93 08 01

Remote Peripheral Equipment

921231

Ring Again

921231

Room Status 93 08 01

Secretarial Filtering

921231

Short Buzz for digital telephones 92 12 31

Speed Call 92 12 31

Speed with Authorization Codes

921231

Speed Call, System 93 08 01

Station Category Indication 92 1231

Station Specific Authorization Code 93 08 01

Station-to-Station Calling

921231

Stored Number Redial

921231

Telephones 93 08 01

Time and Date

921231

Tones and Cadences

921231

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

1-52

Feature modules and issue dates

Feature module Issue date

Tones, Flexible Incoming 92 12 31

Trunk Verification from a Station 92 12 31

Line Connections 92 12 31

User Selectable Call Redirection 92 12 31

Voice Call 93 08 01

2500 Telephone Features 93 10 31

500 Telephone Features

921231

50012500 Type Line Disconnect 93 08 01

features and services 553-3001-305

Access restrictions

Access restrictions limit individual user access to the exchange network,

private network, and certain services and features. These restrictions can be

arranged to control all calls originated by or terminating on stations. Access

restrictions can be temporarily overridden by the use of other Meridian

features, if equipped, such as Forced Charge Account, Authorization Code,

and System Speed Call.

When a call is originated, access checks are made by the Meridian 1 on

the class of service (CLS) of the individual station

the Trunk Group Access Restriction (TGAR) code of the station

the area and exchange codes dialed by stations with a Toll Denied (TLD)

class of service

the Network Class of Service (NCOS) of the station, if Basic Alternate

Route Selection/Network Alternate Route Selection or

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) is equipped

If any restrictions are detected when a call is placed, the call is denied and the

intercept treatment defined in the Customer Data Block is applied.

features and services 553-3001-305

2-2

Access restrictions

Class of Service restrictions

The Class of Service (CLS) restrictions assigned to telephones and Tie trunks

control the degree of access to and from the exchange network. CLS

restrictions also control access to certain features within the system. There are

eight possible CLS access restrictions assigned to telephones, Tie trunks,

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) trunks, and Authorization Codes that

access the public exchange network. They are listed in order, from the most

restricted to least restricted. Each of these restriction levels builds upon the

capabilities of those listed before it. For example, a telephone with CLS

can call anywhere a telephone with FR2 can, and can also access Tie trunks.

See Table 2-l.

Fully Restricted Service

There are three levels:

FR2

.allowed to originate and receive internal calls

.denied access to tie and Common Controlled Switching

Arrangement networks

.denied access to and from the exchange network, either by dialing,

through an attendant, or using call modification from an unrestricted

telephone

Call modification takes place when certain features are activated

while a call is in progress, for example, Call Park, Call Pickup, Call

Transfer, Conference, or Night Answer.

.allowed to originate and receive internal calls

.allowed access to tie and CCSA networks

.denied access to and from the exchange network, either by dialing

through an attendant, or using call modification from an unrestricted

telephone

Note: If a telephone with CLS = is in a Multiple Appearance DN

(MADN) arrangement,

the

call may be presented if at least one of the

telephones has CLS = UNR. Once the call is presented it will ring all

telephones in the MADN group. However, only UNR telephones can

answer the call.

Xl 1 features and services

Access restrictions 2-3

Table

Class of Service chart

Incoming

calls

UNR TLD SRE FRE FR2

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No

using call

modification

Outgoing Yes Yes Yes Yes using Yes No No

non-toll trunk attendant using UNR

calls or UNR telephone

telephone

Outgoing toll Yes

Yes using No

No No

trunk calls

BARS/

direct

(0 or 1+ on NARS access

COT or FX) No direct

access

To/From Tie

trunk Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes No

To/From

internal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Uses Uses Uses Uses Uses NCOS Uses Uses

calls NCOS NCOS NCOS NCOS and CLS

NCOS NCOS

TGAR = No

only only and and CLS and and

CLS

Uses Uses Uses Uses Uses NCOS, Uses Uses

calls NCOS NCOS NCOS, NCOS, CLS, and

NCOS, CLS

TGAR

Yes and

and TGAR CLS

CLS, and

TGAR

only

TGAR

and

TGAR

and

TGAR TGAR

Xl 1 features and services

2-4

Access restrictions

FRE

allowed to originate and receive internal calls

.allowed access to tie and CCSA networks

.allowed access to and from the exchange network using call

modification from an unrestricted telephone

denied access (either by dialing or through an attendant) to and from

the exchange network

Note:

The FRPT prompt in LD17 allows or denies access to incoming

calls for FRE CLS telephones. It allows FRE calls to Call Pickup, Night

Answer, and to receive modified calls.

The assignment of Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) keys allows the attendant to

recognize which calls are fully restricted:

DFO = calls from FRE, and FR2 CLS

DLO = calls from CUN, CTD, TLD, SRE, and UNR CLS

Semi-Restricted Service (SRE)

Allowed to receive calls from the exchange

network. Restricted from all dial access to the exchange network. Allowed to

access the exchange network through an attendant or an unrestricted

telephone only.

Toll Denied Service

Allowed to receive calls from the exchange

network and to dial the local exchange network or selected local exchanges, if

code restriction is in effect. Allowed to originate calls through the toll exchange

network through an attendant or an unrestricted telephone only. TLD is

commonly used with Forced Charge Account and Code Restriction Blocks.

Conditionally Toll Denied Service (CTD)

Allowed access for calls placed

through Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection and

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP). Then the telephone NCOS restriction is

checked. When using dial access of routes, CTD are seen as TLD telephones.

Conditionally Unrestricted Service (CUN)

Allowed access for calls placed

through Automatic Number Identification Denied access for all other

types of outgoing calls.

Unrestricted Service (UNR)

Allowed to originate and receive calls from the

exchange network.

features and services 553-3001-305

Access restrictions 2-5

Code Restriction

Code Restriction allows limited access to the toll exchange network to

stations and Tie trunks with a Toll Denied Class of Service (TLD). A Code

Restriction Block that specifies the allowed area and exchange codes (200

through 999) is built for each trunk route. This block restricts access to

specific area and exchange codes by monitoring the digits dialed.

There can be only one Code Restriction Block per route. The only routes that

use Code Restriction Blocks are Central Office Trunk (COT) and FX, since

they are toll routes. Code Restriction Blocks are ignored for all other types of

routes.

When a telephone or Tie trunk with a CTD, CUN, or TLD class of service

directly access a COT or FX route, the system examines the Code Restriction

Block to determine the call eligibility.

Note: No

area codes, local exchange, on special numbers such as 911

and 411 can be successfully dialed unless allowed in a Code Restriction

Block for

Code Restriction Blocks only perform three-digit screening. For dialing

areas, the system can ignore the 1 when examining the TLD telephone dialed

number. The 1 is later outpulsed with the dialed number to complete the call

successfully.

For more information, see “New Flexible Code Restriction” or Basic

Network Alternate Route Selection description

Trunk Group Access Restrictions

Trunk Group Access Restrictions control access to the exchange

network, tie and CCSA access lines, and paging and dictation services.

Telephones, Tie trunks, Direct Inward System Access (DISA) trunks, and

Authorization Codes are assigned a Trunk Group Access Restriction (TGAR)

code which defines the trunks that may be accessed. Up to 16 TGAR codes

can be assigned for each customer. X11 release 13 and later software allows

the assignment of 32 TGAR codes per customer. Any TGAR that is not

allowed access to a route is assigned in the Trunk Route Data Block in

response to the prompt TARG (Trunk Access Restriction Group).

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

2-6 Access restrictions

When a telephone or Tie trunk accesses a trunk route, the Meridian 1 checks

the class of service of the originating party. If access is allowed, the system

then compares the TGAR of the station against the TARG codes defined for

the route being accessed. If a match is found, the call is denied and Intercept

Treatment (INTR) defined in the Customer Data Block-is applied.

When dial access to a trunk group is denied, the station may access the trunk

route through the attendant or a nonrestricted station. If a route is busied-out

by the attendant, stations with a TGAR code 0 to 7 are intercepted to the

attendant. Stations with a TGAR code 8 to 31 continue to seize and use the

trunks on the busied route to which they have access.

The following example further explains Trunk Group Access Restrictions.

Assume a customer has seven trunk routes:

TGAR

Access denied to routes

Route

COT

WATS

FX2

TIE

TIE 2

6 Paging

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Access restrictions 2-7

Assume the following seven TGAR codes are required:

TGAR

Access denied to routes

No restrictions (default)

The matrix summary is as follows:

Trunk Type

Route number TARG Code

0123456

7-31

COT

WATS

I I

FX 1

I I

12 4

FX 2

123

TIE 1

123

TIE 2

123 56

Paging

456

Xl 1 features and services

2-8

Access restrictions

It follows from the matrix summary that a telephone or Tie trunk was

assigned one of the following TGAR codes:

0 -has no restrictions

1 -cannot access trunk routes 0 through 6

2-cannot access trunk routes 2 through 5

3 -cannot access trunk routes 3 through 5

4 -cannot access trunk routes 2 and 6

5 -cannot access trunk routes 3 through 6

6 -cannot access trunk routes 5 and 6

Trunk signaling arrangements

Trunk to trunk connections are further controlled by the signaling and

supervision arrangements assigned to each trunk. Table 2-2 summarizes the

trunk signaling arrangements.

Table 2-2

Trunk signaling arrangements

From

Trunk

with/without

disconnect

supervision

Paging

dictation

trunk

Telephone

(non-trunk)

Trunk with disconnect

supervision Yes N o Yes

Trunk without No

disconnect supervision

RAN/Paging dictation No

trunk

No Yes

No No

Telephone Yes

Note: Yes: connection allowed

No: connection disallowed

Yes Yes

features and services 553-3001-305

Access restrictions 2-9

Operating parameters

If a conflict exists between the class of service (CLS) and TGAR restrictions,

the access denied restriction takes precedence.

Access restrictions are applied through service change overlay programs.

Access to telephone and trunk features is denied in the respective data block

by allowing the system to default to a denial, by not entering the appropriate

feature code or by not assigning the feature to a key/lamp pair. You must

enable the features and access restrictions you want, on a customer and

telephone level.

Services such as paging and dictation can be restricted through TGAR codes

because the auxiliary equipment is linked to the Meridian 1 system by way of

trunks.

Feature interaction

New Flexible Code Restriction

The Code Restriction feature and New Flexible Code Restriction cannot

be implemented simultaneously for the same customer.

Feature packaging

These capabilities are included in basic Xl 1 system software.

Xl features and services

2-10 Access restrictions

Feature implementation

Use the overlays on the following pages to configure access

restrictions.

Assign a Class of Service and TGAR code for telephones.

REQ

TYPE

TGAR

CHG

500

x, (O)-31

CUN

TLD

CTD

SRE

FRE

FR2

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Station or trunk TGAR

X = remove TGAR value

Note: With 1 release 12 and earlier, O-l 5 TGAR codes are

allowed.

Unrestricted (default)

Conditionally Unrestricted

Toll Denied

Conditionally Toll Denied

Semi Restricted

Fully Restricted

Fully Restricted 1

Fully Restricted 2

Xl 1 features and services

Access restrictions

2-11

-Assign a Class of Service and TGAR code for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

TGAR

CHG

aaaa

x, (O)-31

CUN

TLD

CTD

SRE

FRE

FR2

Change

Telephone type

aaaa

Terminal Number

Station or trunk TGAR

X = remove TGAR value

Note: With Xl 1 release 12 and earlier, O-l 5 TGAR codes are allowed.

Unrestricted (default)

Conditionally Unrestricted

Toll Denied

Conditionally Toll Denied

Semi Restricted

Fully Restricted

Fully Restricted 1

Fully Restricted 2

1 features and services 553-3001-305

2-12 Access restrictions

LD14

Assign a Class of Service and TGAR code for Tie trunks.

REQ

TYPE

TGAR

CHG

TIE, ISA, CSA

x, (O)-31

CUN

TLD

CTD

SRE

FRE

FR2

Change

Trunk type

Terminal Number

Station or trunk TGAR

X = remove TGAR value

Note: With Xl 1 release 12 and earlier, O-l 5 TGAR codes are

allowed.

Unrestricted (default)

Conditionally Unrestricted

Toll Denied

Conditionally Toll Denied

Semi Restricted

Fully Restricted

Fully Restricted 1

Fully Restricted 2

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Access restrictions 2-13

-Assign a Class of Service to the Authorization Code classcode.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

SPWD

CLAS

cos

TGAR

NCOS

CHG

AUB

o-99

xxxx

o-115

CUN

TLD

CTD

SRE

FRE

FR2

x, (O)-31

(O)-99

Change

Authcode Data Block

Customer number

Secure data password (see 5 for description)

Classcode number

Unrestricted

Conditionally Unrestricted

Toll Denied

Conditionally Toll Denied

Semi Restricted

Fully Restricted

Fully Restricted 1

Fully Restricted 2

Class code TGAR Network Class of Service

Toll Restricted

Xl 1 features and services

2-14 Access restrictions

LD24 Assign a Class of Service to Direct Inward System Access (DISA) numbers.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE data

CUST

o-99

Customer number

SPWD

xxxx

Secure

data

password (see 5 for description)

TGAR x, (O)-31

Station or trunk TGAR

X remove TGAR value

Note: With Xl 1 release 12 and earlier, O-15 TGAR codes are

allowed.

NCOS (O)-99 Network Class of Service

cos

Unrestricted

CUN Conditionally Unrestricted

TLD Toll Denied

CTD Conditionally Toll Denied

SR E Semi Restricted

F RE Fully Restricted

Fully Restricted 1

FR2 Fully Restricted 2

incoming calls

telephones with an FRE Class of Service for

all

customers.

REQ

TYPE

FRPT

CHG

CFN

OLFR

(NEFR)

Change

Configuration record

Allow incoming trunk calls to telephones with FRE CLS,

using call modification

Deny incoming trunk calls to FRE telephones using call

modification

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Access restrictions 2-1

LD16

Add/change the TARG code for a trunk route.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

TARG

CHG

RDB

o-99

o-511

2 3 31

Change

Route data block

Customer number

Route number

Route TARG codes (list each TGAR to be blocked from

using this route-put a space between each entry). To

remove an entry, precede with X.

Note: With Xl 1 release 12 and earlier, the range for TARG codes

is I-15.

LD19

Implement Code Restriction on trunk routes.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

CLR

DENY

CHG

CRB

o-99

xxx

DENY

<CR>

xxx xxx

Change

Code Restriction Block

Customer number

Trunk route number of COT or FX (there can be only one

Code Restriction Block for each COT or FX route)

Allow all NPA/NXX codes except those entered in response

to the prompt DENY

Deny all codes except those entered in response

to the prompt

Used when REQ = CHG

If enter the NPA/NXX codes (200-999) allowed

If enter the NPA/NXX codes (200-999) denied

1 features and services 553-3001-30

2-16 Access restrictions

Define toll access digits that are to be ignored for Code Restriction.

CHG

TYPE

RDB

CUST

o-99

ROUT

o-51

OABS

xxx

Change

Route Data Block

Customer number

Route number

Outgoing digits (O-9) to be ignored

Feature operation

Not applicable.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Application Module

The Application Module (AM), formerly known as the Meridian Link

Module, is an application processor providing an interface between a host

computer and the Meridian providing operations, administration, and

maintenance capabilities. It is housed in the Application Equipment Module

Up to two Application Modules can be put into one chassis in

a redundant configuration.

Related documents

For complete information regarding the Application Module (AM), see the

following documents:

Meridinn Link description

1- 1 10)

Application Module installation guide

Meridian Link installation

(553-3201-210)

Meridian Link guide (553-320

l-200)

Meridian Link diagnostic and maintenance

(553-3201-5

1 features and services 553-3001-305

3-2 Application Module

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release:

4-1

Application Module Link

The Application Module Link (AML) provides supervisory and control

functions for the link that allows host computers and other external

processors access to TSDN network services on the Meridian 1. Tasks

performed by the Application Module Link (AML) include link activation,

fault detection, maintenance, and traffic reporting. The Application Module

Link (AML) provides the association of telephones with one or more

with the host computer. This allows a computer to access basic telephone

features of the Meridian 1. Telemarketing, electronic mail, and other features

can take full advantage of ISDN services using the AML.

Operating parameters

Refer to the

Application Module Link description

100).

Feature interaction

Refer to the

Application Module Link description 100).

Feature packaging

Application Module Link package requires:

Command Status Link (CSL), package 77

Digit Display (DDSP), package 19

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Basic features (ACD-A), package 45

ACD Advanced features (ACD-B), package 41

Feature implementation

Refer to the

Application Module Link description

(553-3201-100).

1 features and services 553-3001-305

4-2 Application Module Link

Feature operation

Refer

the

Application Module Link description

(553-3201-100).

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

Release:

All

5-l

Attendant Administration

allows the attendant to tnodify a specific set of

features that can he assigned to telephones. The console must have an

alphanumeric display, and it must be assigned to the satne customer group as

the telephones on which the features are to be changed.

Attendant Administration is itnpletnentcd by assigning a Program key on the

strip on the attendant console. The Program key and a

four-digit password allow the attendant to enter the tnode in a

manner equivalent to into the Meridian systetn from a systetn

terminal.

When in the Program mode, the Attendant Console key/lamp strip functions

are frotn normal call

to the Attendant Administration

programming A plastic overlay is placed over the console

key/lamp strips to indicate programming functions.

inputs the information by pressing the appropriate key or by

numbers or letters on the dial pad. The alphanumeric display shows

information and feedback from the system. The

feedback includes current status of the telephone, the protnpts requesting

input. the tnessages indicating an input error.

The that may be changed by Attendant Administration are listed

below. Any that are not included in the list cannot be tnodified or

the Administration

SL- I and digital key assignments

Call Forward telephones only)

Call Forward Busy (all telephones)

Call Forward Answer (all

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

5-2 Attendant Administration

Call Pickup (all telephones)

Call Pickup Group (all telephones)

Call Waiting telephones only)

Dial Intercom Group telephones only)

Directory Number telephones only)

Permanent Hold telephones only)

Hunt Directory Number (all telephones)

Hunting (all telephones)

Last Hunt Key (SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones only)

Message Waiting (all telephones)

Ring Again telephones only)

Speed Calling telephones only)

Stored Number Redial telephones only)

Call Transfer telephones only).

For details on feature operation, refer to the

XI I

user guide.

Operating parameters

Calls cannot be initiated or received by the console while it is in the program

mode.

The attendant may only change data for the customer to which the console

belongs.

The system generates Customer Service Change (CSC) messages that

indicate changes made to individual telephones. These messages may be

output on a system terminal or stored in the history file.

Attempting to change a telephone that is busy is not allowed. A busy

telephone is defined as a telephone with any active or held calls or with any

active features such as Autodial. There are exceptions, however. A telephone

that has Call Forward All Calls or Make Set Busy activated can be modified.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Administration

5-3

During the time a telephone is undergoing feature changes by the attendant,

it is made Maintenance Busy and is therefore inoperative.

If a console remains idle in the program mode for 20 minutes, the program

mode

terminated and the console returns to Position Busy.

If an Attendant Console, maintenance telephone, or system terminal tries to

log into the system while another device is logged in, the system displays a

message identifying the logged-in device. If a password is then entered, the

is accepted, forcing out the device previously logged in. A console

forced out is returned to Position Busy and provided with an output message

the display to indicate what has occurred.

making service changes at a

system

terminal, when a Directory

Number (DN) is entered for a telephone that appears elsewhere (as

a Hunt, or Private Line DN), the associated error code (MIX, HUNT,

or is not displayed. If the DN is not valid, an error code is displayed.

The data base is automatically dumped during the midnight routine if a

transaction has been successfully completed during the previous day. If this

data dump fails, the minor alarm lamp on the console will light.

Feature interaction

the system initializes or reloads while the console is in the program

Attendant Administration is aborted and the console returns to the

Position Busy mode. Any service change since the last Prime DN prompt

(for initialize) or since the last successful data dump (for system reload)

is lost and must be input again.

Initialize

The Attendant Administration password is preserved over an

initialization and set to the value on the tape when the system is reloaded.

Attendant console

is not

necessary to have the handset/headset plugged in while in the

program mode. Plugging in the handset/headset while in the program

mode has no effect.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

5-4 Attendant Administration

Feature packaging

Attendant Administration (AA), package 54, has no feature package

dependencies.

Feature implementation

LD15

Assign an Attendant Administration access code.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ATAC

PWD2

CHG

CDB

o-99

xxxx

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

New or changed Attendant Administration access code

(maximum four digits)

X preceding the access code removes it.

This password is programmed in LDI 7 at the PWD2

prompt.

Attendant Administration key.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

KEY

NEW, CHG

ATT, 1250, 2250

o-99

lscu

xx PRG

New or change

Console type

Customer number. Prompted only when REQ = NEW

Terminal Number

Add an Attendant Administration key

Feature operation

Not applicable.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Alternative Answering

Attendant Alternative Answering (AAA) allows customers to define a timing

threshold for attendant calls. After the predefined time, the unanswered call

presented to an idle loop key on an attendant console is forwarded to a

predefined DN for alternate answering.

An unanswered call is forwarded to an idle or busy alternate DN. The call is

subject to further call modification depending on the database configuration

for the alternate DN.

When a call is presented to an idle loop key on the attendant console, the

following occurs:

The system checks the attendant for AAA eligibility by checking for the

AAA timer. The AAA time activates the AAA feature.

2When the timer expires, the unanswered call is forwarded to the

Attendant Alternative Answering DN (AAA DN) defined for an

individual attendant. Calls forwarded to the AAA DN are subject to the

individual telephone’s features, independent of the attendant. It is

possible that the DN rung may not be the AAA DN.

3 After the alternate telephone has been reached, the attendant console

releases the call.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

6-2 Attendant Alternative Answering

4 If call termination is unsuccessful at the AAA DN, an error message is

generated that explains the problem:

.If the error is because of an invalid AAA DN or tenant-to-tenant

access denied condition, the call remains on the idle loop key for the

attendant, and the AAA timer is not started again.

.For all other errors, the call remains on the attendant loop key and

AAA timer is restarted. The sequence is repeated until the call is

answered at the console, disconnected by the caller, or terminated at

the AAA-DN.

When an Automatic Wake Up (AWU) recall is presented to the AWU key on

the attendant console, the following occurs:

1 The AWU key buzzes, and the associated indicator fast flashes.

The attendant presses the AWU key to accept the recall.

The attendant presses the RLS key to release the call. An AWU recall

must be acknowledged before any other calls can be presented to the

attendant.

With AAA, the AWU call is presented to the attendant for the duration

of the AAA timer. If an AWU recall is not acknowledged before the

timer threshold, the recall is returned to the attendant queue, to be

presented later. The AWU recall will not be forwarded to the AAA DN.

If the AAA DN does not answer, call treatment is defined by the features

allowed for the originally dialed DN. If the originally dialed DN is the

attendant, call treatment is defined by the features allowed for the AAA DN.

Xl 1 features and services

Attendant Alternative Answering 6-3

The order listed below reflects the precedence when one or more call

forwarding features is equipped:

Call Forward All Calls

2 Message Center

Call Forward No Answer

.Flexible Call Forward No Answer

.Second Level Call Forward No Answer

.Call Forward by Call Type

4 Automatic Timed Recalls (slow answer)

For an unanswered call presented to a busy AAA DN, treatment is defined by

the features enabled for that customer and the AAA DN telephone.

The order listed below reflects the precedence when one or more call

forwarding features is equipped on the AAA DN:

Call Forward All Calls

2 Hunting

3 Call Waiting

4 Message Waiting (Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls only), if Message

Waiting Forward Busy (MWFB) is enabled in

5 Call Forward Busy (DID calls only)

If no call forwarding feature is defined for the busy AAA DN, the call remains

on the attendant console, and the AAA timer is restarted. When the AAA

timer expires, the call is again forwarded to the AAA DN.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

6-4 Attendant Alternative Answering

Operating parameters

Attendant Alternative Answering (AAA) is defined and applicable on a

customer basis only, not at the Console Presentation Group (CPG) level. It

only handles calls presented to the console, not calls in the attendant queue.

It is recommended that the AAA DN assigned to an attendant be within the

same CPG as the attendant.

Only 63 Attendant Consoles can be assigned per customer. Only one AAA

DN can be assigned per Attendant; thus, this feature is limited to 63

per customer, one for each attendant console.

With Night Service (NSVC) enabled and active, calls are rerouted to the

Night Service DN. Calls presented to the NSVC DN are not subject to

The AA4 DN must be a valid DN or ACD DN. If invalid, the call stays on

the console.

The AAA DN defined is not subject to pretranslation. The DN must be

the actual DN.

This feature allows more than one backup of the attendant to be available,

provided the designated alternative DN is defined as a member of a Call

Pickup group or as a Multiple Appearance DN.

Feature interaction

Attendant Overflow Position (AOP)

The AOP DN handles calls from the attendant queue if all attendant

consoles are busy or in the Position Busy mode. Calls presented to the

AOP DN are subject to AAA.

Attendant Recall (ARC)

Under ARC conditions, the initiator of the recall rings the destination

side of the console, and the third party becomes the source. The AAA

timer is applied to the source party. If the AAA timer expires, the

destination is dropped, and the source is forwarded to the AAA DN. If

the source party disconnects before the destination party, then the AAA

timer is restarted on the destination party, still buzzing the attendant

through the ARC key. The AAA timer is dropped if both parties

disconnect.

Xl features

and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Alternative Answering 6-5

Call Forward All Calls

Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over all other call forwarding

features for a particular telephone. Calls forwarded by AAA are subject

to the Call Forwarding conditions on the AAA DN.

Call Forward Busy

If Call Forward Busy is allowed for the AAA DN (and that DN is busy),

a DID call is returned to the attendant and can again be eligible for AAA

timing and operation.

Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT)

If Call Forward by Call Type is enabled on the AAA DN, then calls are

forwarded based on the Call Type of the originator.

Call Forward No Answer (CFNA)

When the AAA DN does not answer, the call can be forwarded by CFNA

to the DN defined as the CFNA DN for the originally dialed DN. If the

originally dialed DN is the attendant, then the call is forwarded to the

CFNA-DN defined for the AAA DN.

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)

The AAA timer is not applied to CAS calls routed from the remote CAS

location through the Release Link Trunk to the main CAS attendant. All

other internal or trunk calls presented to the CAS attendant at the main

location are timed by AAA as usual.

If the remote CAS attendant presses the CAS key while a call is being

presented, the presented call is subject to AAA timing and is forwarded

to the AAA DN at the remote location after the timer expires.

Do Not Disturb (DND)

A DN in the DND mode is free to originate calls but appears busy to

incoming calls. Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over DND

indication on AAA

Hunting

Calls directed to a busy AAA DN with Hunt defined are routed down the

Hunt chain as defined for the AAA DN.

Message Center

If the AAA DN is a Message Center (MWC), then a Message Center call

to the attendant and forwarded by AAA is still treated like a Message

Center call.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

6-6 Attendant Alternative Answering

Multi-Tenant

Tenant-to-tenant access must be allowed between an internal caller and

the AAA DN. If caller-to-AAA access is denied, the call remains on the

console until the call is answered or dropped.

Call Pickup

The AAA DN can be assigned to a call pickup group to allow members

of the same group to answer the call.

Feature packaging

Attendant Alternative Answering (AAA), package 174, has no feature

package dependencies.

Feature implementation

LD15

Implement the Attendant Alternate Answering feature in the customer data block.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

CDB Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

26 AAA timer in 2-second increments. Odd numbers are

rounded down.

= 0 disables the feature

LD12

Define the AAA DN for each attendant console affected.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE ATT,

Console type

lscu

Terminal Number

AADN

Attendant Alternative Answering DN

Feature operation

Not applicable.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Barge-In

7-1

Attendant Barge-In allows the attendant to establish a connection with any

trunk in the system to verify that the trunk is in working order. When Barge-In

is active, a burst of tone is sent to the connected parties every six

seconds to indicate the presence of the attendant.

Operating parameters

Barge-In can only be used for trunks with Warning Tone Allowed (WTA)

Class of Service. All parties connected to the trunk when the attendant

attempts to barge in must have WTA Class of Service.

If equipped, the Barge-in key must be assigned to key I of the console flexible

feature strip.

The system must be equipped with a conference loop.

Feature interaction

None.

Feature packaging

Attendant Barge-In is included in basic XI system software.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

7-2 Attendant Barge-In

Feature implementation

Add/change a Barge-In key on attendant consoles.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE ATT,

Console type

TN Terminal Number

KEY

1 BIN

Add a Barge-In key

Allow/deny a warning tone Class of Service for telephones.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

500 Telephone type

TN Terminal Number

(WTA), WTD (Allow), deny warning tone

-Allow/deny a warning tone Class of Service for SL-1 and digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

lscu

WTD

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317, 2616, or 3000

Terminal Number

(Allow), deny warning tone

LD14

Allow/deny warning tone Class of Service for trunks

REQ

TYPE

CHG

COT, DID, FEX,

RAN, TIE, WAT

lscu

(WTA), WTD

Change

Trunk type

Terminal Number

(Allow), deny warning tone

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Barge-in 7-3

Feature operation

To establish a connection on a trunk, follow these steps:

Select an idle loop key.

Press

Barge-In.

Dial the route access code and the trunk member number, followed by

the octothorpe

Possible results are

dial tone (trunk is idle and working)

conversation (trunk is busy and working)

modem carrier tone (long distance trunk is working)

fast busy (trunk is either disabled or has Warning Tone Denied CLS)

If you hear fast busy, check the trunk again before reporting a problem.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

7-4 Attendant Barge-In

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:

92 1231

Status: Standard

Release: All

Attendant Busy Verify

8-l

Attendant Busy Verify allows the attendant to establish a connection with any

apparently busy DN to verify that the DN is actually busy and in working

order. This feature can also be used to connect with a busy station if an

emergency situation requires call interruption by the attendant.

When Busy Verify is active, a burst of interrupted tone is sent every

six seconds to indicate the presence of the attendant. The attendant can Busy

Verify only those stations with warning tone allowed Class of Service.

Operating parameters

The system must be equipped with a conference loop.

If equipped, the Busy Verify key must be assigned to key 0 of the console

flexible feature strip.

Feature interaction

Call Forward All Calls

If the DN is call forwarded to the attendant console, the attendant will

receive a click followed by silence.

Hunting and Call Forward Busy

Hunting and Call Forward Busy do not affect Busy Verify.

Feature packaging

Attendant Busy Verify is included in basic X 11 system software.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Busy Verify

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant call selection

All calls to the attendant, with the exception of slow-answer recalls, are

automatically queued in order of arrival. The attendant can answer a call in

two ways:

Calls can be answered in the order received, regardless of call type, using

the Loop key (LPK).

A particular call type can be answered before other calls in the queue by

manually selecting the appropriate Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) key.

The first call presented to an idle console is indicated by the appropriate ICI

lamp. All subsequent calls are indicated by the Calls Waiting lamp only until

the first call is released. All appropriate ICI lamps will then light and an

attendant may select a specific incoming call type by depressing the

appropriate ICI key.

If a customer has multiple consoles, the first call in queue is presented to the

first idle console.

Operating parameters

The maximum number of ICI lamps per attendant console is 20. All consoles

associated with a customer have the same ICI assignment.

Feature interaction

None.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

1 o-2

Attendant Calls Waiting Indication

Feature interaction

None.

Feature packaging

Attendant Calls Waiting Indication is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature implementation

Define Call Waiting thresholds and indications for a customer.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

CWCL

CWTM

CWBZ

CHG

CDB

o-99

Yes, (No)

(0)-255 (0)-255

(O)-511 (O)-511

Yes, (No) Yes, (No)

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Automatically notify attendant console (M2250) when the

number of calls waiting in queue changes

Lower and upper bound of the threshold for the number of

calls waiting (default is 0)

Lower and upper bound of the threshold for the time calls

are waiting (default is 0)

The two options are

1. Enable (Disable) a buzz to the attendant when either

the CWCL or CWTM thresholds are exceeded.

2. Enable (Disable) a buzz to the attendant when the first

call enters the queue.

LD12

Add/change a Display Calls Waiting key on an attendant console.

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

ATT,

lscu

xx DCW

Change

Console type

Terminal Number

Add a Display Calls Waiting key

xx = O-9 for QCW or Ml 250 attendant console

xx = 00-l 9 for M2250 attendant console

Feature operation

Not applicable.

features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:. 92 12 31

Status: Standard

Release:

All

11-l

Attendant consoles

Attendant consoles assist in placing and extending calls into and out of the

Meridian 1 system. The operator of an attendant console is known as the

attendant. The consoles provide the attendant with many unique features that

increase the speed and ease of call processing.

This feature module provides an overview of the attendant consoles and a

description of the basic software capabilities and associated service changes.

Additional information regarding attendant-related software features may be

found in other feature modules in this document.

The following attendant consoles are available with the Meridian 1 system:

QCW 2 Basic console with an eight-digit display

QCW 3 Basic console with a display

QCW 4 Basic console with a alphanumeric display

M 1250

Console with a four-line, 40-character wide, alphanumeric liquid

crystal display

M2250 Digital console with a four-line, 40-character wide,

alphanumeric liquid crystal display

1 features and services 553-3001-305

11-2 Attendant consoles

QCW attendant consoles

The attendant consoles have a digit display at the top of the console and a dial

pad below the display. Five vertical keystrips on the console provide access

to the functions described in this section.

Vertical 1

This at the far left on the console is utilized for Trunk Group Busy

(TGB) keys. The attendant may deny stations access to a trunk route by

pressing the associated Trunk Group Busy key. Additionally, the lamps

associated with Trunk Group Busy keys provide the following visual

indication of the status of the trunks within the route.

Dark Some of the trunks in the route are idle.

Flashing

All of the trunks in the route are busy.

Steadily lit The attendant has taken control of the route.

The basic attendant console has 10 Trunk Group Busy keys. If an add-on

module is installed, there are 16 Trunk Group Busy keys.

Vertical 2

This is utilized for Incoming Call Indicator keys. The Incoming Call

Indicators identify the type of calls in the queue and the status of each

particular call type. Three lamp states are associated with each Incoming Call

Indicator key:

Dark No calls of this type are waiting.

Steadily lit One call of this type is waiting in queue.

Flashing Two or more calls of this type are queued, or one call has

been waiting longer than 20 seconds.

To select a specific type of incoming call, the Incoming Call Indicator key

associated with a steadily lit or flashing LED is pressed. The call is removed

from the queue and presented to an idle loop key on the attendant console.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant consoles

11-3

The basic attendant console has 10 Incoming Call Indicator keys. If an add-on

module is equipped, the console may have 20 Incoming Call Indicator keys.

An Incoming Call Indicator key may be assigned to one or more of the call

types listed in Table 11-1.

Table 1 l-l

Incoming Call Indicator key assignments

00-l 9

Mnemonic

CFB

CFN

DFO

DLO

INT

LCT

LDO

LD2

LD3

MWC

RLL

Rxxx

Meaning

Station Category Number (x = l-7)

Call Forward Busy

Call Forward No Answer

Dial 0 fully restricted

Dial 0

Inter-attendant call

Intercept

Lockout

Listed DN 0

Listed DN 1

Listed DN 2

Listed DN 3

Attendant Message Center

Recall

Route number

Vertical 3

This includes the following operating keys:

Release Allows the attendant to release a call from the console. When the

release lamp is lit, it indicates that no incoming calls are being presented to

the console.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

11-4 Attendant consoles

Loop key/lamps

Allows the

attendant

to answer and originate calls from the

console. The first call in the attendant queue is automatically presented to an

idle loop key. Subsequent calls are queued and to a loop key when

the console becomes idle.

Position Busy

Puts the console into the Position Busy mode. All incoming

calls are then redirected to another console in a multiple-console installation

or to a night number in a single console installation.

Night Service

Permits incoming calls to be routed to preselected stations

when all attendant consoles are in the Night mode.

Signal Remote

Provisioned if Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) is in use.

Three lamp indicators, positioned on the upper right hand side of the keystrip,

provide the following information:

Two Alarm indicators

When steadily lit, the minor alarm lamp

indicates the system has detected a malfunction that does not affect

normal call processing. When the major alarm lamp is steadily lit, the

system has detected a malfunction that does not permit normal call

processing.

Waiting indicator

The Call Waiting lamp indicates the number of

calls in the attendant queue and the length of time they have been waiting

to be answered. The lamp changes from steadily lit to flashing when

waiting calls exceed a certain number, or when a call has been waiting

longer than a specified time. The number of waiting calls are displayed

by pressing the Display Calls Waiting key, if assigned.

Vertical 4

This provides the following fixed feature keys:

Hold

Allows the attendant to hold a call at the console.

Conference

Permits the attendant to set up a conference of up to five

conferees plus the attendant.

Release Destination

Allows the attendant to release the called party from a

call held at the console, while holding the calling party.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant consoles

11-5

Release Source

Allows the attendant to release the calling party from a call

held at the console, while holding the called party.

Signal Source and Destination

Allows the attendant to recall either party to

a call held on the console.

Exclude Destination

Excludes the called party from an established call held

at the console, allowing the attendant to speak privately with the calling party.

Exclude Source

Excludes the calling party from an established call held at

the console, allowing the attendant to speak privately with the called party.

Volume Control

Allows the attendant to change the volume of alerting

signals. Each depression of the key changes the volume of the signal by one

step in an eight step range.

Vertical 5

The optional features listed in Table 11-2 can be defined on this key strip.

Table 11-2

Attendant console optional feature key assignments (Part 1 of 2)

Mnemonic

BVR

BIN

00-09 ADL

02-09

AWU

00-09

CHG

00-09

CPN

00-09

DCW

00-09

DDL

00-09

DDT

00-09

DPD

00-09

DPS

Meaning

Busy Verify

Barge-In

Automatic Wake Up

Charge Account

Calling Party Number

Display Calls Waiting

Do-Not-Disturb, Individual

Display Date

Display Destination

Display Source

features and services 553-3001-305

11-6

Attendant consoles

Table 11-2

Attendant console optional feature key assignments (Part 2 of 2)

Mnemonic

00-09

DTM

02-09

EES

00-09

GND O-99

00-09 MCK

00-09

MDT

00-09 MIK

00-09 MTM

00-09

PAG

00-09

PRG

00-09

PRK

00-09

RDL

00-09

RTC

00-09 xxxx

00-09 ssc xxxx

00-09

TRC

Meaning

Display Time

End-to-End Signaling

Group Do-Not-Disturb

Message cancellation

Display/Change Date

Message indication

Display/Change Time

Paging = route access code)

Attendant Administration

Call Park

Stored Number Redial

Routing Control

Speed Call Controller

(xxxx = list number)

System Speed Call Controller

(xxxx = list number)

Malicious Call Trace

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant

consoles 11-7

Ml250 and M2250 attendant consoles

The Ml250 attendant console is available on X11 release 12 and later

software. The M2250 attendant console is available on X11 release and

later software. Both consoles have a four line LCD alphanumeric display,

each line 40 characters wide, which displays the following information:

Line 1

Displays the time and date

Line 2 Displays call source information

Line 3 Displays call destination information

Line 4

Displays console status information

Directly below the display screen is a horizontal row of keys that provide the

Position Busy, Night Service, Signal Source, and Signal Destination

functions.

The Ml250 and M2250 consoles have five vertical keystrips that provide the

functions described for the QCW consoles. In addition, the consoles have a

Shift key on the fixed feature key strip that provides access to an Options

menu. This menu allows the setting of the display screen contrast, buzz tone,

language, time and date format, and calls waiting options. Additional

information on the Options menu can be found in the Ml250 Attendant

Console User Guide and the M2250 Console User Guide.

The Shift key also allows Ml250 consoles to have 20 Incoming Call Indicator

keys in the regular mode and 16 Trunk Group Busy keys in the shift mode.

The M2250 console can have 20 Incoming Call Indicator keys in the regular

mode, and 20 Trunk Group Busy keys and an additional ten flexible feature

keys in the shift mode. Add-on modules are not required on the Ml250 and

M2250 consoles to provide the additional key functions.

Attendant Call Party Name Display (CPND) and the Enhanced Busy Lamp

Field/Console Graphics Module capabilities may be equipped with the

Ml250 and M2250 consoles. Please refer to the feature modules in this

document for a complete description of these capabilities.

Xl 1 features and services

11-8 Attendant consoles

For additional information on attendant consoles and associated hardware,

refer to the following Northern Telecom Publications:

Attendant consoles and add-on

modules

(553-2001-115)

and Attendant Consoles descriptim

(553-2201-117)

Telephone and attendant console installation (553-3001-215)

Fault clearing (553-3001-510)

Operating parameters

Refer to the preceding Northern Telecom Publications.

Feature interaction

Refer to the Northern Telecom Publications.

Feature packaging

QCW and Ml250 attendant console capabilities are included in basic X11

system software.

Call Party Name Display (CPND), package 95, includes Attendant CPND

and requires Digit Display (DDSP), package 19.

M2250 attendant console package 140, requires Digital Telephones

(DSET), package 88.

features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant consoles

11-9

Feature implementation

console related prompts and responses (Part 1 of 3).

REQ CHG

TYPE

CDB

CUST

o-99

LDNO

LDAO xx xx . . . . ALL

xxx...x

xx xx . . . . ALL

LDN2

xxx...x

LDA2 xx xx . . . . ALL

LDN3

xxx...x

xx xx . . . . ALL

xxx...x

hh mm

NIT2

xxx...x

TIM2

hh mm

xxx...x

TIM3

hh mm

NIT4

xxx...x

TIM4

hh mm

ATDN

(0) xxx...x

NCOS (O)-99

C A S Yes, (No)

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Listed Directory Number 0

Attendant Consoles associated with LDNO (see Note)

Listed Directory Number 1

Attendant Consoles associated with (see Note)

Listed Directory Number 2

Attendant Consoles associated with (see Note)

Listed Directory Number 3

Attendant Consoles associated with LDN3 (see Note)

First Night Service DN

Hour and minute of first Night Service DN

Second Night Service DN

Hour and minute for second Night Service DN

Third Night Service DN

Hour and minute for third Night Service DN

Fourth Night Service DN

Hour and minute for fourth Night Service DN

Attendant DN

Attendant Network Class of Service for all consoles

Change Centralized Attendant Service options

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant consoles

Attendant console related prompts and responses (Part 2 of 3).

OPT

ANLD

LFTN

LFFD

AATT

ICI

ITG, (XTG)

(LOD)

IDP, (XDP)

ILF, (XLF)

SYA, (SYD)

xxx x

xxx...x

lscu

xxxx

xxxx yyyy

2222

YYY

AQTT l-(30)-255

AODN

xxxx...x

10 or 20 incoming Call Indicators

Trunk Group Busy keys equipped/not equipped

Allow (Deny) Lockout

Digit Display equipped/not equipped

Lamp Field Array equipped/not equipped

Allow (Deny) Secrecy

Attendant Billing number

listed DN

TN of first Lamp Field Array

TN of second Lamp Field Array

First DN of Lamp Field Array

attendant identifier

Recall timers

xxxx = slow answer (O-378)

yyyy = Camp-on (o-510)

= Call Waiting (O-51 0)

Attendant Alternative Answering timer

Incoming Call Indicator key assignment

xx = key number

yyy = mnemonic (see Table

Note: Multiple responses can be entered for the same key.

To remove an entry, enter xx NUL, then reenter the desired

responses.

To add an entry, enter the desired response. It will be added to any

already existing response.

Attendant queue timing threshold in seconds

Attendant overflow DN

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant consoles

II-11

Attendant console related prompts and responses (Part 3 of 3).

ATAC

xxxx

Attendant Administration access code

Yes, (No) Call Waiting queue update

(Q-255, (0)-255

Call Waiting lower and upper thresholds for number of calls

in queue

CWTM (O)-511 Call Waiting lower and upper thresholds for time in queue

CWBZ Yes, (No) Buzz when Call Waiting thresholds are exceeded

Yes, (No) Buzz when first call enters queue

MATT

Yes, (No) Attendant consoles used as Message Center

O-63

Attendant number for supervisor

AWU Yes, (No), X Enable Automatic Wake Up (X erases AWU information)

ATRC Yes, (No) Attendant Recall after failed AWU attempts

Note: Enter one or more attendant numbers (l-63). Enter ALL to enable this listed DN on all attendants.

Precede the attendant number with X to remove.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

11-12

Attendant consoles

LD12

-Add an attendant console.

REQ ADD Add a console

TYPE

ATT Attendant console

1250 250 console

2250

M2250 console

P W R Power TN

TN TN of attendant console

CDEN

Card density

SETN Second TN (must be on same loop as primary TN of

attendant console)

ANUM

1-63 Attendant number (l-63)

DLEN

Digit display length (default 8)

Not prompted if TYPE = 1250 or 2250

ssu

O-4095 System Speed Call user list number

ICDA, (ICDD) Allow (Deny) internal call detail

CPND CNDA, (CNDD) Allow (Deny) Call Party Name Display

Prompted if TYPE is 1250 or 2250

DNDA, (DNDD) Allow (Deny) dialed name display

EBLF BLFA, (BLFD) Allow (Deny) enhanced busy lamp field

Prompted if TYPE is 1250 or 2250

AADN xxx...x

Attendant Alternative Answering DN

KEY

xx aaa

Key number and mnemonic for feature assignments

(see Table 11-2)

Feature operation

Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Incoming Call Indicators

Attendant consoles can be equipped with up to 20 Incoming Call Indication

(ICI) key/lamp pairs to identify the type of calls being presented and the call

status for each particular call type. The customer can specify which incoming

call types are to be assigned a separate ICI key. Possible call types include,

but are not limited to, the following:

Trunk calls (such as FX, WATS, and tie)

Listed Directory Number (LDN) calls

Dial zero calls

Fully restricted dial zero calls

Automatic Timed Reminder recalls

Attendant Interpositional calls

Attendant Intercept calls

Call Forward Busy calls

Call Forward No Answer calls

Three lamp states are associated with each Incoming Call Indicator key:

Dark There are no calls of this type waiting.

Steadily lit One call of this type is waiting in queue.

Flashing Two or more calls of this type are queued, or one call has

been waiting longer than 20 seconds.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

12-2 Attendant Incoming Call Indicators

Operating parameters

The ICI feature applies to attendant consoles only.

The number of ICI keys to be assigned (10 or 20) is defined in the Customer

Data block. The default is ten.

No more than 20 ICI key/lamp pairs can be assigned to an attendant console.

The assignment of call types to ICI key/lamp pairs is flexible. All attendant

consoles in the customer group will have the same ICI key assignments.

Feature interaction

Attendant

The ICI feature is used with the Attendant Call Selection and Calls

Waiting features to recognize, answer and process incoming calls.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic system software.

features and services

Feature implementation

Attendant Incoming Call Indicators

12-3

Assign ICI keys for attendant consoles.

CHG Change

TYPE

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

OPT

or 20 incoming Call Indicators

ICI O-1 9 Station category number

x = category number through 7

O-l 9 CFB Call Forward Busy

O-l 9 CFN Call Forward No Answer

O-1 9 DFO Dial 0 fully restricted

O-l 9 DLO Dial 0 (attendant)

O-l 9

Inter-attendant call

O-l 9 INT

Call intercept

O-l 9 LCT Line Lockout Intercept

O-l 9 LDO-3 Listed Directory Number (0 through 3)

O-l 9 MWC

Attendant message center

O-1 9 RLL Recall

o-1 9 xxx

Route number

Feature operation

Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

12-4

Attendant Incoming Call Indicators

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Interpositional Transfer

Attendant Interpositional Transfer enables an attendant to call or transfer a

call to another attendant in a multiple-console group, even when the

destination attendant console is busy.

When transferring a call to another attendant whose console is idle, the

interpositional call is presented immediately. If the called attendant is busy,

the calling attendant hears a busy tone. The attendant then presses the Release

key and the transferred call will be the next call presented to the called

attendant console.

Operating parameters

In systems using software prior to X 11 release 8, a call cannot be transferred

if the called attendant console is in Position Busy, has activated Night

Service, or if network blocking occurs. In these cases, the calling attendant

receives a busy tone. With software release 8 and later, the call can be

transferred to an attendant console in the Position Busy state; however, the

called console does not receive any audible signal. A Call Waiting indication

appears on the console display.

Feature interaction

None.

Feature packaging

Attendant Interpositional Transfer is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

features and services 553-3001-305

13-2 Attendant Interpositional Transfer

Feature implementation

an Interpositional Call Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) key on attendant

consoles.

CHG

TYPE

CUST

o-99

ICI

O-l 9

Feature operation

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Add an Interattendant Call ICI to all consoles

To transfer a call to a busy attendant (attendant console), follow these steps:

The attendant console you have dialed is busy. Press

RLS.

Your call will

be the next call presented to the busy attendant.

To transfer a call to an attendant console in Position Busy mode, follow these

steps:

Dial the Interpositional access code (0) and the desired attendant position

number. You receive a busy tone. Press

RLS.

To answer a call transferred to an attendant console in Position Busy mode,

follow these steps:

The Call Waiting indicator lights; there are no audible tones. Press the

Position Busy

key to take the console out of Position Busy mode.

The call is presented to the loop key and you receive an audible tone.

Press the

Loop

key.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Lockout

Attendant Lockout restricts the attendant from entering an established

connection completed through and held on the console. Attendant Lockout

does not come into effect until the call has been answered.

The attendant can reenter the call if the source party is a station telephone.

Attendant Lockout occurs only if the source party is an external number

(trunk) AND the destination party is a telephone.

Operating parameters

Busy Verify and Barge-In allow the attendant to override the Attendant

Lockout feature.

Feature interaction

Attendant Recall

If one of the stations activates Attendant Recall, the attendant is allowed

to reenter the connection.

Feature packaging

Attendant Lockout is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

1 features and services

14-2 Attendant Lockout

Feature implementation

Allow/deny Lockout for attendant consoles.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

C DB Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

OPT

(LOD)

Allow (Deny) attendant lockout

Feature operation

Not applicable.

features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:.

921231

Status: Standard

1 Release: All

Attendant Overflow Position

Attendant Overflow Position (AOP) allows certain types of calls to be

automatically rerouted to a specified idle Directory Number (AOP DN) when

calls waiting to be answered have exceeded a defined threshold, or an

attendant is in the Position Busy state, but the system is not in Night Service.

When a call that can be rerouted has been waiting longer than the

customer-defined Attendant Queue Timing Threshold (O-255 seconds), it is

rerouted to the AOP DN. Calls that can be rerouted to the AOP DN are trunk

calls, internal calls and Call Forward Busy, or Call Forward No Answer calls

directed to the attendant.

Attendant calls that cannot be rerouted are transfer calls, intercept calls,

parked call recalls, automatic or manual recalls, and attendant interposition

calls. These calls will not be answered until an attendant becomes available.

When the last attendant console is put into Position Busy or disabled, the

system does not go into Night Service if an AOP DN is available. In this case,

calls that can be rerouted will be forwarded to the AOP DN. Ineligible calls

remain unanswered until the system is put in Night Service or one of the

consoles deactivates Position Busy.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

15-2 Attendant Position

Operating parameters

An AOP DN can be a single-appearance, multiple-appearance single-call, or

multiple-appearance multiple-call DN. If it is a Multiple Appearance DN, an

SL-1 or digital telephone can busy out the AOP DN for all appearances.

A telephone can have an AOP DN. It does not have the ability to

busy out the AOP DN and continue to receive calls. If it is a requirement that

the telephone have an AOP DN, the AOP DN must also appear on

an SL-1 or digital telephone to create a mix of telephones, which negates

privacy.

In order to properly identify and greet attendant overflow calls, it is best to

have the AOP DN appear on an SL-1 or digital telephone’s secondary DN.

SL-1 or Meridian digital telephones specified as Attendant Overflow

Positions can prevent calls from being rerouted by the Attendant Overflow

feature. To prevent attendant overflow calls, press the Attendant Overflow

Position Busy (AOP Busy) key/lamp pair on the telephone. Activating this

key will busy out all appearances of the AOP for either Single Call Ringing

or Multiple Call Ringing arrangements. Overflow calls will remain in the

attendant queue. Normal incoming calls to the AOP telephone will not be

affected.

The following requirements apply to the activation/deactivation of the AOP

Busy key:

A telephone with an AOP Busy key must have an appearance of the AOP

DN in order for the key to work.

Any AOP DN that has an AOP Busy key can activate or deactivate the

AOP feature. If the AOP Busy key is activated at one appearance of the

AOP DN, attendant calls are not rerouted to any appearance of the AOP

DN.

Activation or deactivation of the AOP Busy key does not affect any call

already rerouted to the AOP DN.

If all consoles are in Position Busy and the system is not in Night Service

when an AOP Busy key is activated, the system goes into Night Service.

If the system is in Night Service when the AOP Busy key is deactivated,

the system remains in Night Service.

features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Overflow Position

15-3

Activation or deactivation of the AOP Busy key does not affect the

Position Busy status of the attendant console. If all attendant consoles are

in Position Busy and the AOP Busy key is activated; the system goes into

Night Service.

The status of the AOP Busy key remains unchanged through a system

initialization but is deactivated if a system reload occurs.

The AOP feature package is not allowed on systems equipped with

Centralized Attendant Service-Main (CASM) or Centralized Attendant

Service-Remote (CASR) packages.

Each customer may have only one AOP DN. The AOP DN cannot be a

private line DN, a trunk DN, or a SPRE code.

There are no special ringing cadences or lamp operations to indicate that an

incoming call to the AOP DN is an Attendant Overflow Position call. It is

recommended that the AOP DN be used only for Attendant Overflow

Position calls enabling calls to be answered appropriately.

If the AOP DN is busy, calls remain in the attendant queue and are not

rerouted through the Attendant Overflow Position feature until the DN is free

to receive the next call.

Calls will not be rerouted to the Attendant Overflow Position DN when

Calls are on an ISDN or ESN network.

All appearances of the AOP DN are busy.

The AOP DN is in the Call Forward All Calls mode.

The call is an interposition call from an attendant.

The call has been redirected to the attendant by the Call Transfer or

Attendant Recall features.

The call is an intercept call to the attendants.

The system is in the Power Fail Transfer modes.

All appearances of the AOP DN have the Make Set Busy feature

activated.

Any appearance of the AOP DN has activated Attendant Overflow

Position Busy (AOP Busy).

1 features and services 553-3001-305

15-4 Attendant Overflow Position

A telephone appearance of the AOP DN goes idle and a Call

Waiting call is queued for the telephone. The Call Waiting call rings the

telephone and AOP calls are not rerouted to the telephone.

The AOP DN goes idle with a Camp-On call queued for the telephone.

The Camp-On call rings the telephone and AOP calls are not rerouted to

the telephone.

The rerouting of the call violates the access restrictions or Class of

Service restrictions on the AOP DN telephone. For example, if the AOP

DN is FR2, an external Public Exchange network call will not be

rerouted to the AOP DN because it is prohibited by the telephone access

restrictions.

The system is in Night Service.

Feature interaction

Attendant

The calls waiting indicator on the attendant console is updated when a

call is rerouted to the AOP DN.

Attendant Overflow Position Busy

If the telephone with AOP DN has an Attendant Overflow Position Busy

(AOP Busy) key activated, calls will not overflow to any appearance of

the AOP DN.

Attendant Recall

An Attendant Overflow Position call answered at an AOP DN may be

recalled to the attendant using the Attendant Recall capability (ARC

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

With X11 release 16 and later externally marked trunks will overflow to

an ACD DN. X11 release 15 and earlier does

support ACD

defined as attendant overflow.

Call Forward All Calls

If the telephone assigned an Attendant Overflow DN has activated the

Call Forward All Calls feature, overflow calls are not rerouted to the

telephone. If a telephone is forwarded, AOP is cancelled.

features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Overflow Position 15-5

Call Forward No Answer

A call rerouted through Attendant Overflow Position will Call Forward

to the forwarding DN only if it is the Prime DN or a single appearance

DN on that telephone.

Call Pickup

An Attendant Overflow Position Call presented to the AOP DN can be

picked up by any station belonging to the same Call Pickup Group.

Conference

An Attendant Overflow Position call answered on an AOP DN may be

with another DN.

Line Lockout

If a telephone with an AOP DN is in Line Lockout, it still receives AOP

calls.

Make Set Busy

If a telephone that is the only idle AOP DN has MSB activated, calls will

not overflow.

If the AOP DN is a multiple appearance DN, the MSB key should be

added to all telephones with an AOP DN.

If MSB is activated in a Multiple Call Ringing arrangement, the

telephone appears busy. All other appearances of the AOP DN will still

receive calls. This allows the user to leave the telephone and prevent

callers from and receiving with no answer.

If the AOP DN is a Multiple Appearance, Single Call arrangement and

MSB is activated, the AOP DN of that telephone will flash but the

telephone will not ring (the call can still be answered from that

appearance).

Multiple Appearance DN

A multiple appearance, multiple call AOP DN allows as many overflow

calls to be in progress as there are appearances of the DN. A multiple

appearance, single call AOP DN allows only one overflow call at a time.

Night Service

A call rerouted through the Attendant Overflow Position feature is not

redirected to the Night DN if the system is subsequently put into Night

Service. When all attendant consoles are in Position Busy the system will

not go into Night Service until the AOP Busy key is activated.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Overflow Position

Note:

Deactivating the AOP Busy key after the system has been placed

in Night Service does not affect the Night Service feature.

Traffic Measurement

Traffic measurements are provided for the Attendant Overflow feature in

Traffic Report A count of the number of attendant calls

rerouted through the feature is printed.

Automatic Timed Recall

After an attendant call has been rerouted using the AOP feature, there is

no automatic timed recall to the attendant or any other DN.

Ring Again

If Ring Again is activated against the AOP DN, notification is given to

the originator when the telephone becomes idle. An AOP call, however,

takes precedence over Ring Again notification on the AOP DN when the

AOP DN becomes free.

Feature packaging

Attendant Overflow Position (AOP), package 56, has no feature package

dependencies. Attendant Overflow Position and Centralized Attendant

Service are, however, mutually exclusive.

Feature implementation

an Attendant Overflow Position DN and queue threshold timing.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

CDB Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

O-(30)-255

Attendant queue timing threshold (AQTT)

AODN

xxx...x

DN where calls are to be overflowed when they have been

in queue the time specified for AQTT

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Over-flow Position 15-7

-Add/change an AOP DN and AOP Busy key.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

Change

Telephone type

KEY

aaaa =

2317,

lscu

Terminal Number

Attendant Overflow Position DN

xx = key number

= DN

xx OVB

Attendant Overflow Position Busy key

Add/change an Attendant Overflow Position DN on a telephone.

KEY

REQ

TYPE

CHG

500

lscu

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Attendant Overflow Position DN

features and services 553-3001-305

15-8 Attendant Overflow Position

Feature operation

Attendant Overflow Position calls will be rerouted to all appearances of the

AOP DN as long as the following conditions are met:

The system is not in Night Service.

The Attendant Overflow Position Busy key (any AOP DN appearance)

is not activated.

At least one appearance of the AOP DN is on a telephone that does not

have Make Set Busy activated.

To prevent attendant overflow calls from being rerouted to the AOP DN, do

any of the following:

Activate the Attendant Overflow Position Busy key.

Activate the Make Set Busy key on all telephones with an appearance of

the AOP DN.

Place the system in Night Service.

To prevent attendant overflow calls from being rerouted to a single telephone

with an appearance of the AOP DN (but not others):

Activate Make Set Busy, OR

Activate Call Forward All Calls telephone)

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

16-1

Attendant Position Busy

If multiple consoles are defined for a customer, an attendant can remove a

console from service by pressing the Position Busy key. Incoming calls are

then directed to other consoles in the customer group.

Operating parameters

Position Busy applies to attendant consoles only.

Feature interaction

Night Service

When the last console operator activates the Position Busy key or the

Night key, Night Service is put into effect. Incoming calls receive the

customer-specified night treatment.

Attendant Administration

If a console in the Attendant Administration mode is idle for more than

20 minutes, it automatically reverts to Position Busy. If the Meridian

SL-1 system is initialized or reloaded while the console is in Attendant

Administration mode, Attendant Administration is aborted and the

console is placed in Position Busy.

Supervisory Console

Activation of the Position Busy key on a Supervisory console puts the

console in the supervisory mode.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

Feature implementation

Not applicable.

features and services

16-2 Attendant Position Busy

Feature operation

Not applicable.

features and services 553-3001-305

17-l

Attendant Recall

Attendant Recall allows a user to call the attendant directly during an

established call by pressing a single key. A three-way connection is

established among the user, the attendant, and the third party.

To activate this feature, a separate Attendant Recall key/lamp pair must be

equipped on SL- 1 and Meridian digital telephones. A must be

programmed on the M3000 Touchphone for this feature.

On single-line telephones, a user can recall the attendant during an

established call by flashing the switchhook. Attendant Recall is automatic if

a Transfer Denied class of service (XFD) is specified for the telephone. If a

Transfer Allowed class of service (XFA) is specified, the user hears a special

dial tone following the switchhook flash, and then dials zero (0) to recall the

attendant. After a switchhook flash has been used to recall the attendant, it is

not possible to return to a two-party connection before the attendant answers.

Operating parameters

In order for the Overflow Position Busy (OVB) key to work, the telephone

must have an AOP DN configured.

Feature interaction

Attendant

After the attendant and the two parties have been connected, the

attendant can use the Attendant Splitting feature to communicate

separately with either party.

Feature packaging

Attendant Recall is included in basic 1 system software.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

17-2 Attendant Recall

Feature implementation

LD15 Add/change a Recall Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) key on attendant consoles.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ICI

CHG

CDB

o-99

xx RLL

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Add a Recall ICI to all consoles

Implement Attendant Recall for telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CLS

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

500

lscu

XFA, (XFD)

CHG

aaaa

lscu

xx ARC

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) call transfer which allows automatic Attendant

Recall

an Attendant Recall key for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Add an Attendant Recall key (M3000 must use key 33)

xx = key number

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Recall

17-3

Feature operation

contact

an attendant during a call (SL-1 or digital telephone), follow these

steps:

Press

Att Recall.

2 Stay on the line until the attendant answers.

3 When you hang up, the other party remains connected to the attendant.

To contact an attendant during a call telephone with Transfer

Allowed class of service), follow these steps:

Flash the switchhook (you hear a special dial tone).

2 Dial zero (0).

When you hang up, the other party remains connected to the attendant.

To contact an attendant during a call telephone with Transfer

Denied class of service), follow these steps:

Flash the switchhook (the attendant is automatically dialed).

When you hang up, the other party remains connected to the attendant.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

17-4 Attendant Recall

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued: 92 1231

Status: Standard

1 Release: All

Attendant Secrecy

18-1

Attendant Secrecy automatically prevents a voice connection between the

source and destination parties of a call being extended by an attendant, until

the attendant connects the two parties. This allows the attendant to converse

privately with the destination party before completing the connection.

Attendant Secrecy is allowed or denied on a customer basis.

Operating parameters

Attendant Secrecy is available on attendant consoles only.

Attendant Secrecy operates on trunk calls only.

Feature interaction

Attendant Recall

Attendant Secrecy does not apply on an attendant recall or when the

attendant re-enters a call held on a Loop key. The Exclude Source and

Destination keys are used in these cases.

Feature packaging

Attendant Secrecy is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

18-2

Attendant Secrecy

Feature implementation

Allow/deny Attendant Secrecy for a customer.

Feature operation

REQ

TYPE

CUST

OPT

CHG

CDB

o-99

SYA, (SYD)

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Allow (Deny) Attendant Secrecy

Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Splitting

Attendant Splitting allows the attendant to talk privately to the source or

destination side of an existing connection on the console. The Exclude Source

(EXCL SRC) key allows the attendant to speak privately with the destination

(called) party. The Exclude Destination (EXCL DEST) key allows the

attendant to speak privately with the source (calling) party.

Operating parameters

This feature is active only while the attendant is involved in the call.

Attendant Splitting applies to attendant consoles only.

Feature interaction

None.

Feature packaging

Attendant Splitting is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

Feature implementation

Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

19-2

Attendant Splitting

Feature operation

To speak privately to the source party:

Press EXCL DEST.

2 To connect yourself, the caller, and the called party, press the

lpk

key.

3 To end your connection in the call, press RLS.

To speak privately to the destination party:

Press EXCL SCR

To connect yourself, the caller, and the called party, press the

Ipk

key.

3 To end your connection in the call, press RLS.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Supervisory Console

The Supervisory Console feature allows one attendant console in a customer

group to function in a supervisory capacity when put into the Position Busy

state. The elements of the Supervisory Console feature allow any of the

following functions.

Attendant Status Display

The supervisor, by monitoring the attendant status display, can determine

how many attendant positions are in service and able to receive calls.

QCW-type consoles

If 1 to 16 attendants are assigned within a customer

group, the supervisory console can be equipped with either a or

20-key add-on module. The or add-on module mounted on the

right side of the supervisory console provides a visual indication to the

supervisor of which attendant consoles are in service. One key/lamp pair on

the supervisory console add-on module is assigned for each attendant in the

customer group including the supervisory attendant. When the supervisory

console is operating as a normal attendant the add-on module key functions

are changed to Trunk Group Busy, if ICI 2 is defined in customer data.

Ml250 console

If 1 to 16 attendants are assigned within a customer group,

the supervisory console can monitor their status using Trunk Group Busy

keys. No add-on module is necessary.

console

If 1 to 20 attendants are assigned within a customer group,

the supervisory console can monitor their status using Trunk Group Busy

keys. No add-on module is necessary.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

20-2 Attendant Supervisory Console

When an indicator on the module associated with a particular attendant is on,

the attendant is available to service calls. If the indicator is off, the attendant

position is in a Position Busy state. Attendant status indicators are only

operable when the supervisory console is in a supervisory mode (Position

Busy key operated). When the supervisory attendant is in Position Busy, the

LED associated with the supervisor fast flashes at 120 ipm.

Status using Lamp Field Array

QCW console

A supervisory console can have up to 49 status indicators. The

QMT3 Lamp Field Array (LFA) is used for this function because the Trunk

Group Busy keys are limited to 16. The supervisory attendant may use the 16

TGB keys or the LFA, depending on the number of attendants or the

preference of the customer.

The LFA associated with the supervisory console displays the attendant status

on lamps 101 to 149. The lamp is dark when the attendant is in Position Busy

and lit when the attendant is available. A steadily lit lamp in fields 51 to 81

identifies the active supervisory console. The letter S is displayed using lamps

0 to 42 to indicate that this LFA is in the supervisory mode. The LFA displays

attendant status whether the console is in Supervisory mode or Attendant

mode.

Ml250 and M2250 consoles

A supervisory console can have up to 49 status

indicators when used in the Standard Busy Lamp Field mode. When using

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field mode, a supervisory console can display the

status of all attendant consoles in the customer group. Figure 20-l shows an

example of Supervisory monitoring in Enhanced Busy Lamp Field mode on

the Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Supervisory Console

20-3

Figure

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field Supervisory mode

SUPERVISORY MODE

STATUS

23456789

n n n n mm n n n

n n n n

n n n

n n n n n n n n n

n n n n

n n n

n n n n n n n n n

= busy or unavailable console

active or available console

553-5107

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

20-4 Attendant Supervisory Console

Visual indication of calls in queue

An attendant call queue holds incoming calls to the SL-1 system that cannot

be immediately answered by attendants. The supervisory console can monitor

the call queue for specific types of incoming calls.

A maximum of 20 (ICI) key/lamp pairs may be assigned on an attendant

console. Each ICI is assigned to handle a specific type of call (such as station,

tie, or dial 0) to the attendant. When a console is in the supervisory mode, the

state of the lamp associated with each ICI provides a visual indication of the

number of calls in the attendant queue for each ICI type. Each supervisory

console ICI lamp state (dark, flash at 60 ipm, fast flash at 120 ipm, steadily

ON) provides the supervisor with a visual indication of the number of calls in

the queue for each call type. The ranges (calls in queue) are identified by one

of three customer-specified thresholds that are set in service change

programs.

Attendant Service Observation

This feature allows the supervisory attendant to monitor (listen only) calls in

progress on other attendant loops without being heard. Service Observation

requires the assignment of one key/lamp pair on

the

supervisory console

flexible key strip. The key is assigned as Busy Verify through service-change

programs. When the console is in Supervisory mode, the key function is

service observation; when the console is operating as a normal attendant the

key function is Busy Verify.

The observed attendant and the connected party or parties are not aware that

their conversation is being monitored. The supervisor can release the

connection by pressing the Release key. When the attendant is in a Service

Observe mode, only the Release key is allowed as a valid input.

Xl 1 features and services

Attendant Supervisory Console

20-5

Supervisory assistance

An attendant can consult with, or transfer calls to, the supervisor or another

attendant using the Interposition call feature. Interposition calls to the

supervisor are allowed regardless of the mode of operation (Supervisory or

Attendant). The supervisor can use the Interposition call feature to contact

any attendant, except those in Position Busy. When the supervisor is

conferring with an attendant, subsequent calls to the supervisor receive a busy

indication.

If an attendant calls the supervisor who at the time is not in supervisory mode

and is handling a call, the supervisory attendant interposition ICI lamp flashes

at 60 ipm. As soon as the supervisor is idle, the calling attendant is connected

to an idle loop on the supervisory console.

Interposition calls can be made from any attendant in the customer group to

any other attendant within the customer group. Only one interposition call can

be terminated on a console at a given time.

Supervisor serving as attendant

When the supervisor decides to act as an attendant, the supervisory console is

removed from Position Busy. The system presents calls to the supervisory

console as if it were a normal attendant console. The supervisory console

must be idle to change states from attendant to supervisor or supervisor to

attendant.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

20-6 Attendant Supervisory Console

Operating parameters

The supervisory console and all attendant consoles (except M2250 attendant

consoles) in the customer group must be assigned to QPC297 Attendant

Console Monitor circuit packs. Their prime TN must be assigned to unit 0 and

the secondary TN must be assigned to unit 1. Units 2 and 3 can be used for

power, otherwise they must be left unassigned.

Note: M2250 digital attendant consoles must be minimum vintage of

AD and have the Attendant Supervisory Module (ASM) installed to

allow supervision.

The supervisory console must be equipped with one of the following if it is a

QCW-type console:

type 10 key/lamp expansion module (can display status of

attendants l-15)

QMT2 type 20 key/lamp expansion module (can display status of

attendants l-15)

QMT3 type Lamp Field Array module (can display status of attendants

149)

The supervisory console must have a Digit Display (DDS).

If the supervisory console is a QCW-type equipped with a QMT3 Lamp Field

Array, the status of attendants 50 to 63 cannot be displayed because of the

physical limitations of the Standard Busy Lamp Field. An Ml250 or M2250

console equipped with a Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module

can display the status of all attendant consoles (up to the

maximum 63) by using the Enhanced Busy Lamp Field mode. The

must be minimum vintage AD to provide this capability.

One supervisory console can be assigned per customer. Only one attendant

console (1 to 63) can be assigned as a supervisory console.

The customer group must be equipped with more than one attendant.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Supervisory Console 20-7

When using the Attendant Supervisory Module (ASM), the console TN must

be configured on unit 16, and so on. The secondary TN (SETN) unit

must succeed the Primary TN 17, and so on). The ASM TN is then

configured with TYPE = PWR. The PWR TN must succeed the SETN

10, 18, and so on).

Feature interaction

Add-on modules

Add-on modules (key/lamp strips and lamp field arrays used to display

attendant status) can be used for other purposes defined by the customer

when the console is in Normal mode; however if the Busy Lamp Field is

assigned to display attendant status, then it cannot be used for other

functions during any mode of the attendant console.

Multi-Tenant Service

The supervisory capabilities extend to all attendant consoles defined

within the customer group, regardless of tenant partitioning. The

attendant console serving as supervisor should be a member of every Call

Presentation Group so that it can serve all Tenant groups when operating

in the Normal mode.

Departmental Listed Directory Number (DLDN)

The supervisory capabilities extend to all attendant consoles defined

within the customer group. The attendant console serving as supervisor

should be a member of every DLDN groups so that it can serve all groups

when operating in the Normal mode.

Attendant Administration

Attendant Administration mode can be entered directly from the

supervisory console from Supervisory or Normal mode by pressing the

program (PRG) key. The Supervisory mode does not need to be

terminated first.

Feature packaging

Supervisory Console (SUPV), package 93, has no feature package

dependencies.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

20-8 Attendant Supervisory Console

Feature implementation

LD15

Enable/disable feature for a QCW console with Lamp Field Array or Add-on Module, or

for an console with a Console Graphics Module in the Standard Busy Lamp Field

mode.

REQ

TYPE

OPT

LFTN

SBLF

CHG

CDB

o-99

ITG, (XTG)

(XLF)

lscu

l-63

Yes, (No)

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

include/exclude Trunk Group Busy Indication

Requires OPT for QCW consoles

include/exclude Lamp Field Array Module

Secondary TN of supervisory console (required when Lamp

Field Array is equipped)

Attendant number for supervisory console

No supervisory console

Supervisory lamp field array is or is not to be used to

monitor other attendant consoles

l-255

Visual indication threshold 1 (number of calls in queue

but < ITH2)

ITH2

2-255

ITH3

3-255

Visual indication threshold 2 (number of calls in queue

but

Visual indication threshold 3 (number of calls in queue

ITH3)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Attendant Supervisory Console 20-9

Enable/disable feature for an console with a Console Graphics Module in the

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field mode.

REQ

TYPE

OPT

ITH2

ITH3

CHG

o-99

IBL, (XBL)

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Include/exclude Busy Lamp Field or Console Graphics

Module

l-63

l-255

Attendant number for supervisory console

No supervisory console

Visual indication threshold 1 (number of calls in queue

but < ITH2)

2-255

Visual indication threshold 2 (number of calls in queue

ITH2 but ITH3)

3-255

Visual indication threshold 3 (number of calls in queue a

ITH3)

LD12

-Enable/disable supervisory console Silent Observe.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE ATT,

Console type

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY 0 BVR Add Busy Verify key (key 0) for silent observation

1 features and services 553-3001-305

20-10 Attendant Supervisory Console

LD12

Enable/disable supervisory console for consoles with Enhanced Busy Lamp

Field and Silent Observe.

REQ

TYPE

EBLF Allow (Deny) Enhanced Busy Lamp Field

KEY

Add Busy Verify key (key 0) for silent observation

CHG

lscu

BLFA (BLFD)

0 BVR

Change

Console type

Terminal Number

LD15

Enable/disable an console using Trunk Group Busy keys as status keys.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

OPT

SBLF

ITH2

ITH3

CHG

CDB

O-99

ITG, (XTG)

1-63

l-255

2-255

3-255

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Include/exclude Trunk Group Busy Indication.

Attendant number for supervisory console

No supervisory console

Supervisory lamp field array is not to be used to monitor

other attendant consoles

Visual indication threshold 1 (number of calls in queue

but

Visual indication threshold 2 (number of calls in queue

ITH2 but ITH3)

Visual indication threshold 3 (number of calls in queue

ITH3)

features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Supervisory Console

Feature operation

Enable/disable Supervisory mode

To put your console in Supervisory mode, follow these steps:

Press

when your console is idle (all lpk indicators are off). Your

console is now in position busy mode, preventing calls from ringing at

your console.

To cancel supervisory mode, press

again.

Monitor other attendants

In supervisory mode, you can monitor selected attendant calls without being

detected by either the attendant or the caller. To monitor an attendant, follow

these steps:

Once in Position Busy mode, select an idle loop key.

Press

ver.

Dial the access code, then the attendant number:

If the called attendant is talking to a caller, you hear the conversation

but you cannot be heard.

.If the called console is idle, the S and D indicators go

on.

If the called console is in Position Busy mode, you hear a fast busy

tone, the S and D indicators flash quickly, and the VER

indicator goes off.

Press

RLS

to end the procedure.

Call an attendant

To call an attendant in your group, follow these steps:

Once in Position Busy mode, select an idle

Ipk

key.

Dial the attendant access code.

Dial the attendant code.

You hear ringing. The S indicator flashes slowly.

4 Press

RLS

to end the call.

The S indicator goes on steadily, and the RLS indicator goes on.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

20-12 Attendant Supervisory Console

Transfer a call to an attendant

You can transfer a call to an attendant in your group, even if the attendant’s

console is in Position Busy mode. To transfer a call, follow these steps:

1 Dial the attendant access code; then the attendant code.

The EXCL SRC indicator goes on; the caller is automatically placed on

hold. The D indicator flashes slowly, the lpk and S indicators are on.

.If you dial an incorrect attendant code or if the called console is in

night service mode, the transfer cannot be completed. You hear a

fast busy tone and the D indicator remains off. Press

RLS.

If the called console is busy, you hear a busy tone and the D indicator

continues to flash slowly. Press

RLS

and your call is placed in the

attendant queue.

Press the

key when the attendant answers.

The EXCL SRC indicator goes off and the D indicator lights steadily.

You, the caller, and the attendant are connected.

3Press to end your connection in the call.

Assist an attendant

Even when your console is in Supervisory mode, an attendant can call you for

assistance or transfer a call to you by following these steps:

You

receive a call from an attendant while you are in Supervisory mode.

You hear a tone. The S indicator flashes and the INTER POS. C.

indicator goes on.

Press the

lpk

key next to the flashing S indicator.

The tone stops; the lpk and S indicators light steadily.

You are connected to the call.

Note:

If it is a transferred call, the Call Waiting indicator lights. You

must exit Position Busy mode to answer the call.

features and services 553-3001-305

Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication

The attendant can control user access to a trunk route by pressing the

appropriate Trunk Group Busy key. Station users with a Trunk Group Access

Restriction (TGAR) from 0 to 7 accessing the route that has been busied out

will be automatically intercepted to the attendant. Station users with a TGAR

of 8 to 3 1 will not be affected and can dial out in the normal manner.

The QCW attendant console has up to 10 Trunk Group Busy key/lamp pairs

assigned. If an add-on module is equipped on the console, up to 16 Trunk

Group Busy key/lamp pairs can be assigned.

The Shift key allows the M 1250 attendant console to have 16 Trunk Group

Busy keys. The M2250 attendant console can have up to 20 Trunk Group

Busy keys.

Trunk Group Busy Indication is allowed or denied on a customer basis. If

allowed, the lamps associated with the Trunk Group Busy keys will provide

the following visual indication of the status of the trunks within the route:

Off Some of trunks in the route are idle.

of the trunks in the route are busy.

Steadily attendant has taken control of the route.

Trunk Routes 0 to 9 are automatically assigned to keys 0 to 9 on the console.

If an add-on module is equipped on a QCW type console and the IC2 option

specified, Trunk Group Busy key/lamp pairs will be automatically assigned

to the add-on module. Trunk Routes 0 to 15 are assigned to keys 0 to 7 and

10 to 17.

features and services 553-3001-305

21-2

Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication

On the M1250, Trunk Routes 0 to 15 are assigned 0 to 7 and 10 to 17 when

the Shift key is activated. On the M2250, Trunk Routes are assigned to keys

0 to 9 and 10 to 19 when the Shift key is activated.

Operating parameters

There are no feature requirements.

Feature interaction

None.

Feature packaging

Attendant Trunk Route Busy Indication is included in basic Xl 1 system

software.

Feature implementation

Allow Trunk Group Busy keys.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

OPT

CHG

CDB

o-99

OPT

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Allow Trunk Group Busy keys

IC2 16 for Ml 250, or 20 for

Include/exclude Trunk Group Busy Indicator keys (default is

XTG)

Feature operation

To restrict access to a trunk route (make it busy to users), follow these steps:

Press the Trunk Group Busy key associated with the trunk.

The indicator goes on steady.

To allow access to the trunk route, follow these steps:

Press the Trunk Group Busy key associated with the trunk.

The indicator goes off.

features and services

Issued: 92 1231

Status: Standard

Release:

22-1

Audible Reminder of Held Calls

Occasionally, a user may forget that a call has been placed on hold. Audible

Reminder of Held Calls (ARHC) allows an audible tone to operate as a

reminder of a held call. It provides for a ring on telephones and a

tone on SL- 1 and Meridian digital telephones. The cadence and the duration

between cadences are programmed per customer. This ability allows the user

to differentiate between the cadence for Audible Reminder of Held Call

(ARHC) and the cadences of other existing features.

The station user will hear a ring or tone, which is repeated every 2 to 120

seconds depending on how this feature is programmed, as a reminder that a

call is being held. A single-line telephone user must hang up after putting a

call on Permanent Hold in order to start the timer.

Operating parameters

For telephones, Audible Reminder of Held Calls (ARHC) applies

only to permanent hold. When using ARHC on an SL- 1 or Meridian digital

telephone, the station user must not be originating, receiving, or active on

another call.

Audible Reminder of Held Calls is supported on Multiple Appearance

however, only the appearance initiating Hold will receive the reminder ring.

This feature does not operate on attendant consoles.

Feature interaction

Permanent Hold

Permanent Hold must be enabled in LD 10 for the single-line telephone;

however, the ARHC timer takes precedence over the Permanent Hold

timer.

features and services

22-2 Audible Reminder of Held Calls

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature implementation

duration between reminder cadences for Audible Reminder of Held Calls.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

DBRC

CHG

CDB

o-99

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Duration between reminder cadences for Audible Reminder of

Held Call

An odd numbered entry is rounded up to the next even number.

Allow/deny Audible Reminder of Held Call for telephones.

REC!

TYPE

CLS

FTR

CHG

lscu

XFA, (XFD)

ARHA, (ARHD)

PHD

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) call transfer.

Allow (Deny) Audible Reminder of Held Call

Permanent Hold allowed

Audible Reminder of Held Call for SL-1 or digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

lscu

ARHA, (ARHD)

Telephone type

aaaa =

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) Audible Reminder of Held Call

Feature operation

Not applicable.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:.

92 12 31

Status: Standard

Xl 1 Release: All

23-1

allows users to dial a number by pressing a single key. SL- 1

telephones, Meridian digital telephones, and attendant consoles can be

assigned an key/lamp pair.

The number stored against the key can be programmed or changed

at any time. The maximum number of digits the user is allowed to program

can be 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, or 23 digits. Depending on the length allowed, the

number can be another DN or an access code plus further digits. The

asterisk can be used when a pause is required. When the key is

pressed, the stored number is processed as if it had been dialed manually.

Speed with Authorization Code, X11 release 13 and later

This enhancement allows an authorization code to be included in a Speed Call

entry

or an key. Entries can contain any one of the following

combinations:

SPRE code + digit 6 + authorization code

SPRE code + digit 6 + authorization code + #

SPRE code + digit 6 + authorization code + # + ESN access code and

dialed number

1 features and services 553-3001-305

23-2

Operating parameters

must be assigned to a key/lamp pair so it is not available on

50012500 type telephones.

An attendant can enter an Authorization Code for other callers provided that

the system is equipped with the Network Authorization Code (NAUT)

package.

On attendant consoles, pressing the key, then pressing a Speed Call

key is not allowed.

Authorization Code Conditionally Last is not supported by the

feature.

An octothorpe (#) is required as a delimiter after the Authorization Code if an

ESN access code and dialed number is stored as part of the key. If

the octothorpe is not entered, the user receives fast busy tone. The octothorpe

is not stored in the CDR record.

The feature allows a maximum of 23 digits including the SPRE

code, the digit 6, the Authorization Code, the delimiter the ESN access

code, and the dialed number.

If the system initializes before the Authorization Code is recorded by CDR,

the record will be lost.

An SL-1 digit display telephone can display up to 16 digits. Additional digits

cause the digits to scroll off the display.

Because it has a Directory, the M3000 Touchphone does not support the

feature.

On digit display telephones, Authorization Codes cannot be blocked from

being displayed.

The Authorization Code is not validated during the storing process. An

invalid authorization code is detected when the key is activated.

NARS and BARS does not support the asterisk as a pause when dialing

an number.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

23-3

Feature interaction

Last Number Redial

A number dialed using will become the Last Number Redial

number on all telephones except the M2317 and M3000.

Fsature packaging

Extended PBX Features (OPTF), package 1, includes and has no

feature package dependencies.

To implement with Authorization Code, the following packages are

required:

Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB), package 24, OR

Basic Authorization Code (BAUT), package 25, OR

Network Authorization Code package 63

Extended PBX Features (OPTF), package 1, OR

System Speed Call (SSC), package 34, OR

Network Speed Call (NSC), package 39

Feature implementation

-Assign key for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317, 2616, 3000

KEY

lscu

Terminal Number

xx ADL yy

xx = assigned key number

yy = the length of the number (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, or

23 digits; default is 16)

= the digits to be dialed automatically (optional)

1 features and services 553-3001-305

23-4

LD12

Assign key for Ml250 and M2250 attendant consoles

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

lscu

Change

Console type

Terminal Number

xx = assigned key number

= the digits to be dialed automatically (optional)

Feature operation

To program autodial, follow these steps:

1 While the handset is on hook, press the

key.

The associated lamp flashes.

2 Dial the desired number and press the

key again.

The lamp goes dark.

To use autodial, follow these steps:

Lift the handset off hook, or press the

Handsfree

key if allowed.

Press the

key.

The call is dialed.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Issued:

92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release: All

24-1

Automatic Answerback

Automatic Answerback (AAB), when assigned to an SL- 1 or Meridian digital

telephone, allows any incoming call to a single appearance Prime Directory

Number (PDN) to be answered automatically. An incoming call will ring one

time, then the Meridian 1 system will turn on Handsfree and establish a

speech path. When either party hangs up, the call is automatically

disconnected.

Automatic Answerback can be permanently assigned either as a Class of

Service, or with an Automatic Answerback key/lamp pair assigned to allow

activation/deactivation of the feature. If privacy is desired during a call,

handset operation is allowed.

Operating parameters

This feature is available on SL-1, Ml 109, M2317, M2616, and

M3000 telephones.

SL- 1 telephones must be equipped with QUS Logic Handsfree unit

connected by the QKK3 Handsfree interface kit. Ml 109 telephones only

require a Handsfree interface kit.

Incoming ground start trunks must provide answer supervision. If not, the call

is connected to the attendant who provides the necessary supervision.

The Prime DN (PDN) must be a single appearance DN.

Calls presented to other than the PDN, or calls presented to the PDN

when active on another DN, will not receive Automatic Answerback

treatment.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

24-2 Automatic Answerback

Feature interaction

Message Center

If a telephone is in the Automatic Answerback mode, incoming calls are

not routed to the Message Center.

Automatic Answerback can be provided as a Class of Service or on a

key/lamp pair. You cannot assign both in service change.

Feature packaging

Automatic Answerback (AAB), package 47, has no feature package

dependencies.

Feature implementation

-Assign Automatic Answerback as a Class of Service to SL-1, M2112, M2317, M2616, or

M3000 telephone.

TYPE

CLS

CHG

aaaa

lscu

HFA (HFD)

Change

Telephone type

aaaa

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) Automatic Answerback for all calls. AAA

cannot be entered if the AAK key is already programmed.

Allow (Deny) Handsfree (see Note)

Note: HFA is allowed for M2216 only.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Automatic Answerback 24-Z

-Assign Automatic Answerback key to SL-1, M2112, M2317, M2616, or M3000

telephone.

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

aaaa

lscu

HFA, (HFD)

xx AAK

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) Handsfree (Note 1)

Allow (Deny) Automatic Answerback

Must disable to add the AAK key

Add Automatic Answerback key (Note 2)

xx = key number

Note HFA is allowed for M2216 only.

Note 2: M2216 with AAA cannot use key 5 as a feature key. Key 5 is reserved for handsfree. M3000 must

use key 35.

Feature operation

To activate Automatic Answerback, follow this step:

Press

Auto Answer.

Incoming calls to your PDN will ring once, then be answered with

Handsfree turned on.

To deactivate Automatic Answerback, follow this step:

Press

Auto Answer.

Incoming calls to your PDN will not be answered automatically.

Note:

If Automatic Answerback is assigned as a Class of Service instead

of a key on your telephone, you cannot deactivate it.

Xl features and services

24-4 Automatic Answerback

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic Call Distribution

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) is an optional feature. The ACD feature

is used when a large volume of incoming calls are answered by a group of

ACD assigned telephones. Incoming calls are served on a first-in, first-out

basis and are distributed among the available telephones so that the agent

position that has been idle the longest is given the first call. This guarantees

that incoming calls are distributed equally to all agents.

ACD is available in several packages:

ACD Basic Features (ACD-A)

ACD Advanced Features (ACD-B)

ACD Management Reports (ACD-C 1)

ACD Load Management (ACD-C2)

ACD-MAX

Meridian MAX

Consult the following documents for complete information regarding the

various ACD packages.

features and services 553-3001-305

25-2 Automatic Call Distribution

Automatic Call Distribution Features

In-Calls key

Directory Number key

Not Ready key

Release key

Make Set Busy key

Night Mode

Call Source Identification

Calls Waiting Indication

Display Agents key

Display Waiting Calls key

Incoming Trunk restrictions

Recorded Announcement

Night Treatment

Night Call Forward (NCFW)

Priority trunks

Music on Hold

ACD-CDR Connection Record

In-Band

Alternate Call Answer

Automatic Overflow

Call Interflow

Time Overflow (TOF) queuing

Enhanced Overflow

Supervisor control of queue size

Call Forcing

Secondary DN Call Blocking (SDNB)

Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)

Routing by DNIS number

Name Display for DNIS

DNIS across call modifications

DNIS on CDR

Enhanced ACD Routing

Customer Controlled Routing (CCR)

Hold in queue for Interactive Voice Response

Music On Delay

Priority Agents

Display Waiting Calls (DWC)

Agent Observe

Supervisor and agent communication

features and services 553-3001-305

Automatic Call Distribution

25-3

Supervisor Control of Night Service (NSVC)

Agent and Supervisor communication

Calls waiting indication

Emergency key

Automatic Call Distribution ACD management commands and reports

(553-2671-112)

CCR reporting information

Agent ID option

ACD set log in

Data Agent log in

ACD telephone log out

Data Agent log out

Agents using DN keys

Report Control

Management report terminals

ACD supervisor terminal

ACD senior supervisor terminal

Periodic management reports

Warning messages

Report data

Calls per ACD DN

Calls delayed per ACD DN

Total trunk usage per ACD DN

Report length

Short Reports

Enhanced daily totals

Ongoing Status Display

Agent ID reporting

System totals

Daily totals

Accessing the command mode

Set Controlled mode (CNTL)

Set Default ACD DN (DFDN)

Query current options (POPT)

Query current parameters (PPAR)

Select Route and Trunk Assignment (SRTA)

Select Trunk Priority Assignment (SPRI)

Select Agent Position Assignment

1 features and services

25-4 Automatic Call Distribution

Select Agent to Supervisor Assignment (SATS)

First RAN Route Assignment (FRRT)

Second RAN Route Assignment (SRRT)

Night RAN Route Assignment (NRRT)

Automatic Overflow Target DN

Automatic Overflow thresholds (TLDA, TLDB, TLDC)

Time Overflow threshold (TLDD)

Setting the Interflow DN (IFDN)

Telephone Service Factor time (TSF)

Daily system totals

Set Agent Priority (SAGP)

List Agent Position Assignment

List Agent Priority (LAGP)

Enable Call Force

Print CDN Parameters and Options (PCPO)

Set the Call Ceiling (CEIL)

Customers with PC-based ACD Package D systems (ACD-MAX or Meridian

MAX) should also consult the documents listed below:

Meridian MAX 3.3-AM Installation

(553-4001-101)

Meridian MAX Operation

Meridian Messages (553-4001-800)

Network ACD, introduced in X11 release 15, uses ISDN to allow ACD

services over the customer’s network for automatic least cost call routing in

an ACD environment. In addition to the above listed documents, refer to the

following:

description and operation

(553-3671-120)

Operating parameters

Refer to the documents listed for your system.

Feature interaction

Refer to the documents listed for your system.

Feature packaging

Refer to the documents listed for your system.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Automatic Call Distribution

25-5

Feature implementation

Refer to the documents listed for your system.

Feature operation

Refer to the documents listed for your system.

Xl 1 features and services

25-6 Automatic Call Distribution

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued: 92 1231

Status: Standard

Release:

26-1

Automatic Line Selection

Automatic Line Selection allows manual or automatic selection of incoming

and outgoing lines for a given SL- 1 or Meridian digital telephone on a class

of service basis. When a user lifts the handset, the telephone automatically

selects a preferred line according to its priority. The line preferences are as

follows, listed in order of selection priority:

Manual Line Selection

The user manually selects the DN to be used before going off hook. Dial

tone is returned if the line is idle. If the line is ringing, the call is answered

and connected to the speaker of the telephone or Handsfree unit.

Incoming Ringing Line Selection

With Incoming Ringing Line Selection enabled, when the user goes off

hook, the telephone automatically scans the DN keys (without the user

first manually selecting a DN key). If a line on the telephone is ringing,

it is selected and the call answered.

Incoming Non-Ringing Line Selection

With Incoming Non-Ringing Line Selection enabled, when the user goes

off hook, the telephone scans the DN lines and answers any unanswered

incoming calls that appear but do not ring at that telephone.

Outgoing Line Selection

With Outgoing Line Selection enabled, when the user goes off hook, the

telephone scans the DN keys for an idle line. If a line is idle, it is selected

and a dial tone is returned.

Prime Line Selection

When the handset is lifted, the system processes any manual, incoming,

or outgoing line selections. If no line is selected by one of these modes,

a designated Prime Line (the DN on key 0) is selected.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

26-2 Automatic Line Selection

Operating parameters

This feature is available on SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones only.

The user determines which line is in use by observing lamp state changes.

interaction

Voice Call

This feature is not selected by automatic Outgoing Line Selection. It is

selected for Incoming Ringing and Non-Ringing Line Selection.

Group Call

This feature is not selected for automatic Outgoing Line Selection or

Non-Ringing Line Selection. It is selected for Incoming Ringing Line

Selection.

Audible Message Waiting

The Audible Message Waiting signal is given if there is a message

waiting on whatever line is selected by Outgoing Line Selection.

Automatic Answerback

Automatic Answerback operates only on the Prime DN (key zero) and

has no interrelation with Incoming Ringing/Non-Ringing Line Selection.

Dial Intercom

A Dial Intercom DN is selected by Incoming Ringing Line Selection and

Outgoing Line Selection.

Private Line Service

A Private line DN is selected by Incoming Ringing/Non-Ringing Line

Selection and Outgoing Line Selection.

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

An ACD DN is not selected by automatic Incoming Non-Ringing and

Outgoing Line Selection. It is selected by Incoming Ringing Line

Selection.

Call Waiting

A call on the Call Waiting key is not selected.

Feature packaging

Automatic Line Selection (LSEL), package 72, has no feature package

dependencies.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Line Selection

26-3

Feature implementation

-Assign Automatic Line Selection for each SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

CLS

LPK

lscu

IRA, (IRD)

NIA, (NID)

OLA, (OLD)

Change

Telephone type

aaaa

2006, 2008, 2009,

2317,

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) incoming ringing line preference

Allow (Deny) incoming non-ringing line preference

Allow (Deny) outgoing line preference

Specify the last key to be scanned for line preference (such

as O-7, O-l

Prompted only if NIA, or OLA

Note: A value of 0 (zero) for LPK disables this feature.

Feature operation

Not applicable.

features and services 553-3001-305

26-4 Automatic Line Selection

1 features and services 553-3001-305

27-1

Automatic Number Identification

Automatic Number Identification automatically identifies a station

originating an outgoing toll call and its destination party, and transmits the

information to a recording office. A multifrequency (MF) sender is used to

transmit AN1 information. The signaling method used to send this

information to the Central Office can be E&M, DX, or loop signaling.

AN1 supports three basic signaling methods: NT400, NT500, and Bell (Super

Trunk Group).

Each customer is assigned an AN1 Listed Directory Number (LDN). This

number identifies the customer to the toll office.

Route Selection works in conjunction with the AN1 feature. The AN1 Route

Selection (ANIR) facility is optional and may be used to route toll calls

automatically over specified trunks. ANIR allows distinctive routing of the

following:

0- calls: calls to the AN1 operator for assistance

0+ calls: credit card or operator-assisted calls

calls: DDD calls

local calls: calls not preceded by a 1 or 0

enhancement, X11 release 12

Permits the transmission of the

necessary signaling method for access to AT&T operator assistance when

“00” is dialed. This enhancement operates on a route basis and applies only

to Centralized Automatic Message Accounting routes using the

Bell MF signaling method.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

27-2 Automatic Number Identification

In-Band AN1 X11 release 15

The In-Band AN1 feature

provides display capability of a lo-digit calling party number during setup

(signaling) over a non-ISDN trunk. The AN1 digits are displayed when

they auto-terminate to an ACD DN agent telephone with digit display.

parameters

The AN1 enhancement operates on a route basis and only applies to

routes using the MF signaling methods. All route members that use

the AN1 enhancement must have an MFR Class of Service.

The AN1 enhancement is not supported over dial pulse trunks.

Therefore, a mix of trunk members may not be used when assigning this

feature.

The enhancement is not supported on CCSA routes.

Feature interaction

AN1 Route Selection (ANIR)

ANIR has not been modified to allow “00” or dialing. Calls made

using “00

or are treated as a call, and the zero plus

route is selected Data Block).

DN Expansion

If the DN Expansion package is equipped, the AN1 billing number

can have up to seven digits. The total number of digits for

and AN1 listed DN (ANLD) cannot exceed seven.

Feature packaging

Automatic Number Identification package 12, has no feature package

dependencies.

AN1 Route Selection (ANIR), package 13, requires Automatic Number

Identification (ANJ), package 12.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Feature implementation

Automatic Number Identification

27-3

LD15

Implement

customer data

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ANLD

CHG

CDB

o-99

xxx...x

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

billing number for attendants making calls

listed DN for billing purposes (O-5 digits)

Note: The total number of digits in and ANLD cannot exceed seven digits.

LD16

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting route data (Part 1 of 2).

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

TKTP

FORM

NEW, CHG

RDB

o-99

xxx

CAM

CAA

BEL

NT4

NT5

OGT

New or change

Route Data Block

Customer number

route number

NT4, or NT5

= Bel

Bell method signaling

ITT-North NT400 signaling

(only if TKTP=CAMA)

ITT-North NT500 signaling

(only if TKTP=CAMA)

For BEL, NT4, or NT5 (NT4 and NT5 not applicable if

TKTP=CAA)

For BEL, NT4, or NT5 (NT4 and NT5 not applicable if

TKTP=CAA)

For NT5 (only if TKTP=CAMA)

Outgoing

features and services 553-3001-305

27-4 Automatic Number Identification

LD16

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting route data (Part 2 of 2).

CAT

STRK

SPTO

ANKP

CNTL

ANDT

o-9

00-99

Identification digit for routes

For BEL

Category digits for routes (only if TKTP=CAMA)

For NT4 and NT5

Yes, (No) Enable or disable super trunk group feature (Bell method

signaling only)

Yes, (No)

AT0

Yes, (No)

3-digit, or to lo-digit outpulsing for calls

Suppress/not suppress KP signal on calls

Allow/not allow changes to timers

timeout timer in ms (default is 4,992)

Provide/not provide dial tone

LD14

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting trunk data.

TYPE

CUST

CLS

NEW, CHG

CAM

CAA

lscu

o-99

MFR

New or change

trunk

trunk in LD16)

Terminal Number

Customer number

Arrange trunk for multifrequency outpulsing

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Automatic Number Identification

27-5

LD28

Route selection data for AN1 calls.

TYPE

RASC

0-RT

CORT

RSA

xxxx

Route selection for

access code digits

Route access code for 0- calls

Route access code for 0+ calls

Route access code for or calls

Route access code for local calls

LD16

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting route data.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

TKTP

ANTK

NEW, CHG

RDB

o-99

xxx

TIE, CCSA

xxxx

Feature operation

Not applicable.

New or change

Route Data Block

Customer number

route number

Trunk type

Billing number for Tie or CCSA trunks that are allowed a

tandem connection to

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

27-6 Automatic Number Identification

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Issued: 921231

Status: Standard

1 Release: 1 4

28-1

Automatic Number Identification on DTI

Introduced in Xl 1 release 14.43, Automatic Number Identification on

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) extends the AN1 feature to digital CO (DCO)

and Digital Toll Office (DTO) trunks. In addition, the AN1 capability is

extended to Primary Rate Access (PRA) trunk routes through the Primary

Rate Interface.

For further information, refer to

Automatic Number description

(553-26

Operating parameters

The is the minimum vintage multifrequency (MF) sender circuit

board required to implement this feature.

DTI interfaces externally with a digital trunk carrier facility at the DS- 1 rate.

MF signals pass across this interface in a digitally encoded format.

Supervisory signaling through DTI is accomplished by A&B bit signaling.

A&B bit signaling can emulate E&M or loop signaling.

Address (called number) signaling through DTI can be DP or MF. Immediate

start or wink start may be used.

Calling number information signaling is done using the MF signaling

method.

This enhancement supports the three basic signaling methods for These

are Bell, NT400, and

Feature interactions

None.

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

28-2 Automatic Number Identification on DTI

Feature packaging

This enhancement is included in the software package.

Automatic Number Identification package 12, requires Xl 1 release

14.43 and later.

implementation

LD16

Define CO or Toll Office port types.

DTR K Yes, (No) Digital trunk route

DGTP DTI Digital trunk type

PTYP DCO/DTO CO or Toll Office port type (default DCO)

Feature operation

Not applicable.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Automatic Preselection of Prime

Directory Number

Automatic Preselection allows a user to select the Directory Number (DN)

assigned to key zero by lifting the handset. It is not necessary to operate the

DN key to get dial tone or to answer an incoming call. The DN assigned to

key zero is referred to as the Prime Directory Number (PDN) for that

telephone.

Operating parameters

The Automatic Preselection feature does not apply to single-line telephones.

Feature interaction

None.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic Xl 1 system software,

Feature implementation

The desired Directory Number is assigned to key zero in

Feature operation

Not applicable.

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

29-2 Automatic Preselection of Prime Directory Number

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

Automatic Set Relocation

Automatic Set Relocation (ASR) and Modular Telephone Relocation (MTR)

move a telephone to another location without the intervention of a

craftsperson. release added MTR to reduce the number of steps

required to relocate the Meridian Modular Terminals.

With ASR, Directory Numbers and features assigned to the telephone

are maintained. Up to 32 telephones can be relocated at any one time. The

following access codes are associated with this feature.

Special Prefix code (SPRE) relocation code 8 1

SPRE codes are system codes enabling type telephones to

utilize additional telephone features. Refer to the “Telephones” or

module in this document.

Flexible Feature Code (FFC) relocation number

are user programmable codes that enable type telephones

to access certain telephone features. Refer to the FFC module in this

document.

Security code

You must enter the security code before a telephone can be moved

Identification code

The identification code is user-selectable, and can be any four-digit

number (excluding the symbols and (MTR does not require this

code.)

This feature is also used to install and enable line cards to make unused

telephone locations available for telephone relocation. Adding the first

telephone on a line card by overlay service change enables that card (if not

already enabled). Removing the last telephone from a line card leaves that

card enabled; it does not disable the card.

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

30-2 Automatic Set Relocation

Note

Automatic Set Relocation (ASR) requires the circuit units on

SL-1 and digital line cards used for supplementary power to be specified

as power units in LD12. This allows the Meridian 1 system to disable

signaling to these units, while leaving unequipped units enabled for

telephone relocation. If power units are not specified, they generate

erroneous messages and may disable the entire card.

Note 2:

After putting a telephone back into service, the craftsperson

should wait at least 20 seconds before using the telephone.

Modular Telephone Relocation 1 release 18 and later)

Modular Telephone Relocation enhances ASR to make relocating Meridian

Modular Telephones simpler and faster (by omitting the requirement for an

identification code). The following telephones support Modular Terminal

Relocation:

M2006

M2008

M2216

M2616

When a telephone is relocated out, a relocation block is automatically built to

store the relocation information in the protected data area. The relocation

block includes the old TN, the terminal ID information, the serial number of

the telephone, and feature information. If a data dump occurs, the relocation

block is not copied to the disk.

Modular Terminal Relocation uses the unique serial number and terminal ID

of the Meridian Modular Telephones (instead of the identification code) to

identify the one being relocated. This reduces the number of steps needed for

relocation.

A telephone’s successful relocation is indicated by a 180-millisecond buzz

through the telephone’s loudspeaker, not a tone through the handset. The buzz

occurs

after

the telephone is plugged into the new location, and the parameter

download to the Meridian Modular Terminal is complete.

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Automatic Set Relocation

30-3

Modifying the relocation table

The relocation table contains information regarding the telephone’s serial

number, Terminal Number (TN) and terminal identification information.

When a telephone is relocated OUT, the table maintains the necessary

telephone information. When the telephone is relocated IN, the Meridian

searches the table for that telephone’s information. When the information is

found, the data is moved to the new location. The telephone data is then

removed from the relocation table.

Through the serial number or any terminal ID information may be

modified while the telephone is relocated out (before is has been relocated

back in). For example, use LD.50 when replacing a telephone with another

one of the same type with a different serial number or terminal ID, but the

same key configuration.

LD21 prints information about telephones that have been relocated out.

The ‘IDU’ (ID for Unit) command in LD32 determines the telephone’s serial

number and ID information.

Operating parameters

A single-line telephone must be relocated to a vacant position on a

Line Card.

An SL-1 telephone must be relocated to a vacant position on an SL-1 Line

Card. A digital telephone must be relocated to a vacant position on a Digital

Line Card (DLC) or Integrated Services Digital Line Card (ISDLC) in the

switch.

An Add-on Data Module (ADM) must be relocated to a vacant data port on a

QPC311 Data Line Card. A co-located telephone and ADM must be

relocated to a vacant voice and data port combination on a Data Line

Card.

Moving a telephone from an off-premise to on-premise location or vice versa

is not recommended as incorrect pad values on connections may result.

A Manual Line telephone cannot be relocated using the Automatic Set

Relocation feature.

Xl 1 features and services

30-4 Automatic Set Relocation

The relocation table allows a maximum of 32 telephones to be relocated out

at one time.

A relocated out telephone be relocated in to an already defined TN. A

telephone relocating-in must be plugged into a TN location that currently has

no assigned telephone information.

ACD agent telephones with an associated supervisor and the ACD supervisor

telephones cannot be relocated.

If a data dump occurs while a telephone is relocated out, a sysload returns the

telephone to its original TN location. If a telephone was in the relocated out

state

when the last data dump occurred, and has since relocated in, another

data dump is necessary. The second data dump prevents a sysload from

returning the telephone to its previous TN location.

When Modular Terminal Relocation is used and the overflow tone is returned

during relocation out, the relocation attempt is abandoned. Try the relocation

again.

When Modular Terminal Relocation is used there is a slight delay between

the time the telephone is plugged in and the buzz. The buzz occurs

after

the

telephone is relocated in, enabled, and downloaded. This delay is

traffic-dependent. If no buzz is received, the relocation is unsuccessful.

When Modular Terminal Relocation is used and a telephone is relocated out,

a Customer Service Change (CSC) message containing the old TN number,

serial number, and terminal ID is displayed on the TTY. When a telephone is

relocated in, a CSC message containing the old TN and new TN is displayed.

These messages are placed in the history file.

When Modular Terminal Relocation is used and a sysload occurs before a

data dump completes, the data for all telephones relocated in or out is lost.

Return the telephones to their original location and repeat the relocation

process.

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Automatic Set Relocation

30-3

Modifying the relocation table

The relocation table contains information regarding the telephone’s serial

number, Terminal Number (TN) and terminal identification information.

When a telephone is relocated OUT, the table maintains the necessary

telephone information. When the telephone is relocated IN, the Meridian

searches the table for that telephone’s information. When the information is

found, the data is moved to the new location. The telephone data is then

removed from the relocation table.

Through LD50, the serial number or any terminal ID information may be

modified while the telephone is relocated out (before is has been relocated

back in). For example, use LD50 when replacing a telephone with another

one of the same type with a different serial number or terminal ID, but the

same key configuration.

LD21 prints information about telephones that have been relocated out.

The ‘IDU’ (ID for Unit) command in LD32 determines the telephone’s serial

number and ID information.

Operating parameters

A single-line telephone must be relocated to a vacant position on a

Line Card.

An SL-1 telephone must be relocated to a vacant position on an SL-1 Line

Card. A digital telephone must be relocated to a vacant position on a Digital

Line Card (DLC) or Integrated Services Digital Line Card (ISDLC) in the

switch.

An Add-on Data Module (ADM) must be relocated to a vacant data port on a

Data Line Card. A co-located SL-1 telephone and ADM must be

relocated to a vacant voice and data port combination on a Data Line

Card.

Moving a telephone from an off-premise to on-premise location or vice versa

is not recommended as incorrect pad values on connections may result.

A Manual Line telephone cannot be relocated using the Automatic Set

Relocation feature.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

30-4 Automatic Set Relocation

The relocation table allows a maximum of 32 telephones to be relocated out

at one time.

A relocated out telephone be relocated in to an already defined TN. A

telephone relocating-in must be plugged into a TN location that currently has

no assigned telephone information.

ACD agent telephones with an associated supervisor and the ACD supervisor

telephones cannot be relocated.

If a data dump occurs while a telephone is relocated out, a sysload returns the

telephone to its original TN location. If a telephone was in the relocated out

state when the last data dump occurred, and has since relocated in, another

data dump is necessary. The second data dump prevents a sysload from

returning the telephone to its previous TN location.

When Modular Terminal Relocation is used and the overflow tone is returned

during relocation out, the relocation attempt is abandoned. Try the relocation

again.

When Modular Terminal Relocation is used there is a slight delay between

the time the telephone is plugged in and the buzz. The buzz occurs

after

the

telephone is relocated in, enabled, and downloaded. This delay is

traffic-dependent. If no buzz is received, the relocation is unsuccessful.

When Modular Terminal Relocation is used and a telephone is relocated out,

a Customer Service Change (CSC) message containing the old TN number,

serial number, and terminal ID is displayed on the TTY. When a telephone is

relocated in, a CSC message containing the old TN and new TN is displayed.

These messages are placed in the history file.

When Modular Terminal Relocation is used and a sysload occurs before a

data dump completes, the data for all telephones relocated in or out is lost.

Return the telephones to their original location and repeat the relocation

process.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Automatic Set Relocation

30-5

Feature interaction

Call Forward No Answer/Hunting- Calls will not hunt or forward no answer

to a telephone that is being relocated.

Call Forward/Ring Again-If Call Forward, or Ring Again is active when a

telephone is relocated, the feature is deactivated.

Make Set Busy -If Make Set Busy is active when the telephone is relocated,

Make Set Busy remains active.

Power Fail Transfer-Since Power Fail Transfer is hardwired to certain

Terminal Numbers (TN), this feature is not maintained by a telephone when

it is relocated.

Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime (MARP) The original MARP

TN is restored when the telephone relocates.

When Automatic Set Relocation or Meridian Modular Terminal is used to

move a telephone, the telephone’s MARP designations are maintained. If the

TN is a MARP for one or more the system maintains the MARP TN. A

system message indicates the telephone relocation.

When a set leaves the system due to set relocation, the following CSC

message appears.

x y

x = old TN (1 c u) for the telephone

y = ID code entered

While the telephone is being relocated, a temporary MARP TN is assigned.

The following SCH message appears for each DN associated to the removed

MARP TN.

SCH5524 DN nnnn NEW MARP 1 c

nnnn = the DN associated with the MARP TN

c = the new default MARP for DN nnnn

The same message given through Attendant Administration displays on the

attendant console when a MARP is assigned for a DN. The History File can

be configured to store these messages until a printout is requested.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

30-6 Automatic Set Relocation

When a telephone reenters the system, the following message appears.

x y

x = old TN (1 c u) for the telephone

y = new TN (1 c u) for the telephone

The following message appears again for each changed TN.

SCH.5524 DN nnnn NEW MARP 1 c

nnnn = the DN associated with the MARP TN

1 c = the new MARP TN assigned to DN nnnn

Feature packaging

Automatic Set Relocation (ASR), package 53, has no feature package

dependencies.

Modular Telephone Relocation requires the following:

Automatic Set Relocation (ASR), package 53

Meridian Modular Terminals (ARIE), package 170

Digital telephones (DSET), package 88

Feature implementation

Assign Automatic Set Relocation security code

REQ CHG

TYPE

CUST o-99

SRCD

xxxx, <CR>, x

Change

Customer data block

Customer number

Automatic Set Relocation security code; default is 0000; X

removes security code

Enable/disable line circuits for Automatic Set Relocation

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

CARD line circuit for Automatic Set Relocation

lscu

Terminal Number

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Automatic Set Relocation

-Enable/disable line circuits for Automatic Set Relocation

30-7

TYPE

CHG

CARD

lscu

Change

SL-I or digital line circuit for Automatic Set Relocation

Terminal Number

LD12

Gather data for each SL-1 line circuit to be used as a supplementary power source

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

PWR SL-1 line circuit for supplementary power

lscu

Terminal Number

LD17

Allow ASR messages to be printed at a system terminal or stored in the history file

REQ CHG

TYPE

CFN

Yes, (No)

(0)-65534

NEW, CHG aaa x

Change

Configuration record

Change input/output terminals or devices

History file buffer length

System terminal device number for Automatic Set

Relocation messages.

aaa

and x HST

PRT O-l 5

TTY O-l 5

USER

csc

Customer service change (Automatic Set Relocation)

messages

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

30-l 0 Automatic Set Relocation

Feature operation

Automatic Set Relocation

To use Automatic Set Relocation:

Lift the handset.

Enter the relocation code (either SPRE 81 or the Flexible Feature Code).

Enter the security code. With X11 release 19 and later, a security code is

required. The default is 0000.

Enter the four-digit code to identify your telephone.

A tone confirms the telephone is ready to be moved.

Unplug the telephone and install it at the new location.

Lift the handset and dial the four-digit identifier.

A tone confirms the telephone has been moved successfully.

Modular Telephone Relocation

To relocate a telephone using Modular Telephone Relocation:

Lift the handset or activate handsfree.

2 Enter the relocation code (either SPRE 81 or the Flexible Feature Code).

3 Enter the security code. With X11 release 19 and later, a security code is

required. The default is 0000.

A two-second tone burst confirms that the telephone is relocated out.

Unplug the telephone and install it at the new location.

The confirmation buzz through the telephone’s loudspeaker indicates the

telephone is in service.

Note:

All calls associated with the telephone receive force disconnect

while it is relocated out. The telephone information automatically moves

to the relocation table.

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Automatic Timed Reminders

Automatic Timed Reminders alert the attendant when a call extended to a

station by the attendant console has not been answered within a predefined

period of time. Recall timers for different conditions are specified by the

customer:

Slow Answer (set in increments of six seconds)

Camp-On (set in increments of two seconds)

Call Waiting (set in increments of two seconds)

If no entry is made, the default is 30 seconds in each case. One optional Recall

Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) key is provided on the attendant console for

operator-extended recalls.

Operating parameters

There are no feature requirements.

Feature interactions

Call Park

A Call Park recall to an attendant appears on the Recall Incoming Call

Indicator.

Call Forward No Answer/Call Forward No Answer Second Level

When Call Forward No Answer is activated on a telephone, the slow

answer timer begins only after the call reaches its final destination.

Feature packaging

Automatic Timed Reminders are included in basic Xl 1 system software.

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

31-2 Automatic Timed Reminders

Feature implementation

Define Recall timers and add/change a Recall Incoming Call Indicator key on attendant

consoles.

REQ CHG

TYPE

CUST

o-99

xxxxyyyyzzzz

ICI O-l 9 RLL

Feature operation

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Recall timers

xxxx = slow answer, in 6-second increments

(default 30 seconds)

yyyy = Camp-on, O-l ,022, in 2-second increments (default

30 seconds)

zzzz = Call Waiting, O-l ,022, in increments

(default 30 seconds)

Add RECALL ICI to all consoles

Not applicable.

features and services 553-3001-305

Automatic Trunk Maintenance

Automatic Trunk Maintenance (ATM) enables Meridian 1 to be programmed

to automatically perform scheduled transmission and supervision tests on

specified trunk groups terminating at the Meridian 1. ATM also reports the

results to the maintenance system terminal.

Trunks that fail any of the tests are flagged so that more rigorous tests can be

performed manually using transmission test equipment. The system can be

programmed to disable any of these flagged trunks, up to a configurable limit

per trunk group, if they reach the programmable “out-of-service” threshold.

In addition to the automatic scheduling and running of the ATM program, it

may also be run manually, at any time.

Related documents

For complete information on Automatic Trunk Maintenance, refer to

Automatic trunk maintenance description (553-275

1- 104).

Configuration is described in and LD92 in the

XI I input/output guide

(553-3001-400).

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

32-2 Automatic Trunk Maintenance

I features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

33-1

Issued:

92 1231

Status: Standard

1 Release: All

Automatic Wake Up

Automatic Wake Up (AWU) provides an efficient wake up service for

hospitality and health care environments. It relieves the console attendant

from having to make wake up calls by providing this service automatically.

At the requested time, the system automatically rings the room or extension

and connects the called party upon answer to a music followed by a recorded

wake up announcement.

If the wake up call is answered within a customer-specified number of rings

(2-5 with Xl 1 release 15 and later, 5 rings with Xl 1 release 14 and earlier),

the system recognizes a completed call and presents the predefined wake up

treatment. The system disconnects the AWU call when the called party

releases, or when the recording cycle is completed.

The system allows for an alternate recording that can be used for evening

wake up calls or when the primary recording is being updated. The secondary

recording can also replace the primary recording at a customer-specified time

period.

Answering the wake up call

The Wake Up indicator goes dark after the

guest answers the wake up call. In Xl 1 release 16 and later, customers can set

the attendant recall option if the call is unanswered after a specified number

of tries (from one to three).

Answering the wake up call for multiple appearance DN telephones is similar

to single appearance DN telephones: after the call is answered, the Wake Up

indicator goes dark.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

33-2 Automatic Wake Up

The system balances the wake up load over five-minute intervals, generating

a maximum of 100 wake up calls per five-minute period. The system

processes one wake up call every two seconds during peak periods, and one

wake up call every four seconds during lighter periods. A light load is defined

as anything less than 60 wake up call requests per five minute interval.

A wake up request is rejected by the system under the following conditions:

The wake up request (in units of five-minute intervals) is less than one

interval ahead of the current time interval (see Note).

The wake up request (in units of five-minute intervals) is less than five

intervals before the current time interval. In other words, the wake up

request is more than 23 hours and eight intervals in advance.

The interval requested contains 100 calls already (or 500 calls with X11

release 1.5 and later for XT, NT, and RT machines, and system options

71, and 81).

Note:

The time interval = (hour x 12) + (minute 5). Always round

down to the nearest five-minute interval.

If the interval requested for a wake-up call already contains the maximum

number of calls, the system searches for the next available time interval in the

following sequence:

the five-minute interval before the requested time

the five-minute interval after the requested time

the next available five-minute interval within three hours before the

requested time

You can also use a Background Terminal (BGD) to enter Automatic Wake

Up information. The Background Terminal lets you monitor system

operation. One or more terminals may be assigned to access AWU data. You

can have data displayed or printed at a preselected time of day.

500 Wake Up Calls, X11 release 15

The number of Automatic Wake Up

calls available per five-minute period increases to 500 calls for NT, RT, and

XT machines and system options and 81. The number (100)

remains the same for all other systems.

features and services 553-3001-305

Automatic Wake Up

33-3

The feature enhancement also lets you define the number of rings for the call

from two to five. If there is no answer after the specified number of rings, the

AWU call overflows to the next five-minute interval. The system tries three

times to terminate the call before it is recalled to the attendant. X11 release

16 and higher software lets you define the number of wake up attempts, from

one to three.

No more than twenty-five telephones should be ringing at any one

time. To ensure this, set the Number of Rings for Wake Up (NRWU) prompt

in LD15 according to the recommendations listed in Table 33-l. The NRWU

is two to five, with a default of five.

Table 33-1

Recommended number of rings per Automatic Wake Up call

Time on

(seconds)

* North American standards

Time off

Maximum

(seconds) number of rings

Only 500 AWU calls can be defined for the system, but up to 750 calls can

actually be placed. Up to half of the programmed AWU calls unanswered can

be carried over to the next five-minute interval. The carry-over from one

block to the next is important in limiting the number of calls in the original

programmed interval.

For a complete description on programming AWU with the Background

Terminal, please refer to

Background Terminal Facility description

(553-2311-316).

Guest Entry of Auto Wake Up (GEWU) Calls, Xl1 release 16

GEWU

provides entry of a wake up call from a room telephone. By using the Wake

Up key on the telephone, guests can program, query (with display),

or cancel their own wake up calls based on a 24-hour time format.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

33-4 Automatic Wake Up

Requests must be made on a daily basis since the wake up time is

automatically canceled after each use.

GEWU does not alter the operation of AWU, but adds a new option to AWU

programming. Unless otherwise specified, operating GEWU is the same

regardless of whether the telephone has a display. The distinction is that with

a display, guests can check their wake up call requests. A dash indicates

that no time has been programmed. In addition, when programming a wake

up call, the system will search for and display the next available time if the

time interval chosen for the wake up call is full. Without a display, the guest

can still program and cancel a wake up call.

Note:

For Multiple Appearance DN telephones, the wake up time for

secondary cannot be queried.

Multi Language Wake Up (MLWU) Calls, X11 release 16

MLWU

provides Automatic Wake Up calls in any of up to six languages. You can use

any language as long as you have a recording of it available on a RAN trunk.

At check-in, each guest can choose the language for wake up calls. If no

language is assigned, the default language, Language 0, is used.

You can assign a language to a room’s telephone at any time by using the

Background Terminal (BGD) or Property Management System (PMS). A

room DN is valid if it has at least one appearance as a Prime DN (key 0) on a

telephone and Controlled Class of Service Allowed (CCSA). Multiple

appearance telephones with the same Prime DN may be assigned different

languages through Service Change.

You can also assign the language on a TN basis, allowing the language option

to be employed outside the hospitality industry without requiring a BGD

terminal or the PMS. Refer to and in

(553-3001-400) for the prompt “LANG.”

The language remains unchanged until the next language assignment. An

AWU language cannot be changed on a call-by-call basis. The customer may,

however, optionally clear the language either at check-in or check-out times,

using the Background Terminal.

1 features and services

Automatic Wake Up

33-5

If Automatic Wake Up is enabled, up to six pairs of language-specific RAN

routes (both a.m. and p.m. for each language), called Automatic Wake Up

routes (AWR), can be configured. The languages, O-5, correspond to the

AWR routes (for Language 0), (for Language

up to (for Language 5) in the Customer Data Block (LD15). The

only requirement is that the default language routes and RAN2 for

Language 0 must be defined. If a specific language AWR is not accessible at

wake up time, the corresponding primary or secondary default language

routes (RAN1 and RAN2) are used.

On a Background Terminal, a customer can define a two-character language

identifier to reference the languages. For example, the customer may define

Language 0 as EN (English), Language 1 as SP (Spanish), and Language 2 as

GR (German). For details on implementing BGD terminal commands, refer

Background Terminal Facility description

(553-2311-316).

Unanswered Automatic Wake Up calls recall to the attendant if the attendant

recall option is on. Upon a recall, the room’s language is displayed on the

attendant console. On alphanumeric displays (Ml250 or M2250 attendant

consoles), the language identifier is displayed after the Call Party Name

Display (CPND) fields. On digit displays (QCW type attendant console), the

language number (O-5) is displayed after the recalling DN field.

Operating parameters

To operate AWU, a system must have a Background Terminal or Attendant

Console with AWU key, room telephones with Controlled Class of Service

Allowed (CCSA), and Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunks.

This feature requires a Background Terminal (BGD). For a complete

description of this feature, refer to Northern Telecom Publication

Background Terminal Facility description

(553-2311-316).

The following hardware is required for the AWU feature:

QPC74 RAN trunk interface card or universal trunk card

a continuous announcement (RAN) machine, such as the Audichron

HQ-1 112

features and services 553-3001-305

33-6 Automatic Wake Up

Systems with software earlier than X11 release 1.5, require at least one

dedicated conference circuit (loop and conference card) for the feature.

For X11 release 1.5 and later software, a dedicated conference loop is no

longer required for the network-enhanced machines.

For the call to utilize both music and a wake up announcement, a music route

First RAN Trunk (RANF) and a primary RAN route must be configured.

Automatic Wake Up is only allowed on a telephone’s Prime Directory

Number (PDN). For telephones in a multiple-appearance arrangement, all

telephones are rung; however, only one wake up time may be assigned against

the PDN. The system tries the wake up call a customer-defined number of

times (from one to three with release 16 and later, 3 with 1 release 15

and earlier), and then treats it as any other unanswered wake up call. In a

single-call arrangement, if any appearance of the DN is busy when the wake

up call is made, the wake up call is not presented. In a multiple-call

arrangement, the wake up call is presented to all idle appearances.

A wake up key cannot be configured on a data station (a telephone with DTA

class of service).

There can only be one wake up key per telephone.

Only attendant consoles can have an AWU key. release 16 and later

releases allow the AWU time to be programmed on digital telephones (using

GEWU and a Wake Up key).

Automatic Wake Up and Centralized Attendant Services (CAS) are mutually

exclusive.

If the wake up call goes unanswered, or the guest hangs up before the AWU

2 second hold time, the system tries the wake up call again in the next five

minute interval. If Attendant recall is enabled, the call transfers to the

attendant following the last unsuccessful wake up call attempt.

Maintenance technicians can access any AWU RAN trunk or music trunk

with the RAN trunk access code.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Automatic Wake Up

33-7

Feature interaction

The Attendant Administration feature does not support data entry or changes

for the AWU feature.

Attendant Overflow Position

AWU recalls are not redirected to a customer-defined Attendant

Ovefflow Position DN. Failed wake up calls stay in the attendant queue

or ring indefinitely on the console.

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP)

AWU supports CDP as long as an internal DN is used.

Do Not Disturb (DND)

When a telephone is configured for DND, a wake up call can still be

presented.

Manual Line or Private Line Services

AWU does not support these features; an AWU call cannot be

programmed against a manual line or private line DN.

Night Service

Unanswered AWU calls going through Attendant Recall are discarded if

the attendant console is in the Night Service mode. AWU may still be

programmed when the attendant console is in Night Service.

Pretranslation

When the Pretranslation feature is equipped with the actual DN,

not the pretranslation DN, should be used when programming the AWU

call request.

Room Status

When a guest checks in or out, the room status changes. If an AWU

request is still active, it is canceled if it is included as part of the Check

In/Out option.

Multiple Appearance DN

All Multiple Appearance are rung, including both primary and

secondary Programming the wake up request using the Wake Up

key applies only to telephones with the primary DN on key 0, and the

Wake Up indicator operates as described only on the telephone that is

currently programming the wake up request.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

33-8 Automatic Wake Up

In addition, if two or more Multiple Appearance Primary DN telephones

program a wake up request at the same time, the last telephone to finish

overrides. In other words, all telephones with the same primary DN get the

same request time of the last telephone to program a request. If the last

telephone cancels the request, all requests are canceled.

When the wake up programming sequence is finished, all Wake Up indicators

on Multiple Appearance Prime are updated unless a telephone is in the

middle of Wake Up programming.

If the AWU Recall option is chosen, the recall is presented to any idle

attendant console in the same Console Presentation Group (CPG) equipped

with the AWU key.

Feature packaging

Automatic Wake Up (AWU), package 102, requires:

Background Terminal Facility (BGD), package 99

Controlled Class of Service (CCOS), package 81

Recorded Announcement (RAN), package 7

Guest Entry of Auto Wake Up is included as part of Automatic Wake Up.

Multi Language Wake Up (MLWU), package 206, requires Automatic Wake

Up (AWU), package 102. Refer to the package dependencies of AWU.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Automatic Wake Up 33-9

Feature implementation

Step l-Assign at least three AWR routes (RANF, and

RAN2)

the RANF route.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

TKTP

RTYP

NEW, CHG

o-99

o-51

AWR

AUD

xxxx

New or change

Route Data Block

Customer number

Route number

AWU RAN route

Audichron recorder

Trunk route access code

Must be different from RANF

Note: Route 31 cannot

be used for AWU on 1 release 13 and earlier.

LD16 Define the route.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

TKTP

RTYP

NEW, CHG

RDB

o-99

o-51

AWR

AUD

xxxx

New or change

Route Data Block

Customer number

Route number

Must be different from RANF route number

AWU RAN route

Audichron recorder

Trunk route access code

Must be different from RANF and RAN1

Note: Route 31 cannot be used for AWU on Xl 1 release 13 and earlier.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

33-10 Automatic Wake Up

LD16

Define the RAN2 route.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

TKTP

RTYP

NEW, CHG

RDB

o-99

o-51 1

AWR

AUD

xxxx

New or change

Route Data Block

Customer number

Route number

Must be different from RANF and RAN1 route numbers

AWU RAN route

Audichron recorder

Trunk route access code

Note: Route

cannot be used for AWU on

Xl 1

release

and earlier.

Step 2-Build a trunk for each route

LD14

Define the trunk for RANF.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

RTMB

NEW, CHG

AWR

lscu

o-99

New or change

AWU RAN trunk

Terminal Number

Customer number

Route number and member number

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Automatic Wake Up 33-11

LD14

Define the trunk for

REQ

TYPE

CUST

RTMB

NEW, CHG

AWR

lscu

o-99

LD14

Define the trunk for RAN2.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

RTMB

NEW, CHG

AWR

lscu

o-99

New or change

AWU RAN trunk

Terminal Number

Must be a different TN from RANF

Customer number

Route number and member number

Must be a different RTMB from RANF

New or change

AWU RAN trunk

Terminal Number

Must be a different TN from RANF and RAN1

Customer number

Route number and member number

Must be a different RTMB from RANF and

Xl 1 features and services

33-12

Automatic Wake Up

Step 3-Enable AWU for the customer

LD15

-Enable Automatic Wake Up in Customer Data Block (Part 1 of 2).

REQ

TYPE

CUST

AWU

ATRC

CONF

RANF

RAN2

LA1 1

LA12

LA21

LA22

LA31

CHG

o-99

Yes

Yes, (No)

o-1 59

o-51 1

O-51 1

O-511 <CR>

O-51 1

o-51 1

O-51 1

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Activate AWU for a customer

Allow or deny attendant recall

Conference loop number (see note below)

Music RAN route number

Primary AWR route number

Secondary AWR route number

Language RAN route 1

X = remove language RAN route definition

Language AWR route 2

Language 2, AWR route 1

Language 2, AWR route 2

Language 3, AWR route 1

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Automatic Wake

33-13

-Enable Automatic Wake Up in Customer Data Block (Part 2 of 2).

LA32

LA41

LA42

LA51

LA52

NRWU

o-51 1

o-51

o-51 1

hhmm

2-(5)

TAWU

Language 3, AWR route 2

Language 4, AWR route 1

Language 4, AWR route 2

Language 5, AWR route 1

Language 5, AWR route 2

RAN2 start time

RAN2 end time

Number of rings for a wake up call (Xl 1 release 15 and

later)

Number of wake up tries for an unanswered AWU call (Xi 1

release 16 and later)

Note Conference loops are required only for release 14 and earlier releases.

Note 2: AWR route number ranges from O-51 1 apply to NT, 51, 61, 71, and 81 only. Range is O-1 27 for

all other options. Enter to remove a route.

Step 4-Allow AWU on telephones and attendant consoles

Set language and CCOS for type telephones (on a per TN basis).

REQ

TYPE

LANG

CHG

lscu

(0)-5

CCSA Controlled Class of Service allowed

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Language number

To remove entry, precede with X

features and services 553-3001-305

33-14 Automatic Wake Up

-Set language

and CCOS for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones (on a per TN basis).

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317, 2616, 3000

lscu

Terminal Number

CCSA Allow Controlled Class of Service

LANG Language number

To remove entry, precede with X

KEY xx WUK

Assign a wake up key on a telephone

Must be a key/lamp pair (Xl 1 release 16 and later)

Note: To assign a language on a per DN basis, use a Background Terminal.

LD12

-Allow access to AWU from attendant consoles.

REQ CHG

TYPE

aaa

lscu

KEY

xx AWU

Change

Console type

aaa =

ATT,

Terminal Number

Add an AWU key

Feature operation

From a telephone with a wake up key

To program a wake up call from an idle telephone, follow these steps:

Press

Wake Up.

The indicator flashes.

2 Dial the wake up request time, in 24-hour format a.m. as

p.m. as 1930).

Telephones with display show a dash followed by the time. If no time is

set, a single dash is shown.The indicator keeps flashing.

Press

Wake Up.

The indicator goes on steady.

features and services 553-3001-305

Automatic Wake Up

33-15

Press the

Release

(RLS) or

PDN

key while programming a wake up request

to abort the wake up request. Any previously defined wake up time will

remain.

Display telephones

If the time interval chosen for the wake up call is full,

the system searches for and displays the next available time. If the system

cannot find another time, the display shows four dashes (- and the

Wake Up indicator remains flashing. If the system finds another time, the

guest has three options:

To accept the new wake up time, press

Wake Up.

To reject the new wake up time and enter another one, dial the new wake

up time and press

Wake Up

to validate the new time.

To abort the wake up time, press

RLS

or the

Prime DN

key (PDN).

To cancel a wake up request, follow these steps:

Press

Wake Up.

The indicator flashes.

Dial the octothorpe

Press

Wake Up.

The indicator goes off.

To check a wake up request on a telephone with display, follow these steps:

Press

Wake Up.

The indicator flashes and the current wake up time appears on the

display. If no wake up time is programmed, the display shows a dash

Press

Wake Up.

The indicator lights if a wake up time is set.

Note: In each scenario, the Wake Up indicator lights and the display

clears, except when the wake up time is aborted and no wake up time was

programmed before the abort. In this case, the Wake Up indicator stays

off. If a time was programmed before aborting, the previous wake up

time is restored, and the indicator is on.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

33-16

Automatic Wake Up

From an attendant console

To program a wake-up call from an attendant console, follow these steps:

Press

A. Wake Up.

The A. Wake Up, ICI, lpk, and S indicators light.

Note:

If the displayed number is not the number requiring the wake up

call, dial the proper number.

Press the

octothorpe

If the A. Wake Up indicator remains on steadily, the dialed number is

valid. If it flashes, the number is invalid.

3 Dial the requested wake up time using a 24-hour format. Press

A. Wake Up

again.

If the A. Wake Up indicator remains on without flashing, the requested

wake up time is acceptable; if it flashes, the time is not acceptable. Enter

the new time; if it is acceptable, the indicator goes on without flashing.

Press

RLS

to end the procedure.

To cancel a wake up call from an attendant console, follow these steps:

Press

A. Wake Up.

The A. Wake Up indicator lights.

Note:

If the displayed number is not the number requiring cancellation

of the wake-up call, dial the proper number.

Press the

octothorpe

then press

A. Wake Up

again.

The A. Wake Up indicator goes off and the wake up request is canceled.

Note:

If the indicator flashes quickly, no wake up call was found for the

dialed number. Press

A. Wake Up

again.

Press

RLS

to end the procedure.

If a guest has not responded after three wake-up call attempts, you’ll hear a

continuous buzz. The indicator will flash quickly. The extension number of

the room that has failed to respond will be displayed. Follow these steps:

Press

A. Wake Up

to cancel the notification.

Press

RLS

to end the procedure.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Auxiliary Processor Link

The Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) is a full-duplex asynchronous data link

capable of accommodating up to a 4800 baud rate. It is connected to the

Meridian SL- system through a Serial Data Interface (SDI) port.

This feature is currently used in conjunction with the Integrated Messaging

System package and the ACD Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)

package.

Operating parameters

There are no feature requirements.

Feature interaction

None.

Feature packaging

Auxiliary Processor Link (APL), package 109, has no feature package

dependencies.

Feature implementation

Not applicable.

Feature operation

Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

34-2 Auxiliary Processor Link

1 features and services

Auxiliary Signaling

In some situations, customers require special auxiliary devices such as bells,

buzzers, or lights to be connected through the Meridian SL- system. These

devices are activated through a regular Line Card and its associated

data block.

Operating parameters

A ringer, or any other special signaling device that can be activated by

a 20 Hz ringing signal, can be equipped through the Line Card.

A maximum of five ringers or equivalent devices can be configured on

one TN. This limit depends on the device’s impedance to the 20 Hz ringing.

Feature interaction

Mixed

If the DN associated with the signaling device appears on

SL- or Meridian digital telephones, the telephone can answer or

into an active call.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic Xl system software.

Feature implementation

The data block is programmed in LD

Feature operation

Not applicable.

features and services 553-3001-305

35-2 Auxiliary Signaling

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Background Terminal

Hospitality and health care personnel use Background Terminal (BGD) to

enter. retrieve, and modify data associated with the following features:

Automatic Wake Up (AWU)

Room Status (RMS)

Message Registration (MR)

Call Party Name Display (CPND)

BGD helps monitor system operations by providing a

visual

display of

information changes. hard-copy backup, and traffic statistics.

For complete information, refer to the

(553-23

1 16).

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

36-2 Background Terminal

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued: 92 1231

Status: Standard

Xl 1 Release: All

Bridging

37-1

With Bridging, the same DN can appear on up to eight single-line telephones.

A maximum of five of these telephones can be equipped with ringers.

Incoming calls ring all telephones with a ringer connected and can be

answered at any of the single-line telephones.

Operating parameters

A maximum of five ringers are allowed on one parallel loop.

Feature interaction

Privacy is lost when telephones are bridged. Any appearance of the DN can

enter the call by going off hook.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic 1 system software.

Feature implementation

Not applicable.

Feature operation

Not applicable.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

37-2 Bridging

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Busy Lamp Field

There are two types of Busy Lamp Field (BLF) modules.

QMT3 Lamp Field Array

The QMT3 Lamp Field Array is an add-on module for SL- 1 telephones and

QCW attendant consoles. It displays the status of a specified 150 consecutive

Directory Numbers defined in LD 15 (Standard Busy Lamp Field

(SBLF)). A maximum of two Lamp Field Arrays can be supported per

customer. Both Lamp Field Arrays in the customer group display status for

the same 150

Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module

The Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module (BLFKGM) is an add-on

module for the M 1250 or M2250 attendant consoles. It can be configured to

display the status of a specified 150 consecutive (Standard Busy Lamp

Field (SBLF), or all 100 at a time (Enhanced Busy Lamp Field (EBLF)).

By monitoring the status, an attendant can tell a caller if the DN is busy prior

to extending the call.

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field (EBLF) Array, introduced in X 11 release 15,

displays the status of all for a customer. The displays the

status of 100 at a time on up to 63 M attendant consoles.

Each of the Console Graphics Modules can display a different hundreds

group, while up to 20 can display the same hundreds group

simultaneously.

When the attendant extends a call, a hundreds group is displayed after enough

digits have been entered to determine the group. After a group has been

established, the shows the status for each DN in that group.

Figure 1 shows an example of the Enhanced Busy Lamp Field (EBLF) on

the

features and services

553-3001-305

38-2

Busy Lamp Field

The EBLF continues to display the status of the hundreds group until another

group is determined or until the module is cleared. The display is updated

whenever the status of a DN in that group changes. The BLF is cleared when

the attendant dials a new series of digits or releases the call.

Figure 38-l shows the Standard Busy Lamp Field (SBLF) display on the

CGM. The first and last in the displayed group are listed as START EXT

and END EXT. The START and END EXT show the hundreds group

displayed. The top row on the CGM designates the tens group. The left side

shows the ones group. Figure 38-1 shows the busy to be

and 3549.

Figure 38-1

Standard Busy Lamp Field on the

START EXT:

3400

END EXT:

3549

01234 56789 01234

n ..m,

. . . . .

. . n Am

. . . . .

. . . .

n .m..

. . .

n . . . .

. . n n

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

q Am . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

n mm..

. . . . .

. . . . . .

. n

. n n

= idle extension

= busy extension

idle extension with supplementary information

= busy extension with supplementary information

553-5109

Xi 1 features and services

Busy Lamp Field

38-3

Figure 38-2 shows a system monitored by the EBLF. Each telephone

represents a busy DN, listed beneath the telephone icon. The display screen

at the top of the module defines the hundreds group as 35. The CGM displays

the busy within that group. The larger squares represent busy telephones

within the group, and the smaller squares represent idle The attendant

can quickly see which telephones are busy and which are idle.

Figure 38-2

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field monitoring (example)

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

38-4

Busy Lamp Field

Operating parameters

Enough hundreds groups must be defined to support the maximum number of

telephones to be monitored. The maximum number of hundreds is 99.

The EBLF requires an attendant console equipped with a

It does not work with the earlier attendant consoles using a

QMT3 Lamp Field Array.

The SBLF and the EBLF are incompatible.

The EBLF supports mixed dialing plans or 7 digits), but each

hundreds group defined must be unique. For example, 25XX and

cannot be configured in the same system. Any group must

begin with something other than 25 because, in this case, the CGM would be

updated for 2500 through 2599.

Only 20 attendant consoles can be updated for the same hundreds group

simultaneously. If more than 20 consoles are monitoring the status of a single

hundreds group, only the first 20 are updated. The remaining consoles display

the earlier status, and an error message is output at this occurrence. (An

unlimited number of consoles can be updated when they display different

hundreds groups.)

Feature interactions

Not applicable.

Feature packaging

Busy Lamp Field Array (BLFA) is included in basic X11 system software.

EBLF requires X11 release 15 or later software and the

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Busy Lamp Field

38-5

Feature implementation

Response to the following prompts in the listed overlays is required for this

feature to operate properly. In addition, at least one DN in each hundreds

group must be activated.

Estimate the memory required for Enhanced Busy Lamp Field trees.

REQ

TYPE

TYNM

CHG

EBLF xx yy z

Change

Customer Data Block

Enhanced Busy Lamp Field

xx = number of Customers to get EBLF

yy = Average number of Hundreds Groups (HGRP) per

customer

z = Average DN length (4, 5, 6, or 7)

Note: This overlay is required for ST and 21 systems.

LD15

Define the Busy Lamp Field/Console Graphics Module options in the customer data

REQ

TYPE

CUST

OPT

LFTN

LFFD

CHG

CDB

o-99

(XLF)

IBL, (XBL)

lscu

xxx . . x

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Include (exclude) Standard Busy Lamp Field

Include (exclude) Enhanced Busy Lamp Field

Lamp Field TN for first display console.

Prompted only if OPT = ILF

Lamp Field TN for second display console

Secondary TN if this is the attendant console

First DN for the Lamp Field Array

Prompted only if OPT = ILF

Xl features and services

38-6 Busy Lamp Field

Identify which attendant consoles have Enhanced Busy Lamp Field on the

REQ

TYPE

EBLF

CHG

ATT, 1250, 2250

lscu

BLFA, (BLFD)

Change

Console type

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) Enhanced Busy Lamp Field

Prompted only if TYPE = 1250 or 2250

When the BLF is configured before the telephones are programmed, the

procedures in and are not required. As an alternative to

reentering data when the BLF is configured after the telephones, a sysload

associates the DN with the Hundreds Group (HGRP).

Activate DN hundreds groups for EBLF for each DN within each hundreds group.

CHG Change

TYPE

500 Telephone type

lscu

Terminal Number

xxx x

Reenter Directory Number (no change necessary)

-Activate DN hundreds groups for EBLF for each DN within each hundreds group.

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

aaaa

lscu

xx aaa

Change

Telephone type

aaaa = 2009, 2216,

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Reassign Directory Number (no change necessary)

xx = key number

aaa

DN type

= Directory Number

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Lamp Field

38-7

Feature operation

To display the status of extensions on the (attendant), follow these

steps:

Press the SHIFT key, then the key.

The console is in the mode.

Press the Mode key

The screen displays the main menu.

Dial 0 (zero).

The BLF/CGM displays the SBLF or the EBLF, depending on which

option is configured in the system software.

For complete feature operation, see

Field/Console

user

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

38-8 Busy Lamp Field

features and services

553-3001-305

Call Detail Recording

Call Detail Recording (CDR) records information about selected calls for

accounting purposes. For each call, CDR identifies the calling and called

parties and notes the time and duration of the call. A record describing the

complete call is output by the Meridian 1 system when the call is terminated.

The following three recording options are available and can be specified by

the customer in any combination for each trunk route:

all outgoing calls

all outgoing toll calls

all incoming calls

For outgoing calls. all calls seizing a trunk in that route are recorded from the

time of trunk seizure, no matter how long or short the call is. If answer

supervision is allowed on the Meridian 1 system, calls placed over tandem tie

trunks are billed from the time the call is answered. The caller is not charged

the time it takes for dialing, digit outpulsing. or ringing.

For incoming calls, all calls answered by a telephone or attendant console are

recorded.

Three output options are available:

System terminal: CDR

system

terminal (CTY)

Information is output in ASCII serial format suitable for a system

terminal or equivalent device.

Magnetic tape: CDR Data Link (CLNK)

Information is output in binary format to a QCA 1 1 CDR machine for

downstream processing.

Both system terminal and magnetic tape.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

39-2 Call Detail Recording

The Meridian 1 system provides access to as many as 16 input/output ports,

which can include any combination of designated CDR system terminal

(CTY) or CDR Data Link (CLNK) ports. Because each customer on a

Meridian can access multiple CDR ports, system terminal and magnetic

tape CDR recording machines can be used at the same time for the same

customer.

Q record option X11 release 3

and later software provide an

integrated Automatic Call Distribution/Call Detail Recording (ACD/CDR)

call processing interface for Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) applications

such as emergency 911 services and airline reservation systems.

For example, a call to an emergency 911 ACD queue is initially screened by

the Meridian 1 system. The caller’s name, location, and problem are entered

into the call profile on the customer’s computer. After this information is

collected, the call is transferred or to the appropriate public

service division. When the division answers the call, the Meridian 1 system

informs the customer’s computer of the transfer or conference. The

customer’s computer then displays the call profile on a CRT at the remote

public service location.

The ACD/CDR call processing interface can be configured from a CDR TTY

(CTY) port. Connection records (records created by this option) include

Q records, for a connections between a trunk and an agent

R records, for calls transferred by an agent

F records, for conferences set up by an agent

Two-party calls generate only one record. Calls involving additional parties

generate multiple records. These records always show the trunk associated

with the original call, unless it is an internal call. A set of records identifies

all parties involved in the call. If the call is transferred to other parties,

however, only those involved at call termination are identified. The call

do not wrap on the printer.

1 features and services

Call Detail Recording 39-3

The following information is recorded for each call:

customer number

calling party identification

terminating party identification

terminal number (if applicable)

date and time at start and end of call

call duration

digits dialed

tenant number

If a Meridian 1 user has placed a call using Basic Alternate Route

Selection/Network Alternate Route Selection or

Consolidated Dialing Plan (CDP), the digit field shows the letter A followed

by the appropriate code and the dialed digits.

Note:

If the user has accepted a route designated as expensive, the letter

E is shown instead of A.

Optional CDR software packages

CDR TTY (CTY)

Outputs call records on one or more compatible

devices. Provides a hard copy of the call records and can be used with the

other CDR optional packages.

CDR Data Link (CLNK)

Formats call records for storage on magnetic tape.

Used with the single- or multi-port CDR storage system.

CDR with Charge Account (CHG)

Bills calls directly to specific charge

account numbers.

Internal Call Detail Recording (ICDR) X11 release 10 and later software

Produces a CDR record (type L) for internal calls, including telephone and

attendant console calls.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

39-4 Call Detail Recording

One of two classes of service internal CDR allowed (ICDA) or internal

CDR denied (ICDD) is assigned to each telephone or attendant console

requiring a CDR record. ICDA class of service generates internal call records

for the telephone. ICDD class of service disallows this new record type on a

per telephone basis. The class of service default is ICDD.

For an internal CDR record to be produced, the following criteria must be

met:

CDR must be activated.

All connecting parties must be telephones, attendant consoles, or internal

conferees.

One party or both parties must have ICDA class of service.

When a telephone disconnects from a call, the speech path between the two

parties is released. If an internal record is warranted, only one is produced,

even if both the originating and terminating telephones have ICDA class of

service. Also, when a conference loop is involved in the call, it is always

considered the originator.

Attendant consoles can also be assigned an ICDR class of service and are

treated like telephones.

When an attendant with ICDA class of service disconnects from a loop (for

an internal call), a maximum of two internal call records is produced, one for

the source and one for the destination.

An internal CDR record is produced when an internal call is released or

modified, or when a multiple-party call is released. The recorded duration of

the internal CDR excludes ringing time.

For details on internal CDR record and magnetic tape formats, refer to

Call

Detail Recording description

(553-2631-100).

Outpulsed Digit Option, X11 release 12 and later

stores outpulsed instead

of dialed digits to generate the CDR record. This option applies to calls using

Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS) or Network Alternate Route

Selection (NARS) software only.

features and services 553-3001-305

Call Detail Recording 39-5

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) and Route Selection-Automatic Number

Identification are not affected by this option. With both BARS and

NARS packages, the CDR record follows the BARS format. For additional

information on CDR, refer to

(553-2631-100).

CDR Expansion, Xl 1 release 13 and later

allow Directory Numbers

fields of CDR records to be expanded to accommodate up to seven digits.

Other fields (such as customer, route, and record type) are also expanded.

This option works in conjunction with DN Expansion (DNXP).

CDR Answer Supervision for Ground Start Trunks

(Xl 1 release 18 and later)

CDR Answer Supervision for Ground Start (and Loop Start) trunks detects

answer supervision on Ground and Loop Start trunks when sent as reverse

battery from the Central Office, and generates Call Detail Records based on

actual answer received rather than trunk seizure. A Ground Start trunk or a

North American Loop Start trunk with answer supervision begins Call Detail

Recording when reverse battery from the CO is detected.

Note

I: Ground Start Answer Supervision is available with X11 release

18 and later. Loop Start Answer Supervision is available with Xl 1

release 14 and later.

Note 2:

Trunks without answer supervision capability continue to

generate Call Detail Records when the trunk is seized.

The A in ther (Terminating ID) field indicates that an answer was

received on an answer supervision trunk. Otherwise, a T appears in that field.

For Ground and Loop Start trunks, the A appears when answer supervision is

detected from the CO. Select this option with the AIA prompt in LD16.

Class of Service

To enable answer supervision, the Polarity Sensitive Pack (PSP) of

Service must be set. PSP indicates that answer supervision is detected by

battery reversal on the CO trunk. If Polarity Insensitive Pack (PIP) is set,

battery reversal is not detected, and Call Detail Records begin at trunk

seizure.

features and services 553-3001-305

39-6 Call Detail Recording

Refer to for the various classes of service and their effects on answer

supervision and Call Detail Records. The table applies to both Ground and

Loop Start trunk types.

Table 39-1

Call Detail Record Generation with answer supervision

OAL

YES

OTL

OAN

CDR

affected

CDR begins

NO *

YES/NO

No CDR

N/A NO

All calls Trunk seizure

YES N/A NO

Toll calls Trunk seizure

N/A NO YES

All calls Reverse battery for answered calls;

Trunk seizure for unanswered calls

YES NO YES

Toll calls Reverse battery for answered calls;

Trunk seizure for unanswered calls

YES YES

YES

Answered

calls Reverse battery

YES

Toll calls

Note: If

OAL

and OTL are NO, then OAN is always NO.

Reverse battery

Legend:

PSP = Answer Supervision CLS for Ground Start and Loop Start trunks

OAL CDR for outgoing calls

OTL CDR for outgoing toll calls

OAN CDR for answered calls only

Not applicable. The option can be YES or NO, and does not affect CDR.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Detail Recording 39-7

Operating parameters

The capacity of the CDR system is limited by two factors:

the maximum rate at which information can be output to the devices

or input to the CDR magnetic tape unit

the storage capacity of the magnetic tape unit

Customer-provided auxiliary processors do not have to be modified to

process an internal CDR record.

Internal CDR data input is not supported through Attendant Administration.

When configuring a Ground Start trunk with the PSP class of service, it

should be confirmed that the Central Office provides reverse battery for

ground start trunks. Otherwise, CDR records will NOT be generated.

Feature interactions

Automatic Call Distribution

If ICDR criteria are satisfied, internal records are produced for ACD

telephones on completion of an internal or inter-position call. In all cases,

the ACD position ID is shown on the originator or terminator identifier

field of the internal record.

When the supervisor releases Observe Agent, internal records show that

the ACD agent and the internal party are connected with the conference

loop.

When the supervisor activates or releases Answer Emergency, the

interactions are similar to those with Observe Agent and internal records

are produced.

1 features and services

39-8 Call Detail Recording

Call Modification

If ICDR criteria are satisfied, internal CDR records are produced in the

following situations:

when a party joins or leaves a conference

.when conference parties leave a conference (the last two parties

remaining in the connection are treated as a normal call)

.when a call is transferred

.when a call is parked

.when a party is disconnected from a group call

.when an attendant activates Busy Verify from a console

Directory Number Expansion

If the DNXP package is equipped without the CDRE package, CDR

records are generated in the unexpanded format and the DN fields

contain only the trailing four digits of a DN.

Integrated Messaging System

When an internal call is routed to Integrated Messaging System (IMS)

and ICDR criteria are satisfied, the IMS position ID is displayed on the

terminator identifier field of the internal record.

Multiple Appearance Directory Number

If the Auxiliary ID is turned on (through LD1.5) and originating or

terminating parties or both have Multiple Appearance Directory

Numbers the Terminal Number (TN) is printed in the

Auxiliary Identifier field of the internal record.

Override

When party A overrides party B while B is in conversation with party C,

the speech path between B and C is disconnected, and a three-party

connection is established. Therefore, when party A releases, multiple

internal records are produced (if the ICDR criteria are satisfied). These

records show the conference loop with each individual party. Also, when

an attendant releases from overriding on a Do Not Disturb (DND)

telephone, internal records are produced (if the ICDR criteria are

satisfied).

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Detail Recording 39-9

Feature packaging

Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4, requires at least one of the

following:

Call Detail Recording on TTY (CTY), package 5

Call Detail Recording on Data Link (CLNK), package 6

Call Detail Recording on Teletype (CTY), package 5, requires:

Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4

Call Detail Recording on Data Link (CLNK), package 6, requires:

Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4

Charge Account for CDR (CHG), package 23, requires:

Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4

Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB), package 24

ACD CDR Queue record (CDRQ), package 83, requires:

Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4

Basic ACD (BACD), package 40

Internal CDR (ICDR), package 108, requires:

Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4

CDR Expansion (CDRE), package 151, requires:

Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4

DN Expansion (DNXP), package 1.50

1 features and services 553-3001-305

39-10

Call Detail Recording

Feature implementation

LD17

Define Call Detail Recording link and priority.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE CFN

Configuration record

PARM Yes To allow changes to system parameters

PCDR Yes, (No) Priority is or is not given to the CDR recording; Yes = an idle

call register is selected before call processing

Yes Allow changes to devices

NEW TTY O-5

Add a CDR port

CDNO

o-15

SDI card number

DENS SDEN, DDEN, SDI card ports

4DEN

USER CDL CDR port connects to a data link

CTY

CDR port connects to a system terminal

Yes, (No) Calling line ID in the CDR; prompted only if

CDR = Yes and package is equipped

features and services 553-3001-305

Call Detail Recording

39-11

Call Detail Recording link and priority for X11 release 18 and later.

REQ

TYPE

PARM

PCDR

CTYP

DNUM

USER

CHG

CFN

Yes

Yes, (No)

Yes

NEW TTY O-l 5

aaaa

o-1 5

CDL

CTY

Yes, (No)

Change

Configuration record

To allow changes to system parameters

Priority is or is not given to the CDR recording; Yes = an idle

call register is selected before call processing

Allow changes to devices

Add a CDR port

Card type

aaaa

= DCHI, MSDL, MSPS, SDI,

Device number printed automatically (same as

number)

CDR port connects to a data link

CDR port connects to a system terminal

Calling line ID in the CDR; prompted only if

CDR = Yes and package is equipped

1 features and services 553-3001-305

39-12 Call Detail Recording

Define Call Detail Recording for a customer.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CDR

Yes, (No) Enable or disable CDR

Yes, (No) Auxiliary identification (TN) for multiple appearance is

or is not included in CDR records; enter Yes if there are

multiple appearance that exist as prime

TRCR Yes, (No) Enable or disable carriage return after each ACD CDR

connection record; when TRCR = Yes, all CDR system

terminal ports in the system are affected.

CDPR

MCR

PORT

Yes, (No)

o-1 5

<CR>

CDP in CDR; prompted only if CDP package is equipped

Yes = trunk access code is inserted before the dialed digits

No = distant steering code or trunk steering code is

replaced by trunk access code

Mini-CDR equipped

CDR port number

Stop the PORT prompt

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Detail Recording

39-13

LD16 Gather data for each trunk route for which Call Detail Recording is to be applied.

REQ CHG

TYPE

RDB

CUST

o-99

ROUT

o-51 1

CDR Yes, (No)

INC Yes, (No)

QREC Yes, (No)

OAL

Yes, (No)

AIA

Yes, (No)

O T L Yes, (No)

OAN (Yes), No

OPD Yes, (No)

Change

Route data block

Customer number

Route number

Enable or disable CDR for the route

Enable or disable CDR for incoming calls

Enable or disable the CDR connection record for ACD

records

Enable or disable CDR for outgoing calls (tie)

Identify answered calls

Enable or disable CDR for outgoing toll calls; prompted if

OAL = No and ROUT = CO, DID, FX, or WATS

CDR allowed or not allowed on all answered calls;

prompted if OAL or OTL = Yes

CDR with outpulsed digits; prompted if OAL or OTL = Yes

No = put dialed digits into CDR

Yes = put outpulsed digits into CDR

Enable/disable the recording of authorization codes in Call Detail Recording.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

SPWD

ACDR

AUB

o-99

xxxx

Yes, (No)

Change

Authcode data block

Customer number

Secure data password

Enable or disable the recording of authorization codes in

CDR

1 features and services 553-3001-305

39-14

Call Detail Recording

Internal Call Detail Recording for telephones.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

500 Telephone type

lscu

Terminal Number

ICDA, (ICDD) Allow (Deny) class of service

-Add/change Internal Call Detail Recording for and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =

, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018,

2317, 2616, 3000

lscu

Terminal Number

ICDA, (ICDD) Allow (Deny) class of service

LD12

Add/change Internal Call Detail Recording for attendant consoles.

REQ CHG

TYPE ATT,

lscu

(ICDD)

Feature operation

Change

Console type

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) class of service

Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued: 93 10 31

Status: Standard

1 Release: All

Forward All Calls

40-l

Call Forward All Calls (CFW) automatically forwards incoming calls to

another destination, within or outside the Meridian 1 system. Only calls to the

Prime DN or any single-appearance DN on the telephone are forwarded.

Outgoing calls can still be placed from the telephone when Call Forward is

active.

1 release 19 and later provides the following additional capabilities. First,

it supports selectively activating Call Forward depending on the source of the

originating party. With the Internal Call Forward (ICF) feature, the user can

cause only

internal

calls to be forwarded. Second, the Call Forward Reminder

Tone (CFRT) presents special dialtones on telephones with CFW

active. One tone indicates that CFW is active; a second indicates that there is

a message waiting for the telephone with CFW active.

Call Forward All Calls, as well as Internal Call Forward, is assigned on a

per-telephone basis. SL-1 and digital telephones must be equipped with

separate key/lamp pairs to allow the activation and deactivation of each

feature. Customers can specify the length of the destination number in LD 11.

Options are 4, 8, 12,

23 digits. If you enter another number for the

length, the system rounds to the nearest acceptable choice. The default is 16

digits.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

40-2 Call Forward All Calls

When using Multiple Appearance call redirection is

determined based on the TN order in your DN block. To determine the TN

order, print the DN block from or LD22 (TYPE = DNB). When a call

comes in to a MADN, the system begins a search to determine how the call

will be handled. Using the TN list you printed, the system performs the

following search, beginning at the

bottom

of the TN list, and working up.

Search for the first Prime DN appearance of the MADN with Call

Forward All Calls activated.

If there are no Prime DN appearances, the first secondary DN appearance

with Call Forward All Calls Activated.

Note:

The search does not necessarily determine the lowest numerical

TN. The search starts at the bottom of the TN

list.

Operating parameters

The forwarding of a call depends on the access restrictions assigned to the

telephones and the trunks involved in the call. If call forwarding results in a

connection that is not permitted by the assigned access restrictions, the

incoming call is not forwarded.

The customer can specify which telephone determines the successful

completion of the call: the originating telephone or the forwarding telephone.

Internal Call Forward requires a programmable feature key. Therefore,

Internal Call Forward is not supported on BRI telephones.

Call Forward Reminder Tone does not apply to telephones such as the SL-1

that have a visual indication of active CFW status.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward All Calls 40-3

Call Forward Reminder Tone requires the presence of either a

(XCT) card or a Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) card.

Table 40-l shows the available card types and their markets.

Table 40-l

Tone and Cadence Card Types

Card Type

XCT

TDS

Identifier

QPC251

Market

International, including

North America

Japan

Feature interaction

X11 release 12 and later provides an option in LD15 to allow or disallow

telephones to program Call Forward All Calls to a Trunk Access Code. See

Call Forward External Deny.

Paging

Calls that originate on a tie trunk to a telephone that is redirected to a

paging route are blocked.

Multiple-Appearance Redirection Prime

X11 release 18 and later support

Multiple-Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP). This affects how call

redirection operation is defined. Refer to the MARP module in this document

for details.

Feature packaging

Internal Call Forward requires the 500 Set Features (package 73) for

telephones, and the Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) (package 139).

Call Forward Reminder Tone is packaged with the Call Forward All Calls

feature.

features and services 553-3001-305

40-4 Call Forward All Calls

Feature implementation

On a type telephone, the user accesses the Call All Calls

and Internal Call Forward features by dialing either the SPRE plus the feature

code, or the appropriate Flexible Feature Codes On a digital

telephone, the user accesses each feature via its feature key.

Activating the features requires service changes to Overlays 15, and

57.

Define Class of Service for Call Forward All Calls

REQ

TYPE

CUST

OPT

CHG

o-99

(CFO), CFF

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

CFO Calling party Class of Service is active during

Call Forward All Calls

CFF Forwarding party Class of Service is active

during Call Forward All Calls

CFTA (No), Yes No = deny telephones to Call Forward All Calls to a

Trunk Access Code (default is no)

Yes = allow telephones to Call Forward All Calls to a

Trunk Access Code

OPT (CFRD), CFRA Call Forward Reminder Tone denied (CFRD) for

telephones

Call Forward Reminder Tone allowed (CFRA) for

50012500 telephones

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward All Calls 40-5

Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for telephones

TYPE

CHG

500

lscu

CFW xx yyyy...y

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Allow Call Forward All Calls

xx maximum number of digits (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 23) in

the Call Forward destination number (default is 16

digits)

yyyy = number where calls are forwarded

Note: YYYY cannot be entered from the maintenance

terminal. When the telephone information is printed in

shows the call forward number.

FTR

ICF xx

Allow Internal Call Forward

xx = maximum number of digits (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 23) in

the Call Forward destination number (default is 16

digits)

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

40-6 Call Forward All Calls

-Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for digital telephones

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

aaaa

lscu

xx CFW yy

xx ICF yy zzzz

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2216,

Terminal Number

Define Call Forward All Calls

xx = key number; M2317 must use key 22

yy = maximum number of digits (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 23) in

the Call Forward All Calls destination number (default is

16 digits)

zzzz = number where calls are forwarded

Define Internal Call Forward

xx = key number

yy = maximum number of digits (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 23) in

the Call Forward All Calls destination number (default is

16 digits)

zzzz = number where calls are forwarded

Add/change Flexible Feature Codes for Internal Call Forward

Add, change, or remove an FFC table

Flexible Feature Code

REQ NEW, CHG, OUT

TYPE

FFC

CODE

xxxx

and may share the same code.

Access code for Internal CFW Activate

Access code for Internal CFW Deactivate

Access code for Internal CFW Verify

Internal CFW Activate Code (Note 1)

Internal CFW Deactivate Code (Note 1)

Internal CFW Verify Code

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward All Calls 40-7

Add/change Flexible Feature Codes for Internal Call Forward

REQ NEW, CHG, OUT Add, change, or remove an FFC table

TYPE

FFC Flexible Feature Code

CODE Access code for Internal CFW Activate

Access code for internal CFW Deactivate

Access code for Internal CFW Verify

xxxx

Internal CFW Activate Code (Note 1)

xxxx

Internal CFW Deactivate Code (Note 1)

xxxx

Internal CFW Verify Code

and may share the same code.

Feature operation

To forward all calls from an SL-1 or digital telephone:

Press

Forward.

2 Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

Press

Forward.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

To forward internal calls only from an SL-1 or digital telephone:

Press

Internal Call Forward.

2 Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

Press

Internal Call Forward.

To cancel Call Forward All Calls:

Press

Forward.

To cancel Internal Call Forward:

Press

Internal Call Forward.

40-8 Call Forward All Calls

To forward calls from a telephone:

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 74 (500 telephone)

or lift the handset and dial (2500 telephone).

or lift the handset and dial the Call Forward Allowed FFC.

Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

3 Hang up.

To forward internal calls from a telephone:

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914 (500 telephone)

or lift the handset and dial (2500 telephone)

or lift the handset and dial the Internal Call Forward FFC.

2 Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

3 Hang up.

To cancel Call Forward All Calls:

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 74 (500 telephone)

or lift the handset and dial (2500 telephone)

or lift the handset and dial the Call Forward Deny FFC.

To cancel Internal Call Forward:

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914 (500 telephone)

or lift the handset and dial (2500 telephone)

or lift the handset and dial the Internal Call Forward Deny FFC.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:- 93 08 01

Status: Standard

Release:

All

41-1

Call Forward Busy

Call Forward Busy (CFB) automatically routes incoming DID calls to the

attendant console when a telephone is busy. This capability is allowed or

denied in the Class of Service of the telephone.

Operating parameters

On incoming DID calls, Hunting takes precedence, followed by Call Waiting,

then Call Forward Busy. In busy situations, the call hunts if the telephone has

Hunting specified.

Feature interaction

Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Call Forward

Busy.

Call Waiting for telephones

If a telephone has and Call Waiting Allowed CLS and a Call

Waiting key, calls are forwarded to the attendant when the telephone is

busy and has another call waiting.

Call Waiting for multi-line telephones

If Class of Service allows CFB and Call Waiting Allowed, and the

telephone has a call waiting key, calls do

not

forward to the attendant

when the telephone is busy and another call is waiting.

When a telephone is busy, an incoming call hunts only if Hunting is

allowed for that telephone. If all the steps in the hunt group are busy, and

Call Waiting is not allowed, the call forwards to the attendant console.

Multiple-Appearance Directory Numbers

With Xl 1 release 18 and later, Hunting is controlled by the MADN

Redirection Prime (MARP) TN. See the description for MARP in this

document.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward Busy

With X11 release 17 and earlier, call redirection parameters are derived

from the TN data block (LD20 TNB) of the first TN in the DN block for

that DN (LD22 DNB) with hunting control enabled. Hunting control is

enabled by Hunting allowed (HTA) class of service for

telephones. For SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones, the DN key must

also be less than or equal to the Last Hunt Key (LHK).

When a telephone is service changed, the TN is moved to the beginning

of the DN list regardless of the TN’s numerical value. This telephone

remains at the of the list until another telephone is service

changed.

Note: If all the telephones in the MADN group are SL-1 and/or

Meridian digital telephones, ringing telephones are placed at the

beginning of the DN list, while non-ringing telephones are placed at the

end.

If a MADN appears in a group with several telephone types, the set type

affects where the TN appears in the list. telephones are listed

at the beginning, and SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones are listed in

numerical TN order at the end of the list. A service change to a

telephone moves its TN to the beginning of the list. A service change

an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone moves it to the end of the list. Call

redirection follows the TN order from beginning to end.

Night Service

When the system is in night service, DID calls forwarded by Call

Forward Busy are routed to the specified night number. If the night

telephone is busy, subsequent calls receive busy tone.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward Busy 41-3

Feature implementation

LD15

Add/change a Call Forward Busy Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) on attendant consoles.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

C DB Customer Data Block

CUST

Customer Number

ICI

xx CFB

Add a Call Forward Busy ICI key; xx = O-1 9

Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

500

lscu

FBA, (FBD)

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) Call Forward Busy

-Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =

lscu

Terminal Number

FBA, (FBD) Allow (Deny) Call Forward Busy

Feature operation

Not applicable.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

41-4

Call Forward Busy

features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:

92 1231

Status: Standard

Release:

42-1

Call Forward by Call Type

Call Forward Call Type (CFCT) routes calls receiving no answer or busy

signal to separately defined based on the type of incoming call. The two

types of incoming calls are internal and external.

An internal call is defined as a station-to-station call, a Direct Inward System

Access or an incoming call over a trunk route class marked as

internal. An external call is an incoming call over a trunk route class marked

as external. The trunk route data block (LD allows routes to be defined as

internal or external for this feature.

Four options are available at the customer level for Call Forward No Answer:

FDN, ATT, NO, and HNT. Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled

only when the FDN and HNT options are chosen. If Call Forward by Call

Type (CFCT) is not activated, the four options function as they did prior to

Xl release 10.

In LD Call Forward No Answer is defined by FNAT for external non-DID

calls and by FNAL for internal calls. FNAD continues to define Call Forward

No Answer for DID trunk calls.

CFCT is allowed or denied for each telephone in LD IO or LD 1 with Class

of Service If CFCT is allowed (CFTA), the forwarding

destination is also defined in LD 10 or LD 1

Once enabled, CFCT requires no intervention. How the system initiates Call

Forward by Call Type is described below.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

42-2 Call Forward by Call Type

When a call is presented to a telephone, the telephone is checked for the

appropriate Class of Service (HTA, FNA, CFTA). The incoming call is then

checked to determine if it is a telephone, DISA, or trunk call. If it is a trunk

call, the trunk route is checked to determine whether the call should be treated

as an internal or external call. After these checks, internal calls are forwarded

to the FDN or Hunt DN of the telephone. External calls are forwarded to the

EFD or EHT DN of the telephone.

The order in which the system handles no answer and busy calls is an

important consideration when implementing this feature. The order of

precedence is listed below.

Calls to telephones that do not answer:

Call Forward All Calls

Message Waiting

Call Forward No Answer

Attendant Recall

Calls to busy telephones:

Call Forward All Calls

Hunting

Call Waiting or Camp-on

Message Waiting Forward Busy

Call Forward Busy

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward by Call Type

42-3

Operating parameters

Attendant Administration does not support the entry of the new EFD and

EHT Class of Service required for Call Forward by Call Type.

The following trunk routes can be defined as internal or external call types for

CFCT: CO, DID, FX, ATVN, CCA, tie, WATS, and CSA.

Incoming DISA calls are always treated as internal calls irrespective of the

trunk route class mark defined for the incoming trunk.

If an incoming call has been modified by Call Forward All Calls or Hunting,

the Class of Service and forwarding DN are obtained from the dialed DN.

This applies when Call Forward No Answer specified at the customer level is

HNT or FDN.

Feature interaction

Attendant

An attendant-extended call is classified internal or external by the

originating telephone or class mark of the trunk type. This is the case

whether or not the attendant has released before forwarding occurs.

Automatic Timed Recall

Calls eligible for Flexible Call Forward No Answer treatment, and

handled by Call Forward by Call Type, use the Call Forward No Answer

timer in the customer data block as the recall timer for attendant extended

calls. Irrespective of the relative timeout for Automatic Timed Recall,

the ringing continues as long as allowed by the Call Forward No Answer

Timer.

Call Forward All Calls

If a call is unanswered at the forwarded DN, the telephone that has Call

Forward All Calls activated is checked for the Class of Service and the

call forward DN. If a chain of call forwarding occurs, the Class of

Service and the forward DN for Call Forward No Answer are obtained

from the first telephone in the chain. This applies when FDN and HNT

have been specified for Call Forward No Answer at the customer level.

Prior to release 10, when HNT was specified for Call

Forward No Answer, the Class of Service and Hunt DN for Call Forward

No Answer were obtained from the last telephone in the chain.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

42-4 Call Forward by Call Type

Call Forward No Answer

The sequence for forwarding unanswered calls is Call Forward All Calls,

Message Waiting, Call Forward No Answer, then Attendant Recall (if

the call is attendant-extended). The same sequence is used when Call

Forward by Call Type is active for the customer.

Call Transfer/Network Call Transfer

Calls modified by Call Transfer and Network Call Transfer receive

CFCT treatment. If party A (telephone or trunk) calls party B, and B

transfers to party C, the forwarding DN and Class of Service are obtained

from party C.

Conference

Calls modified by Conference receive CFCT treatment for the

telephone. If party A calls party B, and B tries to conference

in party C, the forwarding DN and Class of Service are that of C. For

example, Joan and Bob are in conversation, and they try to conference in

is not at his desk, so the attempted conference call is sent to

the destination associated with Mack’s telephone.

DID

Eligibility of a DID call for Call Forward by Call Type is determined by

allowing or denying the type of call in the customer data block (FNAD

prompt). The decision to treat a DID call as internal or external is made

on a trunk route basis.

Message Center

uses

the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN)

of the called telephone to route no answer calls. If CFCT is enabled,

unanswered internal calls use the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN

(FDN) to route a call. Unanswered external calls use the External

Flexible DN (EFD) to route a call.

Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers

Call redirection parameters like Call Forward No Answer are derived

from the TN data block of the prime appearance of the called MADN. If

there is more than one prime appearance, the parameters are selected

from the last TN in the DN block.

If more than one prime appearance of a MADN exists, the following

information must be considered prior to configuring call redirection

parameters for

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward by Call Type

42-5

The DNB organizes MADN information in numerical TN order. The TN

with the highest numerical value (000-O-06-03) is placed at the

beginning of the list. The list then continues in descending order with the

lowest numerical TN (000-O-03-01) at the end of the list. Service change

activity affects the organization of the DN list as described in the

following paragraphs.

If a telephone is service changed, its TN is moved to the beginning

of the DN list, irrespective of the numerical value. This telephone

remains at the beginning of the list until another service change or a

sysload.

If a DN appears on SL-1, and Meridian digital telephones,

the telephones are listed in numerical TN order at the top

of the list. and Meridian digital telephones are listed in

numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A service change to a

telephone moves its TN to the beginning of the list. A

service change to an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone moves its

TN to the end of the list.

.A sysload restructures the list back to numerical TN order, with

telephones at the top and SL-1 and Meridian digital

telephones at the bottom. Call redirection parameters continue to be

derived as described in the preceding paragraphs.

Second Level Call Forward No Answer

After a DN is rung and Call Forward by Call Type is activated, a

forwarded call is allowed Second Level Call Forward No Answer. This

is based on the originating party’s call type if the currently ringing

telephone has Second Level Call Forward No Answer activated.

Feature packaging

Call Forward by Call Type is included in basic X11 system software.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

42-6 Call Forward by Call Type

Feature implementation

Enable Call Forward by Call Type for a customer.

REQ

CUST

FNAD

FNAT

FNAL

CFNA

CHG

CDB

o-99

(HNT), ATT, NO, FDN

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Treatment for incoming DID calls

Treatment for incoming external calls

Treatment for incoming internal calls

Number of ringing cycles for CFNA

Define a trunk route as internal or external for Call Forward by Call Type.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

Customer Data Block

CUST o-99 Customer number

ROUT

xxx

Route number

RCLS INT, (EXT) Route class marked as internal or external

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward by Call Type 42-7

-Enable Call Forward by Call Type for telephones.

TYPE

HUNT

FTR

CHG

500

lscu

xxxx

CFTA, (CFTD)

EFD xxxx

EHT xxxx

FDN xxxx

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Hunt DN for internal calls

Allow (Deny) Call Forward by Call Type Telephone must

have Hunting (HTA), and Call Forward No Answer

(FNA) allowed.

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for external calls

Hunt DN for external calls

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for internal calls

-Enable Call Forward by Call Type for SL-1, M3000, and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

FDN

EFD

HUNT

EHT

LHK

CHG

aaaa

lscu

xxxx

CFTA, (CFTD)

xxxx

000

xxxx

000

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for internal calls

Allow (Deny) Call Forward by Call must

have Hunting (HTA), and Call Forward No Answer

(FNA) allowed

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for external calls

Hunt DN for internal calls

Short Hunt for internal calls

Hunt DN for external calls

Short Hunt for external calls

Last hunt key number for internal and external calls

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

42-8 Call Forward by Call Type

Feature operation

Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward External Deny

This enhancement provides the option to restrict, on a per-telephone basis, the

DN that can be programmed for Call Forward All Calls to internal only.

Internal are defined as:

that terminate on a telephone

that terminate on an SL- or Meridian digital telephone

that terminate on a data terminal defined in LD 10 or LD 1

Attendant or Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) local attendant

Listed

Message Center as defined in LD23

External include (but are not limited to) trunk access codes, Coordinated

Dialing Plan (CDP) steering codes, Basic and Network Alternate Route

Selection access codes, ESN Location Codes, non-message

center ACD numbers, Call Park numbers, and Direct Inward Services Access

numbers.

When Call Forward External Deny is enabled for a telephone:

a user trying to forward calls from a telephone to an external

DN receives overflow tone. The telephone is not call forwarded.

a user trying to forward calls from an SL- 1 or Meridian digital telephone

to an external DN receives overflow tone and the lamp associated with

the Call Forward key of the telephone flashes. The telephone is not call

forwarded.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

43-2

Call Forward External Deny

user trying to forward calls from a Meridian digital to a display

telephone to an external DN receives overflow tone. The telephone is not

call forwarded and one of the following messages is displayed:

Release and try again

(M2317 telephones)

Release, check, and try again

telephones)

a user trying to forward calls from a data module to an external DN does

not receive overflow tone. Calls are not forwarded and one of the

following messages is displayed:

Invalid data forward number

(M2317 telephones)

Data calls not forwarded

(M3000 telephones)

Operating parameters

External cannot be used with Call Forward All Calls if Call Forward

External Deny is enabled for the telephone.

Both ESN access codes and CDP steering codes are considered external

and cannot be used as a Call Forward All Calls DN if Call Forward External

is denied for the telephone.

The number of digits specified in or for the Call Forward DN

must be equal to or greater than the number of digits of any other internal DN.

Attendant Administration cannot change Call Forward External Deny Class

of Service.

Feature interaction

Call Forward All Calls

This feature overrides other Call Forward All Calls parameters. For

example, if Call Forward to Trunk Access Code (CFTA) is allowed for

the customer, but Call Forward External Deny (CFXD) is enabled for the

telephone, CFXD takes precedence and call forwarding to a trunk access

code is denied.

Network Call Forward

Call Forward External Deny restricts a telephone from being forwarded

unconditionally to a number that is not on the home switch. Therefore, it

and the Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate Access (ISDN

PRA) feature Network Call Forward are mutually exclusive.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward External Deny 43-3

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic 1 system software.

Feature implementation

Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

lscu

(CFXA), CFXD

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) Call Forward to an external DN

-Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for SL-1 or Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

lscu

(CFXA), CFXD

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

SLI

2216, 2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) Call Forward to an external DN

Feature operation

Not applicable.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

43-4 Call Forward External Deny

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward, Internal Calls

The Internal Call Forward (Internal CFW) feature operates with Xl release

19 and allows you to selectively forward only

calls to the Internal

CFW DN.

Internal CFW is activated/deactivated on a per telephone basis and is user

programmable when Internal CFW is activated. On an SL-1 or digital

telephone, the Internal CFW feature (ICF) key is the only access method. On

a type telephone, Internal CFW can be accessed by either dialing

SPRE and the Internal CFW feature code or by the appropriate

Flexible Feature Codes

All internal calls terminating on the primary (or any single appearance) DN

of an Internal CFW active telephone are automatically forwarded to the

programmed Internal CFW DN (refer to the operating parameters section for

information on primary and secondary, and single and multiple appearance

An internal call is defined by the Internal CFW feature as one of the following:

An extension-to-extension call

A Direct Inward System Access (DISA) call

An attendant originated call

A conference call

A Group Call feature initiated call

An incoming trunk call over a trunk route classified as internal (LD 16

where RCLS = INT)

An incoming ISDN trunk call using private numbering

Non-internal calls are not affected by the Internal CFW feature.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

44-2

Call Forward, Internal Calls

Parameters

CFW All Calls takes precedence over Internal CFW, but is not a prerequisite

for the Internal CFW feature. For example, if a telephone is already CFW All

Calls active, it will not be allowed to activate Internal CFW at the same time.

Internal CFW can only be activated if CFW All Calls is explicitly

deactivated.

Also, if Internal CFW is active when trying to activate CFW All Calls,

Internal CFW will automatically be deactivated.

Internal CFW operation is consistent with the CFW All Calls feature.

Therefore, when an SL-l/digital telephone activates Internal CFW, the

following will become Internal CFW activated:

The primary DN (key 0), regardless of whether the DN is multiple

appearance or not.

All secondary that are single appearance.

Consequently, if all the appearances of a multiple appearance DN are on

non-primary SL-l/digital telephone keys, calls to these will never

receive Internal CFW treatment.

When a type telephone activates Internal CFW, regardless of

whether the DN is multiple appearance or not, Internal CFW becomes

activated.

Internal CFW supports only the voice line on digital telephones that have both

voice and data options.

On 2317 and M3000 telephones, the CFW programming screen (invoked by

pressing the CFW soft key), is not displayed when the ICF key is pressed.

Instead, the screen displays the previously programmed ICF number.

If an Internal CFW call is rejected, a display message is given if the telephone

is digital and has a digit display module. (This display message is the same as

that given to a failed CFW All Calls activation request.) Otherwise, overflow

tone is given.

Internal CFW is not maintained through a sysload.

Internal CFW is not supported on BRI telephones.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Feature interactions

Call Forward, Internal Calls

Attendant Administration

This feature does not support Internal CFW.

Attendant Busy Verify

When the attendant is using this feature to call a

telephone that is Internal CFW active, the call will not receive Internal

treatment.

Attendant Extended Calls

When the attendant extends a call on its SRC key

to a telephone that is Internal CFW active, the call on the SRC key will only

receive Internal CFW treatment if it is an internal call.

Attendant Night Service

When a call to the attendant is redirected to the

Attendant Night DN that is defined on an Internal CFW active telephone, the

call will only receive Internal CFW treatment if it is an internal call.

Attendant Overflow

If Attendant Ovefflow redirects an internal call to a

telephone that is Internal CFW active, the call will remain in the attendant

queue, and will not receive Internal CFW treatment.

Call Forward Reminder Tone

The Call Forward Reminder Tones apply to Internal CFW.

If Call Forward Reminder Tone Allowed (CFRA), then whenever a PBX

telephone that is Internal CFW is activated goes off-hook to originate a call,

the telephone will hear the CFW Reminder Tone.

If the customer option is set to Call Forward Reminder Tone Denied

(CFRD), then whenever a PBX telephone that is internal CFW activated

goes off-hook to originate a call, it will hear the normal dial tone (DIAL).

If the customer option is set to Call Forward Reminder Tone Allowed

(CFRA, package then whenever a PBX telephone that is Internal

CFW is activated goes off-hook to originate a call, the telephone will

hear either the Call Forward Dial Tone (CFDT) or the Call

Forward/Message Waiting Dial Tone (CFMW).

If the customer option is set to Call Forward Reminder Tone Denied

(CFRD), then whenever a PBX telephone that is internal activated

goes off-hook to originate a call, it will hear either the normal dial tone

(DIAL) or the Message Waiting Dial Tone (MWDT).

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

44-4 Call Forward, internal Calls

Internal CFW takes precedence

over the following:

Call Waiting

Camp-on

Do Not Disturb

Hunting

Remote Call Forward

Remote CFW Activate (RCFA), Remote CFW

Deactivate (RCFD), and Remote Verify (RCFV) can only be

used to access CFW All Calls; they cannot be used to access Internal

CFW.

Feature packaging

Internal CFW requires the following packages:

Package 1 (CFW package required but does not have to be enabled)

Package 73 for access to type telephones

Package 139 to implement FFC

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward, Internal Calls 44-5

Feature implementation

LDlO-Add/change Internal CFW for type telephones.

REQ

TYPE

FTR

NEW

CHG

500

ICF

Add a new telephone.

Modify an existing telephone.

500 or 2500 type telephone.

Allow Internal CFW for the specified telephone and the

maximum forward DN length.

Remove Internal CFW from the telephone.

-Add/change Internal Calls for SL-1 or Meridian digital telephones.

TYPE

KEY

NEW

CHG

xxxx

xx ICF

xx null

Add a new telephone.

Modify an existing telephone.

Telephone type.

2317, 2616.

Define an Internal CFW feature key for the telephone.

The command consists of:

xx = key number

ICF = feature mnemonic

4-23 = the maximum forward DN length

nnnn

= forward DN

Remove function/feature from a key.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

44-6 Call Forward, Internal Calls

LD57

Add/change Internal CFW for type telephones using FFC.

R E Q N E W Add a new FFC table.

C H G Modify an existing FFC table.

O U T Remove an existing FFC code.

TYPE

FFC Flexible Feature Code.

CODE Access Code for Internal CFW Activate.

Access Code for Internal CFW Deactivate.

Access Code for Internal CFW Verify.

xxxx

Internal CFW Activate code.

xxxx

Internal CFW Deactivate code.

xxxx

Internal CFW Verify code.

Feature operation

SL-l/digital telephone

To forward internal calls from an SL-l/digital telephone:

Press the ICF key.

2 Dial the number calls are to be forwarded.

Press the ICF key.

To cancel Internal CFW from an SL-l/digital telephone:

Press the ICF key.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward, Internal Calls 44-7

50012500 type telephone

To forward internal calls from a type telephone:

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914 (Internal CFW feature code)

Lift the handset and dial the Internal CFW Activate (ICFA) FFC.

2 Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

To cancel Internal CFW from a type telephone:

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914 (Internal CFW feature code)

-or-

Lift the handset and dial the Internal CFW Deactivate (ICFD) FFC.

Related modules

When using Internal CFW, you may want to refer to the following related

1 release 19 features:

Call Forward Reminder Tone (CFRT)

Refer to the CFW All Calls module for a description of the Call Forward

Reminder Tone (CFRT) feature.

User Selectable Call Redirection

Refer to the User Selectable Call Redirection (USCR) module for a

description of this feature.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

44-8 Call Forward, Internal Calls

features and services

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call

Forward No Answer

Call Forward No Answer automatically forwards unanswered calls to another

DN. The customer can specify the number of rings (1 to 15) before the system

invokes Call Forward No Answer. The default is four rings.

Four options are available at the customer level for Call Forward No Answer:

deny for all telephones

route all unanswered calls to the attendant

route all unanswered calls to the Hunt number defined for the telephone

route all unanswered calls to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN

defined for the telephone (Xl 1 release 2 and later)

Flexible Call Forward No Answer, X11 release 2 and later

allow the

customer to specify, on a per-telephone basis, where an unanswered call

should be routed. This is independent of the Hunt number assigned to the

telephone. This capability is implemented on a per-customer basis and can be

specified for DID and non-DID call types. When activated, a call to a

telephone that does not answer within the specified number of ring cycles is

forwarded to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN) associated

with that telephone.

1 features and services

45-2 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

A call is forwarded under the following conditions:

The Class of Service of the dialed telephone is Forward No Answer

allowed.

Flexible Call Forward No Answer is enabled at the customer level.

The call has rung the specified number of times.

The Call Forward No Answer DN is valid and has been assigned.

System or telephone features such as Hunting and Call Forward All Calls may

result in the presentation of a call to a telephone that is different from the

dialed DN. In these cases, if the call is eligible for Flexible Call Forward No

Answer, it is forwarded to the DN specified for the dialed DN, not the ringing

DN.

When using Multiple Appearance call redirection is

determine based on the TN order in your DN block. To determine the TN

order, print the DN block from LD20 or LD22 (TYPE = DNB). When a call

comes in to a MADN, the system begins a search to determine how the call

will be handled. Using the TN list you printed, the system performs the

following search, beginning at the

top

of the TN list, and working up.

Search for the first Prime DN appearance of the MADN with Call

Forward All Calls activated.

If there are no Prime DN appearances, the TN at the bottom of the list

controls call redirection

Note:

The search does not necessarily determine the highest or lowest

numerical TN.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer 45-3

Operating parameters

Calls are forwarded one step only. For Call Forward No Answer

enhancements, refer to the Call Forward, Second Level module.

Incoming calls on private lines with the Restricted Call Modification option

enabled are not forwarded.

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN) can be assigned to telephones

with Message Waiting Allowed Class of Service. This is irrespective of the

telephone’s Class of Service and how forward no answer is specified in the

customer data block. Message Center always uses the FDN associated with

the telephone to route unanswered calls.

Feature interaction

Attendant Administration

Attendant Administration can assign and change a Flexible Call Forward

No Answer DN with the function key on the attendant console.

Automatic Timed Recall

Flexible Call Forward No Answer timing takes precedence over

Automatic Timed Recall timing. Irrespective of the relative time-out

intervals for each feature, ringing continues as long as allowed by Call

Forward No Answer.

Call Forward All Calls

Suppose that party A calls party B, and party B has programmed Call

Forward All Calls to party C. Flexible Call Forward No Answer will

forward a No Answer call at party C to the FDN associated with party B,

the dialed DN.

Call Waiting

If a call to a telephone gets CFNA treatment to another telephone that is

busy, then Call Waiting and Camp-On do not apply. The call will attempt

to terminate on the original DN again.

Meridian Mail Operator Revert

Prior to X11 release 13.32, Operator Revert was used to transfer a call

from an ACD Message Center (Meridian Mail). The originally dialed

number was not passed on to the person that received the transferred call.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

45-4 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

With release 13.32 and later the Called Party ID can be passed along

from the ACD Message Center when Operator Revert is activated. The

attendant can now activate the Message Waiting key for the Called Party

while active on the redirected call by pressing the Message Indicator key.

For example, Party A calls Party B, which Call Forward No Answers to

Meridian Mail. Party A dials 0 and is transferred to a message center with

“live” agents. The agent receiving the call sees information for Party B

along with the information for Party A, the calling party.

Multiple-Appearance DN Redirection Prime

Xl 1 release 18 and later supoort Multiple-Appearance DN Redirection

Prime (MARP). This feature affects call redirection operation. refer to

the MARP module in this document for details.

.If a telephone is service changed, its TN is moved to the beginning

of the DN list, irrespective of the numerical. This telephone remains

at the beginning of the list until another service change or a sysload.

If a DN is assigned as a Prime DN on a telephone and as a secondary

DN on one or more telephones, the DN list is still organized as

described in the preceding paragraphs. If only one prime appearance

of a DN exists, however, call redirection parameters are derived

from the TN of the prime appearance telephone, even though it may

not be at the end of the list. A prime appearance is always the first

TN used when the system looks for call redirection instructions.

If a DN appears on SL-1, and Meridian digital telephones,

the telephones are listed in numerical TN order at the top

of the list. SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones are listed in

numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A service change to a

telephone moves its TN to the beginning of the list. A

service change to an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone moves its

TN to the end of the list.

A sysload restructures the list back to numerical TN order with

telephones at the top and SL-1 and Meridian digital

telephones at the bottom. Call redirection parameters continue to be

derived as described in the preceding paragraphs.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

45-5

Feature packaging

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer is included in

basic Xl 1 system software.

Feature implementation

Define Call Forward No Answer for a customer.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ICI

FNAD

CHG

CDB

o-99

xx CFN

ATT

FDN

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Attendant Incoming Call Indicator for Call Forward No Answer

xx = key number (00-19)

Forward No Answer DID calls to the Hunt number

Forward No Answer DID calls to the attendant

Forward No Answer DID calls to the Flexible Call Forward No

Answer DN

features and services 553-3001-305

45-6

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

-Define Call Forward No Answer for a customer.

FNAT

FNAL

CFNA

ATT

FDN

ATT

FDN

l-15

No Answer DID calls are not forwarded

Forward No Answer local calls to the Hunt number

Forward No Answer local calls to the attendant

Forward No Answer local calls to the Flexible CFNA DN

No Answer local calls are not forwarded

Forward No Answer external calls to the Hunt number

Forward No Answer external calls to the attendant

Forward No Answer external calls to the Flexible Call Forward No

No-answer external calls are not forwarded

Number of ringing cycles before No Answer calls are forwarded

(default is 4)

In Xl 1 release 9 and earlier, the FNAN prompt takes the

place of the FNAT and FNAL prompts.

Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for telephones.

CHG

500

lscu

FNA, (FND)

FDN xxxx .

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) Call Forward No Answer

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (if the DN

Expansion package is equipped, the DN can have up to

13 digits)

Xl 1 features and services

Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

45-7

-Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for SL-1 and digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

FDN

CHG

aaaa

lscu

FNA, (FND)

Telephone type

aaaa =

2006, 2008,

2018, 2112,

Terminal Number

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (if the DN

expansion package is equipped, the DN can have up to

seven digits)

Allow (Deny) Call Forward No Answer

-Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on telephones.

REQ

TYPE

HUNT

CHG

500

lscu

xxxx

FNA, (FND)

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Hunt DN where a No Answer call is to be routed (if the

DN Expansion package is equipped, the DN can have

up to 10 digits)

Allow (Deny) CFNA

Xl 1 features and services

45-8 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer

-Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on SL-1 and Meridian digital

telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CLS

HUNT

CHG

aaaa

lscu

FNA, (FND)

xxxx

Feature operation

Not applicable.

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2216,

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) CFNA

Hunt DN where a No Answer call is to be routed (if the

DN Expansion package is equipped, the DN can have

up to digits)

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

. , . :

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release:

46-1

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

Second Level Call Forward No Answer enhances Flexible Call Forward No

Answer by forwarding unanswered calls twice. The following example best

illustrates this enhancement.

Party A places a call to extension 5000, which does not answer. Extension

5000 has Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) allowed and extension 6000

defined as its CFNA number. The call forwards to extension 6000. This is the

first level CFNA.

Extension 6000 also does not answer the call. This telephone has a Call

Forward No Answer and Second Level Call Forward No Answer allowed

Class of Service (FNA and SFA). As it has a CFNA number of 7000, it

forwards there. This is the second level of Call Forward No Answer. Note that

the forwarding DN is always obtained from the currently ringing telephone.

If extension 7000 does not answer the call, one of two things may occur:

If the original call is a DID or internal call, the forwarded call continues

to ring until answered or the calling party disconnects.

If the original call is extended by the attendant console, Attendant Recall

occurs.

Second Level Call Forward No Answer uses the same customer-level timer

as Flexible Call Forward No Answer to determine the number of rings before

forwarding a call.

Telephones with an MWA Class of Service should have the Message Center

DN defined as their FDN. Calls to these telephones forward to the Message

Center and are not eligible for Second Level Call Forward No Answer.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

46-2

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

Requirements at the dialed DN for first-level CFNA are as follows:

Flexible Call Forward No Answer or Hunting is allowed at the customer

level for the incoming call type (DID, non-DID, or internal)

the telephone has an FNA Class of Service

the terminating call has rung for the number of rings specified for CFNA

or DFNA in the customer data block (LD1.5)

the forwarding DN (FDN, EFD, Hunt, or EHT) must be distinct from the

ringing DN and be a valid number within the system

Requirements at the originally called telephone DN for Second Level Call

Forward No Answer are as follows:

Flexible Call Forward No Answer or Hunting is allowed at the customer

level for the incoming call type (DID, non-DID, or internal)

the telephone has SFA and FNA Class of Service

Call Forward No Answer has occurred only once prior to ringing this

telephone

the forwarding DN (FDN, EFD, Hunt or EHT) must be distinct from the

ringing DN and must be a valid number within the system

The order of precedence for activation of first level Call Forward No Answer

is as follows:

Call Forward All Calls

Message Waiting

Call Forward No Answer

Attendant Recall

The order of precedence for activation of Second Level Call Forward No

Answer is as follows:

Call Forward All Calls

Second Call Forward No Answer (CFNA calls only)

Attendant Recall

features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

46-3

Call Forward No Answer Second Level for Message Waiting Allowed

Telephones, X11 release 15 and later

allow an SFA Class of Service to be

defined on telephones with a Message Waiting Allowed (MWA) Class of

Service. Thus, a message waiting indication can be activated at the originally

dialed DN for Second Level CFNA calls terminating at a message center.

Operating parameters

A maximum of two levels of Call Forward No Answer is allowed for an

unanswered call.

Calls directed to an attendant or ACD Message Center cannot have Second

Level Call Forward No Answer.

Attendant Administration cannot change the Class of Service.

Error messages are generated if changes made to the Forward No Answer or

Hunt Class of Service conflict with the Class of Service.

Feature interaction

Call Forward All Calls

Both first and Second Level Call Forward No Answer use the final

(ringing) telephone in the chain to obtain Class of Service and

forwarding DN information.

Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT)

To implement CFCT for Second Level Call Forward No Answer eligible

calls, the originating party’s call type is checked. If it is internal, the call

is forwarded to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN). If it is

external, the call is forwarded to the External Flexible DN (EFD).

Call Forward No Answer

Second Level Call Forward No Answer applies to the Hunt and Flexible

Call Forward No Answer options. This is implemented by defining the

FNAD, FNAT, or FNAL prompts in LD15 as FDN or HNT. If the

attendant option is defined, an unanswered call goes to the attendant

queue and is not eligible for Second Level Call Forward No Answer.

Note: The FNAN prompt is replaced by two new prompts, FNAT and

FNAL, in X11 release 10 and later.

Flexible Call Forward No Answer

If Second Level Call Forward No Answer is disabled, Flexible Call

Forward No Answer operates as described.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

46-4

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing

The ringing cadence for all telephones in a chain of call redirections

remains the same as for the original DN called.

Hunting

A forwarded call may be modified by Hunting if the Call Forward No

Answer DN is busy. This call is eligible for Second Level Call Forward

No Answer if the SFA Class of Service is allowed and a Call Forward No

Answer DN has been defined for the last rung DN.

Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers

Call redirection parameters like Hunt and Call Forward No Answer are

derived from the TN data block (LD20 TNB) of the prime appearance of

the called MADN. If there is more than one prime appearance, the

parameters are selected from the last TN in the DN block for the DN

(LD22 DNB).

If more than one prime appearance of a MADN exists, the following

information must be considered prior to configuring call redirection

parameters for

The DNB organizes MADN information in numerical TN order. The TN

with the highest numerical value (000-O-06-03) is placed at the

beginning of the list. The list then continues in descending order with the

lowest numerical TN (000-0-03-01) at the end of the list. Service change

activity affects the organization of the DN list as described in the

following paragraphs.

If a telephone is service changed, its TN is moved to the beginning

of the DN list, irrespective of the numerical value. This telephone

remains at the beginning of the list until another service change or a

sysload.

If a DN is assigned as a Prime DN on a telephone and as a secondary

DN on one or more telephones, the DN list is still organized as

described in the preceding paragraphs. If only one prime appearance

of a DN exists, however, call redirection parameters are derived

from the TN of the prime appearance telephone, even though it may

not be at the end of the list. A prime appearance is always the first

TN used when the system looks for call redirection instructions.

Xl 1 features and services

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

46-5

If a DN appears on and Meridian digital telephones,

the telephones are listed in numerical TN order at the top

of the list. SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones are listed in

numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A service change to a

telephone moves its TN to the beginning of the list. A

service change to an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone moves its

TN to the end of the list.

A sysload restructures the list with telephones at the top

and SL-1 and Meridian digital at

the

bottom. Call

redirection parameters continue to be derived as described in the

preceding paragraphs.

Message Centers

There are three types of Message Centers:

.ACD

Calls forwarded to an ACD Message Center are queued, so that no

CFNA timeout occurs.

Attendant

Calls forwarded to an Attendant Message Center are queued, so that

no CFNA timeout occurs.

.DN

An indirect call forwarded to a DN Message Center and not

answered by an operator, is forwarded to a second level if SFA for

DN-MC.

Note: It is recommended that DN Message Center stations be denied

CFNA, Call Forward Busy (CFB), call Forwarding (CFW), and Call

Hunting (HUNT).

Slow Answer Recall

When a Call Forward No Answer call is unanswered at a telephone

eligible for Second Level Call Forward No Answer, and the call was

extended by an attendant, Second Level Call Forward No Answer takes

precedence over Slow Answer Recall. If the telephone has a Second

Level Call Forward No Answer denied Class of Service,

the

system

performs Slow Answer Recall for the unanswered call.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

46-6

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

Feature packaging

Call Forward No Answer Second Level is included in basic X11 system

software.

Feature implementation

-&sign Message Center to allow the Message Waiting indication.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

CDB Customer Data Block

CUST o-99 Customer number

OPT

MCI, (MCX)

Include (exclude) Message Center

Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for telephones.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

500 Telephone type

lscu

Terminal Number

FNA, (FND) Allow (Deny) Forward No answer

MWA, (MWD)

Allow (Deny) Message Waiting

SFA, (SFD) Allow (Deny) second level CFNA

Note: To implement SFA in 1 release 14 and earlier,

specify both FNA and MWD.

1 release 15 and later allow SFA to be implemented

with an MWA Class of Service.

FTR FDN Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Forward No Answer, Second Level 46-7

-Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for SL-1 and digital telephones.

REQ CHG

TYPE

aaaa

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2216, 2317, 2616, 3000

FDN

CLS

lscu

xxx...x

FNA, (FND)

MWA, (MWD)

SFA, (SFD)

Terminal Number

Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN

Allow (Deny) Forward No answer

Allow (Deny) Message Waiting

Allow (Deny) second level CFNA

Note:

implement

SFA in 1 release 14

and earlier,

specify both FNA and MWD.

Xl 1 release 15 and later allow SFA to be implemented with an

MWA Class of Service.

Feature operation

To forward calls from an SL-1 or digital telephone:

Press

Forward.

Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

Press

Forward.

To cancel Call Forward All Calls:

Press

Forward.

To forward calls from a telephone:

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 74 (500 telephone).

Lift the handset and dial (2500 telephone).

Lift the handset and dial the Call Forward Allowed Flexible Feature

Code (FFC).

2 Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.

3 Hang up.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

46-8 Call Forward No Answer, Second Level

To cancel Call Forward All Calls:

Lift the handset and dial SPRE 74 (500 telephone).

Lift the handset and dial (2500 telephone).

Lift the handset and dial the Call Forward Deny FFC.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Hold, Deluxe

Deluxe Call Hold (DHLD) offers two options: Individual Hold and Exclusive

Hold.

Individual Hold indicates only those calls placed on hold on SL- 1 and

Meridian digital telephones in a multiple appearance, single call arrangement.

When a user puts a call on hold, normal hold (winking) is indicated at the

user’s telephone only. A slow flicker is shown at all other telephones with the

multiple appearance.

With Exclusive Hold Class of Service, multiple appearances of a line remain

exclusive to the user’s telephone, even when the call is put on hold. While

hold (winking) is indicated at the telephone holding the call, the Directory

Number (DN) lamp is steadily lit on all other appearances of the held call. The

Privacy Release key must be used for access by other appearances of the

Directory Number (DN). Telephones with the Exclusive Hold capability can

be held at any single-line, SL- or Meridian digital telephone with an

appearance.

Operating parameters

Exclusive Hold has priority over Individual Hold. If a telephone is equipped

with Exclusive Hold, the other telephones receive the Exclusive, not

Individual, Hold indication.

features and services 553-3001-305

47-2 Call Hold, Deluxe

Feature

Attendant Administration

Deluxe Hold (DHLD) cannot be administered through the Attendant

Administration feature.

Mixed

If a call is put on Exclusive Hold in a mixed Directory Number

group, other telephones with an appearance of the DN that go off hook

are not included in the call, nor do they receive any tone. Privacy Release

cannot be used with exclusively held calls in a mixed-appearance DN

group.

Deluxe Hold (DHLD), package 71, has no feature package dependencies.

Feature implementation

Enable/disable Individual Hold for the customer.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

CDB Customer Data Block

CUST o-99 Customer number

OPT IHD

Enable or disable Individual Hold (default IHD)

Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for telephones.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

500 Telephone type

lscu

Terminal Number

XHA, XHD

Enable or disable Exclusive Hold (default XHD)

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Hold, Deluxe

47-3

-Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for SL-1, M3000, and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ CHG

TYPE

aaaa

lscu

XHA, XHD

Feature operation

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Enable or disable Exclusive Hold (default XHD)

Not applicable.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

47-4 Call Hold, Deluxe

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:

92 1231

Status: Standard

Xl 1 Release:

All

48-1

Call Hold, Permanent

Permanent Hold holds an active call on a 2500 telephone without attendant

assistance. Calls cannot be originated or received while in the Permanent

Hold mode. Incoming calls receive a busy signal if Hunting is not defined for

the called telephone.

If the telephone user goes on hook after activating Permanent Hold, the

telephone periodically receives a one-second ring burst as a reminder that the

call is on hold. This interval is defined at the customer level.

Operating parameters

Permanent Hold is allowed only when a call is active and if the class of

service allows transfer.

If Busy Verify is attempted on a telephone with a call on Permanent Hold,

busy tone is received.

Override cannot be used on a telephone with a call on Permanent Hold.

Permanent Hold cannot be activated during a Conference call.

Two Meridian 1 parties, connected trunk to trunk, can activate Permanent

Hold at the same time if they both have the feature defined. After being placed

on Permanent Hold, the second party can flash the switchhook and dial to

hold call. After flashing the switchhook, any dialing sequence other than

the access code results in overflow tone.

Permanent Hold is not supported on station-to-station calls.

1 features and services

48-2 Call Hold, Permanent

If the telephone activating Permanent Hold is part of a mixed arrangement

with another 2500, SL-1, or Meridian digital telephone, the following events

occur:

If a different telephone with the same DN goes off hook, that telephone

connects to the held party.

When Permanent Hold is activated, the DN lamp on the SL-1 or

Meridian digital telephone remains steadily lit.

If the telephone activating Permanent Hold goes off hook, it is automatically

reconnected to the held call.

If the held party disconnects, the hold reminder ring stops.

Feature interaction

Privacy

A call placed on Permanent Hold has Privacy removed. Privacy is

reinstated when the call is removed from Permanent Hold.

Audible Reminder of Held Call (ARCH)

If Audible Reminder of Held Call (ARCH) is enabled in LD15, the

Audible Reminder of Held Call (ARCH) timer takes precedence over the

Permanent Hold timer.

Feature packaging

2500 Set Features package 18, includes Permanent Hold and has no

feature package dependencies.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Call Hold, Permanent

48-3

Feature implementation

Set Permanent Hold reminder ring timer.

REQ

CUST

PHDT

CHG

CDB

o-99

l-(30)-63

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Permanent Hold reminder ring timing in two-second

increments (30 = 60 seconds)

Enable/disable Permanent Hold for 2500 telephones.

REQ

TYPE

FTR

CHG

500

XFA

PHD

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Allow transfer

Enable Permanent Hold

Feature operation

To place a call on hold, follow these steps:

While on an active call, flash the switchhook or link key.

2 Dial or the Flexible Feature Code (FFC), if enabled.

3 Hang up.

The Permanent Hold timer begins.

To retrieve a held call, lift the handset.

features and services 553-3001-305

48-4 Call Hold, Permanent

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Park

Call Park places a call in a parked state, similar to hold, where it can be

retrieved by any attendant console or telephone. A parked call must have an

access ID, also known as a Park DN. This is done by parking the call on a

System Park DN or on any telephone Directory Number (DN) in the system.

A parked call does not occupy a Directory Number (DN), nor is there a lamp

to indicate its presence.

Up to 50 System Park are available per customer. There is no limit to the

number of that can be used as a Call Park access ID. However, only one

call at a time can be parked against any particular telephone or System Park

DN.

In addition, the system can offer a default access ID. If System Call Park is

defined, the default access ID for the following equipment is the next

available System Park DN for the following equipment:

attendant consoles

SL-1 telephones

M3000 telephones

Meridian digital telephones equipped with digit display or display

screens

If System Park are not defined for the customer, the default access ID is

the DN of the telephone where the call was parked. An attendant must press

the Park key and enter a DN if System Park are not defined.

1 features and services

49-2

Call

Park

Park the call, then page the person called. The person called then picks up the

call directly or through the attendant. Call Park also enables the telephone that

originally receives the call to park it so that another telephone can retrieve it

later. The telephone placing the call in Park is free to make or answer other

calls.

Calls can be parked from telephones or attendant consoles with the Park

key/lamp pair or Special Prefix (SPRE) code. Parked calls not retrieved

within a specified time (30 to 240 seconds) are recalled to the telephone that

parked it. Music for parked calls can be provided if Music (MUS), package

44, is installed.

If a call is parked on a System Park DN, it is recalled to the attendant who

parked it. However, for multi-tenant service, if the parking attendant does not

belong to the same CPG specified for the tenant of the calling station and if it

is busy at the time of the recall, the parked call is presented to an idle attendant

in the same CPG specified for the calling station. Then if there is no attendant

within that CPG available to accept the recall, the parked call is queued until

one of the attendants in the CPG becomes idle.

If a call is parked on a telephone DN, the recall is placed in the attendant

queue and presented to any available attendant. In all cases, parked calls

recalled to the attendant appear on the Recall Incoming Call Identification

(ICI) key, if defined.

The Park DN of the most recently parked call can be redisplayed on SL-1 and

Meridian digital telephones equipped with displays, a Park key, and a Display

key. This is done by pressing the Display key, then the Park key. The

attendant can display the last call parked by pressing the Park key when no

loop key is active.

features and services 553-3001-305

Operating parameters

Call

Park 49-3

Call Park is not available for calls on Dial Intercom keys or for calls on

telephones designated as Dial Intercom telephones.

Call Park is not permitted when Privacy Release or Conference is active.

Calls parked from SL-1, Meridian digital telephones, and

telephones are recalled to the telephone that parked the call.

When a Multiple Appearance Single Call telephone mix (the same DN

appears on SL-1, Meridian digital telephones, and single-line telephones) is

parked, other appearances are not automatically bridged to the parked call

when going off hook. The call can be retrieved by another Multiple

Appearance DN (MADN) telephone only by dialing the Call Park retrieval

code and the DN.

Remote access (Centralized Attendant Service [CAS] or Direct Inward

System Access [DISA], for example) for parked parties is not permitted.

Private lines, attendant Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), and Direct

Inward System Access (DISA) are not valid park numbers.

Trunks without disconnect supervision cannot be parked.

Parked calls are not retained during initialization or system load.

Parked calls cannot be accessed with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

In-calls key. If parked access from Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

positions is required, a DN key must be provided.

A parked call recall cannot be placed on hold by the attendant.

A call transferred to the attendant by the Conference key on an SL-1 or

Meridian digital telephone

cannot

be parked by the attendant. A call

transferred to the attendant by the Transfer key on an SL-1 or Meridian digital

telephone

can

be parked by the attendant.

features and services 553-3001-305

49-4

Call

Park

Feature interaction

attendant console

The Call Park access code and the Park DN are displayed for parked call

recalls.

QCW4 attendant console

When a parked call returns to the console, the console shows an attendant

display (DLEN in LD12) of eight digits with only the Special Prefix

(SPRE) code and the Park DN when a parked call recalls to the console.

(Press the Display Destination key twice for the Park DN.) An attendant

display of 16 digits shows the SPRE, the Call Park access code, and the

Park DN for parked call recalls.

Access Restrictions and Class of Service (CLS)

A call can be parked on any DN, regardless of its CLS. Access to a

parked call is governed by the same CLS restrictions for normal

trunk-to-telephone call processing. The following table details the

restrictions. These restrictions can be overridden with the Authorization

Code.

Parked call type

Telephone

DID Trunk

Tie trunk

Accessing telephone Class of Service

FRE FR2

allowed allowed allowed

denied denied denied

allowed allowed denied

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Calls parked by ACD agents are recalled to the ACD DN queue and

presented to any available agent.

Busy Lamp Field

A busy lamp field can be equipped to display the status of System Park

features and services 553-3001-305

Call

Park 49-5

Call Detail Recording (CDR)

Call Detail Recording (CDR) records for Call Park are similar to the start

and end records generated when a call is transferred or terminated. When

a call is parked, a Call Detail Recording (CDR) start record is generated

if one has not already been generated by another feature. A CDR record

is not generated when the parked call is accessed. A CDR end record is

generated when the trunk call is terminated or when a parked call

disconnects.

Call Forward

A recalled parked call to telephones with Call Forward, Call Forward

Busy, or Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) is not forwarded.

Call Waiting

A recall of a parked call is not presented in the Call Waiting mode. If an

internal telephone is in the parked state, Call Waiting to that telephone is

not provided.

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)

Call Park is limited to the local Meridian 1 for systems equipped with

CAS. Call Park cannot be accessed from release-link trunks.

Conference/Call Transfer

A parked call can be accessed after Conference or Call Transfer is

activated.

Do Not Disturb (DND)

Calls can be parked on telephone that are in the Do Not Disturb

mode (DND). Telephones in the Do Not Disturb (DND) mode can park

a call or access a parked call. Recall of a parked call to a DND telephone

is recalled to the attendant.

Make Set Busy

Recall of a parked call to a telephone in the Make Set Busy mode is

intercepted by the attendant.

Private Line Service

Private lines cannot park a call.

Privacy Release

When a call from an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone is parked, that

telephone cannot activate Privacy Release. For example, Party A calls

Party B. Party B parks the call. Party A cannot activate Privacy Release.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

49-6

Call

Park

Speed

Speed Call or can be programmed to park calls or access parked

calls.

Traffic measurements

TFCO07 is included for Call Park. It provides traffic measurements for

the following:

system park usage

.system park overflow

telephone park usage

park access

.park recall

.average waiting time

Feature packaging

Call Park (CPRK), package 33, has no feature package dependencies.

Feature implementation

-Enable or disable Call Park.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

C DB Customer Data Block

CUST o-99 Customer number

OPT

CPA, (CPD) Enable or disable Call Park

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call

Park 49-7

Add/change or print Call Park.

Note: This overlay must be defined for Call Park operation.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

CPTM

SPDN

MURT

CHG

CPK

o-99

xxxx

Change

Call Park data block

Customer number

Parked call recall time in seconds (default is 45 seconds)

Number of contiguous System Park DN and the first

System Park DN

Note The default 0 (zero) disables System Park DN capability,

but allows Telephone Park

Note 2: If the DN Expansion package is equipped, the System

Park DN can have up to seven digits.

o-51 1 Music route number for parked calls

Allow or deny access to Call Park for telephones.

TYPE

CLS

CHG

aaaa

XFA, (XFD)

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) access to Call Park

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

49-8

Call

Park

Add or change a Call Park key on SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

aaaa

lscu

xx PRK

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

Terminal Number

Add a Call Park key (key number must be 17 for M2317

and 31 for M3000)

LD12 -Add or change a Call Park key on attendant consoles.

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

aaaa

lscu

xx PRK

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Add a Call Park key (key number can be 00-l 9 on M2250)

Feature operation

To park a call with the Park key, follow these steps:

Press

Park

twice.

If there is a System Park extension, the call is parked on it. Otherwise, it

is parked on your extension.

To park a call on an extension other than the System Park extension, follow

these steps:

Press

Park.

2 Enter the extension number.

Press

Park

again.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call

Park 49-9

To park a call using SPRE codes, follow these steps:

Press

Transfer

Conference.

2 Dial SPRE 71.

You can dial

extension number to park the call, or you can use the

system park extension, chosen automatically. (It shows on your

telephone’s display, if equipped).

Press

Transfer

Conference

again.

To retrieve a parked call, follow these steps:

Select a free extension.

2 Dial SPRE 72.

3 Dial the extension where the call is parked.

1 features and services

49-10 Call Park

features and services

Issued: 93 31

Status: Standard

Xl 1 Release:

50-l

Call Party Name Display

Call Party Name Display (CPND) identifies the calling or called number in

addition to the DN. The identifier (the name, for example) associated with a

DN on telephones with an alphanumeric display is defined in LD95.

Whenever the calling party’s DN displays on the terminating telephone, the

calling party’s name also appears. Likewise, on an internal call, the called

party’s name is appended to the displayed DN on the originator’s telephone,

as soon as a valid DN is completely dialed.

X11 release 13

enhancements display the DN and name of the originally

dialed party for redirected calls. A new Class of Service,

(Dialed Name Display Allowed or Denied), is assigned on a per-telephone

basis. The terminating telephone must have DNDA to display the name of the

originally dialed party.

The attendant console can extend a call to a DN requested by

a calling party. The CPND enhancement enables the M 1250 attendant

console to display the incoming call information on one line, and the outgoing

call information on the next line when extending an incoming call.

X11 release 16 Multi-Language CPND

displays the party’s name in

Roman/English or Katakana (Japanese alphabet) characters on Meridian

modular telephones. The names are stored in the database under each

character set and the language is specified with the Meridian modular

program keys.

1 features and services

50-2 Call Party Name Display

Two languages can be stored in the database for any given name. For this

enhancement to work fully, both telephones involved must have the same

name in the same languages. For example: John Smith calls Anne Jones. Both

John and Anne must have Katakana in their database for the name to appear

in Katakana characters. If John has Katakana enabled, but Anne does not,

Anne sees the English version.

Entering Katakana, or any other non-ASCII Roman characters, requires a

system terminal that supports 8 bit, no-parity I/O.

Call Party Name Display assignment

A CPND name string can be assigned to internal associated with any of

the following:

telephones

single-call/multiple-call SL-1 telephones

trunk access codes

attendant

Dial Intercom Group member numbers

As a customer option for multiple-appearance the assigned

CPND name can be linked with its member telephone’s designator (DES field

in the TN block) to further identify the party of a shared DN.

features and services 553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

50-3

Call Party Name Display composition

A CPND name is the name used to identify a DN, entered in ASCII

alphanumeric character format. The maximum CPND length is the smaller of

two values: the maximum length configured in LD95, or 27 characters,

including spaces and special characters.

The ASCII characters supported are A-Z, O-9, space, Hex 20-127, and the

following special characters:

“0

Prior to X11 release 19, the CPND name was usually entered as first name, a

space, and last name (such as Mary Smith). Beginning with X11 release 19,

the NAME prompt in 10, 11, and 95 accepts first name, a comma as a

separator, and last name (such as X11 release 19 supports

CPND names in the older format, treating the entire name string as the first

name. See Table 50-l for examples..

Table 50-l

Response formats for CPND NAME prompt

Entered Data

Sue Smith

Sue

Sue,

Sue,Smith, Dept. 410

Sue Smith,,Joe Brown

Displayed Result

Sue Smith

Sue

(Trailing comma is ignored.)

Sue Smith, Dept. 410

Sue Smith Brown

The default in X11 release 19 is to accept the names as entered, replacing the

comma with a space. Hence, a value entered as displays as Mary

Smith.

Note I: Do not enter leading spaces. LD95 ignores them.

Note 2: When CPND information is printed (using or

the printout reflects what is in the database, not what appears on the

telephone display.

features and services 553-3001-305

50-4

Call Party Name Display

In addition to the caller’s name, a reason field can be provided to indicate the

cause of a redirection. This is a customer option and the actual mnemonics are

service-changeable. The following call redirections have a reason displayed:

Call Forward All Calls

Call Forward No Answer

Hunting/Call Forward Busy

Call Transfer with Network Call Redirection

Attendant Alternative Answering

Call Pickup

Display Devices and Capabilities

The M3000 Touchphone has a display line of 35 characters, 27 available for

displaying DN-related information.

The M2317 has a display line of 40 characters, 33 available for displaying

DN-related information.

If there are more characters than the telephone’s display allows, the system

deletes letters to make the name fit.

The Ml250 and M2250 attendant consoles are equipped with four lines of

LCD alphanumeric display. Each line has 40 characters, and lines 2 and 3 are

used to display DN-related information. If the number of characters displayed

is more than 40, an arrow appears in the upper right corner of the display. The

arrow alerts the user that more information can be retrieved using the

scrolling keys. For complete information, refer to the

Attendant Console User Guide

(P0728489).

The call type, originating or terminating telephone, and the Class of Service

all affect the display and CPND information. Three Classes of Service are

associated with the display function. CPND conforms to whichever Class of

Service is configured for the telephone.

Automatic Digit Display ADD

Digit Display Selection DDS

Touchphone Digit Display TDD

features and services 553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

50-5

No user interaction is required to display information on the call. On the

M2317 telephone, however, the user can press the SAVE to save

the name and number of the calling party. This applies to all outgoing and

answered incoming calls.

Operating parameters

CPND is not displayed if a live call is not involved, for example, while

programming a Speed Call key.

Attendant Administration does not support the entry of CPND class marks for

digital telephones.

CPND is not displayed on the calling telephone while making an outgoing

trunk call.

CPND is not supported on data calls.

CPND is not available on QCW attendant consoles.

In Xl 1 release 13 and later, CPND applies only to redirected calls on M2008,

M2016, M2216, M2616 M3000, and M2317 telephones.

For M2008, M2016, M2216, M2616 M3000, and M2317 telephones, CPND

is provided on a per-telephone basis, depending on the Class of Service.

DNDA (Dialed Name Display Allowed) and NDD (No Digit Display) Class

of Service are mutually exclusive.

Multi-Language CPND operates on Meridian modular telephones only.

An individual DN can have Roman/English, or Katakana, or both

programmed in the database if MCPND is equipped.

If the call destination is a trunk or a telephone type other than Meridian

modular, the name is translated into the ASCII equivalent.

Multi-Language CPND applies to on local switches only. CPND for

ISDN calls is displayed in English only.

features and services

50-6

Call Party Name Display

Feature interaction

ACD DNIS

If an incoming trunk call from a route with Dialed Number Identification

is presented to a display telephone, the identification digits follow the

regular trunk access code and member number. It precedes the CPND

name for the DNIS incoming trunk group.

ACD Routing by DNIS

With Xl 1 release 17 and later, when an incoming trunk call from a route

with Routing by DNIS is presented to a display telephone, the

identification digits follow the regular trunk access code and member

number. It precedes the CPND name for the DNIS DN.

Attendant Recall

Attendant Recall using the Attendant Recall key or a switchhook flash

results in both source and destination information being displayed. No

redirection reason is displayed, however. In this type of recall, the party

that pressed the Attendant Recall key or switchhook is the destination

Attendant Recall using Call Transfer or Conference displays the

recalling party’s DN and CPND information on the attendant’s source

line. No redirection reason is displayed. If the recall is done with the

Transfer key the third party’s DN and CPND information are displayed

on the source line when the transfer is complete.

and Speed Call

No name information displays during the programming of and

Speed Call numbers.

Automatic Wake-up

All display information associated with Automatic Wake-up programming

is directed to line three of the display. Names are appended to

appearing on line three if they are different those on line two, or if no

DN appears on line two. There is no DN information on line two if the

attendant has initiated the AWU process while not on an active call. No

DES information is appended, since AWU operates on a DN basis.

Calls held or re-established

When a call is put on hold, the holding telephone’s display clears. The

held telephone’s display does not change. When the telephone

re-establishes the call, the display returns the original DN and name.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

50-7

Call Park

Upon valid operation of the Park key, or dial-access if used, CPND

shows the SPRE code and the Park Access ID. Because the Park Access

Code is displayed, no CPND name is displayed. The only time that the

digit display shows the actual DN of the parked party is when the parked

party has been retrieved, put on hold, and then retrieved from hold.

Call Pickup

For Call Pickup, the Xl 1 release 13 enhancement to CPND applies when

the call is answered.

Call Transfer

When the Transfer key is pressed during an active call, the display clears.

(The call is in a held state.) The DN and name of the transferred

telephone appear on the display when the DN is dialed. When the transfer

is complete, the transferring telephone’s display clears because the

telephone is now disconnected. The transferred telephone’s display

changes to show the name of the newly connected party.

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)

When an attendant in the CAS mode extends a call to a remote station,

the display shows only the source line.

Conference

When pressed during an active call, or to set up a conference, the

Conference, Connect, or Join Parties key clears the display. The

telephones involved in the conference have blank displays. If the

conference returns to a two-way only call, each telephone displays the

DN and name of the other telephone.

Dial Intercom

The display on telephones connected by Dial Intercom shows the group

member’s DIG number plus CPND information.

Display Key

When pressed during a call, the Display key clears the display until

pressed again. The original display reappears. When the telephone is

inactive and the DSP key is pressed, followed by a function key like

Autodial, no CPND information is displayed.

End-to-End Signaling

When entered after a call is answered, EES digits are displayed

immediately following the CPND name of the connected party. Leading

DN digits and name characters may be shifted out of the display window.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

ISDN

On incoming ISDN calls, the Calling Line ID number can be displayed

instead of a DN on the source party line. With Xl1 release 14, CPND

applies to telephones configured for ISDN when redirection is supported,

and only when all parties involved are located on the same switch. X11

release 16 allows calls to redirect across a Meridian 1 network with

Network Call Redirection. The CPND is maintained through the

redirection.

Listed Directory Number

CPND is not supported for If the LDN is an incoming trunk route,

the CPND assigned to the route access code is displayed.

M3000 Touchphone

Local Directory Translation CPND and the M3000 Touchphone

DN-to-name translation are mutually exclusive. If CPND name display

is allowed (CLS = CNDA), the DN-to-name translation must be

disallowed.

Multiple Appearance DN (MADN)

On ST and 21 systems, with Xl 1 release 17 and lower, the number of DN

appearances restricts the number of letters/digits allowed for CPND.

These engineering guidelines must be followed:

11 or fewer appearances allows 27 digits/letters in the name

12 appearances allows 23 digits/letters in the name

13 appearances allows 20 digits/letters in the name

14 appearances allows 16 digits/letters in the name

15 appearances allows 14 digits/letters in the name

16 appearances allows 11 digits/letters in the name

17 appearances allows 9 digits/letters in the

name

18 appearances allows 8 digits/letters in the name

Manual Signaling (Buzz)

If the Signal key is pressed to buzz another telephone, no digit or name

display appears on the telephone.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display 50-9

Override

When Overriding an established call, the displays of the other telephones

show the DN and name of the overriding party.

Slow Answer Recall

Slow Answer Recall results in displays showing source and destination

information. If a redirection occurs, the reason is displayed.

Voice Call

The telephone originating a Voice Call displays the called CPND.

The called telephone shows the caller’s DN and name on its display.

Feature packaging

Call Party Name Display (CPND), package 9.5, requires:

Digit Display (DDSP), package 19

Digital Sets (DSET), package 88

M3000 Touchphone (TSET), package 89 or

M2317 telephone package 91

Meridian modular telephones (ARIE), package 170

Multi-Language CPND requires Multi-Language I/O (MLIO), package 211.

If the designator field is to be used for multiple-appearance CPND

requires:

Office Data Administration System (ODAS), package 20

For Hotel/Motel applications configuring CPND, CPND requires:

Background Terminal (BGD), package 99

Multi-Language (MLIO), package 211, to support no-parity

system terminals.

Feature implementation

Before name strings can be assigned to various telephones, the CPND data

block must be created in LD95. The number and size of CPND name strings

is limited by available space in the Protected Data Store, so we recommend

that you initially use a small number for the maximum character length.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

50-10

Call Party Name Display

Procedure 50-l

Enable CPND and add names to the CPND data block

LD95

Create the CPND data block.

R E Q N E W Create CPND database (or open existing data base)

TYPE

CPND CPND data block

CUST o-99 Customer number

CNFG <CR> Stand-alone memory

MXLN Maximum number of characters allowed in each name

string. Once defined, this value can be changed only by

removing the CPND data block and recreating it.

STAL Yes, (No) Static allocation of name storage. Must be Yes if

Background Terminal is equipped, or whenever name

strings change frequently.

Average default character string length. Suggested default

is 13 or the maximum length given to MXLN, whichever is

less.

Prompted if STAL = Yes

DES

RESN

CFWD

-CFNA

-HUNT

Yes, (No)

aaaa,

(F)

aaaa, (N)

aaaa,

(P)

xxxx, (T)

aaaa,

(A)

Allow designator for

Allow display of reason for redirecting calls

Mnemonic for Call Forward All Calls display

Mnemonic for Call Forward No Answer display

Mnemonic for Hunt/Call Forward Busy display

Mnemonic for Call Pickup display

Mnemonic for Call Transfer display for NCRD

Mnemonic for Attendant Alternative Answering

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

50-11

LD95 -Add names to the CPND data block.

REQ

TYPE

LANG

CUST

DIG

-NAME

DCNO

IDC

NAME

NEW

NAME

(ROM), KAT,

o-99

O-2045,0-99

<CR>

aaaa,bbbb

<CR>

xxx...x

aaaa,bbbb

<CR>

xxx

nnn

aaaa,bbbb

Open CPND data block to add new entries

Create a new name string

Store the name in Roman or Katakana. stores the

name in English.

Customer number

Dial Intercom Group number and member number. Each

time a name string is assigned to a Dial Intercom Group

member, the DIG prompt repeats, until a carriage return is

entered to go to the DN prompt.

Bypass Dial Intercom Group and go to the DN prompt to

assign names on a DN basis

CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters; see Call

Party Name Display composition on page 50-3.

Defines maximum number of characters allowed in name

string under CHO operation.

Set XPLN to average default character string length

(DFLN) or the actual length (NAME), whichever is longer.

DN to which name string is linked

CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters; see Call

Party Name Display composition on page

Defines maximum number of characters allowed in name

string under CHO operation.

Set XPLN to average default character string length

(DFLN) or the actual length (NAME), whichever is longer.

IDC conversion table number (O-254)

Existing complete or partial IDC number

Prompted only when DCNO is valid

CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters; see Call

Party Name Display composition on page 50-3.

1 features and services

50-12 Call Party Name Display

Allow names to be assigned to telephones.

REQ

TYPE

REQ CHG

TYPE

aaaa

lscu

Terminal Number

CNDA, (CNDD) Allow (Deny) display of CPND entries

DNDA, (DNDD) Allow (Deny) display of CPND originally dialed entries

CHG

aaaa

lscu

CPND

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

Terminal Number

Allow CPND name assignment on this telephone

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

SLI,

-Allow names to display on M2008, M2016, M2216, M2616, M3000, and M2317.

names to display on attendant consoles.

REQ

TYPE

CPND

CHG

aaaa

lscu

CNDA, (CNDD)

DNDA, (DNDD)

Change

Telephone type

aaaa

ATT

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) CPND name assignment

Allow (Deny) display of originally dialed CPND entries

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display 50-13

Procedure 50-2

Change or remove names in the CPND data block

LD95

Open the CPND data block to change or remove entries.

REQ

CUST

LANG

DIG

-NAME

DCNO

NAME

CHG, OUT

NAME

o-99

ROM, KAT, ALL

o-2045, O-99

ALL,

aaaa,bbbb

<CR>

xxx...x

ALL

<CR>

aaaa,bbbb

xxx

nnn

aaaa,bbbb

Change or remove an existing entry

Change or remove an existing CPND name string

Customer number

Change or remove the name in Roman, or Katakana

All is used to remove all names stored for the DIG.

Dial intercom Group number and member number. Each

time a name string is assigned to or removed from a Dial

Intercom Group member, the DIG prompt repeats, until a

carriage return is entered to go to the DN prompt. ALL

removes all entries for that DIG. bypasses DIG and

goes to the DN

CPND name string for this DIG; maximum of 27 characters;

see Call Party Name Display composition on page 50-3.

Leave this entry unchanged

DN of name string being changed or removed

Remove all DN-defined entries

Return to REQ prompt

CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters; see Call

Party Name Display composition on page

IDC conversion table number (O-254)

Existing complete or partial IDC number

Prompted only when DCNO is valid

CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters; see Call

Party Name Display composition on page

1 features and services 553-3001-305

50-14

Call Party Name Display

Procedure 50-3

Print entries from the CPND data block

LD95 Print information associated with entries in the CPND data block.

REQ PRT Print entries in the CPND data block

NAME

CPND name strings

CUST o-99 Customer number

LANG

ROM, KAT

Print names in Roman or Katakana

PAGE Yes, (No) Page headers and page numbers for multiple and

DIG

ALL

Print information on all entries defined by Dial Intercom

Groups

DCNO

o-2045, O-99

<CR>

ALL

xxxx

<CR>

xxx

nnn

ALL

Dial Intercom Group and member number.The DIG prompt

repeats until a carriage return is entered.

Bypass Dial Intercom Group and go to the DN prompt to

print information on a DN basis.

Print information on all DN entries

DN to print information from. DN prompt repeats until a

carriage return is entered.

Return to REQ prompt

IDC conversion table number (O-254)

Existing complete or partial IDC number

Prompted only when DCNO is valid

Yes, (No) Print short form (long form)

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Call Party Name Display

50-l 5

Procedure

Add or change CPND name entry for a telephone

1 -Add or change CPND name.

REQ NEW, CHG

TYPE

aaaa

lscu

CUST o-99

CPND NEW, CHG, OUT

(ROM), KAT

NAME

aaaa,bbbb

Add or change CPND name information

500,

2500,

sll , 2606, 2616, 2317, 3000, etc.

Terminal number

Customer number

Add, change, or remove the CPND information

Use Roman or Katakana characters

CPND name: maximum of 27 characters; see Call

Party Name Display composition on page 50-3.

XPLN

Expected name length

DISPLAY-FMT (FIRST

Display format: FIRST = first, last (the default);

LAST

LAST = last, first

Feature operation

Not applicable.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

50-l 6 Call Party Name Display

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Call Pickup

Call Pickup allows telephones to be arranged in groups consisting of any

combination of SL- and Meridian digital telephones.

Telephones can be specified as Call Pickup allowed or Call Pickup denied. If

the telephone’s class of service is Call Pickup allowed, the user can answer

calls made to any telephone within the Call Pickup group. If the telephone’s

Class of Service is Call Pickup denied, but the telephone is assigned to a Call

Pickup group, the user cannot answer calls directed to other telephones. Calls

to the denied telephone, however, can be answered by other members of the

group.

SL- 1 and Meridian digital telephones can dial-access this feature, or be

equipped with a Call Pickup key. An associated lamp is not required.

CO Trunk Priority, X11 release 13 and later releases

provide CO trunk

calls priority over other calls within the distinctive ringing and normal ringing

queues. If the CO Trunk Priority is implemented, calls are answered in the

following order:

Distinctive Ringing Queue CO call Priority 1

Distinctive Ringing Queue non-CO call Priority 2

Normal Ringing Queue CO call Priority 3

Normal Ringing Queue non-CO call Priority 4

Operating parameters

Prior to X 11 release 13, Call Pickup groups were limited to 255 per customer.

With Xl 1 release 13 and later releases, the number of Call Pickup groups is

increased to 4095. The number of members assigned to each group is

unlimited, depending on available system memory.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

51-2 Call Pickup

Feature interaction

Call Park

A telephone user on a call can pick up a call by parking the

existing call, then activating the Call Pickup feature.

Directed Call Pickup (DCP)

Call Pickup can be assigned to a telephone independent of Directed Call

Pickup (DCP).

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) are not supported by Call

Pickup.

Flexible Feature Code (FFC)

FFC codes are not supported on SL-1 or digital telephones when

attempting to call pickup a dial intercom ringing call.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic 1 system software.

Feature implementation

Implement CO Trunk Priority in the customer data block.

TYPE

CUST

OPT

CHG

CDB

o-99

cop,

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

CO Trunk Priority for the Call Pickup feature

COX is no Priority

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Call Pickup 51-3

Define Call Pickup group and Class of Service for telephones.

REQ

TYPE

RNPG

CHG

500

lscu

xxxx

(PUA), PUD

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Call Pickup group number (0 4095)

Allow (Deny) Call Pickup

-Define Call Pickup group, Class of Service, and Call Pickup key for SL-1 and Meridian

digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

RNPG

KEY

CHG

aaaa

lscu

xxxx

(PUA), PUD

xx RNP

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

Terminal Number

Call Pickup group number (0 4095)

Allow (Deny) Call Pickup

Add a Call Pickup key

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

51-4 Call Pickup

Feature operation

To answer a call in your Call Pickup group from an SL-1 or Meridian digital

telephone, follow these steps:

Lift the handset, or press a DN key.

Press

Call Pickup

or dial SPRE + 3.

To answer a call in your Call Pickup group from a telephone, follow

these steps:

Lift the handset.

2 Dial SPRE 3 or PUDN FFC.

You are connected to the caller.

Note:

If you are on a call when another call comes in for someone in

your Call Pickup group, you must end, park, or transfer the existing call

before you can answer the new call.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

Release:

Call Pickup, Directed

Directed Call Pickup (DCP) allows a caller from one Call Pickup group to

pick up a ringing call in another Call Pickup group. The ringing call is picked

up by dialing either its call pickup group number or the DN on which it is

ringing.

Directed Call Pickup adds two new methods of call pickup to the existing Call

Pickup feature:

Group Pickup (GPU)

DN Pickup (DPU)

Group Pickup lets you pick up any ringing call in your own pickup group, or

any pickup group in the system.

DN Pickup allows pickup of a call ringing on a specified DN. If a DN is not

assigned to any group, it defaults to Group Zero (0). This prevents any other

group from picking up that DN.

Both GPU and DPU can be activated using programmable keys or Special

Prefix (SPRE) code dialing. Each pickup method can be assigned to a

telephone independent of the others.

The dialed digits (DN or group number) are displayed on the Digit Display as

dialed. Like the Call Pickup feature, the lamp is optional for the Call Pickup

and Group Call Pickup keys. No second dial tone is given after the key is

pressed, nor is it given after the SPRE code is dialed.

Operating parameters

Group 0 (zero) is not a valid group number. A telephone that is not part of any

group is assigned by default to group 0 (zero).

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

52-2

Call Pickup, Directed

Feature interaction

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)

ACD are not supported by Directed Call Pickup.

Feature packaging

Directed Call Pickup (DCP), package 115, has no feature package

requirements.

Feature implementation

Define the number of digits dialed for Call Pickup groups.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

PKND

OPT

CHG

CDB

o-99

-4

cop,

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Number of digits dialed for Group Pickup

Prompted only if DCP is equipped

CO call priority or no priority for Call Pickup and Group Call

Pickup

Add or change telephones to allow DCP Class of Service.

REQ

TYPE

RNPG

CHG

500

lscu

0 4095

GPUA, (GPUD)

DPUA, (DPUD)

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Call Pickup Group

0 = no pickup group

Allow (Deny) Group Pickup

Allow (Deny) DN Pickup

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Call Pickup, Directed 52-3

-Add or change SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones to allow Directed Call Pickup Class

of Service.

REQ CHG

TYPE

aaaa

lscu

RNPG 0 4095

CLS DPUA, (DPUD)

GPUA, (GPUD)

KEY xx DPU

xx GPU

Feature operation

Change

Telephone type

aaaa = , 2006, 2008, 2009, 2216,

Terminal Number

Call Pickup Group

0 = no pickup group

Allow (Deny) DN Pickup

Allow (Deny) Group Pickup

DN Pickup key (not available on M3000)

Group Pickup key (not available on M3000)

To answer a call in another Call Pickup group from an SL-1 or Meridian

digital telephone, follow these steps:

Lift the handset.

Press

Pickup

or dial SPRE + 94 or PUGR FFC.

Dial the pickup group number.

To answer a call on a specified DN from an SL-1 or Meridian digital

telephone:

Lift the handset.

Press

DN Pickup

or dial SPRE + 95 or PURN FFC.

Dial the extension number.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

52-4 Call Pickup, Directed

To answer a call in another Call Pickup group from a telephone,

follow these steps:

Lift the handset and dial SPRE + 94 or PUGR FFC.

2 Dial the pickup group number. ,

To answer a call on a specified DN from a telephone:

Lift the handset and dial SPRE + 95 or PURN FFC.

2 Dial the extension number.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

92 12 31

Standard

Xl 1 Release: All

53-1

Call Transfer

Call Transfer allows a telephone user on any two-party call to hold the

existing call and originate another call to a third party. The user may consult

privately or transfer the original call to the third party. A call is transferred by

pressing a dedicated key on SL- 1 or Meridian digital telephones or by

flashing the switchhook on 50012500 telephones.

Operating parameters

A separate Call Transfer key/lamp pair must be assigned to SL-1 and

Meridian digital telephones.

A transfer allowed Class of Service must be specified for

telephones to access this feature.

If trunks are involved, successful completion of a transfer depends on the

access restrictions assigned to the stations and trunks.

Feature interaction

Conference

You can also transfer calls using the Conference key, but not until the

third party answers the call.

Hold

A consultation call can be placed on Hold.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic X 11 system software.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

53-2

Call Transfer

Feature implementation

Allow/deny Call Transfer for telephones.

TYPE

CHG

500

lscu

XFA, (XFD)

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) Call Transfer

Add a Call Transfer key for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

aaaa

lscu

xx TRN

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

Terminal Number

Add a Call Transfer key (M2317 and M3000 must use key

Feature operation

To transfer an active call on an SL-1 or digital telephone, follow these steps:

Press

Transfer.

The call is on hold.

2 Dial the number where you want to transfer the call.

Press

Transfer

when you hear ringing or after your call is answered.

When your call is answered, you may speak privately with the new party

before completing the transfer.

Note:

To cancel an incomplete transfer, press the key beside the fast

flashing indicator and you return to the call you tried to transfer.

features and services 553-3001-305

Call Transfer 53-3

To transfer an active call on a 500 or 2500 telephone, follow these steps:

1 Flash the switchhook.

The call is on hold.

2 Dial the number where you want to transfer the call.

Flash the switchhook when you hear ringing or after your call is

answered.

When your call is answered, you may speak privately with the new party

before completing the transfer.

Note: To cancel an incomplete transfer, hang up, then lift the handset

and flash the switchhook to return to the call.

Xl 1 features and services

53-4 Call Transfer

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

issued:. 92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release: All

Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting

Call Waiting notifies a telephone user on an established call (internal or

external) that an external call is waiting to be answered. SL-1 and Meridian

digital telephones must have a Call Waiting key/lamp pair assigned and a

class of service that allows a warning tone. Call Waiting is applicable to the

Prime DN or any single appearance DN on the telephone. When an external

call comes into an SL- 1 or Meridian digital telephone and the telephone user

is on a call, the Call Waiting lamp flashes and a buzz sounds through the

telephone’s speaker.

To use Call Waiting, telephones must have a class of service that

allows Call Waiting and a warning tone. Two tone bursts are received through

the handset to advise a telephone user of a waiting call. Note that

the two calls cannot be together.

Call Waiting applies to DID, CO, FX, and WATS trunk calls extended to a

busy telephone by the attendant. With Xl 1 release 8 and later releases, Call

Waiting also applies to calls on tie and Common Control Switching

arrangement (CCSA) trunks.

Internal Call Waiting, X11 release and later releases

provide Call

Waiting for internal calls. This option, defined on a per-telephone level,

allows Call Waiting for calls from other telephones within the customer

group. These calls include the following:

direct telephone-to-telephone calls

attendant-extended internal calls

telephone-to-telephone call transfer of all trunk and internal calls

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

54-2 Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting

Operating parameters

An SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone can have only one working Call

Waiting key/lamp pair.

Telephones with internal telephone-to-telephone Call Waiting must also have

external Call Waiting (CWA) Class of Service.

A Call Waiting indication is not presented to a single-line telephone in the

transfer or conference mode.

A telephone user receiving a second call can connect alternately to

the original call and the Call Waiting call by a switchhook flash. The user

cannot transfer or conference either call.

A telephone user who has received a Call Waiting call routed from

the attendant cannot reconnect to the original call until it has been released

from the console.

Attendant Administration does not support the Internal Call Waiting feature.

Feature interaction

Call Forward All Calls and Hunting

Call Forward All Calls and Hunting take precedence over Call Waiting.

Call Forward No Answer

If a call to a telephone gets CFNA treatment to another telephone which

is busy, Call and Camp-On do not apply. The call will attempt

to terminate on the original DN again.

Camp-On

Call Waiting and Camp-on are mutually exclusive. If a Call Waiting

Class of Service or key is defined, Camp-on cannot be provided.

Hunting

If a call comes into a busy DN, it begins the hunting route defined from

the called DN. If there are idle on the the hunting route, the call

becomes a Call Waiting call on the called DN.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting

54-3

Message Center

Call Waiting calls are not forwarded to a Message Center.

Ring Again

The user is notified that a previously busy line is free only when both the

original call and the waiting call have disconnected.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature implementation

Allow/deny Call Waiting for telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CLS

CHG

500

lscu

CWA, (CWD)

SWA, (SWD)

(WTA), WTD

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) Call Waiting

Allow (Deny) internal Call Waiting (if SWA is defined, CWA

must also be defined)

Allow (Deny) warning tone

Allow/deny Call Waiting for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

aaaa

lscu

SWA, (SWD)

(WTA), WTD

xx CWT

Change

Telephone type

aaaa = 2006, 2008, 2009, 2112, 2216,

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) internal Call Waiting

Allow (Deny) warning tone

Add a Call Waiting key (M3000 must use key 24)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

54-4 Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting

Feature operation

To answer a Call Waiting call on SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones,

follow these steps:

Press Mold when you hear a tone during a phone call.

Press

Call Wait

to answer the waiting call.

To return to your first call, follow these steps:

Press

Hold

if you want to put your second call on Hold.

2 Press the extension key that has the first call on it.

To answer a Call Waiting call on telephones, follow these steps:

Flash the switchhook when you hear a beep during a phone call.

Your current call is on Hold and you are connected to the waiting call.

To return to your first call:

Flash the switchhook.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release:

Called Party Disconnect Control

Called Party Disconnect Control allows Meridian system to control the

disconnecting of calls on CO, FX, CCSA, DID, tie, WATS, modem, and

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting trunks. The trunk

route data block has been modified so that a route can be specified for

Party Disconnect Control.

With Called Party Disconnect Control, an incoming trunk call answered

within Meridian 1 is not disconnected until the Meridian 1 end goes on hook

If the calling party goes on hook, the connection is held, allowing the call

be traced in emergency situations. If the calling party goes off hook again,

call is not reestablished.

Operating parameters

An incoming call on a trunk route with Called Party Disconnect Control

allowed

can

be transferred to another telephone within Meridian but

be transferred to a trunk.

An incoming call with Called Party Disconnect Control can be forwarded

another telephone, but not to another trunk.

Tandem trunk connections are not allowed on incoming calls on trunks

Called Party Disconnect Control allowed.

If Barge-In or Busy Verify is applied to trunks with Called Party

allowed, the trunk is disconnected.

Force disconnect, through service change and maintenance, overrides

Party Disconnect Control.

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

55-2

Called Party Disconnect Control

Feature interaction

Conference

Trunks with Called Party Disconnect Control allowed are treated as

trunks without disconnect supervision when

Automatic Answerback

Incoming calls on a trunk with Called Party Disconnect Control allowed

that terminate on a telephone with Handsfree Answerback are answered

automatically. They are not disconnected automatically, however, when

the calling party goes on hook.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature implementation

LD16

Define Called Party Disconnect Control for a trunk route.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

C DB Customer Data Block

CUST o-99 Customer number

CNTL Yes, (No) Change the controls or timers

CPDC Yes, (No) Allow or deny Called Party Disconnect Control for the trunk

route (default is No)

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

56-1

Camp-On

Camp-On routes one additional external call to a busy Directory Number

(DN). When the attendant extends a call to a busy Directory Number (DN),

the external call is camped on to the telephone. If the class of service allows

a warning tone, the user hears a tone indicating that a call is camped on. If the

user frees the line within a specified time, the camped-on call rings the

telephone automatically. If not, the call returns to the attendant as a recall.

Camp-On Tone is allowed or denied on a per-customer basis. The time a

camped-on call waits is defined in from 0 to 5 seconds, in multiples

of 2 seconds. The default is 30 seconds.

Operating parameters

Camp-On applies to attendant-extended calls only. If the attendant hears a

busy tone, another call has already been camped on to the busy telephone.

Feature interaction

Warning tone

Class of service with warning tone denied allows a call to be camped on,

but with no warning tone.

Call Forward All Calls

Takes precedence over Camp-On.

Hunting

Takes precedence over Camp-On.

Call Waiting

Camp-On and Call Waiting are mutually exclusive.

1 features and services

56-2 Camp-On

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic 1 system software.

Feature implementation

Camp-On tone for a customer.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

OPT

CHG

CDB

o-99

CTA, (CTD)

xx yy

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Enable or disable Camp-On tone for the customer

Set recall timers

, yy = Camp-On recall timer, response is O-(30)-51 0

Allow/deny warning tone class of service for telephones.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

500 Telephone type

lscu

Terminal Number

WTA, (WTD) Allow (Deny) warning tone

warning tone class of service for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

lscu

WTA, (WTD)

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2216,

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) warning tone

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Camp-On

56-3

Feature operation

To camp on an external call to a busy destination, the attendant follows these

steps:

Press

RLS.

The call is camped on to the extension. If you hear a busy tone, a call is

already camped on the extension.

Note: If the call is not answered within a specified time, it recalls to the

attendant. Both the Source and Destination indicators flash until the

recall is answered. The call can be camped on again or released.

To answer a camped-on call, the subscriber follows these steps:

When you hear a short beep indicating a camped-on call, hang up or press

RLS.

When the telephone rings, lift the handset.

You are connected to the camped-on call.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

56-4 Camp-On

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Capacity Expansion

Introduced in releases 13 and 14, Capacity Expansion increases the

limits associated with the features listed in Tables 57-l and 57-2.

Table 57-l

Features expanded in 1 release

Feature

Call Pickup Groups

Speed Call lists/Hot Line lists **

System Speed Call lists

Trunk Group Access Restrictions

Trunk Group members (per trunk group)

CDP route list index *

CDP route list entry *

route list entry *

Multiple Appearance *

Group Call members (per group)

NCOS Groups *

CDP NCOS Groups *

NCOS Groups *

Network Authorization Code digits *

CDP steering codes *

Per customer Per

system

Previous limit

New limit

255

4095 (I-4095)

2 5 5 8191 (O-81 90)

255 4096 (o-4095)

15 31 (O-30)

127

254 (i-254)

32 256 (O-255)

3 64 (O-63)

8 64 (O-63)

100 (O-99)

4 100 (O-99)

100 (O-99)

714

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

57-2 Capacity Expansion

512 (O-51 1) (see Note)

Feature

Previous limit

New limit

Dial Intercom Groups * 254 2046 (o-2045)

Trunk * 128

Private Line routes *

512 (O-51 1)

Customer Groups 32 100 (O-99) (see Note)

Network Authorization Codes * 20K 50K

* Per customer Per system

Note: Due to large memory requirements for data configurations, only XN, NT,

XT, 51, 61, 71,

and 81

support the increased Trunk and Customer Groups. All other systems support the original limits only.

Table 57-2

Features expanded in 1 release 14

Operating parameters

Implementation of expanded features is dependent on available system

memory.

The new Speed Call limit includes all combined Speed Call, System Speed

Call, and Hot Line lists. Of the 8190 lists allocated for the system, up to 4096

lists can be allocated to System Speed Call.

The maximum number of Group Call lists remains 64.

Mini-CDR does not support the expanded CDR records produced by

Capacity Expansion.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Feature interaction

Capacity Expansion

57-3

ACD

Up to 512 (O-511) ACD routes can be configured.

ACD-D records

New ACD-D auxiliary messages replace messages that cannot

accommodate the expansion.

Call Detail Recording (CDR)

The CDR record has a new expanded tape format with the CDR

Expansion package. For a detailed description of the expanded CDR

record format, refer to Derail

(553-2631-100).

Hot Line list

Any number from to 8190 can be assigned as a Hot Line list number.

Hunting

If more than 16 appearances of the same Directory Number (DN) are

configured, each hunt step is counted as two, to avoid running out of time

slots.

System Speed Call lists

Any number from 0 to 4095 can be assigned to a System Speed Call list.

Feature packaging

No new feature package is required to implement the expanded feature limits.

Feature implementation

The existing overlays have been modified to accommodate the increased

limits for the expanded features.

Feature operation

Not applicable.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

57-4 Capacity Expansion

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:

92 1231

Status: Standard

1 Release: All

Centralized Attendant Service

58-1

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) centralizes attendant services for

customers with multiple locations. A typical Centralized Attendant Service

(CAS) configuration consists of one or more remote locations, each served by

its own switch and attendants, and a main site location where the Centralized

Attendant Service (CAS) attendants are located. (See Figure 1.) Each

remote location has access to the main CAS attendant through Release Link

Trunks (RLT), which can be either analog or digital. In addition, the remote

locations are interconnected by tie trunks.

When a call from a PBX in a remote location requires attendant assistance, an

idle Release Link Trunks (RLT) at the remote PBX is seized, and the call is

presented to the CAS attendant. If an idle Release Link Trunks (RLT) is not

available, the call is queued until an RLT becomes idle. The CAS attendant

can then extend the call to a station at the remote location.

The types of calls that require attendant assistance and can be handled by a

CAS attendant are

Listed Directory Number (LDN) calls

Dial-O calls (0 is optional if the flexible attendant Directory Number

(DN) is used)

Recalls, intercepts, or transfers to attendant

Operator-assisted calls for restricted telephones, giving access to WATS,

FX, and CO trunks

Operating parameters

For complete information regarding CAS,

see Centralized Attendant Service

description and engineering

(553-2681-100).

1 features and services

58-2 Centralized Attendant Service

Figure 58-1

Typical Centralized Attendant Service configuration

Tie trunks

Remote

PBX Remote

PBX

Attendant Attendant

Tie trunks

Remote

PBX

Attendant

Tie trunks

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Xl 1 Release:

59-l

Switchhook Flash

Switchhook Flash (THF) accesses services such as Call

Transfer or three-way calling while on an established call. It is useful

where is the backbone of the service network.

Switchhook Flash (THF) is supported by the following trunk types:

Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD)

Common Control Switching Arrangement, Automatic Number

Identification (CCSA

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting

Central Office (CO)

Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA)

Direct Inward Dial (DID)

Foreign Exchange (FX)

Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS)

Analog and DTI trunks

Whenever Switchhook Flash (THF) is invoked, Meridian 1 checks

for the following:

With telephones, that the class of service supports THF.

With SL- 1 or Meridian digital telephones, the feature cannot be activated

if a corresponding key is not equipped.

That the telephone is on an active two-way trunk call.

That THF is enabled in the trunk’s class of service.

If any of the above checks fails, the user hears an overflow tone. After the

tone times out, the original connection resumes.

features and services 553-3001-305

59-2

Switchhook Flash

Operating parameters

This feature is not supported on attendant consoles.

On SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones, once the THF key has been pressed,

all other function keys are blocked. While waiting for the connection,

only the RLS key or on hook connection is operative. Pressing the RLS key

or hanging up terminates the original connection as well as the THF message.

For the telephones, another switchhook flash is not allowed once

THF has been invoked. A second switchhook flash is treated as an on hook

disconnection.

THF allows you to make conference calls through the central office (CO). It

can be invoked only if you are established on a call connected to an outside

trunk. If engaged in internal conference calls, THF cannot be used.

Only trunks connected to the central office (CO) support THF. ISDN PRI

trunks do not support THF.

Only voice calls are supported on THF.

Feature interaction

None.

Package dependencies

Switchhook Flash (THF), package 157, has no package

dependencies.

Feature implementation

Enable/disable Switchhook Flash for single-line telephones.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

500 Telephone type

lscu

Terminal Number

THFA, (THFD)

Allow (Deny) Switchhook Flash

features and services 553-3001-305

Switchhook Flash

59-3

-Enable/disable Switchhook Flash

for

multi-line telephones.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

aaaa Telephone type

aaaa 2009,

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY

xx THF

Add a Switchhook Flash key

LD14

Enable/disable Switchhook Flash for each trunk.

TYPE AID

CAA

CAM

COT

CSA

DID

FEX

WAT

THFA, (THFD)

Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD) trunk

data block

Common Control Switching Arrangement Automatic

Number Identification (CCSA trunk data block

Centralized Automatic Message Accounting trunk

data block

Central Office (CO) trunk data block

Common Control Switching Arrangement access line data

block

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk data block

Foreign Exchange trunk data block

Wide Area Telephone Service trunk data block

Allow (Deny) Switchhook Flash on this trunk

LD16

Enable/disable Switchhook Flash for each trunk route.

CNTL Yes

FLH xx

Change controls or timers

Set the length of the timer for Switchhook Flash to

x msec; legal range for this timer is

256 ms. to 1536 ms. (default is 512 ms.).

1 features and services 553-3001-305

59-4 Switchhook Flash

Feature operation

To use Switchhook Flash (THF) from a telephone, follow

these steps:

Flash the switchhook to receive a special dial tone.

Enter the Special Prefix (SPRE) code, then the THF feature access code

To use Switchhook Flash (THF) from an SL-1 or Meridian digital

telephone, press the key configured for THF. Dial access is not supported on

these telephones.

To reestablish a connection before the overflow tone ends, flash the

switchhook telephone). Or Press the DN key or the key

establishing the original call (SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone).

features and services 553-3001-305

Charge Account and Calling Party

Number

Used in conjunction with Call Detail Recording (CDR), Charge Account

direct-bills calls to specific accounts or charge numbers instead of

Charge Account supports fixed-length numbers of 0 to 23 digits (default is 0),

specified on a per-customer basis. The charge account number is validated by

the system for length only. Verification of the actual digits entered is part of

CDR downstream processing.

On SL- and Meridian digital telephones this feature can be activated by a

separate Charge key/lamp pair, or dial-accessed. On attendant consoles it is

activated by a separate key/lamp pair. On single-line telephones it is

dial-accessed.

When a Charge Account number is used, the entire call is billed to that

number. The number can be entered either before or during a call, or when

Consultation Hold, Call Transfer, or Conference is activated.

Charge Account can be used to charge an entire conference call or portions of

the call. Portions of the call are assigned to different accounts by entering the

account number when adding trunks to a conference, before the conference is

completed.

When using single-line telephones, enter the account information

immediately after the switchhook flash, before the new trunk is dialed.

When using SL- and Meridian digital telephones, enter the number after

pressing the Conference key the first time, and before dialing.

features and services

553-3001-305

60-2 Charge Account and Calling Party Number

The

charge record

shows the identity of the user who made the entry and the

trunk that was added to the call. If the new call is not added to the conference,

the record shows a simple two-party call.

An entire call is charged to the same account by entering the charge number

while active on the conference.

When using SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones, press the Charge key

and enter the number in the usual manner.

When using Single-line telephones, enter the number after a switchhook

flash.

The call is reestablished without dialing additional trunks; a record is

produced for each trunk involved in the conference. In all these records, the

telephone user entering the number is considered the originating party. When

an entire call is charged to only one account number, it must be entered while

all trunks are connected to the conference.

Calling Party Number (CPN) is an extension of Charge Account that allows

entry of the calling party’s number on collect calls. SL-1 and Meridian digital

telephones are assigned a separate Calling Party Number (CPN) key/lamp

pair to activate this feature. When the calling party’s number is entered, a

Calling Party Number (CPN) record is produced. This record may be

compared to a telephone company billing for collect calls. Calling party

numbers can be up to 23 digits, and may include an asterisk and

octothorpe A CPN record is generated on the Call Detail Recording

(CDR) device similar to a normal Charge record.

1 features and services

Charge Account and Calling Party Number 60-3

Operating parameters

A valid charge account number is recognized when the number of dialed

digits matches the account length, or when the octothorpe indicates end of

dialing. After a valid charge account number has been entered, the system

returns a dial tone.

If too few digits are dialed, no response is given until the interdigit timeout

occurs. Overflow tone is returned for 15 seconds after timeout, then the user

is locked out.

If Call Transfer or Conference is used to consult with a third party and returns

to the original call without completing the transfer or conference, the charge

account number is applied to the Consultation call only.

Attendant use of Charge or CPN is restricted to situations in which there is

only one account party involved in the call (source side). When the calling

party number is used, the attendant must transfer the call, or the Call Detail

Recording (CDR) record does not reflect it.

Feature interaction

Telephone features

A Charge Account entry is aborted with any of the following keys:

.DN

Page

.Voice Call

.In-Calls

.Call Waiting

.Call Pickup

Release

Not Ready

a loop key

Release Destination

Release Source

1 features and services 553-3001-305

60-4 Charge Account and Calling Party Number

Barge

Busy Verify

A charge account number cannot be entered when Barge In or Busy

Verify is active. Barge In cannot be used to connect to a trunk after an

account number has been entered.

Override

When Charge Account is used during active Override, some digits may

be lost. When entered with Override in conference, a Charge Account

number is accepted and no digits are lost.

Call Transfer

A Call Transfer call produces two records: a CDR start record and a CDR

end record.

Conference

Conference calls produce multiple CDR records. Whenever a new trunk

is added to a conference, the connection between the connected

telephone and the trunk is recorded, and a connection to the conference

loop is established. This causes CDR to generate a start record with the

telephone and trunk identified as the involved parties. As trunks are

removed from a conference, CDR end records are produced. These

records may identify different telephones or conferences as the local

parties.

Ring Again

When Ring Again is activated, no charge record is generated, but the

information is stored for future use. If Ring Again is canceled before a

trunk is seized, the charge number is deleted and no record is produced.

If a trunk is seized later by Ring Again, the charge record is generated in

the usual manner. The use of Ring Again with Charge Account ties up

system resources because an auxiliary call register must be maintained in

the Ring Again queue.

Speed

Charge account numbers, including the Charge Account access Special

Prefix (SPRE) code, can be stored as Speed Call or numbers.

All current limitations of these features apply, such as a maximum of 23

digits per entry, including the access code. An number or dialed

digits can follow, but not precede, a Speed Call number. The digits

generated by an key during feature operation are accepted as

Charge Account digits.

I features and services

Feature packaging

Charge Account and Calling Party Number 60-5

CDR with Charge Account (CHG), package 23, requires

Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4

Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB), package 24

Feature implementation

-Add/change Charge Account for a customer.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

C DB Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CHLN (0)-23 Maximum number of digits that can be entered as a charge

account number

Allow/deny access to Charge Account for telephones.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

500 Telephone type

lscu

Terminal Number

XFA, (XFD)

Allow (Deny) call transfer

-Add/change a Calling Party Number or Charge key for SL-1, M3000, or Meridian digital

telephones.

CHG

TYPE

aaaa

KEY

lscu

xx CPN

xx CHG

Change

Telephone type

aaaa = SLI

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Add a Calling Party Number key (must be key 24for

and key 32 for M3000)

Add a Charge key (must be key 25 for M2317 and M3000)

1 features and services 553-3001-305

60-6 Charge Account and Calling Party Number

LD12

-Add/change a Calling Party Number or Charge key for attendant consoles.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type

aaaa =

2006, 2008, 2216,

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Customer number

Add a Calling Party Number key

Add a Charge key

CUST

KEY

lscu

o-99

O-9 CPN

CHG

Feature operation

This section explains Charge Account feature and Calling Party Number

feature operation for multi-line telephones, telephones, and

attendant consoles.

Multi-line telephones

To charge a call to an account before dialing, follow these steps:

Select a free extension.

Press

Charge

or dial SPRE + 5.

Dial the Charge Account number.

When you have a dial tone, dial the telephone number.

To charge during a call in progress, follow these steps:

Press

Charge.

2 Dial the Charge Account number.

3 Press the extension key to return to your call.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Charge Account and Calling Party Number

60-7

To use a SPRE code

to charge a call in progress,

follow these steps:

Press

Transfer

Conference.

Dial SPRE + 5.

Dial the Charge Account number.

4 Press the extension key to return to your call.

To charge a call to an account when you transfer a call, follow these steps:

Press

Transfer.

The call is on hold.

Press

Charge

or dial SPRE + 5.

Dial the Charge Account number.

4 Dial the number where the call is to be transferred.

Press

Transfer.

To charge a call to an account when adding a party to a conference call,

follow these steps:

Press

Conference.

The call is on hold.

Press

Charge

or dial SPRE + 5.

Dial the Charge Account number.

Call the party that you want to add to the conference.

Press

Conference.

To record a caller’s number for accounting purposes, follow these steps:

Press

Calling No.

The other party is on hold.

Dial a Charge Account number or the caller’s number.

Press

Calling

No. again to return to the call.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

60-8 Charge Account and Calling Party Number

telephones

To charge a call to an account before dialing, follow these steps:

Select a free extension.

2 Dial SPRE + 5.

3Dial the charge account number.

When you have a dial tone, dial the telephone number.

To charge during a call in progress, follow these steps:

Flash the switchhook or link.

Dial SPRE + 5.

3 Dial the Charge Account number.

Flash the switchhook or link to return to the call in progress.

To charge a call to an account when adding a party to a conference call,

follow these steps:

Flash the switchhook or link.

2 Dial SPRE + 5.

Dial the Charge Account number.

Call the party that you want to add to the conference,

Flash the switchhook or link.

Attendant consoles

To charge a call to an account before dialing, follow these steps:

Press the

loop

key.

Press

Charge.

3Dial the Charge Account number.

4 When you have a dial tone, dial the telephone number.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Charge Account and Calling Party Number 60-9

charge

during a call in progress, follow these steps:

While the source call is active on a loop key, press

Charge.

Dial the Charge Account number.

The voice connection remains active.

3 Flash the switchhook or link to return to the call in progress.

To record a caller’s number for accounting purposes, follow these steps:

While the source call is active on a loop key, press

Calling No.

The other party is on hold.

2 Dial a Charge Account number or the caller’s number.

Press

Calling

No. again to return to the call.

Xl features and services

60-10 Charge Account and Calling Party Number

features and services 553-3001-305

issued:

92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release:

All

61-1

Charge Account, Forced

Forced Charge Account (FCA) temporarily overrides class of service

restrictions for toll-denied users. Use Forced Charge Account (FCA)

long-distance calls to an account number when calling from a telephone that

is restricted from making long-distance calls. The unrestricted class of service

provided by Forced Charge Account (FCA) applies for the duration of the

call.

When the account number is entered, a charge record is produced on a Call

Detail Recording (CDR) device.

FCA supports variable-length numbers of to 23 digits. The minimum value

for the account number is specified at the customer level.

A valid account number equals or exceeds the minimum value defined, and

is validated by the system for length only. Verification of the actual digits

entered is part of Call Detail Recording (CDR) downstream processing.

FCA can be allowed or denied at both customer and user levels. Users include

any station or tie and CCSA type trunks assigned a Toll-Denied (TLD),

Conditionally Toll-Denied (CTD), or Conditionally Unrestricted (CUN)

Class of Service.

SL- and Meridian digital telephones activate this feature by using a separate

Charge key/lamp pair. Any user can access this feature by dialing SPRE + 5.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

61-2 Charge Account, Forced

A distinction is made between normal CDR Charge Account processing and

FCA. If all the following conditions are met, the account number is treated as

an FCA code:

The telephone from which the number is entered must have a TLD, CTD,

or CUN Class of Service.

The station or trunk from which the number is entered must be in a state

to originate a call (press a Directory Number (DN) key or flash the

switchhook).

FCA must be enabled at the customer level.

FCA must be allowed for the station or trunk from which the number is

entered.

A valid account number must be entered at the beginning of the call.

The unrestricted class of service provided by FCA as described above applies

for the duration of the call only. The account number must be reentered for

each successive toll call placed by the station or trunk.

Operating parameters

An octothorpe dialed after the account number indicates that the

subsequent digits are part of the dialed number.

CDR charge account numbers are fixed-length codes for which a maximum

value is specified by the customer. This is also the maximum allowed for the

FCA account number.

Because 500 telephones cannot dial an octothorpe they are restricted to

fixed-length account numbers.

FCA does not apply to attendant calls.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Feature interaction

Charge Account, Forced 61-3

Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection

If BARS or NARS is equipped, an Network Class of Service (NCOS)

associated with FCA must be defined in the customer data block.

CDR

Normal CDR charge account numbers can still be entered before or after

an FCA code. If the criteria for an FCA call are not met, CDR charge

account numbers function in the normal manner.

Conference and Transfer

If an FCA code is entered at the beginning of a call, the new unrestricted

class of service remains in effect for any transfer or conference made

during the call. If all FCA criteria are met, an account number entered

after activating the Conference key, Call Transfer key, or a switchhook

flash is interpreted as an FCA code.

Authorization Code

If the authorization code is used to change the class of service of the user,

the new class of service must be TLD, CTD, or CUN. If an Authorization

Code entered after FCA has altered the class of service to unrestricted

(UNR), the change

made

by the Authorization Code still comes into

effect.

Speed Call and

FCA numbers (including the Special Prefix (SPRE) code and the Charge

Account access code) can be entered in Speed Call lists or stored as

numbers. The digits can also be stored, provided that the

account number, regardless of its length, is followed directly by an

octothorpe

Trunk Group Access Restrictions (TGAR)

apply to the telephone or trunk entering the account number.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

61-4

Charge Account, Forced

Feature packaging

Forced Charge Account (FCA), package 52 requires

Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB), package 24

CDR for Charge Account (CHG), package 23

implementation

Enable/disable Forced Charge Account for a customer.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

CHLN

FCAF

Yes, (No)

CHMN

FCNC

CHG

CDB

o-99

(0)-23

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Maximum number of digits that can be in an FCA code

(default is 0)

Enable or disable FCA for the customer

Minimum number of digits that can be in an FCA code

(must be less than CHLN)

NCOS to be assigned to FCA codes

Enable/disable Forced Charge Account for telephones.

REQ

TYPE

FCAR

CHG

500

lscu

Yes

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

FCA is restricted from use by this telephone

FCA can be used by this telephone

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Charge Account, Forced

61-5

-Enable/disable Forced Charge Account for Sl-1 and Meridian Digital telephones.

TYPE

FCAR

CHG

aaaa

lscu

Yes

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

FCA is restricted from use by this telephone

FCA can be used by this telephone

Enable/disable Forced Charge Account for each incoming tie or CCSA trunk.

TYPE

FCAR

CHG

aaaa

lscu

Yes

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317,

Terminal Number

FCA is restricted from use by this trunk

FCA can be used by this trunk

Feature operation

To use FCA, follow these steps:

Select a free extension.

Press

Charge

or dial SPRE + 5.

Dial the Charge Account number.

When you have a dial tone, dial the long-distance number.

For operating procedures from particular telephones or consoles, see the

“Charge Account and Calling Party Number” on page 60-l.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

61-6 Charge Account, Forced

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:. 92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release: All

62-1

Conference

Conference adds additional parties to an established call. The maximum is

three or six, depending on the Conference feature assigned to the conference

call originator. The parties can be inside or outside Meridian

although one party must be an internal Directory Number (DN) to uphold the

conference connection. The attendant can also establish six-party

conferences.

SL- and Meridian digital telephones require a separate Conference or

Conference 6 key/lamp pair. M23 17 and M3000 Touchphones establish

conference calls by means of a telephones use the

switchhook to establish a three-party conference.

Six-party conference for Telephones, Xl 1 release 10

and later releases

The six-party Conference Class of Service enables

telephones to establish a six-party conference, which operates the same as a

three-party conference, with the exception of Conference Control operation.

Introduced in 1 release 2, Conference Control disconnects an unwanted

third party (trunk only) from a three-party conference. telephone

users implement this feature by means of switchhook flash. Telephones with

the six-party conference capability implement Conference Control by dialing

SPRE 87.

It is recommended that all telephones have either the three-party

conference Class of Service or the six-party Conference Class

of Service to avoid confusion when using Conference Control.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

62-2 Conference

Operating parameters

Due to the potential impact on hearing loss levels of more than two trunks in

a conference at any one time, it is strongly recommended that a maximum of

two trunks be included.

At least one party in the conference must be a telephone on the local

Meridian 1 for the duration of the conference call.

Attendant Administration does not support the implementation of six-party

conference for telephones. An error message is displayed if an

attempt is made to remove Transfer Allowed (XFA) class of service for

telephones with a Class of Service.

A Transfer allowed (XFA) class of service is required for a three-party

conference and is also a prerequisite for the six-party conference class

of service on telephones.

Dial access of Conference Control is provided only for telephones

with a Class of Service.

The number of timeslots is limited to 30 per conference loop. A maximum of

five simultaneous conferences, each consisting of six conference users, is

supported per conference loop.

A warning tone is available for conference calls. When the option is enabled,

the tone lets callers know that they are entering a conference call. The switch

for this option is preset to disable the warning tone. For information on the

switch settings for the card, refer to

cad

testing

(553-3001-211).

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Conference

62-3

Feature interaction

Call Transfer

Conference can be used to transfer calls, eliminating the need for a

separate Call Transfer key/lamp pair on SL-I and Meridian digital

telephones. Calls in the ringing state cannot be transferred with

Conference. The third party must answer before the transfer can be

completed.

Transfer

When a switchhook flash transfers calls on telephones with

three-party conference class of service, the transferring party goes

on hook leaving the other two parties established. Telephones with a

class of service involved in a conference having more than three

parties must add the last party to the conference, then flash the

switchhook and go on hook to complete the transfer.

Attendant Barge-In and Attendant Busy Verify

Conference Control cannot be activated if an attendant has used Barge-In

or Busy Verify during a conference that involves a trunk.

Ring Again

This feature cannot be activated during a conference call.

Call Pickup

This feature cannot be activated during a conference call. SL-1 and

Meridian digital telephones can activate Call Pickup if an idle Directory

Number (DN) key is available. The conference call must be put on hold

before pressing the idle DN key to pick up the call.

Trunk Access from any Station (TAFAS)

A switchhook flash on telephones results in special dial tone.

Dialing SPRE + 4 (TAFAS access code) then picks up an incoming

TAFAS call. A second switchhook flash reconnects the user to the

original conference call. The call picked up by TAFAS is put on

Consultation Hold. No other action can be taken with a call picked up in

this way during an established conference call.

Call Forward All Calls

On telephones, Call Forward All Calls can be activated or

canceled during a conference call.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

62-4 Conference

Hot Line

A Flexible Hot Line (non-enhanced) telephone cannot place conference

calls, but an Enhanced Hot Line telephone can activate the conference

feature. If the Hot Line restriction option is set, the conference call can

terminate only to other Hot Line telephones. If the restriction option is

not set, the conference call can terminate to any type of telephone.

Group Call

Neither Call Transfer nor Conference can be initiated during a Group

Call. If a telephone user flashes the switchhook during an

established Group Call, the user is dropped from the call.

Attendant

Three-party Conference allows telephones on

established calls to flash the switchhook and Dial 0 to talk to the

attendant. Six-party conference users follow the same sequence, but the

conference loop is seized and the call is treated as a conference call.

When only two parties remain from the conference, the call is returned

to a simple call if neither of the remaining parties is an attendant console.

Dial Intercom Group (DIG)

a telephone is part of a Dial Intercom Group (DIG), the user

of the telephone can conference only with another user whose telephone

is within the same Dial Intercom Group (DIG).

Meridian Mail (VOM) Conference Control

Three- and six-party conference allows 2500 telephones to disconnect

from Meridian Mail by dial access during a conference call.

A 2500 telephone on an established call flashes the switchhook to place the

existing call on Consultation Hold. After receiving special dial tone, the user

dials the third party. If the third party does not answer, the call is forwarded

to Meridian Mail. If the 2500 telephone flashes the switchhook again, a

three-party conference is established, including Meridian Mail. If the user

does not flash the switchhook at this time, Privacy is in effect and the user can

disconnect from Meridian Mail by dial access before returning to the original

call. This can be done if the user is in conference or on a simple two-party call.

To disconnect from Meridian Mail, press octothorpe to stop the recorded

greeting, octothorpe to stop recording your message, and 83 to disconnect.

To disconnect from any other message system connected to Meridian

press 3 to stop the recorded message and the asterisk to disconnect.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Conference 62-5

Feature packaging

Conference is included in basic 1 system software.

Feature implementation

Add/change Conference 3 or Conference 6 for telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

500

XFA (XFD)

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) transfer Class of Service

Allow (Deny) six-party conference requires an XFA

Class of Service)

Add/change Conference 3 or Conference 6 for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

aaaa

Change

Telephone type

aaaa

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Add a Conference 3 or Conference 6 key (must be key 23

for M3000)

xx = key number

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

62-6 Conference

Feature operation

To add a new party to an established call on an or digital telephone,

follow these steps:

Press

Conference.

The first party is on hold and you receive a dial tone.

Dial the number of the new party.

When the new party answers, you may talk privately.

Press

Conference

to include all parties in the call.

To add more parties to the conference (up to six, including yourself),

repeat steps 1-3.

Note:

If you make a mistake while dialing or receive a busy signal, press

to disconnect. To return to the call, press the key beside the fast

flashing indicator.

To add a new party to an established call on a telephone, follow

these steps:

Flash the switchhook.

You hear three beeps followed by dial tone. The first party is on hold.

2 Dial the telephone number of the person to be included in your call.

When the call is answered, you may talk privately with the new party.

Flash the switchhook to include all parties in the call.

4 To add more parties to the conference (up to six, including yourself),

repeat steps 1-3.

Note:

If you make a mistake while dialing or receive a busy signal, flash

the switchhook to return to the original caller.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:

Status:

Release:

63-1

Console Presentation Group Level

Services

A Console Presentation Group (CPG) is a subset of the consoles configured

for a customer. A CPG handles attendant calls from one or more tenants and

incoming trunk calls on one or more routes. CPG improves functions for the

following CPG Level Services:

Attendant Overflow Positions (AOP)

AOP DN and waiting time threshold can be specified for each CPG.

Call Waiting Indication

Count thresholds, timers, and buzz options

can

be defined for each CPG.

Incoming Call Identification (ICI)

ICI keys can be defined for each CPG. Attendants see only those ICI

definitions for their own CPG.

Listed Directory Numbers (LDN)

Each CPG allows four

Night Service (NSVC)

Each CPG can go into Night Service mode independent of the other

groups.

Recorded Announcement (RAN)

Each CPG can have its own recorded overflow announcements.

Operating parameters

Console Presentation Group (CPG) services and Departmental Listed

Directory Numbers (DLDN) are mutually exclusive at the customer level.

That is, can be equipped on the same system with Console

Presentation Groups but not enabled for the same customer group at

the same time.

features and services 553-3001-305

63-2 Console

Presentation

Group Level Services

Feature interaction

Attendant Administration

Attendants can dial the access code and activate the Administration

mode. In this mode, they can modify the configuration of any telephone

for this customer.

Call Park

Parked calls recall to the attendant who parked them. If that attendant

console goes into Position Busy mode, the call recalls to an attendant in

the same CPG as the original.

If the attendant goes into Night Service (NSCV) while a call is parked,

the recall is presented to the Night DN defined for that CPG. If an

attendant goes into Night Service while the recall is in the attendant

queue, it stays in the attendant queue until the call is abandoned.

Secrecy

The Secrecy option specified for a customer applies to all attendants for

that customer.

Supervisory console

The supervisory console specified for a customer belongs to one CPG. In

the Supervisory mode, ICI indicators show only the information for

in that CPG. Thresholds specified in the customer data block apply only

to the CPG where that console resides, and do not effect any other CPG.

Feature packaging

Console Presentation Groups (CPG), package 172, requires

Multi-Tenant Services (TENS), package 86

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Console Presentation Group Level Services

63-3

Feature implementation

LD93

Enable CPG.

TYPE

CUST

CPGS

Multi-Tenant data block

Customer number

Enable CPG Level Services

LD93 -Assign attendant consoles to a presentation group.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

AGNO

ANUM

CHG

CPG

o-99

O-63

l-631-63

Change

Console Presentation Group data block

Customer number

Attendant console group number

Attendant console numbers

LD93 Assign tenants to an attendant group number.

REQ CHG

TYPE

TCPG

CUST

o-99

TEN

l-511

AGNO

O-63

Change

Tenant to Console Presentation Group data block

Customer number

Tenant number

Attendant console group number

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

63-4 Console Presentation Group Level Services

LD93

Assign a route to an attendant group number.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

AGNO

CHG

RCPG

o-99

l-511

O-63

LD93

Add CPG features. (Part 1 of 2)

Change

Route to Console Presentation Group data block

Customer number

Route number

Attendant console group number

REQ

TYPE

CUST

CPG

LDNO

NIT1

NIT2

TIM2

NEW, CHG

CPGP

o-99

1-63

xxxx

hhmm

xxxx

hhmm

Enable/disable Multi-Tenant Service for a customer

Console Presentation Group parameters

Customer number

Console Presentation group number

Listed DN 0

First Night Service by Time of Day (NTOD) DN

Hour minute for First NTOD DN

Second NTOD DN

Time for Second NTOD

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Console Presentation Group Level Services 63-5

LD93 -Add CPG features. (Part 2 of 2)

NIT3

xxxx

Third NTOD DN

TIM3

hhmm Time for Third NTOD DN

NIT4

xxxx

Fourth NTOD DN

TIM4

hhmm Time for Fourth NTOD

ICI

xx aaa

Incoming Call Indicators (ICI)

AQTT

Attendant queuing threshold

AODN

xxxx

Attendant overflow DN

(0)-255

Number of waiting calls, lower threshold and upper bound

CWTM

(O)-511 (O)-511 Time for waiting calls, lower threshold and upper bound

CWBZ Yes, (No) Yes, (No) Buzz Call Waiting calls over thresholds, and/or enters

queue

Feature operation

Not applicable.

features and services

553-3001-305

63-6 Console Presentation Group Level Services

features and services 553-3001-305

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

Xl 1 Release:

64-1

Controlled Class of Service

Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) alters the Class of Service restriction

levels on telephones that have been defined as CCOS controlling telephones.

This applies to SL- 1 and Meridian digital telephone users designated as

CCOS controllers. While CCOS is active, central office or toll calls made

from these telephones cannot be completed without first being routed through

an attendant.

SL- 1 and Meridian digital telephones designated as CCOS controlling

telephones are assigned a CCOS key/lamp that is used to activate or cancel

the system-defined CCOS restriction level on individual

Operating parameters

Controlling telephones can be any SL- 1 or Meridian digital telephones.

CCOS controlling telephones must refer to the Prime Directory Number

(PDN) when activating or cancelling CCOS on other telephones.

Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agents cannot be restricted by CCOS.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

64-2 Controlled Class of Service

Feature interaction

Authorization code

The authorization code overrides a telephone’s CCOS restriction level.

Conference

If CCOS is activated at a telephone involved in a conference call,

established control office or toll calls are not affected. The CCOS

restriction level is applied immediately, and no new calls can be initiated

from the conference. The telephone remains in the CCOS active state

after the conference is terminated.

Multiple Appearance DN

CCOS restriction levels are activated or canceled on controlled

telephones through their Prime Directory Number (PDN). When the

PDN of an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone is made CCOS active, all

on that telephone are also restricted. If the DN is a PDN on other

telephones, those telephones are also restricted (if they have CCSA class

of service).

Feature packaging

Controlled Class of Service (CCOS), package 81, has no feature package

requirements.

features and services 553-3001-305

Controlled Class of Service 64-3

Feature implementation

Add/change CCOS for a customer.

REQ

CUST

CCRS

CHG

o-99

UNR

CUN

CTD

TLD

SRE

FRE

FR2

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Unrestricted

Conditionally unrestricted

Conditionally toll-denied

Toll-denied

Semi-restricted

Fully restricted

Fully restricted 2

-Allow/deny CCOS on SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

lscu

CCSA, (CCSD)

Change

Telephone type

aaaa = , 2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112,

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) CCOS

CCOS on 50012500 telephones.

TYPE

CHG

500

lscu

CCSA, (CCSD)

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) CCOS

1 features and services 553-3001-305

64-4

Controlled Class

of Service

-Add/change CCOS controlling telephone assignments on and Meridian digital

telephones.

REQ CHG

TYPE

aaaa

lscu

KEY

xx cos

Feature operation

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Assign CCOS controlling key

To activate CCOS, follow these steps:

Press CCOS.

Dial the Prime Directory Number (PDN) of the telephone to be changed

and press CCOS.

Press

RLS.

To deactivate CCOS, follow these steps:

Press CCOS.

Dial the PDN of the telephone to be returned to its original class of

service and press CCOS.

Press

RLS.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:

931031

Status: Standard

1 Release:

65-l

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS) allows a controller or

attendant console to alter the class of service (CLS) restriction levels of other

CCOS telephones. The feature allows two more customer-defined levels of

restriction. In addition, the CCOS key can now be assigned to an attendant

console and telephones as a programmable key.

Operating parameters

Controlling telephones can be any SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone.

A CCOS controlling telephone must refer to the Prime DN when activating

or canceling CCOS on other telephones.

ACD agents cannot be restricted by CCOS.

On M3000 telephones, the CCOS key can be assigned as a programmable key

(O-5 only).

This feature is applicable only when the CLS lamp is lit on the controlling

telephone.

The CLS key on an attendant console can be used only on an idle loop. (The

loop lamp is lit; source and destination lamps are dark.)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

65-2 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

Feature interaction

Attendant Administration

This feature cannot change CCRS, or ECC2, but can assign CLS

keys to certain telephones.

Authorization Codes

The Authorization Code can override a telephone’s CCOS restriction

level.

Conference Calls

If CCOS is activated at a telephone on a conference call, established CO

or toll calls are not affected. The CCOS restriction level is applied

immediately, however, and no new calls can be initiated from the

conference. That telephone remains in the CCOS state after the end of the

conference.

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP)

The internal DN is used for programming the CLS level for CDP from

the controlling telephone.

Multiple Appearance

All CCOS restriction levels are activated and canceled from the PDN

(PDN) for CCOS controlling telephones. The PDN for an SL-1 telephone

is made CCOS active, and all for that telephone are restricted as

well. If that DN is a PDN on other telephones, they are also restricted (if

they have CCSA Class of Service).

Pretranslation

The DN used to program the CCOS should be the actual DN before

pretranslation. When programming CCOS, the DN entered is not

pretranslated.

Supervisory attendants

When the attendant is in the supervisory mode, CCOS programing is

prohibited.

Feature packaging

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS), package 173, requires

Controlled Class of Service (CCOS), package 81

features and services

553-3001-305

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

65-3

Feature implementation

Define the class of service restrictions for the system.

REQ CHG Change

Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CCRS CCOS restrictions

Unrestricted service

CTD Conditionally Toll Denied

CUN Conditionally Unrestricted

F RE Fully Restricted

Fully Restricted level

FR2 Fully Restricted level 2

SRE Semi-Restricted

T L D Toll Denied

xxx

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service, Level 1

ECC2

xxx

Enhanced Controlled Class of Service, Level 2

x x x =(UNR)

CTD

CUN

FRE

FR2

SRE

TLD

Note: Input restrictions apply when CCSA is active. When CCSA is inactive, the telephone has the CLS

assigned in O/l 1.

features and services 553-3001-305

65-4 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

-Assign keys for controller telephone.

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

aaaa

lscu

xx cos

Change

Telephone type

aaaa = 2006,

Terminal Number

Key number for CCOS key on controller telephone

(for M3000, key must be O-5)

Configure controlled telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

500

lscu

CCSA,

(CCSD)

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Allow (Deny) CCOS

Configure the controlled SL-1 and digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

lscu

CCSA, (CCSD)

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

Terminal Number

18, 2112, 2216,

Allow (Deny) CCOS

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced

65-5

LD12

Assign ECCS keys for attendant console

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHGCHG

ATT, ATT,

lscu

xx cos

Change

Console type

Terminal Number

Key number for CCOS controller key on attendant console

xx = key number (must be greater than 1)

Feature operation

To activate Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS) from an or

digital telephone with the feature currently inactive, follow these steps:

Press CCOS to begin the activation sequence.

Note that this is a toggle: If CCOS is already active, pressing the key will

change the CCOS state to inactive. Check the CCOS lamp to determine

if CCOS is already active.

Dial the PDN of the telephone to be changed and press CCOS. The

controlling telephone’s display, if equipped, shows the DN of the

changed telephone and a 0 (zero).

To select dial 1.

Note that the octothorpe is required. The controlling telephone’s

display, if equipped, shows the DN of the changed telephone and a 1.

To select dial 2.

Note that the octothorpe is required. The controlling telephone’s

display, if equipped, shows the DN of the changed telephone and a 2.

Press

RLS.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

65-6 Controlled Class

of Service,

Enhanced

To activate ECCS from an attendant console, follow these steps:

Select an idle loop key.

Press CCOS.

3 Dial the PDN of the telephone to be changed and press CCOS. The

console’s display shows the DN of the changed telephone. A 0 (zero) is

displayed if the telephone is active in the original CCOS mode.

If the telephone dies not have CCOS or ECCOS active, the console does

not acknowledge that you have successfully entered a valid CCOS DN.

4 To select dial # 1.

Note that the octothorpe is required. The console’s display shows the

DN of the changed telephone and a 1.

To select ECC2, dial 2.

Note that the octothorpe is required. The console’s display shows the

DN of the changed telephone and a 2.

5 Press

RLS.

To deactivate Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS), follow these

steps:

Select an idle loop key.

Press

3 Dial the PDN of the telephone to be returned to its original class of

service and press CCOS.

Press

RLS.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Issued; 92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release:

66-1

Directory Number

The Departmental Listed Directory Number (DLDN) feature allows specified

telephones sharing the same numbering plan to belong to one subgroup out of

a possible four subgroups within a Meridian 1 customer group. Each

Departmental Listed Directory Number (DLDN) subgroup is identified by

one of the customer’s Listed Directory Numbers Calls to a specific

Listed Directory Numbers (LDN). or dial-0 calls from subgroup telephones,

are directed to the attendant console or consoles assigned to that Listed

Directory Numbers (LDN).

When the Departmental Listed Directory Number (DLDN) feature is

implemented, a departmental attendant console is presented with calls from

the following sources:

Incoming external trunk calls routed to the LDN from

an auto-terminate trunk (CO, FX, or WATS) whose Auto-Terminate

Number (ATDN) is the LDN

.a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk whose Direct Inward Dialing

(DID) number is the same as the LDN

Calls that originate from internal telephones or tie trunks when

.a telephone user dials the LDN

a telephone user associated with a departmental attendant console

dials 0

.a tie-line user dials the LDN

The DLDN feature associates attendant consoles with a LDN. Up to 63

attendant consoles can be associated with one LDN.

Xl 1 features and services

66-2 Departmental Listed Directory Number

For call distribution purposes, all attendant consoles within a subgroup are

made members of a circular list. When a call is received, it is presented to the

next listed console after the one that was last offered a call, thus ensuring that

LDN calls are distributed in an equitable way. LDN calls, dial-0 calls, and

associated timed recalls are serviced according to a circular list for the

particular LDN.

On receiving an LDN type call, the Meridian 1 searches for an idle attendant

console and tests whether or not that console is configured to answer a call

for the dialed Directory Number (DN). If the attendant console is not

configured to answer calls for that LDN, the next idle attendant console is

tested. If an attendant console that can answer the call is found, the call is

presented with the appropriate Loop and Incoming Call Indication (ICI)

lamps lit. If no idle attendant console for the LDN is found, the call is placed

in the incoming call queue for all attendant consoles within the customer

group.

The Call Waiting indication is provided to all attendant consoles within the

customer group. If an Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) key has been provisioned

for the LDN, a lamp indication will be provided to all idle attendant consoles

within the customer group and may be answered by pressing the appropriate

key.

When an attendant presses the Release key, the Meridian 1 checks to see if

there are any calls waiting in the queue. If there are calls waiting, it tests

whether or not the attendant console, if it is next in the circular list, can

answer the first call in the queue. If the call can be answered, it is presented

to the attendant console. Otherwise it is put back into the queue and another

call is sought. If no calls for the LDN are found, the attendant console is idled

and the Release lamp is lit.

Operating parameters

An optional assignment of ICI keys is allowed to provide a visual indication

of the LDN

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Departmental Listed Directory Number

66-3

Feature interactions

Night Service

DLDN does not affect Night Service (including TAFAS). Calls

presented to the LDN from an external source will queue for the night

bell. All other attendant calls receive busy treatment if the night

Directory Number (DN) is busy.

Position Busy

If all attendant consoles in an LDN group are in a Position Busy state,

calls to that LDN will not be automatically presented to any attendant

console in the customer group. Other attendants may only answer those

LDN calls if the LDN has been assigned to an ICI key.

Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)

LDN calls are not screened for Centralized Attendant Service (CAS).

When a Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) key is pressed at a CAS

remote attendant console, LDN calls will be handled at the CAS main as

if the DLDN feature did not exist.

Call Forward

Call Forward No Answer to the attendant and Call Forward Busy operate

like Call Forward to 0, and are routed to any idle attendant console in the

customer group.

Interdepartmental Attendant Transfers

Interdepartmental Attendant Transfers operate normally, except that if

there is a recall, it will be to the appropriate department rather than to the

last attendant that extended the call.

Attendant Overflow Position

LDN calls that have been waiting in the queue longer than the specified

threshold period will be routed to the Attendant Overflow Position.

Feature packaging

DLDN, package 76, has no other package dependencies.

1 features and services

66-4 Departmental Listed Directory Number

Feature implementation

Note: If the DN Expansion package is equipped, all can have up

to seven digits.

Enable the Departmental Listed Directory Number feature for a customer. (Part 1 of 2)

REQ

CHG

Change

TYPE

C DB Customer Data Block

CUST o-99 Customer number

DLDN Yes, (No) Enable or disable DLDN

LDNO

xxx...x

Listed Directory Number Zero

LDAO

Associate attendant console number with LDN 0

Note: With 1 release 8 and later, the maximum number of

attendant consoles allowed is 63.

ALL

Associate all attendant consoles with LDN 0

<CR> Associate all attendant consoles with LDNO

xxx...x

Listed Directory Number One

Associate attendant console number with LDN

Note: With Xl 1 release 8 and later, the maximum number of

attendant consoles allowed is 63.

ALL

Associate all attendant consoles with LDN 1

<CR> Associate all attendant consoles with

features and services 553-3001-305

Departmental Listed Directory Number

66-5

Enable the Departmental Listed Directory Number feature for a customer. (Part 2 of 2)

LDN2

xxx...x

Listed Directory Number Two

Associate attendant console number with LDN 2

Note: With 1 release 8 and later, the maximum number of

attendant consoles allowed is 63.

LDN3

LDA3

ALL

<CR>

xxx...x

Associate all attendant consoles with LDN 2

Associate all attendant consoles with LDN2

Listed Directory Number Three

Associate attendant console number with LDN 3

Note: With Xl 1 release 8 and later, the maximum number of

attendant consoles allowed is 63.

ICI

ALL

<CR>

xx LDO

xx LD2

xx LD3

Associate all attendant consoles with LDN 3

Associate all attendant consoles with

Incoming Call Indication for Listed Directory Numbers Zero

to Three (xx key number 9)

Note: To remove an LDN, enter an X before the Directory Number. An LDN cannot be removed if any

attendant consoles are associated with it. To remove an associated attendant console, enter an X at the

LDA prompt before the attendant number.

Add or change Departmental Listed Directory Number for telephones.

REQ

TYPE

LDN

CHG

500

lscu

O-3, (No)

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Telephone associated with LDN (O-3 or none)

Choose No to remove this telephone from the group.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

66-6 Departmental Listed Directory Number

-Add or change Departmental Listed Directory Number for SL-1 and Meridian digital

telephones.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

aaaa

Telephone type (aaaa =

2018, 2112, 2216, 2317, 2616, 3000

lscu

Terminal Number

LDN O-3, Telephone associated with LDN (O-3 or none)

Choose No to remove this telephone from the group.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued: 93 08 01

Status: Standard

1 Release:

67-1

Dial Intercom

Dial Intercom (DI) allows a customer to arrange stations within the Meridian

1 into separate Dial Intercom Groups (DIG

). A total of 100 stations can

belong to each Dial Intercom Group (DIG). One-digit dialing is required for

a Dial Intercom Group (DIG) of up to 10 stations, and two-digit dialing is

required for a DIG of up to 100 stations.

SL- 1 and Meridian digital telephones can be equipped with a separate DIG

key/lamp pair for each DIG of which it is a member. Single-line telephone

users can belong to only one DIG and may not have any non-DIG Directory

Numbers

Voice or ring may be specified on a DIG basis for SL- 1 and Meridian digital

telephones. If voice is specified, an idle stations rings once for 2 seconds. The

calling party is then connected and may make a voice announcement. If ring

is implemented, normal ringing is received until the called party answers. In

Xl 1 release 19, you have the option of an announcement or a two-way speech

path.

The ring option must be used if a 500 type telephone is a member of the

group.

Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom, X11 release 13 and later software

This feature allows a user to differentiate between an incoming call and a Dial

Intercom (DI) call. The Dial Intercom (DI) ringing has a different cadence

than the regular Directory Number (DN) ringing and Distinctive Ringing.

Distinctive Ringing for DI is assignable on a per customer basis. The cadence

is 0.5 on and 0.5 off, repeatedly.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

67-2 Dial Intercom

Dial Intercom Handsfree Voice Call

Dial Intercom Handsfree Voice Call is an X11 release 19 system feature that

can be used with the following telephones: M2112, M2317, and M2616.

Handsfree Voice Call provides the option of configuring (with

voice option) to be answered in either handsfree mode or loudspeaker only

mode. Calls answered in handsfree (HVA) mode establish a two-way voice

path, while those answered in loudspeaker only (HVD) mode establish only

a one-way voice path from the calling telephone to the destination telephone.

Note:

Dial Intercom Handsfree Voice Call applies only to voice option

DIG calls.

Operating parameters

A maximum of 254 can be established per customer. X11 release 13

and later software up to 2046 can be implemented.

Calls are restricted to stations within the DIG only. Trunks cannot be accessed

using the DIG key, and cannot be added to a DIG call using the Conference

feature.

A DIG member number must be a single appearance Directory Number (DN)

within a specified DIG.

DI telephones cannot dial the attendant or be dialed by the

attendant.

A DI telephone cannot be assigned a member number that conflicts with the

Special Prefix (SPRE) code. In the case of double-digit values, the first digit

cannot be the same as the SPRE code. For example, if the SPRE code is 7, the

member number cannot be 7, or 70 through 79, but a two-digit SPRE code,

such as 77, allows 99 DIG member numbers. With no SPRE code defined,

100 DIG members are possible.

Call Transfer and Conference cannot take place to telephones outside the

DIG.

features and services 553-3001-305

Dial Intercom

67-3

Handsfree Voice Call allowed/denied is set at the system level and can only

be used with digital telephones that have handsfree capabilities (such as 2112,

2317, and and requires Class of Service Handsfree on

the destination telephone, which is set at the telephone level.

Note:

BRI, M3000, and SL-1 telephones do not support the Handsfree

feature.

Feature interactions

Call

The Dial Intercom code may be dialed using or Speed Call.

Call Forward/Call Waiting

The Call Forward and Call Waiting features do not apply to a Dial

Intercom appearance.

Call Pickup

Call Pickup may be used by SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones if the

telephones are all in the same DIG and Call Pickup Group and the ring

option is specified for the DIG.

Digit Display

The digit display will be cleared when the DIG key is pressed. When the

user dials the DI code, the digits of the code are displayed. When the call

is answered, the DI code of the calling party appears on the display of the

called party.

If either party presses the Release key or goes on-hook during a DIG call,

the displays of both parties are cleared. If either party presses the Hold

key, the display of the holding station is cleared but the display of the

other station remains unchanged. When the held call is reestablished, the

holding station redisplays the DIG number of the other party.

Conference/Call Transfer

When using Conference or Transfer, the voice option is not provided if

the call is terminated before the conference or transfer is completed.

Auto Answer Back (AAB)

This feature is not affected by the Handsfree Voice Call feature.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

67-4

Dial Intercom

Station features

DI can be used in combination with the following features:

Feature

Speed Call

Digit Display

Make Set Busy

Override

Release

Hold

Call Pickup

Conference

Call Transfer

Ring Again

SL-1 and Meridian

digital telephones telephones

Feature packaging

Dial Intercom (DI) package (21) has no other package dependencies.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Dial Intercom 67-5

REQ

TYPE

DES

CUST

DIG

NEW, CHG

500

lscu

a...x

o-99

xxxx yy

Feature implementation

Enable Dial Intercom for a customer.

REQ CHG

TYPE

CDB

CUST o-99

DGRP (0) 253

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

maximum number of that can be defined for the

customer

Note: With Xl 1 release 13 and later, the maximum number of

allowed is 2046.

Add or change Dial Intercom for telephones.

New or change (see Note)

Telephone type

Terminal Number

ODAS set designator

a...x = one to six character alphanumeric designator

Customer number

xxxx = Dial Intercom group number (O-253)

yy = member number (O-99) within the group

Note: With Xl 1 release 13 and later, the maximum number of

allowed is to 2046.

Note: Single line telephones cannot have both a Dial Intercom Group number and a standard DN. To add

this feature, you must remove the telephone from the database and build it again, as a Dial Intercom Group

member.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

67-6 Dial Intercom

-Add or change Dial Intercom for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

aaaa

lscu

DIG

aaa

bb c

Change

Telephone type (aaaa = , 2006, 2008,

2018, 2112, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

add a Dial Intercom key

xx = key number

aaa

= group number (O-253)

bb = member number (O-99)

c = r (ring) or v (voice)

Note: With Xl 1 release 13 and later, the maximum number of

allowed has increased to 2046.

Add or change Handsfree Voice Call for the Meridian 1 system.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

C D B Customer data block

CUST

Customer number

OPT

HVA, (HVD) Handsfree Voice Call Allowed (Denied)

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Dial Intercom 67-7

Feature operation

An example of a Dial Intercom call is listed below.

Dial Intercom Call

To make a Dial Intercom call

Lift the handset and dial the

Intercom

key.

Dial the one- or two-digit code for the DIG member.

If your phone and the phone you are calling are configured for the voice

option, you can deliver a voice message after 2 seconds of ringing.

To answer a Dial Intercom call when you are on a line other than your DIG

line

Release the current call or place it on hold.

Press

Intercom.

Dial Intercom Handsfree Voice Call

Examples of both Handsfree Voice Call options are listed below.

HVA option

The originating telephone (telephone A) places a DIG call to the destination

telephone (telephone B).

Telephone B rings once.

After one ring, telephone B automatically answers the call in Handsfree

mode.

The DN and handsfree are lit and a two-way voice path is

established.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

67-6 Dial Intercom

HVD option

Telephone A places a call to telephone B.

Telephone B rings once.

After one ring, telephone B automatically answers the call in loudspeaker

only mode.

The DN LCD is lit and the handsfree LCD remains dark, establishing a

one-way voice path from telephone A to telephone B. At this point,

telephone A is unable to hear the person at telephone B.

To establish a two-way voice path, telephone B must either go off-hook,

or press the Handsfree button.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

Release:

68-1

Dial Pulse/Dual Tone Multifrequency

Conversion

With the Dial Pulse/Dual Tone Multifrequency Conversion feature, Dial

Pulse (DP) signals from telephones, Dial Pulse (DP) tie lines, SL-1

and digital telephones, or attendant consoles are automatically converted to

Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) signals for transmission over trunks

equipped for Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) service. Dual Tone

Multifrequency (DTMF) signals from single-line 2500 telephones are

automatically converted for transmission over rotary-dial-only trunks, such

as tie lines. This eliminates the need for duplicate dials.

DTMF calling allows the use of 2500 telephones, equipped with pushbutton

dials, to transmit digits through audible tones to the Meridian 1 equipment.

This feature provides the ability to use any combination of telephones.

However, 2500 telephones cannot use DTMF to control dictation equipment

when the dictation trunk is specified as Dial Pulse (DP).

Operating parameters

There are no feature requirements.

Feature interactions

There are no feature interactions.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

Feature implementation

Not applicable.

features and services 553-3001-305

66-2 Dial Pulse/Dual Tone Multifrequency Conversion

Feature operation

Not applicable.

features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:

921231

Status: Standard

1 Release:

69-1

Dialed Number Identification Service

The ACD Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) shows the last three

or four digits of the dialed DN received from auto-terminated DID and Tie

trunks on the display for ACD agents. The maximum number of characters

allowed is 27, including spaces.

Note:

Xl release 17 and later supports DNIS on non-ACD telephones.

X 11 release 16 and earlier provides DNIS on ACD telephones only.

Routing by number

Routing by DNIS number enhances call distribution within an ACD system.

This Xl 1 release 12 enhancement allows calls to be routed to a specific ACD

DN, based on the DNIS number, instead of auto-terminating as described in

the DNIS description in

Automatic Call Distribution advancedfeatures

description

(553-2671-101).

Xl 1 release 17 provides for Routing by DNIS on Tie trunks.

Name Display for

This Xl 1 release 17 enhancement lets you assign a name to each DNIS

number, and displays both the DNIS number and name for IDC DNIS calls

terminating on both ACD and non-ACD telephones. The maximum number

of characters allowed is 27, including spaces.

ON CDR

For CDR records, the DNIS information is included in the call record after the

Feature Group D digits if the customer has the DNIS and CDR packages, the

route is a DNIS route, and DNIS was turned on in the Route Data Block.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

69-2 Dialed Number Identification Service

across Call Modifications

This enhancement preserves the DNIS information across certain call

modifications and enhances DNIS operation and functionality. This feature

enhances DNIS operation and functionality for DNIS name and number

display across the following call modifications.

Conference and No Hold Conference

Transfer

Privacy Release

Mixed

End to End Signaling

Parked Call/Recalled Parked Call

Related documents

For a complete discussion on DNIS, Routing by DNIS, Name Display for

DNIS, DNIS on CDR, and DNIS across Call Modifications, refer to

(553-2671-101).

For information about Call Detail Reporting (CDR), refer

Call Detail

Recording description and formats

(553-2631-100).

1 features and services

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

Release:

All

70-I

Digit Display

There are two types of Digit Displays: Attendant console Digit Display and

SL- 1 telephone Digit Displays.

Attendant console Digit Display

QCW attendant consoles can be equipped with either an or a 16-digit

display. This display indicates the following:

dialed digits

On attendant-originated calls, Busy Verify (BVR), or Barge-In, the digits

dialed by the attendant are displayed. If the dialed number hunts, the

Hunt destination and the dialed Directory Number (DN) are displayed. If

the dialed number is call forwarded, the forwarded Directory Number

(DN) and the dialed Directory Number (DN) are displayed.

incoming calls

On incoming calls and forwarded Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls, the

trunk access code and member number are displayed. For all station

dial-0 calls, the calling station DN is displayed. For recalls, the

destination DN is displayed.

Display Source/Display Destination keys

Two keys are provided to allow the attendant to display the source and

destination numbers for any connection completed through the console.

Night assignment

During the assignment of night numbers, the Display Source key may be

pressed after the trunk access code and member numbers have been

dialed to display the correct night assignment.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

70-2 Digit Display

The DN stored against an key may be displayed by pressing the

key, then the Display Source key. If using an eight-digit display

assignment and if the stored DN consists of more than eight digits, the

Display Source key must be pressed a second time to display the

remainder of the DN. When the number is changed, the new

number may be displayed by pressing the Display Source key.

Speed Call

The DN stored against a Speed Call code may be displayed by pressing

the Speed Call key, dialing the Speed Call code, and then pressing the

Display Source key. When the Speed Call list is changed, an entry may

be displayed by pressing the Display Source key.

Time and Date

The time may be displayed by pressing the Display Time key on the

attendant console. The date is displayed by pressing the Display Date

key.

SL-1 telephone Digit Display

This feature allows the automatic display of information relevant to normal

call processing and feature activation on any SL-1 telephone equipped with a

display. A key/lamp pair is also provided to enable the station user to

obtain information manually, independent of call processing activity.

Time and Date displayed with an additional Time and Date (TAD) key.

CAUTION

This option should not be used when a Prime DN appears on another

telephone as a Prime DN. Severe real-time penalties will occur

(ERR040 message).

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Digit Display

70-3

Three display options are available:

No Digit Display (NDD)

This is the default option.

Automatic Digit Display (ADD)

This option allows the display of digit information during call

processing. ADD allows the automatic display of a calling party number

on an incoming call to the Prime DN on a telephone.

Standard Delayed Display (DDS)

Provides calling party information, displayed after answer only.

Automatic displays will show the following:

number dialed

number of calling party

Call Pickup

Call Waiting party

time and date

Press the Display (DSP) key, then the feature key to display information

associated with these features:

Buzz DN

Call Waiting party

Voice Call party

number

Speed Call number

Ring Again party

Call Forward party

features and services 553-3001-305

70-4 Digit Display

Operating parameters

Digit Display must be enabled for all console types in using the prompt

OPT.

Only telephones equipped with a Digit Display module can use this feature.

The Display Time and Display Date key cannot be assigned to key 0.

Feature interactions

There are no feature interactions.

Feature packaging

Digit Display (DDSP), package 19, has no other feature package

dependencies.

Feature implementation

LD15

Add or change Digit Display for attendant consoles for each customer.

CHG Change

TYPE

C DB Customer Data Block

CUST o-99 Customer number

OPT

IDP, (XDP) include or exclude Digit Display capability for attendant

consoles of this customer

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Digit Display

70-5

-Enable or disable Digit Display for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

Change

Telephone type

aaaa

2317,

KEY

lscu

DDS

ADD

xx DSP

xx TAD

Terminal Number

Telephone is not equipped with a Digit Display

Calling Party information is displayed after call is answered

(delayed display source)

Calling Party information is displayed during call

processing (Automatic Digit Display)

Add a Digit Display key (must be key/lamp pair)

xx key number

Add a Time and Date key (must be key/lamp pair)

xx key number

1 features and services

70-6 Digit Display

LD12

Enable or disable Digit Display for each attendant console.

REQ

TYPE

DLEN

KEY

CHG

ATT,

lscu

xx DCW

xx DDT

xx DPD

xx DPS

xx DTM

xx MDT

xx MTM

Change

Console type

Terminal Number

Digit Display entry length (default is 8)

This prompt applies to QCW-type consoles only.

Add display Call Waiting key

Add display Date key

Add display Destination key

Add display Source key

Add display Time key

Add display/change Date key

Add display/change Time key

Feature operation

There are no special procedures for operating this feature.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release: All

Digital Trunk Interface

71-1

Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) provides an integrated interface for

transmitting digital voice and data between a network loop and a DS- 1 digital

carrier terminal. Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) operates similarly to a channel

bank on the carrier side and an analog trunk on the Meridian 1 side. Digital

Trunk Interface (DTI) processes digitally the transmission and reception of

Meridian 1 Data (mixed voice/data), as well as voice calls.

interfaces to DS- 1 digital carriers, which may use infrared

transmission, fiber-optic cables, microwave radio, satellite links, or leased

facilities. DTI may connect to any of the following:

another Meridian 1 or an SL-100

a non-Meridian 1 type system that can use carrier facilities

a digital central office (CO)

Related documents

For complete information regarding DTI, refer to the following documents:

Digital Trunk description

(553-281 l-100)

Digital Trunk installation and

(553-28

l-200)

Digital Trunk Interface/Computer-to-PBX maintenance

(553-281 l-500)

Operating parameters

Not applicable.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

71-2 Digital Trunk Interface

Feature interactions

Not applicable.

Feature packaging

Not applicable.

Feature implementation

Not applicable.

Feature operation

Not applicable.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

Xl 1 Release: All

Direct Inward System Access

72-1

Direct Inward System Access (DISA) allows selected users to access the

system from the public or private network by dialing a special Directory

Number (DN) assigned by the customer. The number can be dialed from any

telephone outside the network. Once the Direct Inward System

Access (DISA) call has been answered, the user can access any of the

following features and capabilities offered through Direct Inward System

Access (DISA):

calls to any station within the customer group

trunk calls (such as calls to a central office (CO), a tie trunk, or paging

and dictation trunks)

Basic/Network Authorization Code

Call Detail Recording (CDR) and Call Detail Recording (CDR) Charge

Account

Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection and

Automatic Number Identification route selection

Each special Directory Number (DN) dialed by a DISA user is associated

with a particular DISA Directory Number (DN). Any number of DISA

can be assigned, provided that they are consistent with the numbering plan of

the customer. Access rights are determined by the Class of Service and Trunk

Group Access Restrictions (TGAR) associated with the DISA number. Calls

to DISA can be placed on dedicated, auto-terminate incoming trunks (CO,

FX, or WATS) and tie or Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks, all of which

must have proper supervision.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

72-2 Direct Inward System Access

As a safeguard against unauthorized use, an authorization code or special

security code of one to eight digits can be assigned for each DISA DN. The

security code must be entered before any system resources can be used.

Additionally, a secure data password can be provided to enable the customer

to create, modify, or remove information concerning DISA.

Operating parameters

The features not available to DISA users are those that require a switchhook

flash (such as Call Transfer, Conference, Hold, or Ring Again). Also

unavailable are features requiring that predefined data be assigned for the DN

(Speed Call for example), and other features that are not applicable to DISA

calls (such as Call Pickup and Call Forward).

Any CO, FX, or WATS trunk route can be designated as an auto-terminate

route, allowing incoming calls in the route to terminate on one particular DN

rather than going to the attendant. Several trunks can specify the same DISA

DN, or each trunk can specify a different DISA DN.

Only trunks that give disconnect supervision can be used to provide access to

DISA. Therefore, trunks dedicated to DISA (CO, FX, or WATS) must have

a ground start signaling arrangement. Incoming DISA calls on trunks without

disconnect supervision will not be allowed. For these calls, overflow tone is

given to tie, DID and Common Controlled Switching Arrangement (CCSA)

trunk calls, and calls on CO, FX, and WATS trunks are intercepted to the

attendant.

Trunks dedicated to DISA may also be used as normal outgoing trunks.

The minimum signaling level for the currently available receiver is

22 at the trunk interface.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Feature interactions

Direct Inward System Access

72-3

DISA does not support unsupervised CO, FX, or WATS trunks.

Access Restrictions

Access restrictions are assigned to the DISA DN as they are to any

station within the system. Separate access restrictions are also assigned

to authorization codes used by DISA callers.

Basic/Network Authorization Code (BAUT/NAUT)

This feature can be used in conjunction with DISA to allow a user access

to more resources than are normally available. The authorization code

must be entered, in addition to the security code (if required), using the

applicable Special Prefix (SPRE) code followed by the authorization

access code 6, or by an applicable Flexible Feature Code. If authorization

codes are required, a valid authorization code must be entered after the

DISA security code (no SPRE code is needed).

Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection

The features function on a DISA call as if it had been

originated from inside the system.

Busy Verify (BVR)

Busy Verify (BVR) applies only to within the system. If an

attendant tries to use the feature to enter an DISA DN, overflow tone is

returned.

Call Detail Recording (CDR)

If the customer and trunk route on which the incoming DISA call is being

made have the applicable Call Detail Recording (CDR) options in effect,

particulars of the call are recorded when it is established. There is no

special indication on the Call Detail Recording (CDR) record that this

was a DISA call. If the incoming trunk route is not specified for CDR

options, recording depends on what has been specified by the customer

for any outgoing trunks seized by the DISA caller.

Flexible Line Lockout

The defined Flexible Line Lockout treatment is provided to DISA calls.

Feature packaging

DISA, package 22, has no other feature package dependencies.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

72-4 Direct Inward System Access

Feature implementation

LD24

Create or change the Direct Inward System Access feature for a customer.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

SPWD

SCOD

TGAR

NCOS

cos

NEW, CHG

DIS

o-99

xxxx

xxx...x

x, xx...xx

Yes, (No)

UNR

CUN

SRE

TLD

CTD

FRE

FR2

New or change

data

Customer number

System secure data password (0001 9999)

allows modifications to the data block

0000 = disable the password (see 5)

DN for access

security code (l-8 digits)

X = remove security code

Authorization code is or is not required

Trunk Group Access Restriction to be applied to calls made

using (O-i 5)

Note: With 1 release 13 and later software, TGAR can be from

Network Class of Service to be applied to calls

Class of Service to be applied to calls

unrestricted

conditionally unrestricted

semi-restricted

toll restricted

conditionally toll restricted

fully restricted

fully restricted 2

features and services

Direct Inward System Access

LD16

Define an auto-terminate trunk route for Direct Inward System Access.

72-5

REQ NEW, CHG

TYPE

RDB

CUST o-99

ROUT

xxx

TKTP

aaa

AUTO Yes, (No)

IAO, ICT, OGT

xxxx

New or change

Route data block

Customer number

trunk route number

Trunk type

route is or is not arranged to auto-terminate incoming calls

on the DN

Incoming and outgoing trunk

Trunk route access code

LD14

Define Direct Inward System Access for trunks in an auto-terminate trunk route.

REQ

TYPE

XTRK

CUST

ATDN

NEW, CHG

COT, FEX, WAT

lscu

XUT

o-99

YYY

xxx...x

GRD

New or change

Trunk type

Terminal Number

Universal trunk card (prompted for superloops)

Customer number

Route number and member number

xxx = o-51

yyy = l-254

DN on which incoming calls are to auto-terminate

Ground Start signaling

1 features and services 553-3001-305

72-6 Direct Inward System Access

Feature operation

To dial into the system from the public network

Dial the DISA number. You hear dial tone.

Dial the security code, if required.

Dial the authorization code, if required.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Directory Number

Flexible Attendant Directory Number

The Flexible Attendant Directory Number (FADN) specifies the Directory

Number (DN) that provides access to the attendant, replacing the usual 0. The

Directory Number (DN) may be any Directory Number (DN) in the

numbering plan, but it must be used only for the attendant and in all situations

in which 0 is normally used.

Operating parameters

The attendant DN may be used only for the attendant. One attendant DN is

allowed per customer and all attendants must have the same DN.

Feature interactions

Flexible Attendant Directory Number (FADN) interacts with other features

as follows:

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP)

The attendant DN can have up to seven digits if the Directory Number

Expansion (DNXP) package is equipped.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic X 11 system software.

Feature implementation

or change the attendant Directory Number.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

C DB Customer Data Block

ATDN

xxx...x

number dialed to reach the attendant (default is

1 features and services 553-3001-305

73-2 Directory Number

Feature operation

Not applicable.

Listed Directory Numbers

Each customer within the system may have up to four Listed Directory

Numbers in the public directory on Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

trunks. Each Listed Directory Numbers (LDN) is assigned to an Incoming

Call Indication (ICI) key, enabling the attendant to answer an incoming call

appropriately. For systems without DID facilities, Listed Directory Numbers

may be provided on incoming central office (CO) trunks assigned to

a trunk group and an Incoming Call Indication (ICI) key on the console. Local

telephones and tie lines can call the attendant using any of the four

Operating parameters

Only four can be assigned per customer.

Feature interactions

interact with other features as follows:

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP)

can have up to seven digits if the DNXP package is equipped.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic 1 system software.

Feature implementation

Assign Listed Directory Numbers for each customer.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

LDNO

LDN2

LDN3

CHG

CDB

o-99

xxx...x

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer Number

LDNO

LDN2

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Directory Number 73-3

Feature operation

Not applicable.

Multiple Appearance Directory Number

can appear on more than one multiline telephone, and can be shared

between those telephones and single-line telephones. Up to 16 appearances of

the same DN are allowed on Xl 1 release 12 and earlier software. Xl 1 release

13 and later software allows 30 appearances of the same DN on NT, RT, XT,

and 81 systems only. Four multiple-appearance options are

provided, as follows:

Multiple Call Arrangement with Ringing (MCR)

Call Arrangement without Ringing (MCN)

Single Call Arrangement with Ringing (SCR)

Single Call Arrangement without Ringing (SCN)

The customer can specify which of the four options applies to each

appearance of the DN. Xl 1 release 13 allows 30 Multiple Appearance

Directory Numbers (MADNs) on NT, RT, XT, 71, and 81

systems

only.

Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers (MADNs) are not restricted to

telephones connected to the same loop. Telephones with MADNs can be

assigned to different loops if the Loop Removal enhancement is allowed in

LD17 under the prompt MLDN.

A Multiple Appearance, Multiple Call Arrangement is available between

SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones only. It allows as many calls to be in

progress as there are appearances of the DN (that is, a maximum of six

independent calls). Selection of the ring option allows the DN to be rung

whenever an incoming call is directed to the idle DN.

Selection of the no ring option causes the DN appearance not to ring when an

incoming call is directed to the DN. Indication of an incoming call is limited

to a flashing lamp associated with the DN. Privacy is inherent in all active

calls.

features and services 553-3001-305

73-4

Directory Number

Multiple Appearance, Single Call Arrangement allow a single call to be

active on the DN, irrespective of its number of appearances. Multiple

Appearance, Single Call Arrangement is available to all telephones.

Selection of the ring option allows ringing to accompany lamp flashing when

a call is directed to a DN. The no ring option limits Incoming Call Indication

(ICI) to lamp flashing. Privacy is inherent in active calls, except in a mixed

arrangement and SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones with an

appearance of the same DN).

Call redirection parameters such as Hunt and Call Forward No Answer are

derived from the TN data block TNB) of the prime appearance of the

called DN. If there is more than one prime appearance, the parameters are

selected from the last TN in the DN block for the DN (LD22 DNB).

If more than one prime appearance of an MADN exists, the information noted

in the following list must be considered prior to configuring call redirection

parameters for

The DNB organizes MADN information in numerical TN order. The TN

with the highest numerical value (000-O-06-03) is placed at the

beginning of the DN list. The list then continues in descending order with

the lowest numerical TN (000-O-03-01) at the end of the list.

If a telephone is service changed, the TN of the telephone is moved to the

beginning of the DN list regardless of the numerical value of the TN.

This telephone remains at the beginning of the list until another

telephone is service changed or a sysload is performed. A sysload

restores the DN list to TN order.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Directory Number

73-5

If a DN is assigned as a prime DN on one telephone, and as a secondary

DN on one or more telephones, the DN list is still organized as described

in the preceding text. However, if only one prime appearance of a DN

exists, call redirection parameters are derived from the TN of the prime

appearance telephone, even though it may not be at the end of the list. A

prime appearance is always the first TN used when the system looks for

call redirection instructions.

If a DN appears on SL-1, and Meridian 1 digital telephones

simultaneously, the telephones are listed in numerical TN

order at the top of the DN list, and SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones

are listed in numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A service

change to a telephone moves the TN of that telephone to the

beginning of the list. A service change to an SL-1 or Meridian digital

telephone moves the TN of the telephone to the end of the list. A sysload

restores the list to numerical TN order, with telephones at the

top of the list and SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones at the bottom of

the list. Call redirection parameters continue to be derived as described

in the preceding text.

Note:

It is not necessary to change any data to register service change

activity. To put a telephone at the end of the list, simply call up the

service change data and default through the data.

Operating parameters

Multiple Appearance, Multiple Call Arrangement is limited to SL-1 or

Meridian digital telephones. If telephones are mixed, only Multiple

Appearance, Single Call Arrangement is allowed.

For Multiple Appearance, Single Call Arrangement, the no ring option is

limited to SL-1 or Meridian digital telephones.

If more than 20 appear on an ST or a 21, at least one appearance

must be defined

key 0. Additionally, the key 0 appearance must be the last

key defined in the database. If more are added later, remove the key 0

appearance, and reenter it last.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

73-6 Directory Number

Feature interactions

MADN interacts with other features as follows:

CPND (Call Party Name Display)

On ST and 21 machines using X11 release 17 and earlier software, the

number of DN appearances restricts the number of letters or digits

allowed for CPND. These engineering guidelines must be followed:

Eleven or fewer appearances allows 26 letters or digits in the name.

.Twelve appearances allows 23 letters or digits in the name.

.Thirteen appearances allows 20 letters or digits in the name.

.Fourteen appearances allows 16 letters or digits in the name.

.Fifteen appearances allows 14 letters or digits in the name.

.Sixteen appearances allows 11 letters or digits in the name.

.Seventeen appearances allows 9 letters or digits in the name.

.Eighteen appearances allows 8 letters or digits in the name.

DNXP (DN Expansion)

The DN can have up to seven digits if the DNXP package is equipped.

If Loop Restriction Removal is allowed, telephones with can be

moved across loops using Automatic Set Relocation the Digital

telephones data block the telephone data block

or Attendant Administration.

Loop Restriction

If Loop Restriction removal is not allowed, telephones with can

be moved by using the Automatic Set Relocation feature or the

Attendant Administration feature.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Directory Number

73-7

Privacy

If a Multiple Appearance, Single Call Arrangement (SCR) or Single Call

Arrangement without Ringing (SCN) DN is shared by SL-1 and

Meridian digital telephones only, Privacy is in effect. No one can enter a

call unless the call is first placed on Hold, or unless Privacy Release is

activated to allow another appearance to enter the call. If this

configuration is shared between these telephones and single-line

telephones, Privacy is not in effect for any appearance of the DN.

Anyone sharing the DN can enter the call at any time.

Privacy Release

Privacy Release has no effect on Multiple Multiple Call

Arrangement with Ringing (MCR), or Multiple Call Arrangement

without Ringing (MCN) calls.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature implementation

-Assign a Multiple-appearance Directory Number key.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

aaaa Telephone type

aaaa =

3000

TN Terminal Number

K E Y xx MCN

Add a multiple-call non-ringing DN key

xx = key number

= DN

xx MCR

Add a multiple-call ringing DN key

xx = key number

= DN

Feature operation

Not applicable.

features and services 553-3001-305

73-8 Directory Number

Single Appearance Directory Number

A Single Appearance Directory Number (SDDN) may be assigned to any

type of telephone.

Operating parameters

A Single Appearance Directory Number (SADN) can appear only once

within any customer group.

Feature interactions

Single Appearance Directory Number (SADN) interacts with other features

as follows:

DNXP (DN Expansion)

The DN can have up to seven digits if the DNXP package is equipped.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature implementation

-Assign Single Appearance Directory Number keys.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

Change

Telephone type

aaaa = , 2006, 2008, 2009, 2112,

3000

KEY

lscu

xx SCN

xx SCR yyy...y

Terminal Number

Add a single-call non-ringing DN key

xx key number

= DN

Add a single-call ringing DN key

xx = key number

= DN

Feature operation

Not applicable.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Directory Number 73-9

Prime Directory Number

The bottom key on an SL-1 or a Meridian digital telephone is the Prime DN.

It is preselected for call origination. If a user wishes to place or receive a call

on any other DN, the key must be manually selected.

Operating parameters

Prime DN applies only to SL-1 or Meridian digital telephones. Only one

Prime DN is allowed per telephone.

Feature interactions

There are no feature interactions.

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature implementation

Assign key as the Prime DN in

Feature operation

Not applicable.

1 features and services

73-10

Directory Number

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release:

74-1

Directory Number Expansion

This feature increases the number of digits allowable for internal Directory

Numbers from a maximum of four digits per Directory Numbers (DN)

to seven digits per DN. The following internal Directory Numbers

havebeenexpanded:

single-line telephone

multi-line telephone

Trunk Group Access codes

attendant DN (including local attendant in Centralized Attendant Service

Listed Directory Numbers

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) steering codes

ACD position

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

CAS hold

Release Link Trunk (RLT) in Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)

System Park

test line

data service

1 features and services

74-2 Directory Number Expansion

The following DN types are not expanded:

Special Prefix (SPRE)

Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection access codes

Route Selection Automatic Number Identification (RSANI) access code

Automatic Modem Pooling (AMP) all-digital-connection prefix

Along with Directory Number Expansion (DNXP), a new CDR Expansion

(CDRE) package (package 151) is available to allow CDR records to

accommodate the increased digit field lengths. Basic CDR (package 4) and

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) (package 150) are required for CDRE.

Operating parameters

The Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) capability is available on systems

supporting X11 release 13 and later software.

The number of that can be configured is limited by the available

protected data store in the system.

DNXP does not enhance existing feature capability other than allowing an

internal DN with up to seven digits.

If DNXP is equipped, the system communicates with any attached Auxiliary

Processor (AUX), except ACD-D, in a new message format containing

expanded DN fields. Therefore, the respective Auxiliary Processor (AUX)

software must be upgraded to handle longer in new messages.

If a message is sent to an Auxiliary Processor (AUX) that is not capable of

handling expanded only the last four digits are included in the message.

Incoming Digit Conversion (IDC) translates a maximum of four digits only.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Directory Number Expansion

74-3

The Automatic Number Identification calling number is always seven

digits long. It is obtained by combining the Automatic Number Identification

Listed Directory Number (AN1 LDN) with one of the following:

DN of the PBX telephone

Prime DN of the SL-1 telephone

Automatic Number Identification attendant number, specified on

a per customer basis

Automatic Number Identification trunk number, specified on a per

trunk group basis.

With the DNXP package equipped, if an Automatic Number Identification

Listed Directory Number (AN1 LDN) is not defined, then the full seven digits

of an internal DN can be used as the AN1 calling number. If an Automatic

Number Identification Listed Directory Number (AN1 LDN) is defined and

internal are longer than four digits, then only the leading digits of the

are retained in the AN1 calling number.

CDRE must be equipped to allow the printing of seven-digit in the CDR

records. CDRE is not supported by Mini-CDR.

Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD) station identification

number remains four digits long. If a DN is longer, only the leading digits are

retained as the Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD) station

identifier.

Feature interactions

Electronic Switched Network (ESN)

With DNXP, a seven-digit Location Code (LOC) call to an Electronic

Switched Network (ESN) switch can be terminated to an internal DN of

up to seven digits. A Digit Manipulation Index associated with a Home

Location Code is used to properly terminate the calls.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

74-4 Directory Number Expansion

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP)

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) steering codes are expanded to a

maximum of seven digits. The maximum number of digits for a complete

CDP DN has increased from seven to ten (a three-digit steering code

followed by a seven-digit internal

With DNXP, the maximum number of leading digits to be deleted from

a Local Steering Code (LSC) is expanded to seven digits, due to longer

CDP numbers.

Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

Depending on the number of Direct Inward Dialing (DID) digits

outpulsed by the central office (CO), the system can insert a unique string

of prefix digits to the incoming Direct Inward Dialing (DID) digits on a

per DID trunk group basis to form a final internal DN. The number of

digits that can be inserted for a DID (or tie) trunk group has been

expanded from six to eight digits.

Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD)

The AIOD station identifier and trunk identifier remains four digits long.

If the total number of digits in the AIOD prefix and internal DN exceeds

four, only the leading digits of the station DN are retained as the AIOD

identifier.

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

Refer to

Primary Interface description and administration

(553-2901-100).

Background Terminal Interface (BGD)

When the DNXP package is equipped, any background terminal

command, response, or display containing a DN is allowed to have a DN

of up to seven digits.

ACD-C Reports

When the DNXP package is equipped, each DN-related field is expanded

to seven digits.

ACD Load Management

ACD Load Management commands have been modified to allow longer

DN-related fields (ACD DN, position ID, route access code).

Digit and Name Display

If longer are defined, leftmost digits may be scrolled out on a digit

display, depending on the size of the display window.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Directory Number Expansion 74-5

Auxiliary processors

Any AUX or application processor that shares or exchanges Meridian 1

internal DN related information with the system must be modified to

handle the longer DN format. Otherwise, only the four trailing digits will

be included in the message.

The presence of DNXP has an impact on the following types of AUX:

Auxiliary Processor Link (APL)

.Application Module Link (AML)

standard Serial Data Interface (SDI) with application interface to the

Meridian 1

standard without application interface to the Meridian 1

Feature packaging

DNXP, package 1.50, has no other feature package dependencies.

Feature implementation

Service-change and print overlays with DN-related prompts and commands

have been modified to accommodate seven-digit if the DNXP package

is equipped.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

74-6 Directory Number Expansion

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing

In commercial applications, the ability to have telephones with a distinctive

ring is useful for distinguishing various call types. The Distinctive Ringing

capability is enabled for specific trunk groups.

The Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) card provides SL-1 and Meridian 1 digital

telephones with distinctive ringing cadence. This card provides a distinctive

tone of 440 Hz + 480 Hz on incoming calls on the designated trunks,

timed for 1.64 on and 0.36 off. On single-line telephones, the normal ringing

pattern is 2 on and 4 off. Distinctive Ringing for single-line telephones is 1.54

on and 0.38 off.

New Distinctive Ringing, 1 release 9 and later software

This feature provides a new ringing cadence of 0.5 12 on and 0.5 12 off,

followed by 1.024 on and 4.096 off, for all telephone types.

Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom, Xl 1 release 13 and later

software

This feature allows a user to differentiate between an incoming call and a Dial

Intercom call. The Dial Intercom ringing has a different cadence than regular

Directory Number (DN) ringing or Distinctive Ringing.

Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom is assignable on a per customer basis.

The cadence is 0.5 on and 0.5 off, repeatedly.

1 features and services

75-2 Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing

Operating parameters

Distinctive Ringing requires 2.5 times as much “on” ringing time as routine

ringing. The number of simultaneously ringing lines per ringing generator is

reduced according to the proportion of incoming calls that receive Distinctive

Ringing. For example, if 50% of all calls receive Distinctive Ringing, the

number of simultaneous ringing lines is reduced from 20 to 14 per ringing

generator.

The Fast Tone and Digit Switch card, or a later version of this card,

is required to implement the New Distinctive Ringing feature.

Feature interactions

Attendant calls

When an incoming trunk call is extended by an attendant, the terminating

extension rings distinctively.

telephone features

Calls modified by the following features receive Distinctive or New

Distinctive Ringing:

.Call Forward All Calls

.Call Forward No Answer

.Flexible Call Forward No Answer

.Call Park

.Call Transfer

Conference

Hunting

Call Forward Busy

Calls modified by Call Forward Busy are not given Distinctive Ringing

as they terminate on the attendant console.

Night Service

Incoming calls terminating on a night Directory Number (DN) ring

distinctively.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing

75-3

Meridian digital telephones/M3000 Touchphones The Meridian

digital telephone Distinctive Ringing (defined by the Class of Service in

specifies the frequency and the warble-tone rate, and does not

pertain to the Distinctive Ringing feature as referred to in this feature

description.

For example, suppose New Distinctive Ringing is enabled and a call

comes in from a Distinctive Ringing-enabled trunk. If the call terminates

on a Meridian digital telephone with DR2 Class of Service, it rings with

DR2 (frequency and warble tone), but with a cadence of 0.512 on and

0.512 off, followed by 1.024 on and 4.096 off. This also applies to the

M3000 Touchphone. If the M3000 custom ringing option is selected,

then Distinctive Ringing is overridden.

Feature packaging

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing (DRNG), package 74, has no other

feature package dependencies.

Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom is included in Dial Intercom (DI),

package 21.

Distinctive Ringing for digital telephones is included in Digital Telephones

(DSET), package 88.

Feature implementation

Enable or disable Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom calls and specify Call Forward No

Answer timing for trunks with Distinctive Ringing.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

DFNA

CHG

o-99

Yes, (No)

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Enable/disable Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom calls

The number of triple-ringing cycles before Call Forward N

Answer is activated for calls with Distinctive Ringing

(default is 4)

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

75-4 Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing

LD17

Specify Distinctive or New Distinctive Ringing.

REQ

TYPE

PARM

NDRG

CHG

CFN

Yes, (No)

Change

Configuration Data Block

Change system parameters

Enable (disable) New Distinctive Ringing (DRNG)

Prompted only if DRNG is equipped.

LD16

Enable or disable Distinctive Ringing for each incoming or incoming/outgoing trunk

route.

REQ

TYPE

ROUT

DRNG

CHG

RDB

o-99

o-51 1

Yes, (No)

Change

Route Data Block

Customer number

Route number

Enable (disable) Distinctive Ringing for incoming calls

features and services 553-3001-305

Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing 75-5

LD 11

-Specify Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing class of service for SL-1 and Meridian

digital

REQ

TYPE

CLS

CHG

aaaa

lscu

DRGX

Change

Telephone type

aaaa

2006, 2018,

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Distinctive ring type DRG4

= high fast tone, frequency Hz

DRG2 high slow tone, frequency 6671500 Hz

= low fast tone, frequency 2501333 Hz

DRG4 = low slow tone, frequency 2501333 Hz

The distinctive ringing for M2006 and M2008

telephones are different:

fast tone, frequency Hz

slow tone, frequency Hz

Feature operation

There are no special procedures for operating this feature.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

75-6 Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

Release:

All

76-1

Do Not Disturb

Individual Do Not Disturb (DNDI) allows the attendant to place a particular

Directory Number (DN) in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode. A DN in this mode

is free to originate calls, but appears busy to incoming calls. An attendant

dialing a Directory Number in Do Not Disturb mode receives a visual

indication and can override it temporarily by using Busy Verify (BVR) and

signal source. To activate Individual Do Not Disturb (DNDI), a separate

Individual Do Not Disturb (DNDI) key/lamp pair must be assigned to each

applicable attendant console.

telephones can be equipped with a Do Not Disturb lamp. Common

Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA) and LPA Class of Service must be

allowed.

Calls will receive the customer-specified intercept treatment; for example,

busy tone, RAN, or attendant. An enhancement to DND provides the ability

to route calls to the Hunt DN instead of to the intercept treatment. Table 1

lists possible intercept treatments based on responses to the prompts DNDT

and DNDH in LD 15.

Group Do Not Disturb (DNDG) allows an attendant to place predefined

groups of in DND mode. A DN can belong to many DND groups.

To enable Group Do Not Disturb (DNDG), the DNDI package must be

equipped. DNDI allows the user to activate, cancel, and verify the presence

of the feature. A separate Group Do Not Disturb (DNDG) key is assigned to

each attendant console for activating the DNDG feature.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

76-2

Do Not Disturb

Table 76-1

Do Not Disturb intercept treatments

DNDT = BST DNDT = RAN DNDT = ATT

Call type Hunt DNDH DNDH DNDH DNDH DNDH DNDH

No Yes No Yes No Yes

DID

Allow

HH HHH

Deny

AA AA

SL-l/digital

Allow

H H

Deny

AA AA

Attendant

Allow

HHBHHH

Deny

BBBBBB

SL-1 /digital Allow

BH BHB

Deny

BBBBBB

Internal

Allow

HH HHH

Deny

BBR

SL-l/digital

Allow

BH H

Deny

H = Follow Hunt Directory Number (DN).

= Intercept to attendant.

B = Busy tone

= RAN treatment

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Do Not Disturb 76-3

Operating parameters

Up to 100 groups (O-99) can be defined per customer. Each group can contain

up to 127

Up to 20 DNDG keys can be equipped on an M2250 attendant console. Ten

DNDG keys can be equipped on a QCW or Ml250 attendant console.

Alternatively, the DNDI key plus dial-access can be used to activate DND for

up to 100 groups.

To activate DNDG using a DNDG key, a group of telephones must be defined

for that key (see LD26).

Feature interactions

DND interacts with other features as follows:

Directory Number Expansion (DNXP)

If the Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package is equipped,

can have up to seven digits.

Night Station

A Night Station DN can be placed in DND mode.

Private Lines

DND cannot be used on Private Lines.

Call Forward All Calls/Hunt

If activated, Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over DND busy

indication.

Call Park

Calls can be parked on and by in DND mode. When a telephone in

DND mode parks a call, the call will not return to the DND telephone. It

recalls to the attendant.

Feature packaging

DNDI, package 9, has no feature package dependencies.

DNDG, package 16, requires DNDI, package 9.

Do Not Disturb Hunt requires Meridian Hospitality Voice Services

package 179.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

76-4 Do Not Disturb

Specify the treatment received by calls to a number in Do Not Disturb mode.

CHG

CDB

o-99

Yes, (No)

BST (default)

ATT

RAN Recorded announcement for DND numbers

Yes, (No) Allow (Disallow) Do Not Disturb Hunt

xxx

REQ

TYPE

CUST

DNDL

DNDT

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Do Not Disturb lamp for telephones

Busy tone treatment for Do Not Disturb (DND) numbers

Attendant treatment for DND numbers

DNDH

RRT Route number for the recorded announcement for calls to a

DND number (prompted if DNDT=RAN)

Feature implementation

LD26 Add or change a Group Do Not Disturb.

CHG, REM

DND

o-99

xxx...x

Change, remove DN in DND group

Do Not Disturb Group data block

Customer number

DND group to be added or changed

DN to be added or changed in the DND group; repeat to

add other

DN to be removed from a DND group

Prompted if

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Do Not Disturb 76-5

LD26 Merge one or more defined Do Not Disturb groups into another DND group, retaining

their status as groups.

REQ MRG

CHG

REM

OUT

Merge DND groups

Add a DND group from a list of merged DND groups

Remove DND group from a merged group

Remove a DND group that consists of a list of merged DND

groups

TYPE

CUST

GPNO

DND

o-99

Do Not Disturb Group data block

Customer number

Number of the DND group to be created through merging

of other DND groups

GO-G99 Number of the first DND group to be merged (total number

of members in all merged DND groups cannot exceed 127)

Prompted if REQ = MRG

GRP2 GO-G99 Number of the second DND group to be merged (total

number of members in all merged DND groups cannot

exceed 127)

Prompted if REQ = MRG

G R P GO-G99 Number of the DND group to be merged (total number of

members in all merged DND groups cannot exceed 127)

Prompted if REQ = MRG

STOR GO-G99

RMOV

GO-G99

Specify the number of the DND group to be added to a list

of merged DND groups

Prompted if REQ = CHG

Specify the number of the DND group to be removed from

a list of merged DND groups

Prompted if REQ = REM

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

76-6 Do Not Disturb

LD26

Print Do Not Disturb group data.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

GPNO

LD12

-Add or change Individual or Group Do Not Disturb keys on an attendant console.

CHG Change

TYPE ATT,

Console type

lscu

Terminal Number

KEY xx DDL

Add an Individual Do Not Disturb key

xx = 0 19 for M2250 consoles

xx = 0 9 for M 1250 consoles

K E Y xx GND O-99 Add a DND group key

xx = 0 19 for M2250 consoles

xx = 0 9 for Ml 250 consoles

PRT

DND

o-99

<CR>

Do Not Disturb Group data block

Customer number

DND group to be printed

Print all DND group data

-Enable or disable lamp for telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

500

lscu

LPA, (LPD)

CCSA, (CCSD)

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Enable (disable) lamp

Controlled Class of Service allowed (denied)

features and services 553-3001-305

Do Not Disturb

76-7

Feature operation

Individual Do Not Disturb

To activate DNDI using the DNDI key (attendant console)

Select

an idle loop key.

Press

DNDI.

3Dial the DN of the telephone to place into DND mode.

Press

DNDI

again. (Ignore status of indicator.)

5 Press

To deactivate DNDI, follow the same steps.

Group Do Not Disturb

There are two ways to activate DNDG with the DNDI key, or with the DNDG

key.

To activate DNDG using the DNDG key (attendant console)

Press

DNDG.

This key already has a defined group assigned to it. The

associated indicator remains steadily lit to indicate that all telephones in

that DND group are in DND mode.

Press

RLS.

To deactivate DNDG

Press

DNDG.

To activate DNDG using the DNDI key (attendant console)

Select an idle loop key.

Press

DNDI.

Press the

octothorpe

key.

4 Dial the group number.

5 Press again.

Press

DNDI

again.

Press

RLS.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

76-8 Do Not Disturb

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release: All

77-1

Electronic Switched Network

The Electronic Switched Network (ESN) group of features is designed to

support voice and circuit-switched voiceband data telecommunications needs

for multiple-location customer applications.

Electronic Switched Network (ESN) applications range from a single

network node (combined PBX and network switching system) to a widely

dispersed network with up to 256 locations. For complete information on

Electronic Switched Network (ESN), refer to the

Meridian networking

document

and

Electronic Switched Network description

100).

Basic Authorization Code

The Basic Authorization Code (BAUT) feature provides up to 5000

authorization codes of 1 to 14 digits that allow selected users to temporarily

override system access restrictions by dialing a Special Service Prefix

code, the digit 6, and the Basic Authorization Code (BAUT) code.

The Basic Authorization Code (BAUT) code is used for general applications

and is described in

Basic and Network Authorization Code description

(553-2751-103).

Basic Alternate Route Selection

Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS) enables calls placed to another

location to be routed automatically over the least expensive route.

Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS) access code and the desired number

have been dialed, Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS) automatically

tries alternate routes to the destination and completes the call over the least

expensive route available at the time of dialing. BARS is described in detail

Basic and Network Alternate Route Selection description (553-275

100).

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

77-2 Electronic Switched Network

Call Back Queuing

Call Back Queuing (CBQ) is an optional feature available to systems

equipped with the Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection

or Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) features. If all facilities are busy when an

individual places a BARS, NARS, or CDP call, Call Back Queuing (CBQ)

enables the individual to invoke the Ring Again (RGA) feature and receive a

callback from the system when a facility becomes available. Call Back

Queuing (CBQ) is described in detail in

Network Queue description

(553-2751-101).

Call Back Queuing to Conventional Mains

Call Back Queuing to Conventional Mains (CBQCM) enables call originators

at a Conventional Main (any type of switch, including switches that are part

of Tie Network [ETN]) to access the CBQ feature at the serving

ESN Node. When offered CBQ by the Node, the user at the Conventional

Main dials his extension number to accept the CBQ offer. When facilities

become available at the Node, it initiates a CBQ callback to the call originator

at the Conventional Main. Refer to

Network Queue description

(553-2751-101) for a detailed description of Call Back Queuing to

Conventional Mains (CBQCM).

Coordinated Call Back Queuing

Coordinated Call Back Queuing (CCBQ) enables telephones eligible for Ring

Again (RGA) at the Main to be offered CBQ when network calls are blocked

at the serving Node. When facilities become available at the Node, the call

originator at the Main is alerted by a call back (identical to an RGA callback)

from the Node. Coordinated Call Back Queuing (CCBQ) requires that the

Main and associated Node be equipped with Network Signaling. Refer to

Network Queue description

(553-2751-101) for a detailed description of

Coordinated Call Back Queuing (CCBQ).

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

Electronic Switched Network

Coordinated Call Back Queuing Against Main

Coordinated Call Back Queuing Against Main (CCBQAM) is an

enhancement to the CCBQ feature that allows a station at the Node to be

offered CBQ if a call is blocked at the Main. When facilities become available

at the Main, the call originator at the Node is alerted by a callback from the

Main. The Network Signaling feature must be equipped at both the Main and

the Node for Coordinated Call Back Queuing Against Main (CCBQAM)

implementation.

Coordinated Dialing Plan

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) enables a customer with a number of

switches to coordinate the dialing plan of stations at these switches. The

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) feature allows the telephone user to call any

other telephone within a CDP group by dialing a three- to seven-digit number

assigned to the station. CDP can be arranged to provide a centralized public

exchange network capability that channels access to the public network

through a single Meridian 1 switch within the CDP group.

Xl 1 release 15 and later software allows CDP to route Direct Inward Dialed

(DID) calls over central office (CO) and WATS trunks using a Distant

Steering Code (DSC). The feature is controlled by the Customer Data Block

(LD15). This enhancement applies to CO, WATS, Data Terminal Interface

(DTI) and Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) type trunks.

CDP is described in detail in

Coordinated Dialing Plan description

(553-2751-102).

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

77-4 Electronic Switched Network

Flexible ESN Routing

Flexible ESN Routing (an Xl 1 release 16 and later) allows the routing of

calls on different routes based on a few predefined non-leftwise unique

dialing sequences. “Leftwise unique” means that each entry cannot match the

leftmost portion of any other entry in the table. For example, if “123” is an

entry in the table, then no other entry may begin with “123.”

The ESN translation table will allow any or all of the following non-leftwise

unique numbers (along with their associated route lists) to be entered into the

ESN translation table:

011

Flexible ESN “0” Routing is part of the existing BARS (57) and Network

Alternate Route Selection (NARS) (58) packages and has no interaction with

other features besides these. Since NARS has two translation tables, two

Flexible ESN Routing data blocks will be included in NARS. This means

that a call could be configured to route in two different ways.

This feature is applicable to all route types and network types that are

supported by ESN. For information on the appropriate prompts and responses

in Service Change refer to

input/output guide

(553-3001-400).

Network Alternate Route Selection

Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) is an integral part of Northern

Telecom’s ESN. Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) is designed for

large business customers with numerous distributed operating locations,

enabling the customer to tie together the switches at the various operating

locations to create a private telecommunications network. NARS is described

in detail in

Electronic Switched Network description

(309-3001-100) and

Basic and Network Alternate Route Selection description (553-2751-100).

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Electronic Switched Network 77-5

Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion

Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion (ITGE) is an enhancement to the

feature, offered on 1 release 5 and later software. Standard

call blocking is applied on outgoing calls to a specific Numbering Plan Area

(NPA), NXX, Special Number (SPN), or Location Code (LOC) at the ESN

node if the call is from a specific incoming trunk group.

This prevents routing through the caller’s home switch (home NPA,

NXX). Calls that should have been made off-net from the caller’s home

switch are blocked outgoing at the Node. Main users are prevented from using

the ESN to make calls to certain NPA, NXX, SPN, or Location Code (LOC)

that are restricted from making at the home switch.

Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion (ITGE) provides full ten-digit restriction

for NPA and SPN codes, seven-digit restriction for NXX codes, and

three-digit restriction for Location Code (LOC) codes.

Detailed information on this enhancement is provided in

Electronic Switched

Network description (309-3001-100)

and

Basic Route

Selection description

NARS Multiple DID Office Code Screening

Multiple DID Office Code Screening, offered on release 5 and later

software, is an enhancement to the On-Net to Off-Net Overflow capability of

the NARS feature. This enhancement permits network calls that undergo

on-net to off-net conversion to terminate at any Directory Number (DN) that

has been defined in the LOC data block of memory. This data block allows

the definition of multiple office codes (NXX) and/or multiple Directory

Number (DN) ranges of the following types:

single office code/single Directory Number (DN) range (Prior to Xl 1

release 5, only this arrangement was addressed during on-net to off-net

conversion.)

single office code/multiple DN ranges

multiple office codes/single DN range

multiple office codes/multiple DN ranges

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

77-6 Electronic Switched Network

Operating parameters

NARS Multiple DID Office Code Screening operates within the following

parameters:

Only one Numbering Plan Area (NPA) per LOC is allowed.

Ranges defined within a LOC must be unique. Overlapping or

duplication of ranges is not permitted.

The number of digits must be the same in each Direct Inward Dialing

(DID) range.

A maximum of 20 Direct Inward Dialed (DID) ranges may be defined

per location code.

Off-Net Number Recognition

Off-Net Number Recognition is an enhancement to the Basic/Network

Alternate Route Selection feature for ESN, and for the BARS

feature for stand-alone applications. It is offered on Xl 1 release 5 and later

software.

Off-Net numbers that terminate at an ESN Node or Main, or at a

Conventional Main, can be routed through the private network by means of

tie trunks. Off-Net Number Recognition prevents unnecessary

TO and FROM terminations through CO trunks, at the terminating end, when

a caller dials a DID or Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) call to a location in the

private network. Calls are handled on the basis of customer-defined

parameters stored in Network Translation Tables and Supplementary Digit

Recognition/Restriction Blocks.

Detailed information on this enhancement is provided in

Electronic Switched

Network description

(309-3001-100) and

Basic and Route

Selection description

(553-2751-100).

Xl features and

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Electronic Switched Network

77-7

11 -Digit Translation

This feature expands the ESN translation capabilities from a

maximum of 4 digits to a maximum of 11 digits for route selection.

Possible conflicts between translatable codes (NPA, NXX, LOC, SPN) are

eliminated by 1 l-Digit Translation. By allowing translation of more than four

leading digits, unique nonconflicting routing to a destination is possible.

More than one route list can exist for each specific code of a type. For

example, the NXX 727 could only translate into one route list previously.

With 11-Digit Translation, up to 128 route lists for BARS and up to 256 for

NARS may be defined, extending translation deeper into the dialed code. The

codes must be unique. If an NXX of 7271 is defined, any other 727

entries must be extended to four digits. Table 77-l compares the number of

digits that can be translated prior to X11 release 8 with the present capability.

Table 77-1

Digit translation before and after Xl 1 release 8

Translation Type

LOC

HLOC

NPA

HNPA

NXX

SPN

release 7

and earlier software

3-4

1-4

Xl 1 release 8

and later software

3-7

3-11

3-4

3-8

l-11

BARS/NARS 1 l-Digit Translation is discussed in greater detail in

Electronic

Switched Network description

(309-3001-100) and

Basic and Network

Alternate Route Selection description

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

77-8 Electronic Switched Network

Network Authorization Code

The Network Authorization Code (NAUT) feature provides to 20,000

authorization codes of 1 to 7 digits. X11 release 13 and later software

provides authorization codes of 1 to 14 digits. X11 release 14 and later

software allows up to 50,000 authorization codes. Network Authorization

Code (NAUT) incorporates all the features of the BAUT feature, adds a

conditionally last option for entering an authorization code after dialing an

ESN call, and enables the attendant to enter an authorization code. Network

Authorization Code (NAUT) is described in detail in

Basic and Network

Authorization Code description

Network Call Transfer

Network Call Transfer (NXFER) enhances the operation of Call Transfer

(XFER) between two switches when a call is transferred back to the

originating switch. The regular Call Transfer feature requires two tie trunks

to complete the call. With Network Call Transfer (NXFER), if the call is

transferred back to the originating switch as the same tie trunk group, the

originating switch completes the transfer within itself and the tie trunks are

dropped. For a detailed description of Network Call Transfer (NXFER) refer

Basic and Network Alternate Route Selection description (553-2751-l 00).

The benefits derived from the NXFER feature include

minimal use of access tie lines

improved transmission performance, since tie lines are not used for the

completed connection

operation of identical to that of Call Transfer (XFER)

Operating parameters

NXFER operates within the following parameters:

SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones must be equipped with a Call

Transfer key.

Network Signaling (NSIG) must be provided on both switches.

Xl 1 features and services

Electronic Switched Network

77-9

Network Signaling

Network Signaling (NSIG) provides a proprietary signaling protocol for

transmission of network call information between switches that operate in a

private network environment with Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection

or CDP. Network Signaling (NSIG) can be equipped at the

Node and Main switches. For a detailed description of Network Signaling,

refer to

Electronic Switched Network description

(309-3001-100) and

Basic

and Network Alternate Route Selection description (553-2751-100).

NSIG supports transmission or reception of information between the

following switch types:

Meridian 1 Node to Meridian 1 Node

Meridian 1 Node to Meridian 1 Main

Meridian 1 Node to an Electronic Tie Network (ETN) switch

Meridian 1 Main to Meridian 1 Node

ETN switch to Meridian 1 Node

Information transmitted and received from one switch to another can include

the following:

call type

called number

Network Class of Service (NCOS)

Traveling Class of Service (TCOS)

Traveling Class Mark (TCM)

queue identification number (for CCBQ)

features and services 553-3001-305

77-10

Electronic Switched Network

Operating parameters

NSIG operates within the following parameters:

A Main can connect to only one Node, and both switches must be

equipped with the NSIG feature.

Tie trunks between Nodes and Mains must be arranged for Dial Tone

Multifrequency (DTMF) sending/receiving and wink-start operation.

Meridian 1 Node compatibility with Electronic Tie Network (ETN)

switches is limited to seven-digit on-network and ten-digit off-network

calls.

Network Traffic

The Network Traffic (NTRF) feature enables traffic data related to BARS,

NARS and CDP to be retrieved and output at a traffic TTY. The network

traffic measurements (in addition to the switch traffic measurements) are

described in detail in

measurement formats and output

(553-2001-450).

Network Speed Call

Network Speed Call (NSC) enables a user who is normally restricted from

making network calls to make such a call through provided

that the destination is a number defined in a System Speed Call (SSC) list.

When such a call is placed, the CLS and TGAR restrictions are lifted and a

Network Class of Service (NCOS), associated with the SSC list, is assigned

for the duration of the call. NSC is described in detail in

Electronic Switched

Network description

(309-3001-100) and

Basic and Route

Selection description

Off Hook Queuing

Off Hook Queuing (OHQ) is an optional feature available at any switch

equipped with BARS, NARS, or CDP. If all facilities are busy when an

individual places a BARS, NARS, or CDP call, the OHQ feature enables the

individual to wait off hook for a programmed length of time until a facility

becomes available. OHQ is described in

Network Queue description

(553-2751-101).

Operating parameters

Refer to the appropriate Northern Telecom publication for each ESN feature.

Xl 1 features and services

Electronic Switched Network

77-11

Feature interactions

Refer to the appropriate Northern Telecorn Publication for each ESN feature.

Feature packaging

Basic Authorization Code (BAUT), package 25, requires

Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB), package 24

Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS), package 57, requires

Basic Routing (BRTE), package 14

Network Class of Service (NCOS), package 32

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP), package 59, requires

Basic Routing (BRTE), package 14

Network Class of Service (NCOS), package 32

Flexible Call Back Queuing (FCBQ), package 61

Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS), package 58, requires

Basic Routing (BRTE), package 14

Network Class of Service (NCOS), package 32

Network Authorization Code package 63, requires

Charge Account/Authorization Code (CAB), package 24

Basic Authorization Code (BAUT), package 25

and at least one of the following:

Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS), package 57

Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS), package 58

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP), package 59

Network Call Transfer (NXFR), package 67, requires

Network Class of Service (NCOS), package 32

Network Signaling (NSIG), package 37

features and services 553-3001-305

77-12 Electronic Switched Network

Network Signaling (NSIG), package 37, requires

Network Class of Service (NCOS), package 32

Network Traffic (NTRF), package 29, requires at least one of the following:

Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS), package 57

Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS), package 58

Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP), package 59

Priority Queuing (PQUE), package 60

Flexible Call Back Queuing (FCBQ), package 61

Off Hook Queuing (OHQ), package 62

Network Speed Call (NSC), package 39, requires

System Speed Call package (SSC), package 34

and at least one of the following:

Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS), package 57

Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS), package 58

Off Hook Queuing (OHQ), package 62, requires

Basic Queuing (BQUE), package 28

and at least one of the following:

Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS), package 57

Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS), package 58

Feature implementation

Refer to the appropriate Northern Telecom publication for each ESN feature.

features and services 553-3001-305

End-to-End Signaling

The End-to-End Signaling (EES) feature enables a station to send

end-to-end signaling through an established outgoing connection. Prior to

X 1 release 19, the signaling to both originating and terminating parties

consists of digits in Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) code. With Xl 1

release and later, improved EES provides faster, more reliable service, and

also provides an optional feedback tone to the originator, as specified in

LD56.

Customers requiring DTMF tones should continue to use the original EES

support. This support, provided in X 11 release 18 and earlier, is also provided

as an option in Xl 1 release 19 and later. However, customers who do not need

DTMF tones should use improved EES provided in X release and later.

An outgoing connection from a digital telephone is considered established

after the end of dialing time is elapsed. Alternatively, an outgoing call can be

established after the end of dialing time is elapsed, or can be established

immediately by pressing an octothorpe (#) after the last digit is dialed.

Attendant End-to-End Signaling

With X 1 release 16 and later, the attendant can send DTMF signals using the

EES key on the attendant console. Prior to X 11 release 19, only one party may

be connected to the active loop key (source or destination) and receive DTMF

signals. The console must have one and only one party connected; however,

if that one party is part of a conference, all connected parties receive DTMF

signals. With Xl 1 release 19 and later, when EEST equals “YES” in LD15,

EES no longer requires a conference loop. The TDS or enhanced TDS

conference card is used to produce the tone.

Incoming calls to the attendant console will stay in the attendant queue while

the console is in Attendant End-to-End Signaling (AEES) mode.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

78-2 End-to-End Signaling

Operating parameters

Xl 1 release 5 and later software enables a telephone to send and receive

DTMF codes, thereby extending the EES capability to internal PBX calls and

incoming trunk calls.

EES was only applicable on established outgoing calls on X11 release 4 and

earlier software.

EES and the X11 release 5 enhancement to the EES feature is only allowed

on CO, FX, WATS, TIE, CCSA, DID, and trunk types.

EES is not available on telephones.

Prior to X11 release 19, there must be a conference loop and TDS slot

available to perform Attendant End-to-End Signaling (AEES). With X11

release 19 and later, there is the option to use a conference loop or the TDS.

Prior to X11 release 16, any feature that allows or requires an active party on

the loop key will terminate AEES operation when activated. If such a feature

is already active, pressing the EES key will be ignored.

The AEES key cannot be configured on key 0 or key 1.

A call must be established before using the EES feature. An outgoing call is

considered established 14 seconds (DP trunk) or 4 seconds

telephone or trunk) after the last digit has been outpulsed. The

length of this delay may be changed through service change. If the octothorpe

is dialed, end-to-end signaling may be initiated as soon as is

heard, or answer supervision is received.

Feature interactions

EES cannot be combined with Autodial, Speed Call or Network Speed Call.

However, it can be initiated after a call has been set up by these features.

Attendant Administration

While in the Attendant Administration mode, pressing the EES key is

ignored.

Attendant features

Activating Automatic Wake-up, Call Park, Charge Account, Calling

Party Number, Hold, Release, or another loop key will terminate AEES

operation.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

End-to-End Signaling

78-3

Barge In/Busy Verify

While in the Barge In/Busy Verify mode, the console cannot enter EES

mode.

Call Detail Recording

EES stores EES digits for external calls in the CDR record. Because

these digits may include sensitive information, such as account numbers

and passwords, storing these digits may be a security exposure.

Therefore, in X11 release 19, improved EES gives the customer the

option of whether to include EES digits in the CDR record.

Conference

If the receiving party is part of a conference, all other connected parties

receive DTMF signals. While in AEES mode, the receiving party may

not initiate a conference call.

Digit Key (Meridian Hospitality Voice Services)

Attendant End-to-End Signaling and Digit Key are mutually exclusive.

Being in AEES mode overrides the use of the Digit Key.

End-to-end signaling (station level)

The attendant console and the telephone receiving AEES cannot both

activate EES simultaneously.

Interposition call

When an attendant is actively connected to another console using

Interposition Attendant Call, AEES is blocked. However, during an

Interposition Call Transfer, the console which is actively connected to a

telephone can perform AEES, providing the party connected to the other

attendant console is excluded.

Night Service/Position Busy/Centralized Attendant Service

These features work together with AEES. However, do not press one of

these feature keys while using AEES, or the DTMF signals may be

blocked.

Supervisory console

The supervisor can operate AEES if there is a call on the active loop key.

An attendant in AEES mode can be monitored by the supervisor.

Trunk connection

On incoming ground start CO or DID trunks without Answer

Supervision, you must press the Release (RLS) key on the console to exit

AEES mode and drop the connection.

features and services

553-3001-305

78-4 End-to-End Signaling

Feature packaging

End-to-End Signaling and improved End-to-End Signaling (EES) are both

part of package 10 and have no feature package dependencies.

Feature implementation

Table 78-1

LD15

Enable End-to-End Signaling tone feedback.

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

CUST

EEST

ECDR

Response

CHG

CDB

o-99

<NO>, YES

<YES>, NO

<NO>, YES

Table 78-2

-Add End-to-End Signaling

Prompt Response

REQ

TYPE

KEY

CHG

ATT,

xx EES

Comment

Change

Customer data block

Customer number

NO = No EES feedback tone is given to the telephone.

YES EES feedback tone is given; the type is defined

by the DTMF prompt.

YES Use the current EES for DTMF feedback tone.

NO Use the improved EES for single feedback tone

NO Do not capture EES digits in the CDR record.

YES = Capture EES digits in the CDR record.

to attendant console.

Comment

Change

Console type

Terminal Number

Add EES key (xx = key number) (Cannot be key 0 or 1)

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

End-to-End Signaling 78-5

Table 78-3

LD56

Specify the cadence for the EES feedback tone

Prompt Response Comment

REQ CHG, NEW Change or Add

FTC Flexible Tones and Cadences

TABL

FTC table number

HCCT

YES

Hardware Controlled Cadence

E E S T (No response expected; this is an informational

prompt.)

TDSH

i bbcctt

TDS external, burst, cadence, and tone

N O-255 7 TDS tone code

O-255 7 cadence code for FCAD

Feature operation

There is a 5.4 DS difference between when EEST is set to YES (provide

end-to-end signaling feedback tone) and when it is set to NO (provide no

tone). An attenuation of 5.4 using the conference pads is applied to the

EES tone if a user feedback is to be given.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

78-6 End-to-End Signaling

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

79-1

Equal Access Compliance

A telephone user can select any interexchange carrier for any given call by

using a Carrier Access Code (CAC). A CAC comprises an Equal Access

identifier and a Carrier Identification Code (CIC). Northern Telecom refers

to a call preceded by a CAC as an Equal Access call.

FCC requirements

FCC Part 68 regulations require that any equipment or software manufactured

or imported on or after April 17, 1992, and installed by any aggregator, must

allow all users to use Equal Access codes to selectively access the long

distance carrier of their choice. As defined in FCC docket 90-3 13, an

is any business that, in the ordinary course of operations, makes

telephones available to the public or to transient users of the premises, for

interstate telephone calls using a provider of operator services. Aggregators

include hotels or motels, hospitals, universities, airports, gas stations, or pay

telephone owners.

Aggregators, although they must allow callers access to any long distance

caller, are permitted to block calls

selectively.

Selective equal access lets

aggregators choose to block direct-dialed calls that result in charges to the

originating telephone. Aggregators cannot block operator-assisted calls.

Northern Telecom complies with the FCC Equal Access rules in dockets

90-3 I-35, and their appendixes, in a software up-issue of Xl 1 release 14

(14.59 or later), and 1 release 17 and later. 1 release 19 supports the

expanded codes described in the following section.

Note: X 11 releases 15 and 16 do not support Equal Access.

Xl 1 features and services

79-2 Equal Access Compliance

Carrier Access Code

Prior to the first quarter of 1995, the CAC is defined as where

is the Equal Access identifier and XXX is the CIC. During the first quarter of

1995, Carrier Identification Code Expansion will occur. The CAC will

become (an Equal Access identifier of ‘101’ followed by a

four-digit CIC). For a period of approximately 18 months following

introduction of the new format, both old and new formats will be accepted.

During 1996, support for the format will terminate. Meridian 1

software permits both formats.

Equal Access dialing plans

X11 software supports Equal Access dialing plans as follows:

Allow operator-assisted North American and international dialing.

.CAC + 0 + (NPA) + NXX + XXXX

Allow or deny direct North American and international dialing.

.CAC t 1 t (NPA) t NXX t XXXX

Legend:

CAC = Carrier Access Code or

NPA = Numbering Plan Area (area code in the North American

Numbering Plan)

NXX = end-office code

(N = any digit except 0 or 1; X = any digit (O-9))

XXXX = any four digits

CC = Country Code

NN = National Number

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Equal Access Compliance 79-3

Route types

Equal Access Compliance supports COT, FEX, and tie routes.

A tie route is supported only if standard signaling is specified in LD16 (SIG0

= STD). To enable Equal Access call restrictions to function properly, DTI tie

routes must be voice only. (DTI tie routes configured as voice/data are not

supported for connection to a central office.) Tie routes must be either

outgoing or incoming/outgoing = or OGT).

Call restriction

Call restriction relies on fixed pattern recognition to determine which calls

can be denied. Switch administrators can restrict two kinds of direct-dialed

Equal Access calls: North American calls with the

format and international calls with the

format. If either restriction option is chosen, the

administration must verify that the OCAC flag is correctly set as described in

“Feature packaging” on page 79-3.

Call restrictions do not affect attendant calls.

Calls blocked by Equal Access are not directed to alternate routes.

Feature packaging

Equal Access compliance is included in basic X11 software. The Network

Class of Service package (NCOS, package 32) is required to configure Equal

Access.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

79-4 Equal Access Compliance

Feature implementation

Carrier Identification Code Expansion supports and extends the General

Carrier Restriction method of blocking calls. Given the expansion in the

number of Carrier Identification Codes, it is no longer practical to support

Selective Carrier Restriction functionality. (Carrier Identification Code

Expansion continues to provide the selective blocking function required by

the FCC; Northern Telecom and the FCC interpret the term “selective”

differently.) For these reasons, prompts pertaining to GCR and SCR in LD16

no longer appear.

Customers who chose the ITOL option to block international calls should also

have international calls blocked at the Central Office to reduce the likelihood

of unauthorized international calls.

Before and during the permissive period, when both the three-character and

the four-character CIC are allowed, current Equal Access users must set the

Original Carrier Access Code (OCAC) flag to YES in LD17. The default is

NO, indicating that only the new CAC format is acceptable. A YES setting

for OCAC in LD17 lets customers use both the original and the new CAC

formats. All customers who currently have Equal Access configured should

set OCAC to YES in LD17 immediately after sysload when installing new

software that includes the new expansion feature. When the original CAC is

no longer acceptable (sometime in OCAC should be set to NO.

Note: New

Equal Access customers do not need to change the OCAC

flag until the feature is configured.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

routing

Equal Access Compliance 79-5

Equal Access determines restrictions without looking at a call’s originating

type (ESN or Direct Access). Routing has no effect on Equal Access call

restriction: calls receive the same restriction treatment whether they originate

from a trunk access code or from Equal Access is not a

feature and does not require dialing.

To configure to route Equal Access calls, simply use a special

number (SPN) of 10 (the Equal Access code) to identify the calls as Equal

Access calls and route them accordingly.

Example

Configure BARS/NARS for Equal Access call routing, assuming that calls

originate from Customer 0 and go out over Route 10. To route Equal Access

calls originating from Customer 0 over Route 10, using route list index 100

and access code 1 configure the database as follows.

The configuration in this example routes all Equal Access calls placed

through with access code 1 over route 10. Note that the

SPN is “10,” to support the original CIC format, rather than “101,” as

required under the new CIC format. Set the SPN to “101” if support for the

original CIC format is unnecessary or if another dialing sequence beginning

with “10” is introduced into North American Numbering Plan.

Follow these steps:

In LD17, set OCAC as appropriate.

C H G Change existing route data

TYPE

CFN Route Data Block

PARM YES Change system parameters

Enable or disable new distinctive ringing

YES

Support original CAC format (must be set to YES

YES

during interim period, NO following interim period)

1 features and services 553-3001-305

79-6 Equal Access Compliance

2 In set the route list index to Route 10.

REQ

CUST

FEAT

ENTR

ROUT

NEW, CHG

RLB

100

Create or change database

Customer number

Route List Block

Use route list index 100 to route Equal Access

calls

Route entry number for this route list index (0 if

this is the first entry)

Send Equal Access calls over Route 10

3 In establish an SPN for the Equal Access code.

New ESN translation table entry

Customer number

Network translation table entry

Access code 1 is used to originate the Equal Access

calls

SPN translation entry

SPN (Equal Access code)

Use route list index 100 to route Equal Access calls

4 In LD87, configure an NCOS for Equal Access.

REQ CHG

CUST

FEAT NCTL

NCOS

EQA YES

Change NCTL data

Customer number

Change NCTL block

Network class of service group number

This NCOS permits Equal Access call restriction

capabilities

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

Equal Access Compliance 79-7

Assign an NCOS to a set in or

C H G Change existing set data

TYPE

aaa Specify set type

lscu

Specify set Terminal Number

NCOS 4

Network class of service group number

In LD16, enable Equal Access for this route.

REQ CHG

TYPE

RDB

CUST 0

ROUT 10

Change existing route data

Change Route Data Block

Specify customer number

EQAR

YES

Enter YES to enable Equal Access and selective

blocking for this route. AYES response triggers

the next two prompts.

Specify that Equal Access North American calls

(DENY) billed to originating telephone are to be denied

Specify that Equal Access international calls billed

(DENY) to originating telephone are to be denied

The configuration in this example routes Equal Access calls placed via

using AC1 over route 10 and blocks all Equal Access toll

calls

for NCOS = 4. Note that Equal Access toll calls placed via direct trunk

access

route 10 also will be blocked.

Feature operation

There is no specific procedure for operating this feature.

Operating parameters

Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

79-8 Equal Access Compliance

Feature Interactions

Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release:

Fast Tone Digit Switch

The Fast Tone and Digit Switch (FTDS) card, along with the

associated software, can reduce call setup time by as much as 50 percent with

features such as Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection

Stored Number Redial, Speed Call, and System Speed Call. With the use of

an on-board buffer memory, the calling efficiency of end users is greatly

improved.

The can be operated in two different modes as defined by the

customer 5: 1 either with dual tone multifrequency (DTMF) bursts, or

with 50ms DTMF bursts. The software can load up to 32 digits into the buffer

in a single time slice, and can the digits at a maximum rate of 10

digits per second.

Operating parameters

Tone Digit Switch cards QPC197 and QPC25 1 cannot coexist with the

QPC609 or 17 within the same Meridian 1 system.

Feature interactions

Not applicable.

Feature packaging

Fast Tone and Digit Switch (FTDS), package 87, has no feature package

dependencies.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

80-2 Fast Tone Digit Switch

Feature implementation

LD17

Change duration of burst.

REQ CHG

TYPE CFN

PARM Yes, (No)

D T R B 50, 60, 70, (100)

Change

Configuration Record

Change system parameters

burst time in milliseconds

Feature operation

Not applicable.

features and services 553-3001-305

81-1

FCC Compliance for DID Answer

Supervision

This feature is designed to meet the requirements in the United States, Section

68.3 14(h) of Part 68, and the DOC requirements in Canada, Section 3.22 of

CS03 Part for answer supervision of redirected telephone calls to help

ensure proper billing.

This feature is designed specifically for telephone calls coming in through

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks. Answer supervision for all other types

of telephone calls is not affected. This feature works in conjunction with the

following types of calls:

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls terminating at the Meridian 1 and

forwarded to a Recorded Announcement (RAN)

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) calls forwarded by the system through the

public switched network (PSN) to another number in the central office

(CO), or to another Meridian 1

On North American COT, FEX, and WATS trunks, central offices do not

always return answer supervision. When no answer supervision is

returned, the Meridian software uses the end-of-dial timer for

non-Digitone trunks (EOD timer), or the end-of-dial timer for

trunks (ODT timer) to verify call connection. For FCC compliance, the

EOD and ODT timers will still be used for incoming DID calls, except

that EOD is capped at 20 seconds even if configured for more.

features and services 553-3001-305

81-2

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

This feature handles incoming DID calls over Data Terminal Interface (DTI),

Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN), and analog trunks. Outgoing

calls Central Office (CO) and tie are also handled. System components

involved include trunks, the Meridian 1, and the CO. The following explains

how the system components handle answer supervision.

Analog, DTI, and ISDN incoming trunks: These are covered as long as

they are DID incoming trunks. For incoming analog and DTI trunks,

answer supervision or pseudo-answer supervision is returned by the

Meridian 1 to the CO, if necessary. For incoming ISDN trunks, the

connect message is returned instead.

Analog, DTI, and ISDN outgoing trunks: For incoming DID calls, the

answer and disconnect supervisor (SUPN) of the outgoing trunk is forced

to NO. The EOD or ODT timer simulates the return of answer

supervision.

Meridian 1: For DID calls terminating at the Meridian 1, the system

returns answer supervision based on the terminating condition. For DID

calls forwarded to public switched networks or private networks,

returns answer supervision based on the condition of the outgoing trunk

(answered or timed out).

CO: The Meridian 1 provides the pseudo-answer for DID calls because

the Meridian 1 cannot return answer supervision.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

81-3

DID calls terminating at the Meridian 1

The requirements for a DID call terminating at the Meridian 1 to return

answer supervision to the incoming DID trunk are shown in Table 81-l. The

prompt in LD16 is kept for other types of calls, but the Meridian 1

software enforces the correct settings to return answer supervision if a

Recorded Announcement (RAN) is used for DID calls, regardless of the value

originally specified in the service change.

Table 81-l

Returning Answer Supervision for DID calls terminating at the

Meridian 1

DID call terminating status

Answer supervision

returned with FCC

Compliance

Answered by the called DID station

Answered by an attendant

Routed to dialing prompt

Routed to Meridian Mail

Routed to recorded announcement (except for

invalid number, not in service, and not assigned

announcements)

Yes

Routed to recorded announcement by Automatic

Call Distribution (ACD) including invalid number,

not in service, or not assigned announcement

Not answered

Busy signal

Recorder signal

Routed to announcement for invalid number, not

in service, or not assigned

Yes

Xi features and services

553-3001-305

81-4 FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

Calls forwarded to public switched network

Because it is uncertain whether or not the far end will return answer

supervision, the Meridian 1 uses the EOD and ODT timers. If the Meridian 1

has not detected the return of answer supervision upon timeout of the

outgoing CO trunk, the Meridian 1 sends pseudo-answer supervision to the

incoming DID trunk. This timer is set in LD16 on a per route basis. When a

CO trunk is configured, Meridian 1 software forces the value of SUPN to NO.

Consequently, Meridian 1 software does not expect the return of answer

supervision, and returns answer supervision in the following cases:

The Meridian 1 receives answer supervision from the outgoing CO trunk

before the EOD or ODT timer of the outgoing route expires.

The Meridian 1 does not receive answer supervision from the outgoing

trunk and the EOD or ODT timer of the outgoing route expires;

pseudo-answer is generated.

Note:

There are still some cases in which the SUPN value for CO trunks

is assigned to YES if the CO supports a reverse battery mechanism.

With FCC Compliance, a more stringent mechanism is introduced to apply

SUPN = No in LD14 to all CO trunks, even those configured as polarity

sensitive. Service-changeable EOD or ODT timers are always used for

incoming DID calls to enforce the return of answer supervision. In this case,

EOD = 128-19, 968 ms (default time is 13,952 ms)

ODT = 256-16, 128 ms (default time is 4,096 ms)

Note:

The EOD timer expires at 20 (20,000 ms) for FCC Compliance.

For outgoing DID calls, the EOD upper limit is 32,640 ms.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision 81-5

DID calls forwarded to private networks

Answer supervision is not always returned on tie trunks because some tie

trunks leased from public carriers are connected to that do not support

answer supervision.

Currently, the Meridian 1 provides the SUPN prompt (LD14) to specify the

availability of answer supervision on certain types of trunks, including tie,

CAM, CCSA (common control switching arrangement), and CAA (CCSA

Automatic Number Identification If SUPN is YES, and it is an

outgoing trunk, Meridian 1 does not return answer supervision to the

incoming DID trunk unless answer supervision is received from that outgoing

trunk. If the user specifies NO, the Meridian 1 returns pseudo-answer

supervision upon EOD or ODT timeout. Such implementation causes short

billing and overcharge problems.

To solve this problem, a treatment similar to the one implemented on CO

trunks is used on the trunks in this category. The Meridian 1 enforces SUPN

= NO without changing the SUPN value.

Feature interactions

For incoming DID calls routed to private networks, SUPN is enforced to NO

to ensure the return of answer supervision on the outgoing tie, CO, FEX,

WATS, CAM, CAA, Common Control Switching Arrangement (CSA), and

Automatic Voice Network (AUTOVON) trunks. If answer supervision is not

returned when the end of dial timeout occurs, the Meridian 1 disregards the

original value of SUPN set by the user and forces the return of answer

supervision.

When the call comes from a DID trunk, the following outgoing trunks are

affected: tie, CO, FEX, WATS, CAM, CAA, and CCSA.

Feature Group D trunks and Japan (JPN) DID trunks are not affected by this

feature.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

81-6 FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

trunks

Both incoming and outgoing Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

trunks are affected by this feature.

For ISDN incoming DID trunks, the connect message is returned when

answer supervision is returned or when the end of dial timer expires.

For ISDN outgoing trunks, the end of dial timer is added to the protocol

to simulate the EOD timer when a connect message is not returned from

the far end; the Meridian 1 generates a pseudo-answer to send to the

incoming trunk.

intercept and RAN

With this feature, incoming DID calls that are intercepted to a Recorded

Announcement (RAN) are provided with answer supervision.

Operating parameters

FCC compliance is supported on 1 release 14, and on X11 release 17 and

later software.

Note: X11 releases 15 and 16 do not support FCC Compliance.

Allowing Meridian equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not

provide proper answer supervision signaling is in violation of Part 68 rules.

This equipment, if provisioned with X11 release 17 or later software,

returns answer supervision signals to the public switched telephone

network (PSTN) when

answered by the called station

answered by the attendant

routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the

Customer Premises Equipment (CPE) user

.routed to a dial prompt

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

81-7

This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded

back to the PSTN. Permissible exceptions are when

a call is unanswered

a busy tone is received

a reorder tone is received

Feature packaging

FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision requires FCC compliance

package 223.

Feature implementation

Although no implementation changes are necessary, FCC Compliance does

affect system parameters.

LD14

When FCC Compliance is equipped, the Meridian 1 forces SUPN to NO. This

indicates that the system does not expect the CO to return answer supervision,

and provides the pseudo-answer supervision required.

LD16

When RAN is provided for DID calls, the Meridian 1 forces answer

supervision regardless of the setting established in LD16 with the

prompt.

Feature operation

There is no specific procedure required to operate this feature.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

81-8 FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:

93 08 01

Status: Standard

Xl Release:

82-1

Flexible Feature Codes

Flexible Feature Codes are user-defined numbers of up to four digits

that can be used in place of existing Special Prefix (SPRE) codes. With DN

Expansion (DNXP), package 150, Flexible Feature Codes can be up

to seven digits long. The Flexible Feature Code (FFC) feature allows

customers to define different dialing codes for different features. There is no

limit to the number of per prompt as long as each one is unique.

This enhancement allows the use of digits 0 through 9, and the asterisk and

octothorpe to activate features. The existing Special Prefix (SPRE) dialing

feature is still supported, with or without the FFC feature enabled. However,

the Special Prefix (SPRE) must be assigned in LD1.5 in order for to

operate for those features that also use SPRE codes.

The FFC package allows telephones to activate these features:

Automatic Wakeup (AWU)

Electronic Lock (ELK) (see “Feature operation” on page 82-9)

Override

Remote Call Forward (RCFW) (see “Feature operation” on page 82-9)

Customers define one or more codes at their discretion in LD57 (FFC). For

Service Change updates, refer to the (553-3001-400).

Any telephone that can currently operate the SPRE dialing feature can

operate the FFC feature. Any telephone that does not currently have SPRE

access receives intercept treatment when dialing Telephone operation

remains the same (only the codes are different) so that the FFC code is dialed

instead of the SPRE code. Therefore, each feature enabled must have an FFC

individually defined.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

82-2 Flexible Feature Codes

When FFCT is YES in LD57, the Meridian 1 returns a confirmation tone to

the user after completing some feature operations. Refer to “Feature

interactions,” later in this document)

The confirmation tone is the same as the special dial tone.

Operating parameters

The SPRE feature must exist in order for FFC to operate.

Xl 1 release 15 and later software supports Flexible Feature Codes.

The selected must be unique numbers up to seven digits long. They

cannot conflict with any Directory Number (DN) already in the dialing plan.

LD57 can allow no more than 100 to be modified in a single pass

through Service Change.

Customers using the octothorpe as part of their dialing plan can use a

predefined string of digits for end-of-dialing indicators.

Changes to the Station Control Passwords do not take affect until

after a and sysload. Configuring the system or enabling the feature

changes SCPL = 0 in LD15 to any length. This change takes effect

immediately. Any other change to SCPL in LD15 requires a and

sysload before taking effect. When the Station Control Password Length

(SCPL) is changed, all associated passwords change accordingly at the next

and sysload. Changing SCPL from 3 to 5 automatically inserts

leading zeros before all existing three-character passwords. Conversely,

changing SCPL from 5 to 3 automatically truncates the leading characters of

all existing five-character passwords.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Flexible Feature Codes

82-3

Feature interactions

FFC interacts with other features as follows:

It allows telephones to Override established calls, based on the

telephone’s programmed Class of Service (CLS). telephones

can also activate and deactivate Call Forward by dialing a single FFC.

Telephones with the proper Class of Service (CLS) can activate

Automatic Wakeup (AWU) for their own telephone.

Confirmation Tone for FFC lets and digital telephones receive

a special tone when certain functions are complete. Confirmation Tone

is returned following these events:

Automatic Wakeup (any function)

.Call Forward (deactivate)

.Electronic Lock (any function)

.Ring Again (activate or deactivate)

Room Status (any function)

.Speed Call Controller (add to Speed Call list)

.Store Number (erase)

Confirmation Tone for FFC is returned when a predefined string is used

as the end-of-dialing indicator for the following activities:

.Call Forward (activate)

.Permanent Hold (any function)

.Speed Call (store)

.Store Number (store)

.Flexible Feature Code (any verification)

Confirmation Tone is provided for Speed Call store after the

End-Of-Dial string (such as is entered.

FFC codes are not supported on SL-1 and digital telephones when

attempting to call pickup a Dial Intercom ringing call.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

82-4 Flexible Feature Codes

Automatic Wake-Up

Telephones can activate Automatic Wakeup (AWU) features for their

own station with Common Controlled Switching Arrangement (CCSA)

Class of Service (CLS).

Users are still able to use SPRE dialing (if the feature is enabled), with

or without FFC defined.

Because Electronic Lock (ELK) sets the Controlled Class of Service

(CCOS) to CCRS (as defined in a telephone with a key used to

modify CCOS can be used to activate or deactivate the Electronic Lock

without having to dial the FFC or the password.

Feature packaging

Flexible Feature Codes (FFC), package 139, requires Controlled Class of

Service (CCOS), package 81, only if Electronic is desired.

In addition, the SPRE dialing feature must be enabled for FFC functions.

2500 Set Features package 18, and 500 Set Features package

73, are required to support the following features:

Call Forward

Speed Call Controller

Speed Call User

Permanent Hold

Call Park

System Speed Call

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Flexible Feature Codes

82-5

Feature implementation

Set parameters for Flexible Feature Code.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

CCRS

FFCS

STRL

STRG

CHG

CDB

o-99

aaa

YES, NO

aaa

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) (assigned when

Electronic Lock (ELK) is activated)

aaa =

UNR Unrestricted

TLD Toll Denied

CTD Conditionally Toil Denied

CUN Conditionally Unrestricted

SR E Semirestricted

F RE Fully Restricted

Fully Restrict Level

FR2 Fully Restrict Level 2

Station Control Password Length (SCPL), O-8.

Entering 0 disables ELK and RCFW features at next

and sysload.

Change or don’t change FFC end-of-dialing indicator

String length l-3 (prompted only if FFCS = YES)

Character string to be used (up to string length; prompted

only if FFCS = YES)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

82-6 Flexible Feature Codes

Set Station Control Password Length for telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CLS

CHG

500

CCSA

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Station Control Password (must be same length as SCPL in

LDl5; enter X to delete password)

Enable CCOS for Electronic Lock (ELK) and Remote Call

Forward

Set Station Control Password Length for SL-1 and digital telephcmes.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

lscu

xx...xx

CCSA

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Station Control Password

Must be the same length as SCPL in

Enter X to delete the password

Delete the password only if SCPL = 0; else receive an error

code for no password to fit the SCPL

Enable CCOS for ELK and Remote Call Forward

features and services 553-3001-305

Flexible Feature Codes

82-7

LD57

Define numbers for Flexible Feature Code (Part 1 of 3).

REQ NEW, CHG, OUT Build new FFC data block, change FFC data block, remove

FFC code.

TYPE FFC Flexible Feature Codes

CUST

o-99

Customer number

CEPT

YES, NO

Conference des Postes Tel defaults are allowed,

or not allowed, to be defined (prompted only if REQ = NEW)

REP*

Single-character replacement for * and # in CEPT defaults

Create defaults only

ALL

YES, NO

Remove or don’t remove all (prompted only if REQ =

OUT)

CODE nnnn

FFC type

ALL

All prompts

<CR> No prompts

ASRC nnnnnnn Automatic Set Relocation code

AUTH nnnnnnn Authorization code

AWUA

nnnnnnn Automatic Wakeup Activate code

AWUD nnnnnnn Automatic Wakeup Deactivate code

AWUV

nnnnnnn Automatic Wakeup Verify code

CDRC nnnnnnn Call Detail Recording charge account code

CFWA nnnn Call Forward All Calls Activate code

CFWD nnnn Call Forward All Calls Deactivate code

CFWV

nnnn Call Forward All Calls Verify code

nnnn Conference Diagnostics code

CPAC nnnn Access Parked Call code

CPRK nnnn Park Call code

CSHF nnnn Switchhook Flash

Xl features and services

82-8 Flexible Feature Codes

LD57

Define numbers for Flexible Feature Code (Part 2 of 3).

nnnn Six-Party Conference call code

DEAF nnnn Deactivate Ring Again and FWD codes

DPVS nnnn Data port Verification code

nnnn Electronic Lock Activate code

ELKD nnnn Electronic Lock Deactivate code

HOLD nnnn Permanent Hold code

IMS nnnn Integrated Message System Access code

MNTC nnnn Maintenance Access code

MTRC nnnn Malicious Call Trace code

OVRD nnnn Override code

PUDN nnnn Pick Up Directory Number code

PUGR nnnn Pick Up Group code

PURN nnnn Pick Up Ringing Number code

RCFA nnnn Remote Call Forward Activate code

RCFD nnnn Remote Call Forward Deactivate code

RCFV nnnn Remote Call Forward verify code

RDLN nnnn Redial Last Number code

RDNE nnnn Erase Stored Number code

RDSN nnnn Redial Saved Number code

RDST nnnn Store Last Number code

RGAA

nnnn Ring Again Activate code

RGAD nnnn Ring Again Deactivate code

RGAV

nnnn Ring Again Verify code

RMST nnnn Room

Status

code

features and services 553-3001-305

Flexible Feature Codes

LD57 Define numbers for Flexible Feature Code (Part 3 of 3).

82-9

nnnn Station Control Password Change code

nnnn Speed Call Controller code

nnnn Speed Call User code

nnnn System Speed Call User code

TFAS nnnn Trunk Answer from Any Station code

TRMD nnnn Terminal Diagnostics code

TRVS nnnn Trunk Verification code

USTA nnnn User Status code

nnnn Log-in, Log-out code for 50012500 ACD telephones

NRDY nnnn

Not Ready Activate or Deactivate code for ACD

telephones

Feature operation

For some features, the user can dial a different FFC to activate or deactivate

a feature or to verify some feature operations. The tone for each event

(activate, deactivate, verify) is the

same

as the default Confirmation Tone

(special dial tone).

Electronic Lock

Electronic Lock (ELK), packaged with FFC, provides an SCPW for changing

the status from the telephone. The SCPW also protects against changes to the

RCFW feature. Entering a password length of 0 in (SCPL) disables

password control for both ELK and Remote Call Forward (RCFW).

Operating ELK requires enabling of CCOS, package 81.

To change the Class of Service (CLS) from a telephone

Dial the Electronic Lock Activate code.

2 Dial the SCPW. The telephone’s CLS is changed to the CCRS value

defined in LD15.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

82-10

Flexible Feature Codes

To return the telephone to the originally defined CLS

Dial the Electronic Lock Deactivate (ELKD) code.

2 Dial the SCPW. The telephone’s CLS is changed to the values defined in

and

Because the CLS defined for CCRS in LD15 is usually lower than the CLS

defined in or the CLS for a telephone is lowered by dialing the

Electronic Lock Activate FFC and the password associated with that

telephone. The user can activate from a remote telephone by dialing the

FFC, the SCPW and the Directory Number to be changed. The same

operation can deactivate the feature, using the Electronic Lock Deactivate

(ELKD) code programmed in LD57.

ELK operation has the following requirements:

CCOS allowed, with CCSA CLS in and and CCRS defined

in LD15

Set the password length in LD15, at the SCPL prompt

Add passwords in and at the

FFCT = YES in LD 57

To change the SCPW for ELK

Select a free extension.

2 Dial the SCPC code.

Dial the SCPW for your telephone.

Dial the

new

password.

To confirm, dial the new password again

6 Hang up or press RLS.

Remote Call Forward

Remote Call Forward (RCFW) allows a telephone user to program their Call

Forward Directory Number (DN) from a remote telephone. Each telephone

must have Call Forward All Calls enabled, and must have the SCPW defined

for FFC in or

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Flexible Feature Codes 82-11

As with all FFC applications, a unique number code must be programmed for

each of the FFC functions relating to RCFW: Remote Forward Activate

(RCFA), Remote Call Forward Deactivate (RCFD), and Remote Call

Forward Verify (RCFV). User’s can change the RCFW Directory Number

(DN) from their own telephone, or from a telephone remote from the switch.

From any telephone within the Meridian 1 system, simply lift the handset and

use the following procedures. From any telephone outside the system, first

dial the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) number and wait for dial tone.

You may hear a Confirmation Tone after entering the main extension number,

telling you that the password and extension match. You may hear a second

special tone after dialing the end-of-entry digits, telling you that the

procedure was successful. If you hear a Fast Busy signal, hang up and try

again.

Dial RCFW FFC (for example,

2Dial the SCPW.

Dial the DN of station to be forwarded.

4 Dial the number you are forwarding to.

If required, dial end-of-dialing digits (default is the octothorpe

6 Hang up.

If there are two telephones with the same Prime DN, it is recommended that

only one of them have an SCPW. With RCFW, it is possible that the two

telephones could have the same password assigned. With the same password,

they could control each other’s telephone security. For the same reason, the

Secondary DN for an ACD station should not appear as a Prime DN on

another station.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

82-12 Flexible Feature Codes

features and services 553-3001-305

Issued:

921231

Status: Standard

Xl 1 Release: All

83-1

Group Call

Group Call allows a user of an SL-1 or Meridian digital telephone to place a

call to up to ten Directory Numbers simultaneously by activating a

Group Call key. The called must have been previously defined as

members of a group.

Each customer within the Meridian 1 system can have up to 64 groups

assigned. Each group has up to ten member Xl 1 release 13 and later

software allows 20 members per group. Any DN in the system can be

assigned as a member of a group, and a DN can be a member of more than

one group.

Groups are defined through Service Change in LD18. When a group is

defined, each member of the group is assigned a member number. If network

or conference blocking is encountered, members are assigned priorities for

connection to the Group Call in order of their group member numbers

(member 0 has the highest priority). It is recommended that group members

be assigned from different network loops to minimize the possibility of

network blocking.

The Group Call key is used to originate a Group Call to all members of the

group to which the Group Call key is assigned. The Group Call key for a

given group can appear on more than one telephone. More than one Group

Call key can be assigned to a group, but only one Group Call key can be active

for a given group at any time. A telephone with a Group Call key need not be

equipped with a Directory Number (DN) that is defined as a group member.

features and services

553-3001-305

83-2 Group Call

Activation of a Group Call key originates a call to all assigned members of

the group. When the first member of the group answers, tone is

removed and a speech path is set up between the member and the originator

of the call. As subsequent members answer, they are added to the call. The

lamp associated with the Group Call key at the originator’s telephone flashes

until all members of the group have answered the call.

If a Directory Number (DN) is actively engaged in a call and a Group Call is

originated for that DN, either the Group Call is camped-on or Call Waiting is

activated for the DN and a special warning tone is provided. The special

warning tone consists of three rapid bursts of tone followed by ten seconds of

silence, then an additional three rapid bursts of tone.

An active Group Call is under complete control of the originator of the call.

If the originator goes on hook, the call is completely broken down. Members

who are taking part in a Group Call may disconnect from the call at any time,

but once disconnected, they cannot be reconnected.

Operating parameters

A Group Call can be originated only from an SL-1 or Meridian 1 digital

telephone with a Group Call key.

The maximum number of members per group is 10 (20 with X11 release 13

and later software).

The maximum number of groups per customer is 64.

Each group member DN must have a Warning tone allowed COS.

OPX lines cannot be members of a group.

Calls to a DN that is active in a Conference call or Group Call are blocked.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Group Call 83-3

Feature interactions

Telephone features

The following features cannot be applied on a Group Call:

.Call Forward No Answer

.Call Forward Busy

.Call Park

.Call Transfer

Conference

Hunting

.Privacy Release

Ring Again

Call Forward All Calls

A Group Call to a telephone with Call Forward active is forwarded one

step only. The Call Forward number must be a valid DN.

Call Pickup

This feature can be used to answer a Group Call if it is activated by a

valid telephone in the same Call Pickup group, or by using Directory

Number (DN) Pickup or Group Pickup.

Hold

Only the originator of a Group Call can put the Group Call on hold.

Make Set Busy or Individual Do Not Disturb

A Group Call to a telephone in Make Busy or Individual Do Not Disturb

mode cannot be completed. The telephone will not be rung and is not

counted as part of the Group Call; that is, if all other members in the

group have answered, the lamp next to the Group Call key on the

originator’s telephone lights steadily.

Feature packaging

Group Call (GRP), package 48, has no feature package dependencies.

Xl 1 features and services

83-4 Group Call

Feature implementation

or change a Group Call list.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

G R P Group Call data block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

GRNO O-63 Number of the Group Call list

STOR

Group member number (xx) and associated DN

<CR> End input of stored Group Call entries

-Add or change Group Call for and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ CHG

TYPE

aaaa

lscu

KEY

xx GRC yy

LD20 Print Group Call data.

REQ

TYPE

CUST

GRNO

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Add a Group Call key

xx = key number

yy = Group Call member number

PRT

GRP

o-99

O-63

Group Call data

Customer number

Number of the Group Call group

Print data for all Group Call groups

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Group Call 83-5

Feature operation

To make a Group Call,

Press

Group Call.

All group members are automatically called. The

LCD indicator beside the Group Call key flashes until all members have

answered. Then it lights steadily.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

83-6 Group Call

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

History File

The History File provides the capability to allocate an area of protected data

to store system messages until a printout is requested by a craftsperson. The

size of the History File is defined on a system basis and can be up to 65,534

characters. Since one word of protected data stores two History File

characters, the size of the History File is up to 32,767 words of protected data.

For a complete description of the History File, including the significant

enhancements provided in X 11 release 19, please refer to XI

system

management application

(553-3001-301).

Xl 1 features and services

84-2 History File

1 features and services

85-1

Hot Line

Flexible Hot Line

Flexible Hot Line (HOT) allows designated telephones to place

calls to a predetermined destination simply by lifting the handset. The

destination may be internal or external to the Meridian and the call does not

require attendant intervention.

Flexible Hot Line (HOT) is provided to designated telephones on a

Class of Service (CLS) basis. A telephone is assigned the Hot Line feature

through Service Change and a Manual Line (MNL) CLS. Address digits must

be stored for the predetermined destination. If no digits are defined, the call

will route to the attendant console.

When the user lifts the handset, no dial tone is returned. The Meridian 1

translates the stored digits and performs in one of two operations:

It rings an internal Directory Number (DN), then returns tone.

It translates to an external Trunk Access Code (TRC) and DN, then

returns external call-progress tones or announcements.

Note:

Flash the switchhook at any time during call setup or during the

call will be ignored.

caller is a Hot Line, the prime Directory Number of the calling

telephone is displayed on the terminating telephone, if equipped with a

display.

Operating parameters

Flexible Hot Line applies to telephones only.

1 features and services

553-3001-305

85-2 Hot Line

Feature interactions

Enhanced Hotline

Flexible Hotline and Enhanced Hotline are mutually exclusive (a

telephone cannot have both Manual Line (MNL) and Enhanced Hot Line

Allowed (EHTA) Class of Service (CLS)).

Hunting

Calls will hunt before being routed to the attendant.

Feature packaging

Flexible Hot Line (HOT), package 70, has no feature package dependencies.

Feature implementation

Add or change Flexible Hot Line for telephone

TYPE

FTR

C H G Change

aaaa Telephone type

aaaa = 2018, 2112,

lscu

Terminal Number

M N L Manual signaling (requires XFD Class of Service,

transfer denied)

HOT l-31

Add Flexible Hot Line (Xl 1 releases 4 through 9)

Flexible Hot Line Directory Number (DN)

HOT D 1-31

Add Flexible Hot Line (Xl 1 release 10 and later

software)

l-31 = maximum digits for Hot Line

= Flexible Hot Line DN

= Phantom DN for a two-way Hot Line

features and services 553-3001-305

Hot Line 85-3

Feature operation

To make a Flexible Hot Line Call, follow these steps:

Lift the handset. The Hot Line number is automatically dialed.

To end the call, hang up.

Enhanced Hot Line

Enhanced Hot Line (EHOT), available in X11 release 10 and later software,

provides Hot Line services to telephones with programmable keys. This

feature is designed for, and is compatible with, telephones and SL-1

and Meridian digital telephones. All capabilities from Flexible Hot Line

(HOT) are provided to any key/lamp pair for one- and two-way Hot Lines on

a per station basis. When the handset is lifted, or when a preprogrammed key

is activated, the system-speed calls a preprogrammed DN. Hot Lines access

a set of terminal numbers programmed by direct entry using or by list

entry such as by System Speed Call (SSC) using There is no difference

in operation for the Hot Line user.

Once a Hot Line call enters the ringing state, it is the same as any normal call.

Enhanced Hot Line (EHOT) allows a distinction between telephone

Hot Lines and manual Hot Lines without dial capabilities. For example,

telephones with EHOT enabled and dial facilities support Dial Access

features such as Call Transfer or Conference calling.

A Hot Line key may be defined with a Directory Number (DN) of its own,

allowing other calls to terminate on that HOT key. For SL-1 and digital

telephones, the HOT key must be assigned to a DN during Service Change to

create a two-way Hot Line. telephones are always two-way Hot

Lines, as they always have a DN assigned.

1 features and services

85-4 Hot Line

Operating parameters

Incoming calls to Hot Line telephones or keys can be restricted to calls

originating from other Hot Line telephones or keys, Voice Call keys, and

Group Call keys. This restriction is turned on or off on a percustomer basis.

Telephones without a keypad or rotary dial cannot be assigned the Enhanced

Hot Line Allowed (EHTA) Class of Service (CLS).

A maximum of 31 digits can be stored against a Hot Line telephone or key.

Only one Hot Line list is allowed per customer.

HOT cannot access a list created by the list-entry method for Enhanced Hot

Line (EHOT).

A specific Hot Line key

an SL-1 or digital telephone can have access to

only one entry in the Hot Line List, but more than one telephone may have

access to the same entry.

telephones with Manual Line (MNL) CLS cannot be defined as

Enhanced Hot Line Allowed (EHTA); Enhanced Hot Line Denied (EHTD) is

the default. Users of these telephones must continue to use the HOT feature.

If a key is assigned as an EHOT Directory Number (DN), then all

appearances of that DN must also be EHOT keys.

Feature interactions

ACD

A Hot Line DN key can be assigned to an ACD telephone.

Prime DN

If the Hot Line key is assigned to key 0 on an SL-1 or Meridian digital

telephone, it acts as the prime DN. When the user goes off-hook without

selecting a DN key, the Hot Line is activated and the call is placed

without further user action.

Automatic Line Selection

Since the Hot Line key acts as a Single Call Ring (SCR) key, incoming

ringing line preference can be applied. Outgoing line preference

automatically selects a line other than the current Hot Line, so that a Hot

Line call is not accidentally activated.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Hot Line

85-5

Attendant Administration

Use of an attendant console to change the data base for EHOT is not

supported.

Automatic Answerback

The Automatic Answerback feature is fully compatible with a two-way

Hot Line key assigned as the Prime DN.

Call Forward Busy/No Answer and Hunting

Any Hot Line telephone may be assigned Call Forward Busy/No Answer

and Hunting (excluding Short Hunt) CLS, but it applies only to the

two-way Hot Line capability.

Call Park

The Hot Line telephones with EHTA and XFA CLS are

allowed to park calls using the established Call Park procedures. Once a

call is parked on a Hot Line telephone and the telephone is

placed on hook, it cannot be unparked. Parked calls will recall to the

parking telephone after the Call Park timeout. Two-way SL-1 Hot Line

stations that are equipped with a Park key/lamp pair are allowed to park

calls in the normal fashion. As with telephones, a call parked

from a Hot Line key cannot be picked up using the same key.

Call Pickup

Telephones with two-way Hot Line keys, and Hot Line

telephones, may be assigned to pickup groups. Incoming Hot Line calls

may be picked up by group members. To prevent any one from picking

up a Hot Line call, do one of the following:

.Do not put a Hot Line user into a Call Pickup group

.Assign the Hot Line restricted option (OPT HTR) in LD15

Dial Intercom

The Hot Line telephones cannot be members of Dial Intercom

Groups (DIG

Controlled Class of Service (CCOS)

When a Hot Line DN is on a telephone that has CCOS activated, Hot

Line calls ignore the imposed CLS, if the System Speed Call (SSC)

package is present and the Hot Line list is given an adequate Network

Class of Service (NCOS) for the override.

Xl 1 features and services

85-6 Hot Line

Digit Display

A Display key on a telephone with a Hot Line appearance will display

the Hot Line target DN data stored for that key.

HOT

EHOT and HOT are mutually exclusive (a telephone cannot have both

MNL and EHTA CLS).

Group Call

Hot Lines may be members of a Group Call. They cannot, however, have

a Group Call key.

Make Set Busy

Make Set Busy is overridden by the Hot Line feature. If an SL-1

telephone is in Make Set Busy mode, incoming Hot Line calls still

terminate (ring) on the telephone.

Override

A Hot Line call can be entered using the Override feature.

Permanent Hold

telephones with EHTA cannot have Permanent Hold.

Private Line

A Hot Line key cannot be a Private Line, as this would defeat the benefits

of Private Line service.

Room Status (RMS)

The Room Status feature is incompatible with any telephone for which

going off hook activates Hot Line.

Internal CDR

Hot Line stations may be assigned the appropriate CLS that allows CDR

records to be printed for calls originating on that telephone.

System Speed Call (SSC)

When the SSC package is equipped, Hot Line lists have the

characteristics and limitations of SSC lists. If the package is not

equipped, Hot Line lists function like standard Speed Call lists.

Voice Call

The terminating DN of a Voice Call arrangement may be the incoming

DN of a two-way Hot Line.

Note:

When engineering call modification paths (such as Hunting and

Call Forward No Answer), the Hot Line Restriction option will cancel

the normal call modification operation for internal non-Hot Line calls.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Hot Line

85-7

Feature packaging

Enhanced Hot Line (EHOT), package 70, requires:

Network Class of Service (NCOS), package 32

System Speed Call (SSC), package 34

Feature implementation

the number of Speed Call lists, including Hot Line lists.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

CFN Configuration record

MSCL O-81 91 Maximum number of Speed Call lists

-Add or change Enhanced Hot Line for a customer.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

CDB Customer Data Block

CUST o-99

Customer number

OPT HTU, HTR Hot Line unrestricted or restricted

This program determines whether the call is going to a Hot Line DN or to any available DN. HTR

restricts Hot Line calls to Hot Line but HTU does not.

Hot Line Speed Call list memory size and disk records release 17).

REQ

TYPE

NOLS

DNSZ

COMP

l-8191

6-31

Compute disk and memory

Speed Call lists

Number of lists to be added

Maximum length of DN allowed for Speed Call list

SIZE 1-1000 Maximum number of DN entries in Speed Call list

Note: Use this prompt sequence to determine if there are enough memory and disk records for new Speed

Call lists. Compare the output with the MEM AVAIL and DISK AVAIL values output before the REQ prompt.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

85-8 Hot Line

or change a Hot Line Speed Call list.

NEW,

CHG,

OUT

Add, change, or remove a Speed Call list

TYPE HTL Hot Line List

o-99

Customer number

LNSO O-81 90 Hot Line List number (only one Hot Line List per customer)

NCOS

o-99

NCOS to be assigned to calls accessing the list

DNSZ xx

Maximum number of digits in a list entry (4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, or 31)

SIZE

l-1000

Maximum number of entries in the Speed Call list

WRT

YES, NO

Data is (or is not) correct and list may (or may not be) be updated

STOR

xxx xxx list entry number (O-9, O-99, or O-999)

= digits to be stored against the entry (must be equal to or less

than DNSZ)

WRT

YES, NO

Data is (or is not) correct and list may (or may not be) be updated

Note: The WRT prompt follows SIZE and STOR prompts asking for confirmation of the data just entered.

data is correct, or A response of NO to WRT after SIZE returns the REQ prompt. A

response of NO to WRT after STOR causes the data just entered to be ignored and a restart message

(SCH3213)

to be generated.

A response of aborts the program. The last STOR value is lost but all other values to which WRT was

Yes are saved.

In 1 release 17 and later software, the following information is output with the WRT prompt:

ADDS: MEM: DISK:

(xxxxx is the amount of protected memory; is the number of disk records required for the new speed

call list. Check the MEM AVAIL and DISK REC AVAIL values output before the REQ prompt)

features and services 553-3001-305

Hot Line

Add Enhanced Hot for telephones.

REQ

TYPE

FTR

CHG

500

lscu

DTN, DIP

EHTA

LNA, LDN)

XFA, XFD

CWA, CWD

XRA, XRD

HOT D nn

HOT L O-999

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

or dial pulse service (manual service is not

allowed)

Enhanced Hot Line allowed

Last Number Redial allowed or denied (optional)

Call Transfer allowed or denied (optional)

Call Waiting allowed or denied (optional)

Ring Again allowed or denied (optional)

Direct Hot Line DN

nn = number of digits (l-31) for target DN

Hot Line List entry number defined in 8

features and services

85-10 Hot Line

-Allow or deny Enhanced Hot Line for SL-1 and digital telephones.

REQ CHG

TYPE

aaaa

KEY nn HOT D cc

nn HOT L

aaa

nn HOT D cc

xxxx

Change

Telephone type

aaaa

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

One-way Hot Line key

One-way Hot Line List key

Two-way Hot Line key

nn HOT L aaa Two-way Hot Line List key

nn CH D cc Combined No Hold Conference and Direct Hot Line

feature (Xi release 14 and later software)

nn CH L aaa Combined No Hold Conference and Hot Line List feature

(Xl 1 release 14 and later software)

Legend:nn = key number

cc number of digits for target DN (1-31)

target DN (s 31 digits)

aaa

Hot Line List entry defined in

DN for Hot Line key

Feature operation

To make an EHOT call on a telephone,

Lift the handset. The Hot Line number is automatically dialed.

To transfer or conference an EHOT call on type telephones,

Flash the switchhook (or press

Link)

and dial the third-party extension.

To make an EHOT call on a SL-1 or digital telephone,

Press

Hotline.

To answer an incoming Hot Line call on a SL-1 or digital telephone,

Press the flashing

Hotline

key.

To end an Enhanced Hot Line call,

Hang up or press

RLS.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Hunting

Hunting allows calls encountering a busy Directory Number to route

automatically to another DN. Hunting continues along a predefined path,

known as the hunt chain, until reaching an idle DN, the end of the hunt chain,

or the maximum number of hunt steps. Hunting is specified on a DN basis.

in the hunt chain can be consecutive or nonconsecutive numbers.

The four types of hunt chains provided by the Meridian 1 are:

Circular hunting

Linear hunting

Secretarial hunting

Short hunting

The following pages describe and illustrate each of these ways to hunt.

In addition, Data Port Hunting is described on page and Trunk

Hunting is described on page 1.5.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

86-2

Hunting

Circular Hunting

Circular Hunting begins at the dialed DN and travels through every DN in the

hunt group. The chain can begin at any point in the circle. The call goes

around the circle until answered, or until returned to the initial DN. If the

in the chain arc busy, the caller hears busy tone. Figure shows an

example

circular hunting.

Figure 86-1

Circular Hunting example

HUNT

HUN

Final step

Return to

Dialed DN

Caller hears busy if

3001 is still busy

Incoming call

Dialed DN 3001

Fourth step

3005

HUNT 3001

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Hunting

86-3

Linear Hunting

Linear Hunting begins at the dialed DN. The call travels in one direction only

when hunting along a linear chain. If a call comes into the second DN of a

four-DN chain, it hunts to the third and fourth only. If all the are

busy, the caller hears busy tone. Figure 86-2 shows an example of Linear

Hunting.

Figure 86-2

Linear Hunting example

DN 3001

DN 3002 DN 3003 DN 3004

HUNT 3002

HUNT

3003 HUNT 3004 HUNT

Incoming call Caller hears busy

Dialed DN 3002 if 3004 is busy

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

86-4

Hunting

Secretarial Hunting

Secretarial Hunting sends calls to a single Hunt DN, typically a secretary or

Voice Mail. When a call comes in to a busy DN, it travels to the central

location. Figure 86-3 shows an example of Secretarial Hunting.

Figure 86-3

Secretariai Hunting example

3002

3003

HUNT 3100

3004

HUNT 3100

Incoming call

Dialed DN 3004

DN 3100

DN 3001

HUNT 3100

Incoming call

Dialed DN 3001

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Hunting 86-5

Short Hunting

Short Hunting takes place along the key strip of any SL-1 or Meridian digital

telephone. The hunt chain begins on a DN on the key strip. The call hunts up

the keys until it reaches a feature key, an unassigned key, or the Last Hunt

Key (LHK, defined in LD 11). If the call cannot reach an available DN, the

caller hears busy. When a call hunts to a Multiple Appearance DN, all

appearances with ringing allowed.

For a TN with Hunting control enabled, Short Hunt takes precedence over

normal Hunting (Circular, Linar, or Secretarial). If the Hunting search selects

a TN for a digital telephone, Short Hunt redirects the call before attempting

to use the Hunt TN. Thus the hunt chain might become Hunt DN A, Hunt DN

B, Short Hunt Sequence C, Short Hunt Sequence D, Hunt DN E.

Figure 86-4 shows an example of Short Hunting.

Operating parameters

The maximum number of hunt steps varies according to the system, as

follows:

18 hunt steps are allowed with M, MS, LE, N, ST, and 21 systems.

30 hunt steps are allowed with VLE, XL, XN, NT, XT, and

81 systems.

Xl 1 features and services

telemanuals.com

86-6 Hunting

Figure 86-4

Short Hunting example

SCR 3005

SCR 3003

SCR 3002

CLS HTA

SCR 3001

HUNT 000

LHK 3

CLS HTA

HUNT 000

LHK

SCR 4005

SCR 4003

TRN

SCR 4002

SCR 4001

incoming call

Dialed DN 3001

Incoming call

Dialed DN 4001

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Hunting 86-7

Feature interactions

Call Forward All Calls

Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Hunting.

Call Forward Busy

Hunting takes precedence over Call Forward Busy for Direct Inward

Dialing (DID) calls. When the station receiving a DID call has both Call

Forward Busy and Hunting Allowed (HTA) Class of Service, the call is

routed along the hunt chain. If all stations in the hunt chain are busy, the

call is forwarded to the attendant.

Call Waiting or Station-to-Station Call Waiting

Hunting takes precedence over Call Waiting. If all steps in the hunt chain

are busy, Call Waiting is activated.

Multiple-Appearance Directory Numbers

With Xl 1 release 17 and earlier software, call redirection parameters are

derived from the Terminal Number data block (TNB, in LD 20) of the

first TN in the DN block for that DN (DNB, in LD 22) with hunting

control enabled. Hunting control is enabled by Hunting Allowed (HTA)

Class of Service (CLS) for telephones. For SL-1 and Meridian

digital telephones, the DN key must also be less than or equal to the Last

Hunt Key (LHK, in LD 11).

A printout of the DN block (using 20 and 22) for digital telephones

shows an “H” beside the TN that has Hunting enabled. For

telephones, a printout of the TN blocks indicates if the CLS HTA is set

for Hunting control. If no TN for that DN has Hunting control enabled,

no Hunting is attempted.

The selected TN gives the Hunting parameters and determines the

current ordering of the in the TN list of the DN block at the time the

DN block is accessed. The Hunting pattern can be different if the TN

ordering is changed. The DN block for each busy DN is checked each

time Hunting is attempted for call redirection.

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

86-8 Hunting

When a TN is found with Hunting control enabled, Short Hunting takes

precedence over normal Hunting (that is, Linear, Circular, and

Secretarial, which use the Hunt DN). If the TN selected by the Hunting

search is a digital telephone, the call will be redirected by Short Hunting,

if possible, before attempting to use the Hunt DN. Thus a Hunt Chain can

go from Hunt DN A to Hunt DN B to Short Hunt sequence C to Short

Hunt sequence D to Hunt DN E.

When a telephone is service changed, the Terminal Number (TN) is

moved to the beginning of the DN list regardless of the TN’s numerical

value. This telephone remains at the beginning of the list until another

telephone is service changed.

With X11 release 18 and later software, Hunting can be controlled by the

MADN Redirection Prime (MARP) Terminal Number (TN). If the MARP

system option is disabled, Hunting proceeds as if MARP did not exist.

Note: If all the telephones in the Multiple-Appearance Directory

Number (MADN) group are SL-1 and/or Meridian digital telephones,

ringing telephones are placed at the beginning of the DN list, and

nonringing telephones are placed at the end.

If a Multiple-Appearance Directory Number (MADN) appears in a group

with several telephone types, the telephone type affects the position of

the TN in the list. The telephones are listed at the beginning,

and SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones are listed in numerical TN

order at the end of the list. A service change to a telephone

moves its TN to the beginning of the list. A service change to an SL-1 or

Meridian digital telephone moves it to the end of the list. Call redirection

follows the TN order from beginning to end.

The MARP TN is always checked to determine if and how the call is to

be redirected by Hunting, regardless of where the MARP TN resides in

the TN list of the DN block. No searching of the TN list of the DN block

is needed. Hunting will follow the Hunt Chain based on the originally

dialed DN. The actual functioning and requirements for Hunting are not

changed by the MARP feature. The basic change introduced by the

MARP feature is to always have a designated TN, the MARP TN, as the

TN supplying the call redirection parameters.

If the MARP TN does not have Hunting control enabled, no Hunting is

attempted. Other features for redirecting calls to busy may be

attempted based on the MARP TN.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Add or change Hunting for telephones.

ChangeREQ

TYPE

HUNT

CHG

500

xxx...x

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Hunt DN

removes the DN from the hunt chain

HTA, HTD Allow or deny hunting (default is HTD)

Hunting 86-9

A Short Hunting sequence begins when the MARP TN of a busy DN can

perform Short Hunting. When a Short Hunt begins, it completes on that

telephone before going to the Hunt DN. The precedence of Short Hunting

over normal Hunting is maintained. Once a Short Hunting sequence is

started on a digital TN, all the in the Short Hunt sequence on that TN

are attempted before redirecting the call to the TN’s Hunt DN. Thus a Hunt

Chain connects Short Hunting sequences through Hunt only.

Feature packaging

Hunting is included in basic 1 system software.

Feature implementation

Add or change Hunting for SL-1 and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

HUNT

LHK

CHG

aaaa

lscu

xxx...x

000

HTA, HTD

Change

Telephone type

aaaa = , 2006,

2317, 2616, 3000

Terminal Number

Hunt DN

000 allows short hunt only

removes the DN from the hunting chain

Allow Short Hunting

Last Hunt Key (LHK) number (default is 0)

LHK 0 deactivates Short Hunt

Allow or deny hunting (default is HTD)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

86-10

Hunting

Data Port Hunting

This feature was known as ADM Trunk Hunting (ATH) with 1 release 5,

and ADM Trunk Hunting Enhancement with 1 release 12. Trunk

Hunting (TH) is supported on release 76 or 17 for ST, NT, RT, and XT

systems only. Data Port Hunting is available with 1 release 18 and later for

all supported systems.

Data Port Hunting improves the Hunting operation for data ports and modem

pooling, and improves Ring Again operation for modem pooling.

Up to 255 data ports can be configured as trunks in data port trunk routes. In

addition, the route may be programmed to step to another data port route if all

members in the route are busy.

A data port serves as the interface between the Meridian 1 and a computer or

other data communication device. A data port can be one of the following

devices:

Stand alone Add-on Data Module (ADM) in auto-answer mode (no

modem)

Any modem that can recognize ringing and simulate off hook or on hook

status

stand alone ADM in auto-answer mode, connected to a modem

Data Access Card (DAC)

Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA)

The following types of trunk routes are supported for data port hunting:

ADM Trunk Routes: Add-on Data Module (ADM) data ports that

interface through Data Line Cards.

Modem Trunk Routes: Modem data ports which interface through

Line Cards.

RS-232 (R232): RS-232 data ports that interface through Data Access

Cards

RS-422 (R422): RS-422 data ports that interface through Data Access

Cards

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Hunting

86-11

MCA: Meridian Communications Adapter (MCA) data ports which

interface through Integrated Services Data Line Cards or Data

Line Cards

Data ports can act only as terminating parties. The user dials the access code

of the trunk route to access the data ports.

Feature operation

To access a Data Unit (DU), the user dials the Access Code of the

route data block. If a DU is available, a connection is made. If a DU is

unavailable, the user receives this message on the terminal screen: ALL

PORTS ARE BUSY. ACTIVATE RING AGAIN? Select Ring Again and

wait until a DU port becomes available.

When a user dials a data port, the request is placed in the Ring Again queue

until a port becomes idle. When an idle port is located, the calling party is

notified and the port is reserved for 8 seconds.

Verification (DVS)

Any applicable set with Verification Allowed (ADV) Class of

Service may place a call to a specific Add-on Data Module (ADM) in a route

by going off hook, receiving dial tone, and dialing

SPRE + 70 + + mmm

Where:

SPRE = special prefix

70 = special access code for the Data port Verification (DVS)

feature

= Access Code for the ADM trunk group

mmm = three-digit number that is to be seized within

the

trunk

The selected ADM trunk is seized if it is in not busy, maintenance busy, or

disabled state. Once the call is established, it is treated as a normal ADM

trunk call. If the selected trunk is in busy, maintenance busy, or disabled state,

the call originator receives an overflow tone. No tone is returned when

keyboard dialing is used.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

86-12

Hunting

Operating parameters

All data port trunks within a route must be of a single type. ADM and

MDM data ports cannot be mixed in the same data port trunk route.

Only an attendant can extend incoming calls from stations or trunks (CO,

FX, WATS, tie, Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Common Controlled

Switching Arrangement (CCSA)) to data port trunk routes. Calls cannot

be extended, transferred, or from a station to a data port

group.

In Night Service mode, any station can transfer incoming calls to data

port routes.

Trunk access restrictions (TARG, TGAR) should be applied to data port

trunk routes to prevent stations with collocated from directly

accessing data ports with modems, and vice versa.

Class of Service restrictions do not apply to data port trunks.

Ring Again, Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection

and trunk access restrictions (TARG, TGAR) are the only features that

may be applied on calls to data port routes.

Feature interactions

Conference

The Conference feature is not supported with data ports.

Ring Again

When a user activates Ring Again against the data port extension Access

Code (ACOI), the Meridian 1 stores the request until a member in the

data port route becomes idle. When an idle member is found, the calling

party is notified and the member is reserved for 8 seconds. If the calling

party does not respond to the Ring Again notification after 8 seconds, the

reservation is dropped.

Feature packaging

Data Port Hunting is included in basic 1 system software.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Feature implementation

Hunting

86-13

or change a data port trunk route. (Part 1 of 2)

REQ

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

TKTP

NEW, CHG

RDB

o-99

o-51 1

ADM, MDM, R232,

R422, MMPM

New or change

Route Data Block

Customer number

Trunk route number

Trunk route type

STEP o-51 1

TARG o-31

TOV o-3

Alternate trunk route number

Trunk Access Restriction Groups

Data port time out

No timeout

1 = 15 minutes

2 = 30 minutes

3 60 minutes

PSEL

OPE

TLNK, DMDM

YES, NO

PSDS

TRAN

YES, NO

SYN, ASYN

T-Link or DM-DM protocol (See Note 2)

Change or don’t change data port operating

parameters (See Note 2)

Allow or don’t allow PSDS protocol (See Note 2)

Port transmission type; if PSDS = YES, then TRAN

must be SYN (See Note 2)

PAR SPAC, EVEN, ODD,

MARK

Parity type

SPAC = space parity

EVEN = even parity

ODD = odd parity

MARK = mark parity

DTR

ON, OFF Forced DTR (If ON) or dynamic DTR (if OFF)

(See

Notes 1 and 2)

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

86-14

Hunting

or change a data port trunk route. (Part 2 of 2)

DCD’

DEM’

PBDO’

HALF, (FULL)

OFF, (ON)

YES, (NO)

ON, (OFF)

YES, (NO)

DTE, (DCE)

ON, (OFF)

Half duplex/full duplex

OFF = forced CD

(ON) = dynamic CD

Modem, (Network): when TRAN = SYN

Interworking

ON = Internal, (OFF) = External Clock:

when TRAN = SYN

V.25 bis offered only when TRAN = SYN

High Level Data Link Control offered only when V25 =

YES

Data Equipment Mode

DCE or DTE mode

Port Busy upon DTR Off

presented when DCE, Dynamic DTR

ON = enabled

(OFF) = disabled

I: Prompt offered to R232

Note 2: Prompt offered to MCU = MMPM)

LD14 Add or change a data port trunk.

REQ

TYPE

NEW, CHG

ADM, MDM, R232,

R422, MMPM

lscu

New or change

Trunk type

Loop Shelf Card Unit

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Hunting

86-15

Trunk Hunting

Trunk Hunting provides either Linear Hunting or Round Robin Trunk

Hunting for outgoing trunks in a route.

When Linear Hunting is implemented, the system searches for an available

trunk in descending order. A station originating an outgoing call is connected

to the last available trunk (highest available trunk route member number) of

the trunk route accessed. The last trunk route member is always the first

choice for outgoing calls and the first trunk route member is always the last

choice.

Round Robin Trunk Hunting, Xl 1 release 3 and later software

Outgoing calls evenly distributed among the members of a trunk route. When

a station originates an outgoing call, the system searches for an available

trunk route member in descending order, starting with the next lower member

number from the last trunk seized for an outgoing call on the trunk route. If a

trunk with a lower member number is not available, the system searches for

a trunk starting with the highest member number of the route.

Note for multiple group machines using Round Robin Trunk Hunting:

To minimize system resource usage, the Meridian 1 will attempt to hunt to an

available trunk within the same group as the originating TN. For example, if

a call is placed from a telephone whose TN is in group 1, the system will first

attempt to locate an available trunk within group 1. If there are no available

trunks in group 1, the system selects an available trunk from another group.

Each time hunting occurs, the round robin index value, which points to the

next route member to be examined, is updated. Because the proximity of a

trunk loop to the originating TN loop takes precedence over the order of the

trunk route members, the system may be forced to hunt through many route

members to locate an available trunk within a given group. This can cause the

round robin index to change dramatically, yielding inconsistent trunk usage

patterns.

If uniform trunk usage is a prime concern, configure route members with

alternating groups. For example, if a given route contains trunk members

from different groups, alternate the groups so that route member 1 is a trunk

member from group 1, route member 2 is a trunk member from group 2, and

on. This configuration will produce more uniform trunk usage than would

occur if trunks of the same group were bunched together within a route.

features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

86-16 Hunting

Operating parameters

The central office (CO) governs incoming trunk hunting. The Meridian 1 has

no control over the order of incoming trunks.

Feature interactions

There are no feature interactions.

Feature packaging

Trunk Hunting is included in basic X11 system software.

Feature implementation

LD16

Implement Linear or Round Robin Trunk Hunting for a trunk route.

REQ NEW, CHG

TYPE

RDB

CUST

o-99

ROUT o-51

SRCH RRB, LIN

New or change

Route data block

Customer number

Trunk route number

Round Robin or Linear Hunting

Feature operation

There is no specific procedure for operating this feature.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

Release:

87-l

In-Band

The In-Band feature provides the ability to display a ten-digit

calling party number during setup (signaling) over a non-Integrated Services

Digital Network (ISDN) trunk. The Automatic Number Identification

digits are displayed when they auto-terminate to an Automatic Call

Distribution (ACD) Directory Number (DN) agent telephone with digit

display. The feature supports ten digits for or three and four digits

for Dialed Number Identification (DNIS). sends these digits to three

places: the CDR records, the host, and the agent telephone.

When a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or tie trunk originates a call, the

software determines whether the call is on an In-Band AN1 trunk

group. If it is, the ten Automatic Member Identification digits are

collected, and the call auto-terminates at the Automatic Call Distribution

(ACD) Directory Number (DN) specified for that trunk, provided that the

ACD telephone has digit display and Standard Delayed Display (DDS) Class

of Service. The call, sent by Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) signaling

prior to call termination, is not received until all the digits are received by the

software.

When the call is presented to the ACD DN, a message is simultaneously

sent across the Application Module Link (AML) carrying the Automatic

Number Identification digits. The message contains the AN1 number,

the ACD DN, and the ACD Agent ID. For a complete description of

see

Meridian Link general guide

(553-2901-I 10).

If an auto-terminating ACD DN is not configured for the trunk, the call

intercepts to the attendant, and the AN1 number is displayed on the attendant

console. If the call is extended to an ACD DN, the IAN1 digits are displayed

after it is extended.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

87-2 In-Band

Operating parameters

operates on Direct Inward Dialing (DID), and tie trunks only.

cannot be configured on the same trunk with Electronic Switched

Network (ESN), Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN), or Dialed

Number Identification Service (DNIS).

The auto-terminating Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Directory

(DN) is configured in LD14. Any ACD Agent specified to

answer calls also receives standard ACD calls. When a standard

ACD call is received on an non-ISDN or non-AN1 trunk, no AN1

numbers are displayed.

If an call terminates on a non-ACD DN, no digits appear on

the telephone display. Likewise, no messages are sent across the

Application Module Link (AML).

Auxiliary Processor Link (APL) is not supported.

Should the system initialize while an agent is active on an call,

there will be no impact on the call. However, if any call modification

(such as, Call Transfer or Conference) takes place, the number is

lost.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

In-Band

87-3

CDR records

Because IAN1 and Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) cannot be

configured on the same trunk group, the IAN1 report is able to appear in place

of the Calling Line Identification (CLID)

records. The AN1 number is shown

on the second line of the CDR report in the following format:

N 002 00 TO0004 01

Where:

= record type

002 = record sequence number

00 = customer number

TO0004

= trunk route and member number

= ACD Agent Position ID

= date (month/day)

= time (hour:minute)

= duration

= AN1 number (ten digits followed by

For a complete description of CDR output,

description and formats

(553-2631-100).

Feature interactions

The IAN1 feature interacts heavily with ACD. For a complete description of

the ACD features involved,

see Automatic Call Distribution basic features

description (553-2671-100).

feature interactions

ACD Answer/Call Supervisor/Emergency

If the agent presses the Supervisor (ASP) key or the Emergency (EMR)

key, the digit display is cleared when the supervisor answers the call. The

display remains clear while the supervisor is active on the call. If the

supervisor releases first, the AN1 number reappears on the agent’s

telephone display.

Xl 1 features and services

87-4 In-Band

ACD Interflow

If an IAN1 call inter-flows to another predesignated local ACD DN, the

number is displayed on the ovefflow agent’s digit display. The

source ACD DN is displayed following the number.

ACD Night Call Forward

If an call is forwarded to an ACD DN, the number is displayed

on the ACD Agent telephone.

ACD Overflow by Count

If an call overflows to another ACD DN, the number is

displayed on the overflow agent’s digit display. The source ACD DN is

displayed following the number.

activity code

If the Activity Code (ACNT) key is activated during an call, the

display is cleared. Once the activity code has been entered and the ACNT

key pressed again, the AN1 number reappears on the agent’s display.

Attendant Recall

If an ACD Agent is active on an call and activates the Attendant

Recall (ARC) key to call the attendant, the agent’s display shows the

attendant number when the attendant answers the call. The number

reappears when the attendant releases.

Call Consultation

If the agent is active on an call and presses the TRN key for call

consultation, the display is cleared. When the agent restores the

call, the number reappears.

Call Park

If an agent parks an call and it times out and recalls the agent, the

number is not displayed.

Call Transfer

If an agent transfers an call to another ACD DN, the number

is displayed on the terminating set’s display.

Conference

If an agent activates the Conference feature while active on an call,

the display is cleared. The display remains clear while the Conference

call is active. If the party releases first, the number

appears on the agent’s display.

features and services 553-3001-305

Display (DSP) key

In-Band 87-5

If the agent is active on an IAN1 call and presses the DSP key to display

another key feature, the number does not reappear when the DSP

function is complete.

Hold

If an ACD Agent places an IAN1 call on hold, the AN1 number reappears

when the call is restored.

NACD

If an IAN1 call diverts to a target node as a result of Network ACD

(NACD), the AN1 number appears at the target node.

time and date

If the agent presses the Time and Date (TAD) key while on an IAN1 call,

the time and date remains displayed throughout the call. To display the

AN1 number again, place the call on hold and retrieve it. The AN1

number reappears.

time overflow

If an ACD Agent receives an IAN1 call due to time overflow, the AN1

number is displayed. The source ACD DN follows the AN1 number on

the display.

Virtual Agents

Virtual Agents are not supported for IAN1 calls.

Hardware requirements

A Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) receiver is required to interpret the

DTMF tones with an IAN1 number.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

87-6 In-Band

Feature packaging

In-Band is not a separately-packaged feature. To implement

requires the following packages:

Basic ACD (BACD), package 40

ISDN Signaling (ISDN), package 145

Primary Rate Access (PRA), package 146

Inter-Exchange Carrier (IEC), package 149

Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS), package 98

If Application Module Link (AML) is required, Command Status Link

(CSL), package 77, and Integrated Messaging System (IMS), package 35,

must be included.

For CDR records, Call Detail Recording (CDR), package 4, is required.

Feature implementation

LD16

Identify the route as an In-Band Automatic Number Identification route.

REQ

TYPE

AUTO

NEW, CHG

DID, TIE

NO, YES

YES, NO

Add or change an route

Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or tie route

Enable or disable (cannot be configured on same

route as

Specify or don’t specify as an auto-terminating route

Enable or disable the route

LD23 Send the messages across the Auxiliary Processor Link (APL).

REQ

TYPE

NEW, CHG

ACD

Yes, (No)

Add or modify an route

calls terminate at an auto-terminating ACD DN

Enable messaging across the AP link (see note).

Note: The prompt replaces the prompt in Xl 1 release 15 and later software.

Feature operation

There is no specific procedure for operating this feature.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

88-1

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

The Incoming DID Digit Conversion (IDC) feature allows digits received

from the central office (CO) to be converted to unrelated extension numbers

within the system. This conversion is accomplished using a translation table

dedicated to a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) route. The digit conversion table

is set up to map the received (external) DID digits into the local (internal)

Directory Number (DN).

IDC can be selectively applied to DID routes. A unique conversion table is

available for each route.

Full Digit Conversion

All the digits received are converted to another string of digits as specified in

the conversion table.

Note:

Different strings of digits can be converted to the same internal

Directory Number (DN).

Partial Digit Conversion

Not all of the digits received from the central office (CO) are converted. The

remaining digits may remain unchanged, and the whole string of digits is

forwarded to the Directory Number (DN) translator.

It is possible to convert a partial string to another partial string of

digits of different length (for instance, to or to The range

of to convert can include a mix of DN lengths.

No Digit Conversion

If the digits received are not defined in the conversion table, they are assumed

to represent an internal Directory Number (DN). They are forwarded to the

DN translator without any change.

1 features

and

services 553-3001-305

88-2 Incoming DID Digit Conversion

Direct Call Termination

Incoming calls from non-Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks are not affected

by Incoming DID Digit Conversion (IDC). If a call from a trunk on a route

with IDC is received, the digits are translated into a pass (continue), or a

converted telephone of local digits. These digits replace the dialed digits.

Additional dialed digits are then forwarded directly for call processing. The

IDC processor has no further influence on the call. Once the internal digit

processor receives the digits, it alone determines the disposition of the call. It

may be able to terminate the call, or it may be required to intercept the call

due to invalid digits, a busy station, or Call Forward.

When DEXT = NO (LD16) the SL-1 or digital telephone display looks like

this:

Where:

AAAA = route access code

MMM = Route Member Number

The display may show the name of the route if

Call Party Name Display (CPND) is allowed.

When DEXT = YES (LD16) the SL-1 or digital telephone display looks like

this:

Pxxxx

Where:

AAAA = route access code

MMM = Route Member Number

P = Special character (identifying the received digits)

xxxx = Originally dialed digits

features and services 553-3001-305

Incoming DID Digit Conversion

88-3

When DEXT = NO (LD16) the attendant console display looks like this:

iiii xxxx

Where:

AAAA = route access code

MMM = Route Member Number

iiii = Internal DN (called party)

xxxx = route name if Call Party Name Display (CPND) is allowed

When DEXT = YES (LD16) the attendant console display looks like this:

iiii

Where:

AAAA = route access code

MMM = Route Member Number

= Special character (identifying the received digits)

xxxx = originally dialed digits

iiii = Internal DN (called party)

Incoming Call Redirection

If an incoming call is redirected to a Centralized Attendant Services (CAS) or

local attendant, the local DN is used to extend the call. If an incoming call

reaches a Night DN, Hunt DN, Call Forward DN, or similar destination, then

both the internal DN and the directory of local are used to redirect the

call.

Operating parameters

IDC applies to Direct Inward Dialing (DID) routes only. Auto-terminate

trunks to Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS) do not support IDC.

All digits received from an incoming call translate to a maximum of four

digits. Acceptable received digits for an incoming call are 0 through 9.

New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) is required to operate IDC. Since

NFCR trees and IDC tables share the same structure, the total combined

number of NFCR trees and IDC tables cannot exceed 255 per customer.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

88-4 Incoming DID Digit Conversion

Feature interactions

There are no feature interactions.

Feature packaging

Incoming DID Digit Conversion (IDC), package 113, requires New Flexible

Code Restriction (NFCR), package 49.

Feature implementation

LD15

Specify maximum number of Incoming Digit Conversion trees allowed.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

C DB Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

NFCR

YES, NO

New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) enable or disable

MAXT l-255

Maximum number of NFCR trees

YES, NO.

Enable or disable IDC

DCMX

l-255

Maximum number of IDC tables

Note: The sum of the values for MAXT and DCMX cannot exceed 255 per customer.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Incoming DID Digit Conversion 88-5

Create tables to convert incoming Direct Inward Dialing digits.

REQ NEW

TYPE

IDC

CUST

o-99

O-254

O-99990-9999

Create tables

IDC tables

Customer number

IDC tree number

DN or range of to be converted

Examples:

To convert the external DN 3440 to 510, enter

IDGT3440

3440510

To convert external in the range enter

I DGT3440 3465

3440444

3441445

3465469

Enable digit conversion for required Direct Inward Dialing trunk routes.

REQ CHG

TYPE

RDB

CUST

o-99

ROUT o-51 1

IDC

YES, NO

DCNO O-254

NDNO O-254

DEXT

YES, NO

Change

Route Data Block

Customer number

Route number

Use or don’t use digit conversion for this route

IDC tree number

IDC conversion table for Night mode

Allow or don’t allow Digit Display

1 features and services 553-3001-305

88-6 Incoming DID Digit Conversion

Feature operation

There is no specific procedure for operating this feature.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Incremental Software Management

89-1

Incremental Software Management introduces a new approach to

system management, offering more flexibility and control over system

configuration and implementation. With ISM, software ordering and pricing

is based on the total count of Terminal Numbers ACD positions

(agents and supervisors), ACD Directory Numbers (ACD and Control

and AST The customer requested configuration parameters are

communicated to Northern Telecom when a new system or upgrade order is

placed, and are then defined during software disk preparation.

The number of configurable Terminal Numbers is provided in

increments of 100. ACD positions are incremented by 5, while ACD and

AST are provided in increments of 1. If an order is received without

these parameters defined, the order will not be processed. The system

parameters used, available, and totaled are listed in a header at the beginning

of each software program. For specific system requirements and limits, refer

to the Pricing Manual.

Note

ACD parameters are preset for each system. The numbers in the

header are not necessarily real limits, and are subject to system

configuration. Contact your Northern Telecom representative for

information regarding your system limits.

Note

With Xl 1 release 17, the system are incremented along

with the ACD

features and services

89-2 Incremental Software Management

Operating parameters

Incremental Software Management (ISM) operates within the following

parameters:

To calculate the Terminal Numbers configured in the system, all

associated with SL-1, and digital telephones, ACD AST

attendant consoles (two per console), receivers, tone

detectors, and trunks are included in the total.

The total refers to Terminal Numbers configured in

and LD14. There is no differentiating between signaling, data,

or voice channels.

To calculate the number of ACD Agents configured in the system, any

telephone configured as key 0 ACD is counted for the total. This includes

ACD Agents and ACD Supervisors.

AST are not counted in the total of ACD Agents.

With release 17 and later software, AST must be defined

individually in or 1. In Xl 1 release 16 and earlier software, AST

are defined in LD23 on a per queue basis.

AST DN designation is not maintained following a software conversion. All

AST must be reconfigured after the conversion is complete.

The total ACD Agents refers to virtual and active (live) ACD Agents and

ACD Supervisors.

Each attendant console increments the TN count twice. The first TN is

designated for the primary TN, and the second TN is designated as the

secondary TN. Power units are not included in the TN count.

X11 release 18 and later software tracks Application Module Links (AML),

D-channels Logical Terminal Identifiers and Digital

Subscriber Loops

Note: and apply to Integrated Services Digital Network

(ISDN) Basic Rate Interface (BRI) only. Refer to

Basic Rate

Interface description

(553-3901-100) for more information regarding

BRI.

features and services

Incremental Software Management 89-3

System monitoring

To assist in monitoring system growth, a header appears in each affected

overlay (LD), reflecting system status. The header indicates the total,

available, and used quantities of ACD ACD positions, AST

Digital Subscriber Loops Logical Terminal Identifiers

D-channels or Application Module Links configured. The

counts are updated each time system activity adds or deletes one of the

tracked items. When the limits are exceeded, an error message appears. For a

complete list of the Service Change and error message information, see

inputloutput guide (553-3001-400).

In addition to the headers, a new response is added to Print Routine 3 (LD22)

to query the system limits.

With 1 release 17.67 and later software, when the allowed limits are

exceeded, any additional entry is blocked, and a message is shown

every time an entry is attempted. Refer to the message list in this section for

the SYS message for

each

parameter.

Note:

The ACD parameters are allowed only if the basic ACD package

is equipped (option 40).

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

89-4 Incremental Software Management

System administration

When the predefined limits are reached, an error message indicates that

further database additions are blocked. New software must be ordered to

increase system limits. In order to minimize delays in system administration,

it is critical that the configuration limits be monitored and that new disks be

ordered before the current parameters are exceeded.

When doing a system enhancement requiring new software, if insufficient

TN, ACD DN, or ACD Agent quantities are ordered, excess TN, ACD DN,

ACD Agent, and AST DN information could be lost. For example, if a system

has 150 configured, but the Incremental Software Management

order is for 100 the system will eliminate the additional 50 A SYS

message is given if this occurs.

CAUTION

System information will be lost.

With ISM in X11 release 15.55 and later software, if SYS message

or 4330 appears at sysload, sysload previous system

disks. Order ISM disks with sufficient system parameters configured.

Call your technical support department for assistance.

Feature packaging

This implementation is required for all new system installations and system

upgrades as of Xl 1 release 15.

The ACD and ACD Agent and Supervisor parameters are included only

if the basic ACD, package 40, is equipped.

To configure AST Command Status Link (CSL), package 77, and

Application Module Link (AML), package 209, must be equipped.

features and services 553-3001-305

Incremental Software Management 89-5

Feature implementation

The following programs contain new headers to indicate the total system

limits allowed, and the current system usage. New error messages are also

added to warn when the limits are reached.

telephones

digital telephones

LD12: attendant consoles

LD13: receivers and tone detectors

LD14: trunks

LD17: D-channels (DCH) and Application Module Links

LD23: ACD

LD27: Digital Subscriber Loops and Logical Terminal

Identifiers

Note

The ACD parameters are allowed only if ACD is equipped.

Note

Prior to X11 release 17, ACD groups are defined as at the

group level in LD23. As of 1 release 17, each agent can be defined

individually using LD 10 and As a consequence, customers must

reconfigure ACD manually through and 1 when

upgrading to Xl 1 release 17.

Note

3: and apply to Integrated Services Digital Network

(ISDN) Basic Rate Interface (BRI) only. Refer to

ISDN Basic Rate

Interface description

(553-3901-100) for more information.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

89-6 Incremental Software Management

The following implementation procedures show the header increments when

ACD positions, ACD or AST are added or deleted. Other

than the headers, the programs have not changed. LD22 contains a new

response to query system limits.

a 500-type telephone.

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 189162 USED: 154594 TOT: 343756

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

TNS AVAIL:

USED: 390 TOT: 400

ACD AGENTS AVAIL: 5

USED: 10 TOT: 15

AST SETS AVAIL: 10

USED: 3 TOT: 13

REQ NEW

TYPE

500

1010

Add a new telephone

Telephone type

Terminal Number

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 189139 USED: 154617 TOT: 343756

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

TNS AVAIL: 9

USED: 391 TOT: 400

ACD AGENTS AVAIL: 5

USED:

TOT:

AST SET AVAIL:

USED:

TOT:

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Incremental Software Management 89-7

Add a or Meridian digital telephone.

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 189139

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

TNS AVAIL: 9

ACD AGENTS AVAIL: 5

AST SETS AVAIL:

REQ NEW

TYPE

SL-1

1010

USED: 154617

USED: 391

USED:

USED: 3

Add a new telephone

Telephone type

Terminal Number

TOT: 343756

TOT: 400

TOT: 15

TOT: 13

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 189042 USED: 154714 TOT: 343756

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

TNS AVAIL: 8

USED: 392 TOT: 400

ACD AGENTS AVAIL: 5

USED:

TOT:

AST SETS AVAIL: 10

USED:

TOT:

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

89-8

Incremental Software Management

LD12

Add an attendant console.

MEM AVAIL: (U/P):

189042 USED: 154714 TOT: 343756

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

TNS AVAIL: 8

USED: 392 TOT: 400

REQ

TYPE

CDEN

SETN

NEW

1250

4050

4051

Add a new console

Console type

Assign this as the primary TN

Double Density card

Assign this as the secondary TN

MEM AVAIL: (U/P):

188867 USED: 154889 TOT: 343756

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

TNS AVAIL: 6

USED: 394 TOT: 400

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Incremental Software Management 89-9

a receiver.

MEM AVAIL: (U/P):

188867 USED: 154889 TOT: 343756

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

TNS AVAIL: 6

USED: 394 TOT: 400

REQ NEW

TYPE

DTR

1580100

Add a new DTR

Assign the DTR to this TN

MEM AVAIL: (U/P):

189857 USED: 154899 TOT: 343756

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

TNS AVAIL: 5

USED: 395 TOT: 4 0 0

a trunk.

MEM AVAIL: (U/P):

188857 USED: 154899 TOT: 343756

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

TNS AVAIL: 5

USED: 395 TOT: 400

REQ NEW

TYPE

TIE

8052

MEM AVAIL: (U/P):

188802

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

TNS AVAIL: 4

Add a new trunk

Add a new tie trunk

Assign the trunk to this TN

USED: 154954

USED: 396

TOT: 343756

TOT: 400

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

89-10

Incremental Software Management

a D-channel (DCH).

MEM AVAIL: (U/P):

188857

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

DCHS 7

AMLS AVAIL: 5

REQ CHG

TYPE

CFN

NEW DCH 6

MEM AVAIL: (U/P):

188857

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

DCHS AVAIL: 6

AMLS AVAIL: 5

USED: 154899 TOT: 343756

USED:

TOT:

USED:

TOT:

Add a DCH

Configuration Record

Add a primary DCH on port 6

USED: 154899 TOT: 343756

USED:

TOT:

USED:

TOT:

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

LD17 Add an Application Module Link.

Incremental Software Management

89-11

MEM AVAIL: (U/P): 188857

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

DCHS AVAIL: 7

AMLS AVAIL: 5

REQ CHG

TYPE

CFN

NEW AML 4

USED: 154899

USED: 8

USED: 4

Add a DCH

Configuration record

Add an AML on port 4

TOT: 343756

TOT: 15

TOT: 9

MEM AVAIL: (U/P):

188857 USED: 154899 TOT: 343756

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

DCHS AVAIL: 6 USED:

TOT:

AMLS AVAIL: 4

USED:

TOT:

1 features and services 553-3001-305

89-12 incremental Software Management

LD23 Add

ACD DN.

MEM

AVAIL: (U/P):

188802 USED: 154954 TOT:

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

A C D DNS AVAIL: 5 USED:

TOT:

REQ NEW

TYPE

ACD

CUST

ACDN 7700

Add a new ACD DN

Add a new ACD queue

Customer number

Assign this ACD DN

MEM

AVAIL: (U/P):

188513 USED: 155243 TOT: 343756

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

A C D DNS AVAIL: 4 USED:

TOT:

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

LD27 Add a Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL).

Incremental Software Management

89-13

MEM AVAIL: (U/P):

188802

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

AVAIL: 4

REQ NEW

TYPE

DSL

D S L I s c dsl

MEM AVAIL: (U/P):

188802

DISC RECS AVAIL: 94

DSLS AVAIL: 4

LTIDS AVAIL: 4

USED: 154954 TOT: 343756

USED:

TOT:

USED:

TOT:

Add a DSL

address

USED: 154954 TOT: 343756

USED:

TOT:

USED:

TOT:

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

89-14

Incremental Software Management

LD22 Print the system limits.

R E Q SLT Prints the limits established for the system, the used

parameters, and the quantities remaining.

Additionally, to print complete information regarding system parameters, use

the following print routine:

Parameter

New error messages

ACD

LD23

ACD positions LD81

LD20

LD21

Prompt

REQ

TYPE

REQ

FEAT

Response

LTN

PRT

CDB

PRT

LST

ACD

CAUTION

System information will be lost.

With ISM in release 15.55 and later software, if SYS message

or 4330 appears at sysload, sysload previous system

disks. Order ISM disks with sufficient system parameters configured.

Call your technical support department for assistance.

The following error messages relate to ISM administration. For a complete

list and description of all error messages, see XI

1 input/output guide

(553-3001-400).

Note: In the Service Change (SCH) messages appear only after

the FTR prompt has been answered. In the messages appear only

after the prompt has been answered.

1 features and services

Incremental Software Management

89-15

Message

Event

Action

SCH5069 The number of exceeds the limit. New disks

required

SCH5070 The number of ACD Agents (including agents and New disks

supervisors) exceeds the limit. required

SCH5071 The number of ACD and exceeds the New disks

limit. required

SCH5072 The number of AST sets exceeds the limit. New disks

required

BUG51 19 The number of configured for the system is 0. New disks

required

BUG51 20 The number of ACD Agents (including agents and New disks

supervisors) configured for the system is 0. required

BUG51 21 The number of ACD configured for the system is New disks

required

SYS4327 DO NOT DATADUMP. SYSTEM INFORMATION WILL BE LOST.

The TN limits are exceeded and cannot be

sysloaded. See note.

SYS4328 DO NOT DATADUMP. SYSTEM INFORMATION WILL BE LOST.

New disks

required

The ACD Agent (including agents and supervisors)

limits are exceeded and cannot be sysloaded.

See note.

New disks

required

SYS4329 DO NOT SYSTEM INFORMATION WILL BE LOST.

The ACD DN limits are exceeded and cannot be

sysloaded. See note.

DO NOT DATADUMP. SYSTEM INFORMATION WILL BE LOST.

New disks

required

The AST set limits are exceeded and cannot be New disks

sysloaded. See note. required

Note: Do not when this message appears, or system information will be lost.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

89-16

Incremental Software Management

Feature operation

There is no specific procedure for operating this feature.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Integrated Messaging System Link 90-3

Feature implementation

LD17

Add or change the link to a messaging system (Xl 1 release 17 and later software).

REQ

TYPE

CHG

CFN

YES, NO

NEW, CHG TTY

o-15

Change

Configuration Record

Allow changes to input/output devices

Add or change a messaging system link to the SL-1

USER

APL

20-255

AXQO 20-255

This link is an Auxiliary Processor Link (APL)

Number of call registers to be used for receipt of messages

from the messaging system (see note 2)

Number of call registers to be used for output of messages

to the messaging system (see note 2)

Note Before adding, changing, or removing a link, the device must be disabled. Refer to the

input/output guide (553-3001-400) for overlay programs and commands to disable or enable devices.

Note 2: If the number of call registers defined for the Meridian SL-1 system (prompt NCR) is within the

range 80-l 020, and AXQO cannot exceed 25% of the system call registers.

features and services 553-3001-305

90-4 integrated Messaging System Link

or change the link to a messaging system for X11 release 18 or later.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

CFN

YES, NO

NEW, CHG TTY

o-1 5

Change

Configuration Record

Allow changes to input/output devices

Add or change a messaging system link to the SL-1

CTYP

aaaa

Card type

aaaa

= DCHI, MSDL, MSPS, SDI, SDl2, SD14,

DNUM o-1 5 Device number to be printed automatically (same as

number)

USER

APL

20-255

AXQO 20-255

This link is an Auxiliary Processor Link (APL)

Number of call registers to be used for receipt of messages

from the messaging system

Number of call registers to be used for output of messages

to the messaging system

Note Before adding, changing or removing a link, the device must be disabled. Refer to the X7

for overlay programs and commands to disable or enable devices.

Note 2: If the number of call registers defined for the Meridian SL-l system (prompt NCR) is within the

range 80-l 020, and AXQO cannot exceed 25% of the system call registers.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Integrated Messaging System Link 90-5

or change the IMS feature for a customer.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

C DB Customer Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

OPT

MCI, MCX

Include or exclude

IMS

YES, NO

Allow or don’t allow changes to the IMS feature

YES, NO

IMS feature is or is not enabled

APL

o-1 5 Port number of the link to the messaging system

UST

YES, NO

User Status Update (UST) feature is or is not enabled

APL

o-1 5 Port number of the link from UST to the messaging system

UMG

YES, NO

User-to-User Messaging (UMG) feature is or is not enabled

APL

o-1 5 Port number of the link from UMG to the messaging system

Xl 1 features and services

90-6 Integrated Messaging System Link

LD23

-Add or change ACD data for Integrated Messaging System Link feature.

C H G Change

TYPE

A C D ACD Data Block

CUST

o-99

Customer number

ACDN

xxxx

ACD DN (can have up to seven digits if DN Expansion

package is equipped)

MWC

IMS

APL

UST

APL

UMG

APL

RAN

YES, NO

o-15

YES, NO

o-15

YES, NO

o-1 5

O-30, 32-xxx

UMT

o-15

ACD is or is not an IMS

Allow or doesn’t allow changes to the IMS feature

ACD DN is or is not used as an IMS DN

Port number of the link to the messaging system

User Status Update (UST) feature is or is not enabled

Port number of the link from UST to the messaging system

User-to-User Messaging (UMG) feature is or is not enabled

Port number of the link from UMG to the messaging system

Route number to the Recorded Announcement (RAN) for

UMG (default is no RAN)

Time, in seconds, of silent interval after alert tone on RAN

(default is 6 seconds)

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Integrated Messaging System Link 90-7

Add or change IMS attendant capability for each telephone.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

aaaa

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2006, 2008, 2009, 2016, 2018, 2112,

2216, 2317, 2616, 3000

CLS

LTN

lscu

IMD

i-253,

O-l 5

Terminal Number

This telephone is or is not an IMS attendant

Logical Terminal Number assigned to this attendant, port

number of the link to messaging system used by this

attendant

KEY 0 ACD yyyy Add an key

xxxx IMS Directory Number (DN)

yyyy Agent ID

Note: IMS DN and Agent ID can have up to 7 digits if DN

Expansion package is equipped

xx MIK

xx MCK

xx NRD

xx MSB

Feature operation

Add a Message Indication (Ml) key

Add a Message Cancellation (MC) key

Add a Not Ready (NR) key

Add a Make Set Busy (MSB) key

There is no specific procedure required to operate this feature.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Integrated Messaging System Link

Xl features and services

Issued: 92

12 31

Status: Standard

Release:

91-1

Integrated Services Digital Network

Integrated Services Digital Network is the new standard in digital

communications. Phase I of ISDN, which is implemented in X release

and later software, provides Primary Rate Access (PRA) to host computers,

other and central office (CO) switches. Refer to

ISDN

description and

100) for additional

information.

Operating parameters

Refer to

ISDN Primary Rate

100) for a complete description of the following TSDN features:

Backup D-channel

Basic Call Service

Calling Line Identification

Data Packet Network access

Digital Trunk Interface replacement

Electronic Switched Network interworking

Integrated Services Access

ISDN Signaling Link

Integrated Trunk Access

Network Call Party Name Display/Network Call Redirection

Network Message Services

Network Ring Again

Remote Virtual Queueing

Software Defined Network access

Software Release ID

T309 Timer

Trunk Optimization (before answer)

1 features and services

91-2 Integrated Services Digital Network

Feature interactions

Refer to

Primary Rate Interface description and administration

(553-2901-100).

Feature packaging

Integrated Network (ISDN), package 145, has no feature

package dependencies.

Feature implementation

Refer to

ISDN Primary Rate Interface description and administration

(553-2901-100).

Feature operation

There is no specific procedure required to operate this feature.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

1 Release: All

92-1

Integrated Voice and Data

The Integrated Voice and Data feature provides integrated voice and data

switching through a host Meridian

Hardware consists of the Add-on Data Module (ADM), Data Line Card

(DLC). and Modem Pool Line Card (MPLC), if modem pooling is used.

The Meridian SL- I software recognizes the ADM as an SL- 1 telephone, the

DLC as an SL-1 Line Card, and the MPLC as a 500 telephone Line Card.

Overlay programs (LD and LD 1 1) are used to enter the hardware into the

office data.

Refer to the Northern Telecom Publication

Services

series

(553-273 1- 100 through 553-273 l-300) for further details.

Operating parameters

Hunting is not allowed with the Modem Pool Line Card (MPLC) pack.

No telephone may be assigned to the MPLC pack.

Co-located SL- 1 telephones can only have three key/lamp strips, due to

physical constraints.

Feature interactions

Refer to Northern Telecom Publication

Services

series

(553-273 I -ZZZ).

Feature packaging

This capability is included in basic Xl 1 system software.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

92-2

integrated Voice and Data

Feature implementation

Add or change SL-1 telephone (of an telephone/Add-on Module (ADM) pair)

associated with a Data Line Card (DLC) data port pair.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

lscu

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number (TN): SL-1 telephones are restricted to

unit 0 or 2 when co-located with an ADM

CDEN

KLS

KEY

SD, DD

1-7

0 DN

2 TRN

9 RLS

Density of this card is single or double

Number of key/lamp strips

Key 0, Voice Frequency Directory Number (DN) (VFDN)

Key 2, Call Transfer key

Key 9, Release key

Note: Other feature keys may be associated as required, subject

to the limitations imposed by the companion ADM.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Integrated Voice and Data 92-3

-Add or change ADM (of an SL-1 pair) associated with a Data Line Card

(DLC) data port pair.

REQ

TYPE

CHG Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number (TN): loop shelf (O-i), card

unit (1, 3, 5, 7); the loop, shelf, and card must be the

same as those specified for the companion SL-1 telephone;

the unit must be the next subsequent unit to the companion

telephone (e.g., if the unit for telephone is 2, then

the unit for ADM must be 3)

CDEN

KEY

SD, DD

WTD

0 DN xxxx

Single or double density card

Warning Tone Denied (WTD)

Key 0, data Directory Number (DN); can have up to 7 digits

if DN Expansion (DNXP) package is equipped

1 DN

2 TRN

3 ADL

4 RGA

6 SCC O-81 90

Key optional secondary data DN

Key 2, Call Transfer key (optional)

Key 3, DN (optional)

Key 4, Ring Again key (optional)

Speed Call Controller, Speed Call List number (optional;

must be on key 6 if equipped)

6 SCU O-81 90 Speed Call User, Speed Call List number (optional, must be

on key 6 if equipped)

Note: With 1 release 12 and earlier software, the number of

Speed Call Lists is limited to 253.

9 RLS Release key: must be key 9

Note:

Only the feature keys listed above may be assigned to the

Add-on Data Module (ADM). If they are assigned to the ADM, they

must also be assigned to the companion SL-1 telephone on the

same keys; that is, if the ADM has ADL on key 3, the companion

SL-1 telephone must also have ADL on key 3, with the same

DN.

Xl 1 features and services

553-3001-305

92-4 Integrated Voice and Data

-Add or change DLC data port associated with a stand-alone ADM.

REQ

TYPE

CDEN

KEY

CHG

WTD

0 DN

9 RLS

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number (TN)

Single density card

Warning Tone Denied (WTD)

Key 0, data Directory Number (DN)

Key 9, Release key

Note: Other features/functions must not be assigned to keys 1-8.

-Add or change IDLC port associated with an AIM.

REQ

TYPE

CDEN

CHG

lscu

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number (TN): for AIM, unit 1 or 3 should be used

Single density card

Xl 1 features and services

integrated Voice and Data 92-5

-Add

change IDLC port associated with an AIM.

CLS

KEY

WTD

TRN

ADL

RGA

6 O-81 90

SCU O-81 90

9 RLS

Warning Tone Denied (WTD)

Key 0, data Directory Number (DN)

Key 1, optional secondary data DN

Key 2, Call Transfer key (optional)

Key 3, DN (optional)

Key 4, Ring Again key (optional)

Speed Call Controller, Speed Call List number (optional;

must be on key 6 if equipped)

Speed Call User, Speed Call List number (optional; must be

on key 6 if equipped)

Note: Before Xl 1 release 13, the number of Speed Call Lists is

limited to 253.

Release key, must be key 9

trunk route for each data port group (modem pool).

REQ NEW, CHG Create a new route, or modify an existing one

TYPE

R D B Route Data Block

CUST o-99 Customer number

ROUT

o-51 1

Route number

TKTP

ADM ADM route

xxx...x

Access code for this route

CDPC Yes, (No) SL-1 is or is not the only controlling party on incoming calls

1 features and services 553-3001-305

92-6 integrated Voice and Data

a DLC as a trunk for each data port within the data port group.

REQ NEW, CHG Create a new trunk or modify an existing one

TYPE ADM ADM trunk

TN Terminal Number

Define a Modem Pool Line Card (MPLC) for each modem in the data port group.

REQ

TYPE

CDEN

CHG

500

lscu

SD, DD, 4D

xxx...x

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number

Single, double, or quad density card

Voice Frequency Directory Number (DN) (VFDN); must be

the same as that telephone by switches in the ADM

Note: The trunk route defined for the data port group in LD16 cannot be used.

LD16 Define a route data block for each Central Office (CO), FEX, tie, or WATS trunk route to

a remote system.

TYPE

CUST

ROUT

TKTP

NEW, CHG

RDB

o-99

o-51 1

COT, FEX, TIE

WAT

Create a new route, or modify an existing one

Route Data Block

Customer number

Route number

Route type

Access code for the route

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Integrated Voice and Data 92-7

Define each trunk within the route.

REQ NEW, CHG

TYPE

COT, FEX, TIE

WAT

lscu

CDEN SD, DD

Feature operation

Create a new trunk or modify an existing one

Trunk type

Terminal Number

Single or double density card

Not applicable.

features and services

92-8 Integrated Voice and Data

Xl features and services

Intercept Treatment

Calls that cannot be completed because of call restrictions or dialing

irregularities can be routed to a Recorded Announcement (RDN), the

attendant, or to hear overflow, or busy tone. Separate treatments can be

specified for calls from the following categories of originating party:

telephones

attendants

attendant originated

attendant extended

tie trunk, or remote attendant or telephone

Controlled Class of Service Allowed (CCSA) or Direct Inward Dialing

(DID) trunk

Operating parameters

When Intercept to RAN is desired, you must have a recording device. A

Recorded Announcement (RAN) route and at least one trunk must be defined

(see the RAN feature module).

Intercept Treatment (INTR) for these types of calls can be specified in

the Customer Data Block for the situations as listed in

Table 1.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

93-2 Intercept Treatment

Table 93-1

Intercept Treatment

Intercept situation Telephone

Attendant

extended

calls

Calling Party

tie trunk

(including

attendant) trunk

Access denied

(ACCD)

Call to vacant number

(CTVN)

Maintenance busy number,

RPE failure

(MBNR)

Code or toll restricted call by NA NA

Toll Denied (TLD) station or

tie trunk

(CTRC)

Calls to

(CLDN)

0 = overflow tone

A = intercept to the attendant

C = choice of overflow tone, attendant, or Recorded Announcement (RAN)

NA = not applicable

DISC = call disconnected

Note: Items in parenthesis are the default Intercept Treatments. Where an item is preceded with a

choice can be made between overflow, attendant busy, or a RAN. Four entries are required for each

intercept situation.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Intercept Treatment 93-3

Feature interactions

Flexible Feature Codes

If Intercept Treatment has been specified for a call to a vacant number

(CTVN), the Digit Display on the attendant console is affected by

If no FFC has been defined, the dialed digits are displayed up to

and including the first digit that fails to match any Directory Number

(DN). If one or more have been defined, the dialed digits are

displayed, up to and including the first digit that fails to match any FFC.

Basic/Network Alternate Route Selection

Table 93-2 specifies the type of Intercept Treatments (INTR) available

for calls, and lists the intercept situations that are possible.

Table 93-2

Intercept Treatment for calls

Originating Party

Intercept situation

Station or Attendant

Tie trunk

extended

(including

trunk

calls attendant)

invalid (NINV)

invalid

translation (NITR)

restricted

(NRES)

blocked (NBLK) C(0)

0 = overflow tone

A = intercept to the attendant

C = choice of overflow tone, attendant, or Recorded Announcement (RAN)

NA = not applicable

DISC call disconnected

Note: Items in parenthesis are the default Intercept Treatments. Where an item is preceded with a

choice can be made between overflow, attendant busy or a RAN. Four entries are required for each

intercept situation.

Xl 1 features and services

. .

93-4 Intercept Treatment

Feature packaging

Intercept Treatment (INTR), package 11, has no feature package

dependencies.

Feature implementation

Change customer’s Intercept Treatment for various call types.

REQ CHG

TYPE

CDB

CUST

o-99

Yes, (No)

ACCD

OVF OVF OVF ATN

CTVN

OVF OVF OVF ATN

MBNR

OVF OVF OVF ATN

CTRC

OVF NAP OVF NAP

CLDN

NAP OVF NAP NAP

OVF OVF OVF ATN

NRES

OVF OVF OVF ATN

NBLK

OVF OVF OVF ATN

RANR

xxx

Feature operation

Not applicable.

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Allow changes to intercept treatments

Default Intercept Treatment for calls to access-denied

numbers

Default Intercept Treatment for calls to vacant numbers

Default Intercept Treatment for calls to maintenance busy

numbers

Default Intercept Treatment for a code or toll restricted call by

a toll restricted station or Tie trunk

Default Intercept Treatment for calls to a Listed DN

Default Intercept Treatment for BARWNARS invalid calls

Default Intercept Treatment for BARWNARS invalid

translation calls

Default Intercept Treatment for restricted calls

Default Intercept Treatment for BARWNARS blocked calls

RAN route number for intercepted calls

features and services

Basic Rate Interface

Meridian ISDN BRI supports network functions defined by CCITT, ANSI,

ETSI, and NET64 standards (and other standards such as for ISDN

BRA. These standards create a universal digital network to facilitate voice

and data communications that use different transmission protocols, existing

networks, and diverse communication equipment.

ISDN is a digital port that integrates three digital channels on one digital

subscriber loop (DSL). The three digital channels consist of two 64 kbps

B-channels and one 16 kbps D-channel. B-channels can be automatically

assigned and reassigned to different voice and data terminals in

circuit-switched applications or they can be dedicated to specific terminals

for packet data applications. A D-channel is permanently dedicated to a DSL

and is used for signaling and low speed packet data transmission. The ability

to dynamically connect different terminals on one DSL provides more

flexibility, connectivity, and service diversity than the conventional “hard

wired” connections where each channel is dedicated to one terminal.

Operating parameters

Refer to the following publications:

ISDN Basic Rate Interface description

100)

ISDN Basic Rate installation

(553-3901-200)

Basic Rate Interface maintenance (553-3901-500)

Feature interactions

Refer to the documents listed for your system.

features and services 553-3001-305

94-2 Basic Rate Interface

Feature packaging

ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI), package 216, requires the following:

Integrated Services Digital Network package 145

Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL), package 222

implementation

Refer to

ISDN Basic Rate Interface description

(553-3901-100).

Feature operation

There is no specific procedure required to operate this feature.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Last Number Redial

95-l

Last Number Redial (LNR), which is defined on a customer and a telephone

basis, allows the last number dialed by a user to be automatically stored. The

stored number can be redialed by pressing a key on SL- 1 and Meridian digital

telephones, or by dialing SPRE + 89 on telephones. The M3000 and

the M23 17 telephones have LNR as a local telephone (firmware) feature

instead of as a system feature.

The number is stored whether the call rings, is busy or answered, or if a valid

access code is dialed with the number. Only one number, composed of up to

32 digits (including access codes), may be stored at any one time. The new

number overwrites the previously stored number.

If the telephone has a Digit Display (DDS), the called number is displayed.

Operating parameters

When making a call using Last Number Redial (LNR), no digits may be

dialed before the stored number, except Authorization, Charge Account, or

Forced Charge Account codes. However, additional digits may follow the

outpulsed LNR number.

Feature Interactions

A number dialed using will become the LNR number on all

telephones except the M23 17 and M3000.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

95-2 Last Number

Call Modification

When a Call Modification takes place at the called Directory Number

(DN), the originally dialed number and not the number reached through

Call Modification is stored as the LNR. This applies to the following

features:

all Call Forward features

.Call Pickup

Conference

Hunting

Integrated Messaging System when using Operator Revert

.Transfer

The stored LNR number will not be affected when making calls using the

following features:

.numbers dialed on Call Transfer or Conference

.Attendant Recall from and Meridian digital telephones (using

.Call Park

.Dial Intercom

.Group Call

Special Services Access Codes

Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MADN)

A last number dialed on a Directory Number (DN) with multiple

appearances is stored only against the telephone from which the number

was originally dialed.

Authorization, Charge Account, Forced Charge Account codes

These codes are not stored in LNR. To use these features when calling

the number stored in LNR, the code must first be dialed manually. When

dial tone is returned, LNR may be used to complete the dialing.

Speed Call

A number dialed using Speed Call will become the LNR number on all

telephones except the M2317 and M3000.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Feature packaging

Last Number Redial 95-3

Last Number Redial (LNR), package 90, has no feature package

dependencies.

Feature implementation

Enable or disable LNR for a customer.

REQ CHG Change

TYPE

C DB Customer Data Block

CUST o-99 Customer number

OPT

LRA, (LRD) LNR allowed or denied

Add or change LNR for telephones.

REQ C H G Change

TYPE

500 Telephone type

lscu

Terminal Number (TN)

LNA, (LND) LNR allowed or denied

LNRS LNR size

-Add or change LNR for SL-1 or Meridian digital telephones.

REQ CHG

TYPE

aaaa

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2616

LNRS

KEY

lscu

LNA, (LND)

xx LNK

Terminal Number (TN)

LNR allowed or denied

LNR size

LNR key

xx = key number

1 features and services 553-3001-305

95-4 Last Number Redial

Feature operation

To automatically redial the last number dialed:

Lift the handset or select a free Directory Number (DN).

Press the

Last

No. or the

key again.

To automatically redial the last number dialed telephones),

Lift the handset.

2 Dial

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

Limited Access to Overlays

96-1

Limited Access to Overlays allows the administrator to limit access to a

configured database. It allows you to define up to 100 passwords in the

configuration record each with its own set of access restrictions. For

each Limited Access Password (LAPW), you define the level of access the

password provides:

Only the LD numbers defined for each password can be accessed.

Only the customer data specified can be modified by users of each

password.

Only the tenant numbers allowed can be accessed.

Access to Print routine LD20 may or may not include access to the Speed

Call lists.

Access to the Configuration Record (CFN) LD17 can be restricted to:

no access at all to LD 17

changing a user’s own password only

full access to modify the system configuration

With the Print Only option defined, certain users are limited to:

access only to administration that contain print commands, and

can only use the print commands in those

.full access to all print routines: and l-83.

.System commands in Traffic LD02 are accessible only to users with

access to all customers. Customer defined commands are accessible

according to the customer numbers defined for each password.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

96-2 Limited Access to Overlays

Only the highest level password users Level 2 or PWD2 can configure or

change access for other passwords. These users are the Administrators.

Implementing and using the LAPW feature does not interfere with the use of

any existing passwords in the system. For a complete listing of the passwords

currently used, refer to LD17, prompts PWD2, NPW2 and

prompts ATAC and SPWD in XI

(553-3001-400).

Each password can access up to 32 customer-tenant combinations. Each

combination is defined by a number designator that includes the customer

number (O-99), and the tenant number (O-51 1).

Each new Limited Access Password (LAPW) must be:

any combination of numbers and letters (upper-case letters only)

four to sixteen characters in length with no spaces

unique

different than existing passwords.

For example, acceptable passwords may include:

JSMITH

0001

2GUEST

CRAFTSPERSON

System administrators using and PWD2 in LD17 define access to

with this feature. They may also define certain command use levels within a

given LD. For instance, the administrator can specify

access

in the

Configuration record (LD17). Any other requests generate the following

system message:

SCH8836 PASSWORD HAS PRINT ONLY CLASS OF SERVICE.

After calling up a LD, certain commands may be restricted from use by the

same password, if that password is properly defined. Trying to use those

commands without the correct password is not successful access is denied.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

Limited Access to Overlays 96-3

Log on attempts are monitored for security. Failed attempts with invalid

passwords are counted and the tally is compared with a pre-defined threshold.

If the threshold is met or passed, the entry point or terminal) is locked

out for a pre-determined time set in service change (and password protected).

Access from that point is ignored by the system for the lock-out timer defined.

Lock-out conditions are reported to all maintenance terminals when they

occur, with a special report to the next system administrator who logs on.

The system can keep an Audit Trail to record information. The four

columns in the Audit Trail printout contain:

column 1

DAT (date, appears at beginning of each day), or

LOG (a record)

column 2 (month/day), or

cc:dd (hours: minutes)

column 3

#ee (number associated with password)

column 4 ff ff . . . (LD numbers accessed)

Figure 96-l

Example of Audit Trail printout (LD22)

PWD2

10 11

15 10 21

14 15

15 17

57 22

11 15

Only system administrators, logged in using or PWD2, can access the

Audit Trail from LD22.

Administrators can change the size of the Audit Trail buffer, from 50 to 1000

words (divisible by 50). When the buffer is full, new records overwrite the

oldest information in the buffer message is sent to the active TTY

and all maintenance Printing the Audit Trail in LD22 clears the

buffer.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

96-4 Limited Access to Overlays

Operating parameters

The LAPW feature should only be enabled on a system with a completed

Configuration record in LD17 a Meridian 1 or SL-1 machine that is already

up and running. All passwords defined within the feature must be unique.

Users and administrators can not have more than one password defined for

any one access configuration.

Feature interactions

This feature has no interactions with other feature packages.

Feature packaging

Limited Access to Overlays (LAPW), package 164, must be enabled for this

feature to operate.

Feature implementation

Implementing the LAPW feature requires you change the Configuration

record (CFN), LD17. You must respond to the following prompts in LD17.

LD17

Define LAPW options and passwords. (Part 1 of 2)

TYPE

PWD2

TEN

CHG, END

CFN

xxxx

0 99

xx xx xx

ALL, (XALL)

O-99, ALL, (XALL)

xxx xxx xxx,

ALL, (XALL)

Change data or terminate overlay

Configuration data block

Current Level 2 master password

New level 1 Log-in password

New level 2 master password

LAPW password number

New password for “nn” above

No more changes to LAPW

Add these overlays to the list accesses by password

Xnn removes the overlay.

Customer number, all customers, (no customers)

Tenant list for the above customer for password access.

XALL removes tenant access for this password.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

Limited Access to Overlays 96-5

LD17

Define LAPW options and passwords. (Part 2 of 2)

HOST Host modeYes, (No)

aaaa

CFPD, (CFPA)

LLCA, (LLCD)

(PROD)

PSCD, (PSCA)

O-(3)-7

-LOCK

O-(60)-270

Yes, (No)

-SIZE

000

(0)-65534

Yes, (No)

Change user’s LAPW password (user must log in using current LAPW).

Password Options allowed

Changes to all 7 prompts denied (allowed)

Line Load Control commands in allowed (denied)

Print Only Class of Service allowed (denied)

Printing Speed Call lists (allowed) denied

Stop defining passwords.

Failed log-on attempt threshold

Lock-out time in minutes

Audit Trail allowed (denied)

Word size stored in the Audit Trail buffer

For release 18 and later

Reset ports locked out during manual INIT.

PWD2

CHG

<CR>

aaaa

xx x

Change password options

Level 2 master password

Log on Password for LAPW user

New log on password for LAPW user

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

96-6 Limited Access to Overlays

LD22 -Check options available for LAPW passwords (administrator).

REQ PWD Lookup password options

PWD2 xxxx Level 2 master password

Note: LAPW password options are output to the active TTY only. Options format is shown below:

FLTH

Failed log-on attempt Threshold

LOCK

xx Lock-out time in minutes

AUDT aaa Audit Trail allowed (denied)

SIZE

xxxx

Word size stored in the Audit Trail buffer

aaa

Reset ports locked out during manual

1 master password

PWD2 xxxx Level 2 master password

aaaaaa password number and password

x x x x x x Overlays accessible by this password

CUST xx TEN xxx Customer number and tenant numbers accessible

HOST No

Host mode

OPT

aaaa Password options allowed

REQ

PWD2

PWD

<CR>

Print passwords

Administrator’s password

Note: Options available to the logged on password are printed. The format is shown below:

aaaaaa password number and password

x x x x x x Overlays accessible by this password

CUST xx TEN xxx Customer number and tenant numbers accessible

Host

Host mode

OPT

aaaa Password options allowed

LD22 Print contents of Audit Trail buffer (allowed if using or PWD2).

REQ PRT Print

TYPE AUDT Audit Trail

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Line Load Control 97-3

Operating parameters

The following services are not subject to LLC:

attendant stations

Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

Hot line services

Feature interactions

Established calls are not affected by LLC upgrades, only new calls

attempted.

The system counts the calls denied for each CLS, and prints the traffic

data periodically as part of the Processor Load Format TFS004.

Feature packaging

Line Load Control (LLC), package 105, must be enabled for this feature to

operate.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

97-4

Line Load Control

Feature implementation

Add or change Line Load Control for telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CHG

500

LLCN

LLC2

LLC3

Change

Telephone type

Terminal Number (TN)

LLC not enabled (default)

LLC class 1

LLC class 2

LLC class 3

-Add or change Line Load Control for and Meridian digital telephones.

REQ

TYPE

CLS

CHG

aaaa

lscu

LLCN

LLC2

LLC3

Change

Telephone type

aaaa =

2317,

Terminal Number (TN)

LLC not enabled (default)

LLC class

LLC 2

LLC class 3

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Line Load Control 97-5

LD2 Set Line Load Control levels.

SCTL

SLLC

TLLC

x aaa

Set blocking probability

x = F (LLC, level F)

S (LLC, level S)

T (LLC, level T)

aaa

O-l 00

Activate LLC at level x

x = F (LLC, level F)

S (LLC, level S)

T (LLC, level T)

OFF (deactivate LLC)

Print blocking probability and current active LLC level

Feature operation

Not applicable.

features and services

telemanuals.com

97-6 Line Load Control

1 features and services

telemanuals.com

Issued: 92 12 31

Status: Standard

Xl 1 Release: All

98-1

Line Lockout

When a user remains without dialing any digits, a timeout occurs.

The transmission path is released for other uses. Dial tone timeout and

interdigit timeout for telephone and Direct Inward System Access (DISA)

trunks are considered Line Lockout situations.

The 2500 telephones lock out after 15 seconds. SL- Meridian digital

telephones, and 500 telephones lock out after 30 seconds. When Line

Lockout occurs, the system gives overflow tone for 14 seconds and then puts

the telephone in a lockout state. SL- and Meridian digital telephones are

idled, and telephones appear busy to any incoming calls. DISA

calls receive overflow tone.

Flexible Line Lockout, X11 release 4 and later software

This

enhancement provides three options for lockout treatment for stations and

DISA calls. Flexible Line Lockout can perform any of the following

functions:

provide the existing ovefflow tone and then lockout treatment

immediately intercept calls to the attendant

receive overflow tone and then intercept to the attendant

When a call is intercepted to the attendant, is returned and the call

appears at the attendant console on a designated Line Lockout (LCT)

Incoming Indicator (ICI) key. If an LCT ICI key is not defined, the call

is treated as a normal incoming call.

When the attendant answers the call, the Directory Number (DN) of the

originating telephone, followed by the name (if Call Party Name Display

(CPND) is enabled), is displayed on the console. The attendant may then

terminate the call or offer assistance to the call originator.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

98-2 Line Lockout

Flexible Line Lockout Timers, X11 release 10 and later software

This

enhancement to Flexible Line Lockout provides three variable Line Lockout

timers. The timers are defined in and range from 0 to

Operating parameters

Tie trunk calls do not receive overflow tone during line lockout, and do not

receive Flexible Line Lockout treatment.

Feature interactions

Attendant Overflow Position (AOP)

A call intercepted to the attendant due to Flexible Line Lockout receives

AOP treatment if the feature package is equipped and the AOP Directory

Number (DN) is defined.

Call Detail Recording (CDR)

If a Direct Inward System Access (DISA) call routes to the attendant due

to Flexible Line Lockout, and CDR is selected for incoming trunk calls,

a call record generates when the attendant terminates the call after

answer. The CDR record shows the attendant number and the route and

member numbers.

If the attendant extends the call, the CDR record generates when the call

is terminated. The CDR record does not show the attendant Directory

Number (DN).

Display

If a call from a telephone equipped with a display is intercepted to the

attendant due to Flexible Line Lockout, the telephone displays the digits

dialed, if any, before the intercept. If no digits are dialed, the attendant

DN and name (if configured) will be displayed. When the attendant

answers the call, the console displays the DN and the number zero (0), or

any digits dialed and the name (if configured) of the telephone

intercepted.

1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Line Lockout 98-3

Recorded Overflow Announcement (ROA)

Calls intercepted to the attendant due to Flexible Line Lockout receive

ROA treatment if the Line Lockout (LCT) Incoming Call Indicator (ICI)

key is configured for ROA.

System Overflow Tone

If the option for Flexible Line Lockout to the attendant is enabled, any

call that is given ovefflow tone (for example, if the wrong access code is

dialed, or if the telephone is not allowed to dial the Trunk Access

code) is intercepted to the attendant on overflow timeout.

Feature packaging

This feature is included in basic X11 system software.

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

98-4

Line Lockout

Feature implementation

LD15

Implement Flexible Line Lockout for a customer.

REQ

TYPE CDB

CUST o-99

ICI O-l 9 LCT

LLT

ATN

DLT

ATN

BOTO

Feature operation

Change

Customer Data Block

Customer number

Assign a Flexible Line Lockout Incoming Call Indicator (ICI)

key to attendant consoles

Line Lockout treatment

Overflow tone, then lockout

Overflow tone, then attendant intercept

Attendant intercept

Line lockout treatment for Direct Inward System Access

(DISA) calls

Overflow tone, then lockout

Overflow tone, then attendant intercept

Attendant intercept

Dial tone and interdigit timeout for SL-I , Meridian 1 digital

telephones, and 500 telephones

Dial tone and interdigit timeout for 2500 telephones

Busy tone and overflow tone timeout for all telephones

Not applicable.

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

and Trunk Cards

99-1

In addition to providing a definition for card types, this section lists cards for

Meridian 1 and SL-I systems.

Line Cards

Line cards provide the interface between the Meridian 1 and telephones, their

associated data options, and attendant consoles.

Line cards

. Digital (16 digital telephones plus 16 associated data

options)

Analog ( 16 analog in-line telephones)

Telephone Line Card

QPC594 (4d) (16 ports per card)

QPC452 (dd) (8 ports per card)

QPC60 (sd) (4 ports per card)

Message Waiting Line Card

. Analog Message Waiting (16 analog single-line

telephones with Message Waiting lamps)

QPC789 (4d) (16 ports per card)

QPC494 (dd) (8 ports per card)

QPC267 (4 ports per card)

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

99-2 Line and Trunk Cards

SL-I Telephone Line Card

(dd) (8 ports per card)

QPC61 (sd) (4 ports per card)

Attendant Console Line Card

QPC451 (dd) (8 ports per card; 4 ports per console)

QPC61 (sd) (4 ports per card; 4 ports per console; card must be

vintage C or later)

Integrated Services Digital Line Card (ISDLC)

QPC578 (4d) (16 logical ports per card; 8 physical ports; 8 for

voice/8 for data)

In addition, Data Line Cards are available to interface data communications

products.

Trunk Cards

Trunk cards provide the interface between the Meridian 1 and all trunk

facilities, including not only public and private network trunks (CO, Tie), but

those that connect the Meridian 1 to special features (Recorded

Announcement, Paging, and so forth).

Universal (Any combination of 8: CO, DID, FX, RAN,

Paging (low resistance), WATS, TIE, Music

E&M (Any combination of 4: 2-wire E&M, 4-wire E&M,

4-wire duplex, Paging (high resistance), Emergency Recorder

Receivers (DTR)

Receivers convert DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) signals to a

digital format acceptable by the CPU. They are required for all 2500

telephones, some incoming TIE trunks, and DID trunks. Because

perform a service rather than support an item, the quantity depends on

the volume of traffic generated in a system.

Receiver (8 Receivers)

Xl 1 features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

Line and Trunk Cards 99-3

Controller Cards

Controller cards provide the interface and control between the Network cards

and telephone, consoles, and trunks. These cards are always installed in a

dedicated slot in the IPE module. One Controller card is required per IPE

module.

Controller-2 (Connects up to 2 superloops to one IPE

module)

Controller-4 (Connects up

to4

superloops to one IPE

module)

Xl features and services

553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

99-4 Line and Trunk Cards

features and services 553-3001-305

telemanuals.com

PDF Meridian Features & Services 1 Of 3

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation